courtland high school renovation€¦ · school renovation november 2, 2017 state project no....

GENERAL CONTRACT FOR:

COURTLAND HIGH SCHOOL RENOVATION November 2, 2017

State Project No. 88-02-00-101 BCWH Project No. 2015.53 Spotsylvania County School Board Spotsylvania County, V i rg in ia

PROJECT MANUAL Volume 1

BCWH 1840 West Broad Street Suite 400 Richmond, Virginia 23220 804.788.4774

PROJECT MANUAL

COURTLAND HIGH SCHOOL RENOVATION

SPOTSYLVANIA COUNTY SCHOOL BOARD SPOTSYLVANIA COUNTY, VIRGINIA

Architect BCWH Architects

1840 West Broad Street, Suite 400 Richmond, Virginia 23220

Phone: 804-788-4774

Landscape Architect BCWH Architects

1840 West Broad Street, Suite 400 Richmond, Virginia 23220

Phone: 804-788-4774

Civil Timmons Group

1001 Boulders Parkway Richmond, Virginia 23225

Phone: 804-200-6500

Structural Dunbar Milby Williams Pittman & Vaughn

720 Moorefield Park Drive, Suite 301 Richmond, Virginia 23236

Phone: 804-323-0656

Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical, AVIT

Ascent Engineering 11508 Allecingie Pkwy

Richmond, Virginia 23235 Phone: 804-423-6444

November 2, 2017

COURTLAND HIGH SCHOOL RENOVATION 11-02-2017

TABLE OF CONTENTS 000200 - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PROJECT MANUAL - VOLUME 1 of 2

000100 TITLE PAGE

000200 TABLE OF CONTENTS

000300 LIST OF DRAWINGS

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS

000400 INVITATION TO BID

000500 * INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS:

AIA DOCUMENT A701, 1997 ELECTRONIC EDITION

000600 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS:

000700 BID FORM

000700a CERTIFICATION OF CRIMES AGAINST CHILDREN

000700b EXCEL BID FORM ATTACHMENT

000900 * BID BOND:


CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

001000 * STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR:


001100 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION:

SPOTSYLVANIA COUNTY 2012 EDITION

001300 * PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND:

AIA DOCUMENT A312, 2010 ELECTRONIC EDITIONS

001400 SAMPLE FORMS

* FOR REFERENCE ONLY NOT INCLUDED IN PROJECT MANUAL

REFERENCE DOCUMENTS AND REPORTS

001500 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT:

ATLANTIC GEOTECHNICAL SERVICES DATED AUGUST 28,2017

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

010200 GENERAL SITEWORK REQUIREMENTS

011000 SUMMARY

012100 ALLOWANCES

012200 UNIT PRICES

012300 ALTERNATES

012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

013310 CADD/ELECTRONIC FILE TRANSFER AGREEMENT

014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

014100 SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES

014100a STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

017300 EXECUTION



017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING

017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

018000 ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS ABATEMENT

019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

024113 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION

024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

034500 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

042000 UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 05 - METALS

051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

051213 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

052100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING

053100 STEEL DECKING 054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

055000 METAL FABRICATIONS

055100 METAL STAIRS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

061600 SHEATHING

062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

071326 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING

072100 THERMAL INSULATION

072726 FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

074200 DIRECT EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM (DEFS)

074213.13 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS

074243 COMPOSITE WALL PANELS

075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING

076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES

078100 APPLIED FIREPROOFING

078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

078446 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

079200 JOINT SEALANTS

079500 EXPANSION CONTROL



DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

083323 OVERHEAD DOORS

084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

084433 SLOPED GLAZING ASSEMBLIES

087100 FINISH HARDWARE

088000 GLAZING

088300 MIRRORS

089000 LOUVERS AND VENTS

PROJECT MANUAL - VOLUME 2 of 2

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

092116.23 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES

092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

092900 GYPSUM BOARD

093000 TILING

095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

096536 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING

096566 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING

096623 EPOXY TERRAZZO FLOORING

096726 EPOXY FLOORING

096813 TILE CARPETING

096816 SHEET CARPETING

097200 WALLCOVERING

097723 FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS

098400 ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS

099123 PAINTING

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

101100 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES

101200 DISPLAY CASES

102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

102123 CUBICLES

102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

104000 SPECIALTY SIGNS

104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

105113 METAL LOCKERS

105613 METAL STORAGE SHELVING

105626 MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING

108213 EQUIPMENT SCREENS

109000 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

113100 APPLIANCES

115123 LIBRARY STACK SYSTEMS



116143 STAGE CURTAINS

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

123213 MANUFACTURED WOOD-VENEER-FACED CASEWORK

123551 MUSIC EDUCATION STORAGE CASEWORK

123553 STEEL LABORATORY CASEWORK

126100 FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

133419 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

133450 PRE-ENGINEERED METAL CANOPIES

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

144400 ELEVATORS

DIVISION 21 – FIRE PROTECTION

210400 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

211313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

213113 ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS

213400 PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS

213900 CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE-PUMP DRIVERS

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

220400 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING

220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220553 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220700 PLUMBING INSULATION

221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

221123 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

221413 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

221429 SUMP PUMPS

221613 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

223400 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES

224700 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

230010 HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

230100 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF HVAC SYSTEMS

230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

230700 HVAC INSULATION

230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

230993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS



232000 HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS

233000 HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION

235000 CENTRAL HEATING EQUIPMENT

236000 CENTRAL COOLING EQUIPMENT

237000 CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT

230713 FIRE RATED DUCT INSULATION

238000 DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

260523 CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES

260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260536 CABLE MANAGEMENT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260573 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

262000 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

262200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

262413 SWITCHBOARDS

262416 PANELBOARDS

262726 RECEPTACLES

262813 FUSES

262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

262900 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

263213 ENGINE GENERATORS

263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES

264100 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

264300 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS)

265000 LIGHTING

265561 THEATRICAL LIGHTING

266000 CONNECTIONS AND SYSTEMS’ INTERFACES TO ELEVATORS

266013 ELECTRIC SERVICE

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

270500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

270526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

270553 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

272000 DATA COMMUNICATIONS

273000 VOICE COMMUNICATIONS

274000 AUDIO-VIDEO COMMUNICATIONS

274116.62 INTEGRATED AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT FOR AUDITORIUMS

274116.64 COMMONS SOUND SYSTEMS

274116.66 GYMNASIUM SOUND SYSTEM

274116.67 BAND SOUND SYSTEM

274116.68 CHORUS SOUND SYSTEM

274116.69 ORCHESTRA SOUND SYSTEM

274124 TELEVISION STUDIO SYSTEM (TSS)

274125 MEDIA BROADCAST SYSTEM

275123 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS



275300.01 ANTENNA DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS

275313 CLOCK SYSTEMS

275313.01 WIRELESS CLOCK AND TONE GENERATION SYSTEM

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

280500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

SYSTEMS 280528 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 281300 ACCESS CONTROL (EMPTY CONDUIT) 281600 INTRUSION ALARM SYSTEM 282000 CCTV SYSTEM 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

311000 SITE CLEARING

312000 EARTHWORK

312100 BIORETENTION

312500 EROSION CONTROL

313116 TERMITE CONTROL

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

321216 ASPHALT PAVEMENT 321313 SITE CONCRETE 321700 PAVEMENT MARKINGS, SIGNS AND SPECIALTIES

321823.33 TRACK AND FIELD SURFACE

323113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES (GALVANIZED)

329200 LAWNS AND GRASSES

329300 PLANTS

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

331000 EXTERIOR WATER SYSTEM

333000 SANITARY SEWERAGE

334100 STORM DRAINAGE

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


LIST OF DRAWINGS 000300 - 1

VOLUME 1 GENERAL DRAWINGS G001A COVER SHEET - VOLUME 1 G002 CODE ANALYSIS G003 CODE ANALYSIS G004 FIRE RATED CONSTRUCTION PLAN G010 LIFE SAFETY PLAN - FIRST FLOOR G011 LIFE SAFETY PLAN - SECOND FLOOR G020 PHASING PLAN - PHASE 1 G021 PHASING PLAN - PHASE 2 CIVIL DRAWINGS C-000 COVER SHEET C-100 OVERALL SITE PLAN C-101 NOTES & DETAILS C-102 NOTES & DETAILS C-200 EXISTING CONDITIONS PLAN C-201 EXISTING CONDITIONS PLAN C-202 DEMOLITION & PHASE I EROSION CONTROL PLAN C-203 PHASE II EROSION CONTROL PLAN C-204 EROSION CONTROL NOTES & DETAILS C-205 EROSION CONTROL NOTES & DETAILS C-206 POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN C-207 SOILS MAP C-300 LAYOUT & UTILITY PLAN C-301 WATERLINE LAYOUT AND PROFILE C-302 UTILITY NOTES & DETAILS C-303 UTILITY NOTES & DETAILS C-304 UTILITY NOTES & DETAILS C-400 GRADING & DRAINAGE PLAN C-401 BASE BID CONDITIONS C-402 EASEMENT PLAN C-500 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT PLAN C-501 PRE-DEVELOPMENT HYDROLOGY C-502 POST-DEVELOPMENT HYDROLOGY C-503 STORMWATER COMPLIANCE PLAN LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS L001 OVERALL LANDSCAPE PLAN DEMOLITION DRAWINGS AD101 OVERALL DEMOLITION PLAN - FIRST FLOOR AD101A DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA A AD101B DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA B AD101C DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA C AD101D DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA D AD101E DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA E AD102 OVERALL DEMOLITION PLAN - SECOND FLOOR AD102F DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA F AD102G DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA G



ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS A001 LEGENDS, SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, SCHEDULES A002 PARTITION TYPES AND WALL ASSEMBLIES A101 OVERALL PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A101A PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN - AREA A A101B PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN - AREA B A101C PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN - AREA C A101D PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN - AREA D A101E PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN - AREA E A102 OVERALL FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR A102F PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN - AREA F A102G PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN - AREA G A103 ATHLETIC STORAGE BLDG FLOOR PLAN AND ELEVATIONS & CANOPY SECTIONS A130 ROOF PLAN A201A REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - AREA A A201B REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - AREA B A201C REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - AREA C A201D REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - AREA D A201E REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - AREA E A202F REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - AREA F A202G REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - AREA G A301A FINISH PLAN - AREA A A301B FINISH PLAN - AREA B A301C FINISH PLAN - AREA C A301D FINISH PLAN - AREA D A301E FINISH PLAN - AREA E A302F FINISH PLAN - AREA F A302G FINISH PLAN - AREA G A310 FINISH SCHEDULE A311 FINISH SCHEDULE A401 BUILDING ELEVATIONS A402 BUILDING ELEVATIONS A403 BUILDING ELEVATIONS A404 MAIN ENTRANCE ADDITION ELEVATIONS, DETAILS, & 3D VIEWS A410 BUILDING SECTIONS A501 WALL SECTIONS & FOUNDATION DETAILS A502 WALL SECTIONS A503 WALL SECTIONS A510 ROOF DETAILS A511 ROOF & SECTION DETAILS A520 STOREFRONT DETAILS A521 STOREFRONT DETAILS A522 STOREFRONT DETAILS A530 CEILING DETAILS A610 ENLARGED TOILET PLANS A611 ENLARGED TOILET PLANS A620 EXTERIOR PLAN DETAILS A621 INTERIOR PLAN DETAILS A622 INTERIOR PLAN DETAILS A701 ENLARGED STAIR & RAMP PLANS, SECTIONS, DETAILS A702 ENLARGED STAIR AND RAMP PLANS, SECTIONS, DETAILS A703 ENLARGED STAIR & RAMP PLANS, SECTIONS, DETAILS A801 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A802 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A803 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & SECTIONS



A804 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A805 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A810 CASEWORK ELEVATIONS & DETAILS A811 CASEWORK ELEVATIONS & DETAILS A812 CASEWORK ELEVATIONS & DETAILS A813 CASEWORK ELEVATIONS & DETAILS A901 DOOR SCHEDULE & HOLLOW METAL DETAILS A902 DOOR SCHEDULE A910 EXTERIOR STOREFRONT ELEVATIONS A911 INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL ELEVATIONS A912 INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL & STOREFRONT ELEVATIONS A920 DOOR DETAILS FURNITURE DRAWINGS i101 FF&E PLAN - FIRST FLOOR i102 FF&E PLAN - SECOND FLOOR STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS S001 GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES S002 GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES S101A PARTIAL FOUNDATION PLAN - AREA A S101B PARTIAL FOUNDATION PLAN - AREA B S101C PARTIAL FOUNDATION PLAN - AREA C S101D PARTIAL FOUNDATION PLAN - AREA D S101E PARTIAL FOUNDATION PLAN - AREA E S102F PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR AND LOW ROOF FRAMING PLAN - AREA F S102G PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR AND LOW ROOF FRAMING PLAN - AREA G S103A PARTIAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN - AREA A S103B PARTIAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN - AREA B S103C PARTIAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN - AREA C S103D PARTIAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN - AREA D S103E PARTIAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN - AREA E S201 TYPICAL FOUNDATION DETAILS S202 TYPICAL FOUNDATION DETAILS S203 FOUNDATION SECTIONS AND DETAILS S204 FOUNDATION SECTIONS AND DETAILS S205 FOUNDATION SECTIONS AND DETAILS S301 TYPICAL MASONRY DETAILS AND MASONRY REPAIR NOTES S302 MASONRY REPAIR DETAILS AND MISC DETAILS S401 TYPICAL FLOOR FRAMING DETAILS S402 TYPICAL FLOOR FRAMING DETAILS S403 FLOOR FRAMING SECTIONS AND DETAILS S404 FLOOR FRAMING SECTIONS AND DETAILS S405 FLOOR FRAMING SECTIONS AND DETAILS S501 TYPICAL ROOF FRAMING DETAILS S502 TYPICAL ROOF FRAMING DETAILS S503 ROOF FRAMING SECTIONS AND DETAILS S504 ROOF FRAMING SECTIONS AND DETAILS S505 ROOF FRAMING SECTIONS AND DETAILS S601 ROOF FRAMING REINFORCING DETAILS S602 FRAMING REINFORCING DETAILS AND ROOF SECTIONS S701 TYPICAL BRACING ELEVATIONS S702 BRACING CONNECTION DETAILS S801 LINTEL SCHEDULE AND TYPICAL LIGHT GAGE FRAMING DETAILS



S901 METAL BUILDING PLANS AND DETAILS VOLUME 2 GENERAL DRAWINGS G001B COVER SHEET - VOLUME 2 PLUMBING DRAWINGS PD101A PLUMBING - SANITARY DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA A PD101B PLUMBING - SANITARY DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA B PD101C PLUMBING - SANITARY DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA C PD101D PLUMBING - SANITARY DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA D PD101E PLUMBING - SANITARY DEMOLTION PLAN - AREA E PD102F PLUMBING - SANITARY DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA F PD102G PLUMBING - SANITARY DEMOLTION PLAN - AREA G PD201A PLUMBING - DOMESTIC DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA A PD201B PLUMBING - DOMESTIC DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA B PD201C PLUMBING - DOMESTIC DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA C PD201D PLUMBING - DOMESTIC DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA D PD201E PLUMBING - DOMESTIC DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA E PD202F PLUMBING - DOMESTIC DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA F PD202G PLUMBING - DOMESTIC DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA G P001 PLUMBING LEGEND, NOTES, AND SCHEDULES P002 PLUMBING DETAILS AND SCHEDULES P003 PLUMBING DETAILS P101A PLUMBING - FOUNDATION PLAN - AREA A P101B PLUMBING - FOUNDATION PLAN - AREA B P101C PLUMBING - FOUNDATION PLAN - AREA C P101D PLUMBING - FOUNDATION PLAN - AREA D P101E PLUMBING - FOUNDATION PLAN - AREA E P201A PLUMBING - SANITARY PLAN - AREA A P201B PLUMBING - SANITARY PLAN - AREA B P201C PLUMBING - SANITARY PLAN - AREA C P201D PLUMBING - SANITARY PLAN - AREA D P201E PLUMBING - SANITARY PLAN - AREA E P202F PLUMBING - SANITARY PLAN - AREA F P202G PLUMBING - SANITARY PLAN - AREA G P301A PLUMBING - DOMESTIC PLAN - AREA A P301B PLUMBING - DOMESTIC PLAN - AREA B P301C PLUMBING - DOMESTIC PLAN - AREA C P301D PLUMBING - DOMESTIC PLAN - AREA D P301E PLUMBING - DOMESTIC PLAN - AREA E P302F PLUMBING - DOMESTIC PLAN - AREA F P302G PLUMBING - DOMESTIC PLAN - AREA G P401 PLUMBING - ENLARGED PLANS - MECHANICAL ROOM P402 PLUMBING - ENLARGED PLANS AND RISERS - AREA A P403 PLUMBING - ENLARGED PLANS AND RISERS - AREA B P404 PLUMBING - ENLARGED PLANS AND RISERS - AREAS D & F P405 PLUMBING - ENLARGED PLANS AND RISERS - AREA E P406 PLUMBING - ENLARGED SANITARY PLANS AND RISERS - AREA G P407 PLUMBING - ENLARGED DOMESTIC PLANS AND RISERS - AREA G P408 PLUMBING - NATURAL GAS RISER DIAGRAM SP001 FIRE PROTECTION LEGEND, SCHEDULES, NOTES AND DETAILS



SP201 FIRE PROTECTION - FIRST FLOOR PLAN SP202 FIRE PROTECTION - SECOND FLOOR PLAN MECHANICAL DRAWINGS MD101A MECHANICAL - DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA A MD101B MECHANICAL - DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA B MD101C MECHANICAL - DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA C MD101D MECHANICAL - DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA D MD101E MECHANICAL - DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA E MD102F MECHANICAL - DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA F MD102G MECHANICAL - DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA G MD103 MECHANICAL - OVERALL DEMOLITION PLAN - ROOF M001 MECHANICAL LEGEND, NOTES, AND DETAILS M002 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT NOTES M101A MECHANICAL - DUCTWORK PLAN - AREA A M101B MECHANICAL - DUCTWORK PLAN - AREA B M101C MECHANICAL - DUCTWORK PLAN - AREA C M101D MECHANICAL - DUCTWORK PLAN - AREA D M101E MECHANICAL - DUCTWORK PLAN - AREA E M102F MECHANICAL - DUCTWORK PLAN - AREA F M102G MECHANICAL - DUCTWORK PLAN - AREA G M103 MECHANICAL - OVERALL ROOF PLAN M104 MECHANICAL - DUCTWORK PLAN - ATHLETIC BUILDING M201A MECHANICAL - PIPING PLAN - AREA A M201B MECHANICAL - PIPING PLAN - AREA B M201C MECHANICAL - PIPING PLAN - AREA C M201D MECHANICAL - PIPING PLAN - AREA D M201E MECHANICAL - PIPING PLAN - AREA E M202F MECHANICAL - PIPING PLAN - AREA F M202G MECHANICAL - PIPING PLAN - AREA G M203 MECHANICAL - PARTIAL SITE PLAN M301 MECHANICAL ENLARGED PLANS M401 MECHANICAL DETAILS M402 MECHANICAL DETAILS M403 MECHANICAL AIRFLOW DIAGRAMS M501 MECHANICAL ELEC. SEQUENCES AND DDC CONTROLS M502 MECHANICAL DDC CONTROLS ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS ED101A ELECTRICAL - DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA A ED101B ELECTRICAL - DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA B ED101C ELECTRICAL - DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA C ED101D ELECTRICAL - DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA D ED101E ELECTRICAL - DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA E ED102F ELECTRICAL - DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA F ED102G ELECTRICAL - DEMOLITION PLAN - AREA G ED201 ELECTRICAL - DEMOLITION PLAN - SITE E001 ELECTRICAL LEGEND, NOTES, AND DETAILS E002 ELECTRICAL - DETAILS E003 ELECTRICAL - DETAILS E004 ELECTRICAL - DETAILS E005 ELECTRICAL - DETAILS E006 ELECTRICAL - DETAILS E007 ELECTRICAL - DETAILS



E008 ELECTRICAL - DETAILS E009 ELECTRICAL - DETAILS E010 ELECTRICAL - DETAILS E011 ELECTRICAL - DETAILS E101A ELECTRICAL - LIGHTING PLAN - AREA A E101B ELECTRICAL - LIGHTING PLAN - AREA B E101C ELECTRICAL - LIGHTING PLAN - AREA C E101D ELECTRICAL - LIGHTING PLAN - AREA D E101E ELECTRICAL - LIGHTING PLAN - AREA E E102F ELECTRICAL - LIGHTING PLAN - AREA F E102G ELECTRICAL - LIGHTING PLAN - AREA G E201A ELECTRICAL - POWER PLAN - AREA A E201B ELECTRICAL - POWER PLAN - AREA B E201C ELECTRICAL - POWER PLAN - AREA C E201D ELECTRICAL - POWER PLAN - AREA D E201E ELECTRICAL - POWER PLAN - AREA E E202F ELECTRICAL - POWER PLAN - AREA F E202G ELECTRICAL - POWER PLAN - AREA G E202H ELECTRICAL - POWER PLAN - ROOF E301A ELECTRICAL - LOW VOLTAGE PLAN - AREA A E301B ELECTRICAL - LOW VOLTAGE PLAN - AREA B E301C ELECTRICAL - LOW VOLTAGE PLAN - AREA C E301D ELECTRICAL - LOW VOLTAGE PLAN - AREA D E301E ELECTRICAL - LOW VOLTAGE PLAN - AREA E E302F ELECTRICAL - LOW VOLTAGE PLAN - AREA F E302G ELECTRICAL - LOW VOLTAGE PLAN - AREA G E401 ELECTRICAL - ENLARGED KITCHEN PLAN E501 ELECTRICAL - POWER RISER DIAGRAM E601 ELECTRICAL - PANELBOARD SCHEDULES E602 ELECTRICAL - PANELBOARD SCHEDULES E603 ELECTRICAL - PANELBOARD SCHEDULES E604 ELECTRICAL - PANELBOARD SCHEDULES E605 ELECTRICAL - PANELBOARD SCHEDULES E606 ELECTRICAL - PANELBOARD SCHEDULES E701 ELECTRICAL - ENLARGED AUDITORIUM PLANS E702 ELECTRICAL - AUDITORIUM DETAILS E703 ELECTRICAL - AUDITORIUM DETAILS E704 ELECTRICAL - AUDITORIUM DETAILS E705 ELECTRICAL - AUDITORIUM DETAILS E706 ELECTRICAL - AUDITORIUM DETAILS E801 ELECTRICAL - AUDITORIUM SOUND DETAILS E802 ELECTRICAL - AUDITORIUM SOUND DETAILS E901 ELECTRICAL - SITE PLAN


INVITATION TO BID 000400 -1

INVITATION TO BID

Bid Request No. 11292017-1400 Sealed bids in duplicate will be received at the Spotsylvania County Schools Administration Building, 8020 River Stone Drive Fredericksburg, VA, until 2:00 pm. local prevailing time, Thursday, November 30, 2017 for the general contract for the Courtland High School Renovation. Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud. The project is generally described as Courtland High School Renovation, 6701 Smith Station Road, Spotsylvania, VA 22553. The Owner will accept proposals from only the following General Contractors prequalified under the terms of General Contractor Prequalification IFB 11292017-1400:

A.D. Whittaker of Hanover, VA Gulf Seaboard General Contractors of Hanover, VA W.M. Schlosser of Hyattsville, MD

A mandatory Pre-bid Conference will be held at 10:00 am, November 7, 2017 at the project site. Attendance of all General Contractors planning to submit a proposal is specifically required. Bids received from Contractors who did not attend the Pre-bid Conference will be returned unopened. Beginning Thursday, November 2, 2017 electronic documents will be available on both the SCSB Website (http://www.spotsylvania.k12.va.us/Page/601) and the e-VA procurement website (www.eva.virginia.gov). Additionally, beginning Thursday, November 2, 2017, bidding documents may be obtained, upon payment of a deposit of two hundred dollars ($200.00) and a non-refundable payment of $25 per set for processing/handling payable to BCWH Architects (804) 788-4774. Upon payment, bidding documents may be picked up at ARC, 1905-C Westwood Avenue, Richmond, Virginia 23227 (804) 355-8601, or received by mail or freight. Shipping costs shall be paid by the bidder. Upon returning bid documents to ARC, postage paid, in good condition, free from markings and fully bound (loose sheets will not be accepted), within 10 days after the date of receipt of bids, a full deposit will be returned. Sets of documents returned with marked up portions shall be discarded in their entirety and the deposit used to purchase new documents for use on the project. Should the bidder wish to purchase replacement portions prior to returning sets, same may be obtained from ARC, 1905-C, Richmond, Virginia 23227 (804) 355-8601. NO EXCEPTIONS. Visits to the site during the bidding period can be arranged through the Construction Division of Spotsylvania County Schools. Contact Russell Davis, (540)582-5894 Ext 1931 No bid can be withdrawn after the time set for the receipt of bids and for ninety days thereafter except as provided under Chapter 7, Section 2.2-4330, of the Code of Virginia, as follows: The bidder shall give notice in writing of his claim or right to withdraw his bid within two business days after the conclusion of the bid opening procedure and shall submit original work papers with such notice. The notice and the original working papers shall be given to the Owner, to the attention of Shannon Finley, 8020 River Stone Drive, Fredericksburg, VA 22407, within such period. Either a cashier's or certified check must accompany bids or an acceptable bid bond in the amount of five percent (5%) of the base bid, made payable to the County of Spotsylvania. Bidders must be licensed contractors in the Commonwealth of Virginia in accordance with Title 54.1, Chapter 11 of the Code of Virginia as amended; and meet requirements of Title 2.2, Chapter 43, Paragraph 2.2-4311, Employment Discrimination Prohibitions and Paragraph 2.2-4312, Drug Free Workplace. The contract will be awarded on a lump sum base bid to the lowest responsive and responsible bidder. The Spotsylvania County School Board reserves the right to award the contract in whole or in part. Questions shall be referred in writing to Kylan Shirley at BCWH Architects, 1840 West Broad Street, Suite 400, Richmond, VA 23220, telephone: (804) 545-7636, fax: (804)788-0986; email [email protected]. The Spotsylvania County School Board does not discriminate on the basis of race, religion, color, sex, national origin, age, disability, status as a service disabled veteran, or any other basis prohibited by law. Spotsylvania County School Board


SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 000600-1

SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. General

The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "Instructions to Bidders," AIA Document A701, 1997. Where a portion of the Instructions to Bidders is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Instructions, the unaltered provisions of the Instructions to Bidders shall remain in effect.

B. Article 3.3: Substitutions

3.3.2: Delete this paragraph in its entirety and substitute the following: “3.3.2 No substitutions shall be considered prior to receipt of Bids.”

3.3.3: Delete this paragraph.

3.3.4: Delete this paragraph. END OF SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS


BID FORM 000700 - 1

BID FORM Project: Courtland High School Renovation Spotsylvania County Public Schools Bid Request No. 11292017-1400 From: (Bidder’s Name & Address) Date: The Undersigned, having carefully examined the drawings and specifications entitled “Courtland High School Renovation” and dated November 2, 2017, as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all materials, labor, equipment and services called for by them for a lump sum consideration of: TOTAL BID AMOUNT (Base Bid + Fixed Allowances 1-5 + Unit Price Allowances 1-16) The Total Bid Amount includes all Work required by the Bid Documents for this project, Courtland High School Renovations in strict accordance with the drawings and specifications, for the sum of: $ ______________________________________________ (Figures Only) Bidder must include Excel sheet with bid

ADDITIVE ALTERNATES:

Additive Bid Item #I: includes all work related to the site improvements, landscaping and construction of the 2 story, six classroom addition at the south east corner of the building. Scope includes pre-manufactured aluminum canopy.

$ (Figure Only) The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids, to waive any informality, and to award the contract in the best interest of the Owner. If the lowest responsible bid exceeds the project construction budget, the Owner reserves the right to negotiate with the lowest bidder per Section 2.2-4318 of the Code of Virginia. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION The undersigned agrees to Substantially Complete the Project as follows: 1 . For Phase 1 the work shall be Substantially Complete no later than December 2, 2018. 2 . For Phase 1A, the work shall be Substantially Complete no later than August 1, 2018 3 . For Phase 2 and Phase 2A, the work shall be Substantially Complete no later than August 1, 2019. The Bidder and the Owner agree that if Substantial Completion as specified is not achieved within the time indicated, and certified by the Architect, there shall be deducted from the Contract Price, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages, the amount defined in General Conditions, paragraph 9.11 Liquidated Damages, for each and every day of delay in the completion of that Work required to achieve Substantial Completion beyond the time stipulated. The Contractor understands and agrees that time is of the essence.


BID FORM 000700 - 2

PROPOSED SUB-CONTRACTORS The following is a listing of the subcontractors used in this bid:

Masonry Subcontractor Mechanical Subcontractor Plumbing Subcontractor: Electrical Subcontractor: _______________________________________ Storefront Subcontractor: Abatement Subcontractor _______________________________________

RECEIPT OF ADDENDA

The following Addenda are acknowledged (if no Addenda are issued, write the word "none"): ADDENDUM # DATE

BID SECURITY

Attached hereto is a Bid Bond (AIA Document A310) for 5% of the undersigned base bid made payable to the Spotsylvania County School Board.

CERTIFICATION OF CRIMES AGAINST CHILDREN See Attachment A following this Bid Form. Attachment A must be signed and included with this Bid Form. BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION

By the act of submitting a bid for the proposed contract, the Bidder represents that:

1. The Bidder and all subcontractors the Bidder intends to use have carefully and thoroughly reviewed the drawings, specifications and other construction contract documents and have found them complete and free from ambiguity and sufficient for the purposes intended; and further that,

2. The Bidder and all workman, employees and subcontractors the Bidder intends to use are skilled and experienced in the type of construction represented by the construction contract documents bid upon; and further that,

3. Neither the Bidder or any of the Bidder's employees, agents, intended suppliers or subcontractors have relied on any verbal representations, allegedly authorized or unauthorized from the Owner, or the Owner's employees or agents including architects, engineers or consultants, in the assembling of the bid figure; and further that,

4. The bid figure is based solely upon the construction contract documents and properly issued written addenda and not upon any other written representation.

AGREEMENT TO EXECUTE CONTRACT If notified of the acceptance of this Bid within thirty (30) calendar days after the date fixed for the opening of the bids, the undersigned agrees to execute and deliver to the Owner the Contract and Contractor's Bonds within five (5) calendar days thereafter, and to faithfully and properly complete the work with the best interest of the Owner, the safety of the public and in accordance with first class workmanship. The Undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to comply with all provisions regarding commencement, performance, completion and acceptance of the work described in the above mentioned specifications and as stipulated in his proposal and the construction contract. In case of failure on his part to execute the said contract and bond and commence work thereon, the check or bid bond shall be paid as liquidated damages for such failure; otherwise, the check or bid bond accompanying this proposal shall be returned to the Undersigned.


BID FORM 000700 - 3

It is agreed that the Undersigned has complied with and/or will comply with all requirements concerning licensing and with all other Local, State and National Laws and that no legal requirement has been or will be violated in making or accepting this proposal, in awarding the contract to him and/or in the prosecution of the work required there under. The Undersigned is a licensed Class Contractor in accordance with Section 2.2-4330, Code of Virginia, as amended, certificate number , dated . Under Section 2.2-4354, Code of Virginia, an individual contractor is required to furnish his social security number and a proprietorship, partnership and corporation is required to furnish their employer identification numbers to the County of Spotsylvania. Please indicate this information on this Bid Form as follows: Social Security Number: Federal Employer Identification Number: By bidding in response to this invitation, the Bidder represents that in the preparation and submission of this Bid, said Bidder did not, either directly or indirectly, enter into any combination or arrangement with any person, firm or corporation or enter into any agreement, participate in any collusion, or otherwise take any action in the restraint of free, competitive bidding in violation of the Sherman Act (15 U.S.C. Section 1) or Section 2.2-4340 of the Code of Virginia. The Undersigned declares that this firm is: A Corporation organized and existing under the laws of the state of______. A Partnership consisting of The Undersigned declares that the person or persons signing this proposal is/are fully authorized to sign the proposal on behalf of the firm listed and to fully bind the firm listed to all the conditions and provisions thereof. It is agreed that no person or persons or company other than the firm listed below or as otherwise indicated hereinafter has any interest whatsoever in this proposal of the Contract that may be entered into as a result thereof and that in all respects the proposal is legal and fair, submitted in good faith without collusion or fraud. Respectfully submitted this day of , 2017

(Name of Firm)

(Mailing Address of Firm)

(City/State/Zip Code of Firm)

(Phone Number)

(By)

END OF BID FORM


BID PROPOSAL – ATTACHMENT A 000700a-1

BID PROPOSAL – ATTACHMENT A

CERTIFICATION OF CRIMES AGAINST CHILDREN

Contractor acknowledges that the implementation of this contract requires Contractor and Contractor’s employees to have direct contact with Spotsylvania County Schools’ students. Therefore, Contractor hereby certifies that neither Contractor nor, to the best of Contractor’s knowledge, its employees have been convicted of a felony or any offense involving the sexual molestation or physical or sexual abuse or rape of a child. For the purposes of this certification, "direct contact with students" means being in the presence of students during regular school hours or during school sponsored activities. Contractor understands that, pursuant to Code of Virginia §22.1-296.1(C), making a materially false statement regarding offenses which are required to be included in the certification referenced above is a Class 1 misdemeanor and, upon conviction, the fact of such conviction shall be grounds for the revocation of the contract to provide such services and, when relevant, the revocation of any license required to provide such services. Spotsylvania County Public Schools shall not be liable for materially false statements regarding the certifications required under this Contract.

We agree that we will not hire any person whose background check reveals that they have been convicted of a felony, a class 1 misdemeanor, a crime of moral turpitude (lying, cheating or stealing), or any offense involving the sexual molestation, physical or sexual abuse or rape of a child. We also agree that, after specific inquiry of any potential employee, we will not hire any person for this contract who has been the subject of a founded case of child abuse and neglect.

_____________________________ _____________________ Contractor Date By:________________________________ Title: ______________________________

ITEM NO.

ITEM DESCRIPTION QUANT. UNIT Unit Price Total

1 BASE BID AMOUNT 1 LS

2 Video Surveillance, Lump Sum Allowance 1 1 LS $120,000 120,000.00$

3 Firelane Striping and Signage, Lump Sum Allowance 2 1 LS $1,500 1,500.00$

4Circuit Breaker Revisions - Short Circuit Coordination Study, Lump Sum Allowance 3

1 LS $10,000 10,000.00$

5 Signage, Lump Sum allowance 4 1 LS $75,000 75,000.00$

6 Miscellaneous Construction, Lump Summ Allowance 5 1 LS $15,000 15,000.00$

7 Unit Price Allowance 1, Additional Excavation 200 C.Y. -$

8 Unit Price Allowance 2, Additional Excavation in Trenches 100 C.Y. -$

9 Unit Price Allowance 3, Additional Excavation in Footings 25 C.Y. -$

10 Unit Price Allowance 4, Mass Rock Removal 10 C.Y. -$

11 Unit Price Allowance 5, VDOT Std. No. 21B Stone 10 C.Y. -$

12 Unit Price Allowance 6, VDOT Std. No. 57 Stone 10 C.Y. -$

13 Unit Price Allowance 7, Woven Geotextile Fabic 200 S.Y. -$

14 Unit Price Allowance 8, Sidewalk Removal and Replacement 75 S.Y. -$

15 Unit Price Allowance 9, Asphalt Removal and Replacement 200 S.Y. -$

16 Unit Price Allowance 10, Additional Smoke Detectors 5 EA -$

17 Unit Price Allowance 11, Additional Duct Smoke Detectors 5 EA -$

18Unit Price Allowance 12, Additional Fire Alarm Horns/Strobes

5 EA -$

19 Unit Price Allowance 13, Additional Fire Alarm Pull Stations 5 EA -$

Courtland High School Renovation

Bid Request No. 11292017-1400

November 2, 2017 Bid Form Excel Sheet

ITEM NO.

ITEM DESCRIPTION QUANT. UNIT Unit Price Total

Courtland High School Renovation

Bid Request No. 11292017-1400

20 Unit Price Allowance 14, Additional Double Face Exit Signs 5 EA -$

21 Unit Price Allowance 15, Additional Single Face Exit Signs 5 EA -$

22 Unit Price Allowance 15, Quarry Tile 100 SF -$

TOTAL BID AMOUNT: Base Bid + Lump Sum Allowances (1-5) + Unit Price Allowances (1-16)

November 2, 2017 Bid Form Excel Sheet


GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 001100-1

SPOTSYLVANIA COUNTY SCHOOL BOARD

GENERAL CONDITIONS

OF THE

CONTRACT

FOR

CONSTRUCTION



TABLE OF CONTENTS ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 Basic Definitions 1 1.2 Execution, Correlation and Intent 2 1.3 Ownership and Use of Architect's Drawings, Specifications and Other Documents 4 1.4 Capitalization 5 1.5 Interpretation 5 ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1 Definition 5

2.2 Information and Services Required of the Owner 6

2.3 Owner's Right to Stop the Work 7 2.4 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 7 ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1 Definition 8 3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor 8 3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures 10

3.4 Labor and Materials 11 3.5 Warranty 12 3.6 Taxes 14 3.7 Permits, Fees and Notices 14 3.8 Allowances 15



3.9 Superintendence 16 3.10 Contractor's Construction Schedules 17 3.11 Documents and Samples at the Site 18 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 18 3.13 Use of Site 19 3.14 Cutting and Patching 20 3.15 Cleaning Up 21 3.16 Access to Work 22 3.17 Royalties and Patents 22 3.18 Indemnification and Covenant Not to Sue 22 3.19 Non-Discrimination 23 3.20 Drug-Free Workplace 23 3.21 Illegal Aliens 24 ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 Architect 24 4.2 Architect's Administration of the Contract 25 4.3 Claims and Disputes 28 4.4 Review of Claims by Architect 32 ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 Definitions 33

5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work 33 5.3 Subcontractual Relations 34



5.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 34 ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE

CONTRACTORS 6.1 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to

Award Separate Contracts 35 6.2 Mutual Responsibility 35 6.3 Owner's Right to Clean Up 36 ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 Changes 37 7.2 Change Orders 38 7.3 Construction Change Directives 39 7.4 Minor Changes in the Work 42 ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 Definitions 43 8.2 Progress and Completion 43 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time 44 ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 Contract Sum 45 9.2 Schedule of Values 45 9.3 Applications for Payment 45

9.4 Certificates for Payment 47 9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification 47 9.6 Progress Payments 48 9.7 Failure of Payment 49



9.8 Substantial Completion 50 9.9 Partial Occupancy or Use 51 9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment 52 9.11 Liquidated Damages 53 ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs 54 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property 54 10.3 Emergencies 57 10.4 Hazardous Materials Certification 57 ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 Contractor's Insurance 57 11.2 Property Insurance / Builder’s Risk Insurance 61 11.3 Performance Bond and Payment Bond 62 ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 Uncovering of Work 63 12.2 Correction of Work 63 12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 65 ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 Governing Law 66

13.2 Successors and Assigns 66

13.3 Written Notice 66 13.4 Rights and Remedies 66 13.5 Tests and Inspections 67



13.6 Legal Claims 68 13.7 Cooperation with Governmental Agencies,

Public Utilities, Etc. 68

13.8 Records 68 ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 Termination by the Contractor 69 14.2 Termination by the Owner 70 14.3 Suspension or Termination by the Owner for Convenience 70

01/06/12 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ARTICLE 1

GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS

1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, all sections of the Project Manual, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically deleted in the Agreement, the Contract Documents shall include other documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor's bid and portions of addenda relating to bidding requirements). In the event of a conflict, terms and conditions contained in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor shall take precedence over the terms and conditions contained in these General Conditions, and the terms and conditions in the General Conditions shall take precedence over all other terms and conditions contained in the other Contract Documents. If the Request for Proposals and the Proposal are included in the Contract Documents, then the Request for Proposals shall take precedence over the Proposal, unless specifically agreed otherwise herein. 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT

The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a written Modification. Except as provided in Paragraph 3.18, nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall be construed to create any contractual relationship (1) between the Architect and the Contractor, (2) between the Owner or the Architect and a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect, or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties.


1.1.3 THE WORK

The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 1.1.4 THE PROJECT

The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS

The Drawings are the graphic, diagrammatic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams. 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS

The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL

The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. 1.1.8 ADDENDA

Addenda record modifications to the drawings and/or Project Manual made prior to the signing of Agreement for the construction of the Project by the Owner and the Contractor. 1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT 1.2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor as provided in the Agreement. If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request. A copy of the signed set shall be deposited with the Architect.


1.2.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the intended results. Any item of work not specifically mentioned but by custom and usage normally included in order to properly complete the intent of the Contract Documents is to be considered as so included. All work mentioned or indicated in the Contract Documents shall be performed by the Contractor as part of this Contract unless it is specifically indicated in the Contract Documents that such Work is to be done by others. Should the Drawings, Specifications, applicable Federal, State or local Codes, or manufacturer's instructions disagree in themselves or with each other, the Contractor shall provide the better quality or greater quantity of Work unless otherwise directed by written addendum to the Contract. 1.2.4 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall refer to all of the Drawings, including those showing primarily the Work of the mechanical, electrical and other specialized trades, and to all of the Sections of the Specifications, and shall perform all Work reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to produce the indicated results. 1.2.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings, as interpreted by the Architect. 1.2.6 Where codes, standards, requirements and publications of public and private bodies are referred to in the Specifications, references shall be understood to be the latest revision prior to the date of receiving bids, except where otherwise indicated. 1.2.7 All manufactured articles, materials, and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with the manufacturer's written or printed directions and instructions unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. 1.2.8 Test boring or soil test information included with the Contract Documents or otherwise made available to the Contractor was obtained by the Owner for use by the Architect in the design of the Project or Work. Neither the Owner nor the Architect


represent such information to the Contractor as an accurate or approximate indication of subsurface conditions, and no claim for extra cost or extension of time resulting from a reliance by the Contractor on such information shall be allowed. 1.2.9 Where the Work is to fit with existing conditions or work to be performed by others, the Contractor shall fully and completely join the Work with such conditions or work, unless otherwise specified. 1.2.10 The mechanical and electrical Drawings, except for electrical outlets which are to be located by scale dimensions, are diagrammatic, intending to show general locations and arrangements of piping, wiring, equipment and specialties, and does not necessarily show all required offsets, conditions and appurtenances. All Work shall be accurately laid out and coordinated by the Contractor in cooperation with the trades to avoid conflicts and to obtain a neat and workmanlike installation that will afford maximum practical accessibility for operation, maintenance and headroom. All equipment shall, insofar as possible, be installed in such a manner as will not interfere with architectural or structural portions of the buildings. 1.2.11 No Drawings are intended to be rigid in specific details where such details may be in conflict with recommendations of the manufacturer of the equipment actually provided. The Work under the division includes making such modifications in the designs indicated as may be required to cause all Work to conform to such recommendations. 1.2.12 The Contractor shall provide equipment and materials indicated herein complete with all features normally provided with such items, although all features of design and construction may not be indicated in complete detail. Such features shall be subject to the approval of Architect and shall include all standard accessories and appurtenances normally provided or which are required for safe operation. 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS 1.3.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect are instruments of the Architect's service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one contract record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect shall be deemed the author of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. All copies of them, except the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or


material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner and Architect. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's copyright or other reserved rights. 1.4 CAPITALIZATION 1.4.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles and identified references to Paragraphs, Subparagraphs and Clauses in the document or (3) the titles of documents published by the American Institute of Architects. 1.5 INTERPRETATION 1.5.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. 1.5.2 Most divisions of the Specifications have been written in the so-called “abbreviated” style of which such phrases as “the Contractor shall”, or “shall be”, etc., have been omitted, and similarly so with the notes on the Drawings. Where the sense of the sentence or statement implies the inclusion of the above phrase, it shall be construed to be so included. ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1 DEFINITION 2.1.1 The Owner is the School Board of the County of Spotsylvania, and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. The School Board of the County of Spotsylvania, by majority vote, is the only representative of the Owner, an independent school district, having the power to enter into or amend a contract, to approve changes in the scope of Work, to approve and execute a Change Order or Construction Change


Directive modifying the Contract Sum, or agree to an extension to the date of Substantial or Final Completion. The Board will act as soon as reasonably possible to avoid undue delays. The Board designates authorized representatives to act on its behalf for day-to-day operations under the Contract. 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. Any existing utilities shown on the drawings have been located utilizing the best information available at the time. The Contractor shall field verify exact locations and/or depths prior to beginning any construction, and shall perform any Work in such a manner so as to avoid damaging any such utilities. Any damage to any utilities shall be repaired or replaced to the utility company's satisfaction by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. All repairs shall be made immediately to restore all service. 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 2.2.3 Information or services required of the Owner hereunder shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for such information or services. 2.2.4 The Contractor will be furnished, for construction purposes, free of charge, a maximum of thirty (30) sets of Drawings and Project Manuals, including any and all addenda. Additional complete or partial sets may be purchased by the Contractor at cost of reproduction, postage and handling. 2.2.5 The bench mark will be furnished to the Contractor for vertical elevation control. All other lines, levels and supplemental bench marks are to be established and maintained by the Contractor. 2.2.6 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and responsibilities of the Owner enumerated herein and especially those in respect to Article 6 (Construction by Owner or by Separate Contractors), Article 9 (Payments and Completion) and Article 11 (Insurance and Bonds). 2.2.7 The Contractor stipulates and agrees that the Owner has no duty to discover any design errors or omission in the Drawings, Plans, Specifications and other Construction Documents, and has no duty to notify Contractor of same. By entering into the Contract Documents or any Agreement with any Architect, Owner does not warrant the adequacy and accuracy of any Drawings, Plans, Specifications or other Contract Documents.


2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12.2, or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or fails to carry out Work, or any portion thereof, in a safe manner as prescribed by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration or the Virginia Department of Labor and Industry, the Owner, by written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. Any work stoppage under this subparagraph shall not give rise to any claim by the Contractor for an extension of time or for money damages. 2.3.2 Failure of the Owner to notify the Contractor of necessary corrections or to stop the Work shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities or obligations of the Contract Documents. 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner or the Architect to begin and prosecute correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Construction Change Directive or other written notice shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for the Architect's and other consultants’ additional services and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect or failure, including attorney’s fees and costs associated with any necessary re-bidding of any portion of the Work. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 3


CONTRACTOR 3.1 DEFINITION 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. 3.1.2 The Contractor represents and warrants the following to the Owner (in addition to the other representations and warranties contained in the Contract Documents), as an inducement to the Owner to execute this Contract, which representations and warranties shall survive the execution and delivery of the Contract and the Final Completion of the Work: .1 that it is financially solvent, able to pay its debts as they mature, and

possessed of sufficient working capital to complete the Work and perform its obligations under the Contract Documents;

.2 that it is able to furnish the tools, materials, supplies, equipment and labor

required to timely complete the Word and perform its obligations hereunder and has sufficient experience and competence to do so;

.3 that it is authorized to transact business in the Commonwealth as required by

Virginia law, that it shall not allow its existence to lapse or its certificate of authority or registration to transact business in Virginia to be revoked or cancelled during the term of this Contract, and that it is properly licensed by all necessary governmental, public and quasi-public authorities having jurisdiction over it, the Work, or the site of the Project; and

.4 that the execution of the Contract and its performance thereof are within its

duly authorized powers. 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR

3.2.1 Before starting the Work, and at frequent intervals during the progress thereof, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to subparagraph 2.2.1 and shall at once report to the Architect and Owner any error, inconsistency or omission the Contractor may discover. Any necessary change shall be ordered as provided in Article 7, subject to the requirements of Paragraph 1.2 and other provisions of the Contract Documents. If the Contractor proceeds with the Work without such notice to the Architect and Owner having discovered such errors, inconsistencies or omissions or if by reasonable study of the Contract Documents the Contractor could have discovered such, the Contractor shall bear


all costs arising therefrom. 3.2.2 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported promptly to the Owner and Architect. 3.2.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and submittals approved pursuant to Paragraph 3.12. 3.2.4 The Contractor represents and warrants by submission of a Proposal that he has carefully examined the Contract Documents, any soil test reports, drainage studies, geotechnical or other reports and the site of the Work, and that, from his own investigations and testing, he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the Work, the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials likely to be encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the Work, the general and local conditions and all other materials which may in any way affect the Work or its performance. Should the Contractor find discrepancies, omissions or conflicts with the Contract Documents, or be in doubt as to their meaning, the Contractor shall at once notify in writing the Architect and Owner, and Architect will issue a written addendum to all parties that is consistent with the Owner’s Scope of the Work. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional time or compensation for Contractor’s failure to visit the site, failure to perform testing at the site, or for any additional Work caused by Contractor’s fault, by improper construction, or by Contractor’s failure to carefully study and compare the Contract Documents prior to execution of the Work. 3.2.5 If the Contractor has knowledge that any of the products or systems specified will perform in a manner that will limit the Contractor’s ability to satisfactorily perform the Work or to honor his warranty, or will result in a limitation of or interference with the Owner’s intended use, then the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, providing substantiation for his position. Any necessary changes, including substitution of materials, shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. 3.2.6 The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum amounts paid to the Architect for the Architect to evaluate and respond to the Contractor’s requests for information, where such information was available to the Contractor from a careful study and comparison of the Contract Documents, field conditions, Owner-provided information, construction drawings or prior Project correspondence or documentation. If, in the reasonable opinion of the Architect, the Contractor does not make reasonable effort to comply with any of the above requirements of the Contract Documents and this causes the Architect or his Consultants to expend an unreasonable amount of time in the discharge of the duties imposed by the Contract Documents, then the Contractor shall bear the cost of compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such failure.


3.2.7 The Contractor shall arrange meetings prior to commencement of the Work of all major Subcontractors to allow the Subcontractors to demonstrate an understanding of the Construction and Contract Documents to the Architect and to allow the Subcontractors to ask for interpretations, when necessary. The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall evaluate and satisfy themselves as to the conditions and limitations under which the Work is to be performed, including:

.1 The location, condition, layout, drainage and nature of the Project site and surrounding areas;

.2 Generally prevailing climatic conditions; .3 Anticipated labor supply and costs; .4 Availability and cost of materials, tools and equipment; and .5 Other similar issues.

3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract unless Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. As part of that responsibility, Contractor shall enforce the Owner’s alcohol-free, drug-free, harassment-free and weapon-free policies and zones, which will require compliance with those policies and zones by Contractor’s employees, subcontractors, and all other persons carrying out the Contract. Contractor shall require all construction workers, whether Contractor’s own forces or forces of Contractor’s subcontractors, while on Owner’s property, to refrain from committing any criminal conduct, possessing or drinking alcoholic beverages, possessing or using illegal drugs or any controlled substances, carrying weapons, speaking profane and/or offensive language, or engaging in any inappropriate interactions of any nature whatsoever with students and employees, including talking, touching, staring or otherwise contributing to a hostile or offensive environment for Owner’s students and employees. All areas of campus, other than the defined construction areas, shall be off limits to Contractor’s forces, unless the work assignment specifies otherwise. Failure of an individual to adhere to these standards of conduct shall result in the immediate removal of the offending employee from all construction on any of Owner’s


property. Repeated removal of Contractor’s or Contractor’s subcontractor’s forces, or one serious infraction, shall constitute a substantial breach of the Agreement justifying the immediate termination by Owner pursuant to Article 14. 3.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. 3.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed under this Contract to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. The Contractor shall properly and efficiently coordinate the timing, scheduling and routing of all Work performed by all trades and subcontractors. 3.3.5 It is understood and agreed that the relationship of Contractor to Owner shall be that of an independent contractor. Nothing contained in this Agreement or inferable therefrom shall be deemed or construed to (1) make Contractor the agent, servant or employee or the Owner; or (2) create any partnership, joint venture or other association between Owner and Contractor. Any direction and instruction by Owner or any of its authorized representatives with respect to the Work shall relate to the results the Owner desires to obtain from the Work, and shall in no way affect Contractor’s independent contractor status. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for qualified, careful and efficient workers and labor eligible to work in accordance with state and federal law. In addition, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. The word "provide" shall mean furnish and install complete, including connections, unless otherwise specified. Before ordering any material or doing any Work, Contractor shall verify all dimensions and check all conditions in order to assure Contractor that they are the same as those in the Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents. Any inconsistency shall be brought to the attention of the Architect. In the event that discrepancies occur between ordered materials and actual conditions and Architect was not notified beforehand, then costs to correct such discrepancies, including purchasing new materials, shall be borne by Contractor. 3.4.2 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them.


3.4.3 In executing the Work under the Contract Documents, Contractor shall comply with all applicable state and federal laws, including but not limited to laws concerned with labor, safety and minimum wages. 3.5 WARRANTY 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor further warrants that it shall perform the Work in a good and workmanlike manner, continuously and diligently in accordance with generally accepted standards of construction practice for construction of projects similar to the Project, except to the extent the Contract Documents expressly specify a higher degree of finish or workmanship, in which case the standard shall be the higher standard. All material shall be installed in a true and straight alignment, level and plumb; patterns shall be uniform; and jointing of materials shall be flush and level, unless otherwise directed in writing by the Architect. 3.5.1.1 The warranty period for any system or systems on which required tests have not been successfully performed as of the Date of Substantial Completion for the Work, due to seasonal limitations, shall begin after the required tests have been successfully performed. 3.5.1.2 Notwithstanding anything in the Contract Documents to the contrary, Owner and Contractor expressly agree that the warranties stated herein shall mean the individual warranties associated with each particular Work within the Project, and each such individual warranty shall run from the applicable Work’s Final Completion date (unless otherwise expressly provided in the applicable Contract Documents for that particular Work). Contractor’s express warranty is in addition to, and not in lieu of, Owner’s other available remedies. All required warranties on equipment, machinery, materials or components shall be submitted to the Architect on the manufacturer’s or supplier’s approved forms for delivery to the Owner. The warranties set out in Section 3.5 are not exclusive of any other warranties or guarantees set out in other places in the Contract Documents or expressed or implied under applicable law. 3.5.2 In all cases in which a manufacturer's name, trade name or other proprietary designation is used in connection with materials or articles to be furnished under this Contract, whether or not the phrase "or equal" is used after such name, the Contractor shall furnish the product of the named manufacturer(s) without substitution, unless a written request for a substitute has been submitted by the Contractor and approved in writing by the Architect. 3.5.3 If the contractor proposes to use a material which, while suitable for the intended


use, deviates in any way from the detailed requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall inform the Architect, in writing, of the nature of such deviations at the time the material is submitted for approval, and shall request written approval of the deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents. 3.5.4 In requesting approval of deviations or substitutions, the Contractor shall provide, upon request, evidence leading to a reasonable certainty that the proposed substitution or deviation will provide a quality of result at least equal to that otherwise attainable. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the evidence presented by the Contractor does not provide a sufficient basis for such reasonable certainty, the Architect may reject such substitution or deviation without further investigation. Any delay created by the Contractor's requesting approval of deviations or substitutions or of Contractor's submissions relating thereto shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall not constitute grounds for any claim for extensions of time or for money damages. 3.5.5 In proposing any substitution, the Contractor represents that its bid and Contract amounts are based upon specified and indicated equipment and materials. Any modification to the Work necessitated by approval of a substitution shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.5.6 Whether or not the Owner or Architect accepts any proposed substitution, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for any fees charged by the Architect or other consultants for evaluating any proposed substitution. 3.5.7 The Contractor agrees to assign to the Owner at Final Completion of the Work, such assignment to be effective no later than Final Completion, any and all manufacturers’ warranties relating to materials and labor used in the Work. Contractor further agrees to perform the Work in such manner so as to preserve any and all such manufacturers’ warranties. All forms will be required to be submitted prior to Final Payment. 3.5.8 Prior to receipt of Final Payment, Contractor shall obtain all original warranties applicable to the Project, fully and properly executed by Contractor and/or subcontractor, and deliver them to Architect. 3.5.9 In the event of failure of materials, products or workmanship, either during construction or the warranty period, the Contractor shall take appropriate measures to ensure correction of defective Work or replacement of defective items, without cost to the Owner. Such warranty shall be maintained notwithstanding that certain systems may be activated prior to Substantial Completion as required for the satisfactory completion of the Project. Upon written notice from the Owner or Architect, the Contract shall promptly remedy defects as covered by Contractor’s warranty. If Contractor does not respond to the written notice, either by beginning corrective work or notifying Owner in writing regarding when corrective work will begin, within ten days of Contractor’s receipt of the written notice, then the Owner may take measures to correct the Work and Contractors will be obligated to


reimburse Owner’s costs, including attorney’s fees. The provisions of this subparagraph shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, any other rights and remedies available to the Owner. 3.6 TAXES 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. 3.6.2 The Contractor shall pay all County, City, State and Federal taxes required by law enacted at the time bids are received and resulting from the Work or traceable thereto, under whatever name levied. Said taxes shall not be in addition to the Contract Sum between Owner and Contractor, as the taxes shall be an obligation of the Contractor and not of the Owner, and the Owner shall be held harmless for same by the Contractor. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7.1 As required by federal, state and local codes, laws, or ordinances including business license laws the Contractor shall secure and pay all costs for ALL required building and other permits (for all trades), governmental fees, licenses, and inspection fees necessary and legally required at the time bids were received or negotiations concluded, which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract. Each contractor, prior to submitting a bid shall be responsible for contacting the local governing agencies for permits and fees cost information, and include all costs in the Contractor's bid. No work shall begin until all permits have been obtained and all costs and fees have been paid on the part of the Contractor and all Subcontractors. 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations. However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the attributable costs.


3.7.5 Prior to obtaining the Occupancy Permit, the Contractor will be required to submit a signed statement to the County Building Official:

Certifying that to the best of its knowledge all construction materials and workmanship for the Work are in compliance with the Contract Documents and meet or exceed all governing codes.

3.7.6 The Contractor shall pay directly all temporary utility charges, tap charges and water meter charges without reimbursement from Owner. 3.7.7 The Contractor shall be responsible for timely notification to and coordination with all utility companies regarding the provision of services to the Project. 3.8 ALLOWANCES

3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities against which the Contractor makes reasonable objection. 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents:

.1 materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected promptly by the Owner to avoid delay in the Work;

.2 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment

delivered at the site, less applicable trade discounts;

.3 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum and not in the allowances unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents;

.4 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum

shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Clause 3.8.2.2 and (2) changes in Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2.3.

3.8.3 When performing Work under allowances, Contractor shall solicit and receive not less than three written proposals and shall provide the Work as directed by the Architect, upon Owner’s written approval, no the basis of the best value to the District.


3.9 SUPERINTENDENCE 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a qualified, competent full time superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance daily at the Project site at all times during the progress of the Work until Final Completion. The superintendent shall not be responsible for performing any of the physical Work, but shall be responsible for managing others in the performance of that Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor and all communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communication shall be so confirmed on written request in each case. The superintendent shall be satisfactory to the Owner and shall not be changed without written consent of the Owner. Should the Contractor's superintendent become unsatisfactory to the Owner and the Owner notify the Contractor in writing of his objection and request removal of said superintendent, the Contractor shall remove said superintendent immediately and provide suitable replacement. Any personnel of the Contractor who are rejected by the Owner in writing shall not be returned to the project site without prior written approval of the Owner. 3.9.2 The Contractor shall provide supervisory personnel (minimum of one) at the project site at all times, who speak fluent English and the language(s) of the workers. Contractor shall provide an adequate staff for the proper coordination and expedition of the Work at all times. Owner shall have the right to require Contractor to dismiss from the Work any employee or employees that Owner may deem incompetent, careless, insubordinate, or in violation of any provisions in these Contract Documents. This provision is applicable to subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and their employees. 3.9.3 The Superintendent employed by the Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years commercial experience as the primary Superintendent on projects of similar size and complexity as the Work. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner and Architect a resume and other supporting documentation showing that the proposed Superintendent is competent and has the minimum work experience required to execute the Work. The Owner reserves the right to request additional supporting documentation regarding the proposed Superintendent's qualifications and to require the Contractor to propose an alternate Superintendent who better meets the requirements contained in this Article, as may reasonably be determined by the Owner. 3.9.4 The Contractor shall employ a Project Manager to be assigned to the Work. The Project Manager employed by the Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years commercial experience as Project Manager on projects of similar size and complexity as the Work. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner and Architect a resume and other supporting documentation showing that the proposed Project Manager is competent and has the minimum work experience required to execute the Work. The Owner reserves the right to request additional supporting documentation regarding the proposed Project Manager's qualifications and to require the Contractor to propose an alternate Project Manager who better meets the requirements contained in this Article, as may reasonably


be determined by the Owner. The Contractor shall notify the Architect and Owner in writing of any proposed replacement of the Project Manager. The Contractor shall not replace a competent Project Manager without prior written approval from the Owner. The requirements contained in this Article shall apply to any proposed replacement Project Manager, whether the proposed tenure is to be temporary or permanent. The Project Manager shall not act as the Superintendent or as a replacement for the Superintendent without written approval from the Owner. 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner and Architect's approval a Contractor's critical path construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall conform to and shall not exceed time limits required under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the Contract Documents, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Owner's approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. 3.10.3 The Contractor shall conform to the most recent schedules. 3.10.4 The Contractor shall hold weekly progress meetings at the Project Site, or at such other time and frequency as are acceptable to the Owner. Progress of the work shall be reported at said meetings with reference to Contractor’s construction schedule. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect with each application for payment a copy of the progress schedule showing all modifications required, and shall take whatever corrective action is necessary to assure that the project completion schedule is met at no additional cost to Owner, except as herein allowed. In the event that Contractor shall fall behind schedule at any time, Contractor shall develop and deliver a recovery schedule and a program describing the additional manpower, overtime, material expediting, resequencing or the Work and other steps Contractor shall take to meet the requirement of the Contract. Contractor shall not be entitled to compensation from the Owner or any increase in the Contract Sum for the recovery schedule efforts. No approval or consent by the Owner of any plan for resequencing or acceleration of the Work submitted by Contractor shall constitute a waiver by Owner of any damages, including liquidated damages, or losses which Owner may suffer by reason of such resequencing or the failure of Contractor to meet the Substantial Completion Date or the Final Completion Date. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the


Drawings, Specifications, addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record changes and selections made during construction, and in addition approved Shop Drawings, field test records, inspection certificates and records, manufacturers’ certificates, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and the Owner at all times and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work, and before Application for Final Payment. 3.11.2 Prior to installation, Contractor shall furnish or cause a subcontractor to furnish, for the Owner’s and Architect’s written approval, a physical sample of each specified item, product, fixture or devise which is visible by the general public and/or attached to an architecturally-finished surface. Samples shall be suitable labeled, adequately protected and properly stored at the site. Samples which are approved and undamaged will be considered to be suitable for incorporation into the Work. 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. The Contractor represents that all shop drawings shall be prepared by persons or entities possessing expertise and experience in the trade for which the shop drawings are prepared, and if required by the Architect or applicable law, by a licensed engineer. 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required the way the Contractor proposes to conform to the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.2.7. 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review, approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. Submittals made by the Contractor that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned without action. At least seven copies of all such Drawings, Data or Samples shall be required.


3.12.6 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the Architect has approved the respective submittal. Such Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. 3.12.7 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 3.12.8 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Owner and Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and the Owner and Architect have given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof. 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. Unless such written notice has been given, the Architect's approval of a resubmitted Shop Drawing, Product Data, Sample, or similar submittal shall not constitute approval of any changes not requested on the prior submittal. 3.12.10 Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. 3.12.11 When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifications. 3.12.12 The Contractor shall submit complete drawings, data and samples to the Architect at least fifteen (15) days prior to the date the Contractor needs the reviewed submittals and samples returned. 3.13 USE OF SITE 3.13.1 The right of possession of the premises and the improvements made thereon by the Contractor shall remain at all times in the Owner. The Contractor's right to entry and use thereof arises solely from the permission granted by the Owner under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall confine the Contractor's apparatus, the storage of materials and the operations of the Contractor's workmen to limits indicated by law,


ordinances, the Contract Documents and permits and/or directions of the Architect or Owner and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with the Contractor's materials. The Owner shall not be liable to the Contractor, the Subcontractors, their employees or anyone else with respect to the conditions of the premises, except only for a condition caused directly and solely by the negligence of the Owner. 3.13.2 Unless otherwise indicated, the property lines shall be the limits of construction and all Work shall be confined therein including the storage of materials and equipment at the site. 3.13.3 Only materials and equipment which are to be used directly in the Work shall be brought to and stored on the Project site by the Contractor. After equipment is no longer required for the Work, it shall be promptly removed from the Project site. Protection of construction materials and equipment stored at the Project site from weather, theft, damage and all other adversity is solely the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.13.4 The Contractor and its subcontractors shall not erect any sign on the Project sit without the prior written consent of the Owner. 3.13.5 Contractor shall ensure that the Work, at all times, is performed in a manner that affords the Owner reasonable access, both vehicular and pedestrian, to the site of the Work and all adjacent areas. The Work shall be performed in such a manner that public areas adjacent to the Site of the Work shall be free from all debris, building materials and equipment likely to cause hazardous conditions. Without limitation of any other provision of the Construction Documents, Contractor shall use its best efforts to minimize any interference with the occupancy or beneficial use of any area or building adjacent to the site of the Work, or the building, in the event of partial occupancy. 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly, provided, however, that any such cutting, fitting or patching can only be performed if the cutting, fitting or patching results in Work that is in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.


3.15 CLEANING UP 3.15.1 The Contractor, on a daily basis, shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. Contractor shall provide on-site containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish from the Work and dispose of all such materials at legal disposal areas away from the site. All cleaning operations shall be scheduled so as to ensure that contaminants resulting from the cleaning process will not fall on newly-coated or newly-painted surfaces. Upon substantial completion of the work, all areas of the Project to be occupied by Owner shall be free of waste, materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. At completion of the Work the Contractor shall remove from and about the project all such items. 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. 3.15.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the Work. Prior to the Architect’s inspection of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall clean exterior and interior surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains, putty, soil, paint and foreign substances from all surfaces, including glass and painted surfaces; polish transparent and glossy surfaces; clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition; replace air filters in mechanical equipment; clean roofs, gutters and downspouts; remove obstructions and flush debris from drainage systems; clean site; sweep paved areas and rake clean other surfaces; remove trash and surplus materials from the site; clean and polish all floors; clean and polish all hardware; and repair all Work damaged during cleaning. 3.15.4 After construction is complete, Contractor shall: (1) employ skilled workers for final cleaning; (2) remove grease, mastic adhesive, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels and other foreign materials from all sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces; (3) wash and shine glazing and mirrors; (4) polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine; (5) vacuum clean carpeted and similar soft surfaces; (6) clean (damp mop with clean mop and water) resilient and hard surface floors, repeating as necessary until no visible residue remains on floors; (7) clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition; (8) clean surfaces of all equipment and remove excess lubrication; (9) clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters in ventilating systems if units were operated during construction and clean ducts, blowers and coils; (10) clean light fixtures; (11) remove waste, foreign matter and debris from roofs, gutters, area ways and drainage ways; (12) remove waste, debris and surplus materials from the site; (13) remove stains, spills and foreign substances from paved areas; and (14) broom clean exterior concrete and paved surfaces and rake clean the grounds. 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK


3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect and their designated representatives access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. The presence of the Owner, Architect or their representatives does not constitute acceptance or approval of the Work. 3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights, waive and release claims against the Owner and Architect, and shall indemnify and hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION AND COVENANT NOT TO SUE 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall waive and release claims against and shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, causes of action, suits, judgments and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (including the Work itself) including loss of use resulting there from, caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3.18. 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this Paragraph 3.18 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under insurance policies, workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 3.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph 3.18 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect, the Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them arising out of (1) defects in plans, designs, or specificatiosn prepared, approved or


used by Architect or Engineer; or (2) negligence of the Architect or Engineer in the rendition or conduct of professional duties called for or arising out of the Construction Contract and the plans, designs or specifications that are a part of the Construction Contract. 3.18.4 The provisions of Section 3.18 in their entirety shall survive the completion, termination or expiration of this Contract. 3.19 NON-DISCRIMINATION During the performance of this contract, the Contractor agrees as follows:

.1 The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, handicapped, sex or national origin, except where religion, sex or national origin is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal operation of the Contractor. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.

.2 The Contractor, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by

or on behalf of the Contractor, will state that such Contractor is an Equal Opportunity Employer.

.3 Notices, advertisements and solicitations placed in accordance with federal

law, rule or regulation shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of meeting the requirements of this section.

.4 The Contractor shall be held responsible for the inclusion of the above

requirements in every subcontract and purchase order, which exceeds $10,000. Such requirements shall be made binding upon such subcontractors and vendors.

3.20 DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees as follows: .1 The Contractor will provide a drug-free workplace for all of its employees. .2 The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to

employees and applicants for employment, a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of a controlled substance or marijuana is prohibited in the workplace and specify the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of this prohibition.


.3 The Contractor will state in all solicitations or advertisements for

employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor, that such Contractor maintains a drug-free workplace.

.4 The Contractor shall include the provisions of the foregoing paragraphs

“.1”, “.2” and “.3” of this section in every subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor.

3.21 ILLEGAL ALIENS Contractor agrees that it does not, and shall not during the performance of this Contract, knowingly employ any unauthorized aliens as defined in the federal Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986.

ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. 4.1.1.1 Such terms as ‘Architect-Engineer,’ ‘Engineer,’ and ‘A-E’ are used in these documents to identify the Architect and its consultants and/or representatives and shall have the force of the term ‘Architect’ in the documents. 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. 4.1.3 In case of termination of employment of the Architect, the Owner shall appoint an architect whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former architect. 4.1.4 Except as expressly provided herein, the Contractor shall not be relieved of Contractor’s obligations to perform the Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents by the duties, responsibilities or activities of the Architect. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT


4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, (1) during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, during the correction period described in Paragraph 12.2. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine in general if the Work is being performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. On the basis of on-site observations as an architect, the Architect will keep the Owner informed of progress of the Work, and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. 4.2.3 The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's responsibility as provided in Paragraph 3.3. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or of any other persons performing portions of the Work. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for compensation paid to the Architect for additional site visits made necessary by the fault, neglect or request of the Contractor. 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. The Contractor shall communicate with the Owner through the Architect and the Owner's Construction Program Manager regarding such matters as the parties from time to time deem appropriate. However, Owner reserves the right to communicate directly with the Contractor. It is the intent of this provision that at all times both the Architect and the Owner shall be fully informed as to the progress of the Work, and the Architect, Construction Program Manager, and the Owner shall be kept fully advised of all communications. Nothing herein shall diminish the Architect's responsibility and authority to make judgments and decisions called for herein. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.


4.2.6 The Architect shall have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect shall have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect or the Owner to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons performing portions of the Work. 4.2.7 The Architect to the extent it deems necessary will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, for the purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents and all applicable laws, statutes, codes and requirements applicable to Architect’s design services. The Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under the Contract Documents. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. If any submittal does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, then Architect shall require Contractor to come into compliance. The Architect shall promptly report in writing to the Contractor and Owner any errors, inconsistencies and omissions discovery by the Architect in the Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4. A properly prepared request for a change in the Work by the Contractor shall be accompanied by sufficient supporting data and information to permit the Architect to make a reasonable determination without extensive investigation or preparation of additional drawings or specifications. The Architect is not authorized to approve changes involving major systems such as: Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning; roof; foundation; outward appearance; color schemes; floor plans; building materials; draining or mechanical equipment without Owner’s prior written consent. 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of Final Completion, will receive and forward to the Owner for the Owner's review and records written warranties and related documents required by the


Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and make recommendations concerning performance under and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed upon. The Architect may, as the Architect judges desirable, issue additional drawings or instructions indicating in greater detail the construction or design of the various parts of the Work; such drawings or instructions may be effected by field order or other notice to the Contractor, and provided such drawings or instructions are reasonably consistent with the previously existing Contract Documents, the Work shall be executed in accordance with such additional drawings or instructions without additional cost or extension of the contract time. If the Contractor claims additional cost or time on account of such additional drawings or instructions, the Contractor shall give the notice provided in subparagraph 4.3.7. 4.2.12 Interpretations or recommendations of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations or recommendations, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor. 4.2.13 The Owner’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect shall be final. 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by the Contractor seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. Claims must be made by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the Contractor. 4.3.1.1 The Owner will consider contractual claims in accordance with the "Spotsylvania County School Board Procedure For Resolution of Contractual Disputes.” The procedures and time limits for claims set forth below in paragraphs 4.3.2 through 4.3.9 must be followed initially, and as a prerequisite to, filing any claim pursuant to the Spotsylvania County School Board Procedure for Resolution of Contractual Claims. 4.3.1.2 If the Architect provides services in connection with a legal proceeding, except


when the Architect is a party thereto and such services relate to its own defenses, then the cost of such services shall be paid for by the party whose act or omission was a proximate cause of the problem that led to the requirement to provide such services. 4.3.2 Decision of Architect. Claims of the Contractor, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect, shall be referred initially to the Architect for action as provided in Paragraph 4.4. A decision by the Architect, as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.4 shall be required as a condition precedent to litigation of a Claim of the Contractor against the Owner as to all such matters arising prior to the date final payment is due, regardless of (1) whether such matters relate to execution and progress of the Work or (2) the extent to which the Work has been completed. The decision by the Architect in response to a Claim shall not be a condition precedent to litigation in the event (1) the position of Architect is vacant, (2) the Architect has failed to render a decision within agreed time limits despite it having received sufficient evidence from Contractor, (3) the Architect has failed to take action required under Subparagraph 4.4.4 within 30 days after the Claim is made, or (4) 45 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect. 4.3.3 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by the Contractor must be made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be made by written notice. Any change or addition to a previously made claim shall be made by timely written notice in accordance with this subparagraph 4.3.3. 4.3.4 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim, unless otherwise agreed in writing, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.3.5 Waiver of Claims: Final Payment. The making of final payment shall not constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner against the Contractor.

Any Claim of the Owner against the Contractor shall be deemed to have accrued upon discovery by the Owner of the condition or breach upon which such Claim is based, for the purpose of any applicable statute of limitation.

4.3.6 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. Should conditions encountered below the surface of the ground require that footings, foundations or other parts of the building be raised, lowered or changed, or if additional depth of excavation below the levels shown on the Drawings is required in order to provide proper bearing for the building, any change in the amount of excavation, dewatering, sheeting, protection, rock excavation, backfill, concrete or other structural work, or any other work permanently incorporated in the building shall be considered a change in the Work, and the Contract Sum shall be adjusted as provided in this Article, provided that the Work has been ordered in writing as provided in 7.1.1. There shall be no adjustment to the Contract Sum on account of other


costs resulting from subsoil or water conditions including, without limitations, costs on account of delay, administration, operations, temporary construction, cave-in or collapse of excavations, or pumping. 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor claims that any acts or omissions of the Owner or the Architect, including any instructions or orders, whether oral, written, by Drawings, or otherwise, involve extra cost or time, and the Contractor has not received a written acknowledgement by the Owner or Architect that extra payment will be made or time extended on account thereof, the Contractor shall promptly so notify the Architect in writing of such Claim and shall not proceed with the Work relating to such Claim until the Contractor has received a Change Order, Construction Change Directive or further written order to proceed in accordance with Paragraph 4.4.4 except, as provided in Paragraph 10.3, in the case of an emergency affecting life or property. No Claim by the Contractor on account of such acts, omissions, instructions or orders shall be valid unless the Contractor has so notified the Architect, before proceeding, and has received the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or further written order to proceed. 4.3.8 Claims for Additional Time. 4.3.8.1 If the Contractor wishes to make claim for an increase in the Contract time, the Contractor shall give the Architect written notice thereof within seven (7) days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such claim. The Contractor shall have the burden of demonstrating the effect of the claimed delay on the Contract Time, and shall furnish the Architect with such documentation relating thereto as the Architect may reasonably require. 4.3.8.2 Any claim for extension of time based on delays caused by abnormal weather shall be substantiated by the following:

a. Record of "normal weather conditions" established from historical weather data determined from climatological data sheets obtained from (U.S. Department of Commerce) National Weather Service Station for the locality closest to the project site for a five-year period preceding the date of the Contract.

b. Weather data from National Weather Service for the time period cited in the

claim for extension.

c. Copy of Superintendent's daily report for time period cited in the claim for extension.

d. Copy of the Contractor's construction schedule indicating critical major

sequences of work.

e. Documentation by the Contractor that abnormal weather conditions actually


caused delay in project completion. Precipitation level must be more than a "trace" for consideration as a basis of delay.

4.3.8.3 The determination of the allowability of a claim for an increase in the Contract Time shall be made in accordance with the provisions of subparagraphs 4.3.8.4 through 4.3.8.9. 4.3.8.4 The Contractor agrees that the Contract Time will not be extended due to normal inclement weather. For a time extension to be granted for abnormal inclement weather: (1) such weather must, in the opinion of the Architect, actually have an adverse effect upon the progress of the Contractor's Work which is of a critical nature; and (2) in the opinion of the Architect, the adverse effect must not be due to any fault or negligence of the Contractor and could not have been avoided through proper planning, coordination and implementation of adequate weather protection necessary to allow the Work to be continued without adverse effect upon labor production. The Contractor agrees that the fact abnormal inclement weather may occur does not, of itself, justify any time extension hereunder. 4.3.8.5 The Contractor agrees that it shall not be entitled to a time extension for normal inclement weather which can be expected at the Project locale due to precipitation or temperature, based upon actual data from the U. S. Department of Commerce, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) for the locale of the Project. The Contractor acknowledges and warrants that in making its proposal or bid and Construction Schedule for the Work, it gave due care and consideration to this expected number of calendar days of inclement weather for the locale of the Project and allowed therefore as well as the impact of inclement weather on subsequent work. During the time of performance, should the expected number of calendar days of inclement weather for the locale of the Project be less than originally anticipated by the Contractor and the Owner, at the time of contracting, those days not so affected by inclement weather shall be considered float time in the Construction Schedule. 4.3.8.6 The Contractor agrees that the measure of abnormal inclement weather due to precipitation or temperature during the period covered by this Contract shall be the number of days in excess of those shown in the weather data referenced in subparagraph 4.3.8.5 hereof, in which precipitation exceeds .10 inch (or in the case of snow or ice pellets, 1 inch or more), or in which the highest temperature was 32 degrees Fahrenheit or below or the lowest temperature was 95 degrees Fahrenheit or above. 4.3.8.7 No extension of time will be made for abnormal inclement weather after the principal portions of the Work are enclosed except for site work which critically affects the Contract Time. For the purpose of this Paragraph 4.3.8, the term "enclosed" is defined to mean when the Work is sufficiently closed in (exterior walls up and roof in place) so as to permit any structure, or major portion thereof which is part of the Work, to be adequately heated so as to allow the various trades to perform their work.


4.3.8.8 If the total calendar days lost due to inclement weather, from the time written notice to proceed is given until the Work is enclosed, exceeds the total number of days to be expected to be lost for the same time period, a time extension, if granted, shall only be the number of calendar days needed to equal the excess number of calendar days lost to such abnormal inclement weather. 4.3.8.9 Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract, the Contractor agrees that its right to receive an extension of time pursuant to the provisions of this Paragraph 4.3.8 shall be the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy with regard to any delays or interference with the Contractor's schedule for completion of the Work, and the Contractor hereby waives any and all claims for monetary damages arising out of or related to any such delay or interference, including, but not limited to, claims for delay damages, interference damages, impact damages, acceleration damages, and any other form of time-related damages. 4.3.9 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. 4.3.10 If the Architect is required to provide contingent additional services as provided in the Agreement between the Owner and Architect, specifically relating to additional compensation for the Architect for evaluating an excessive number of claims submitted by the Contractor, then such services shall be paid for by the Contractor through the Owner, unless the contingent additional services result from negligence or omission by the Architect. 4.4 REVIEW OF CLAIMS BY ARCHITECT 4.4.1 The Architect will review Claims and take one or more of the following preliminary actions within ten days of receipt of a Claim: (1) request additional supporting data from the Contractor, (2) submit a schedule to the parties indicating when the Architect expects to take action, (3) reject the Claim in whole or in part, stating reasons for rejection, (4) recommend approval of the Claim by the Contractor to the Owner; (5) suggest a compromise; or (6) advise the parties the Architect is unable to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim, or if the Architect and the Owner conclude that it would be inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim. The Architect may also, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. 4.4.2 If a Claim has been resolved, the Architect will prepare or obtain appropriate documentation.


4.4.3 If a Claim has not been resolved, the Contractor making the Claim shall, within ten days after the Architect's preliminary response, take one or more of the following actions: (1) submit additional supporting data requested by the Architect, (2) modify the initial Claim or (3) notify the Architect that the initial Claim stands. 4.4.4 If a Claim has not been resolved after consideration of the foregoing and of further evidence presented by the parties or requested by the Architect, the Architect will notify the parties in writing of the Architect's recommendation relative to the Claim, including any recommended change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both, within seven days unless such time is extended by agreement of the Owner and Contractor. After receiving the recommendation of the Architect, the Owner shall make its decision in writing after considering the recommendation of the Architect, which decision shall be final and binding on the Contractor but subject to the Spotsylvania County School Board Procedure for Resolution of Contractual Disputes. At the time of any such written decision by the Owner, the Architect may issue to the Contractor a written order to proceed. Upon receiving a written order to proceed, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with the performance of the Work relating to the claim. If there is a surety and there appears to be a possibility of a Contractor's default, the Architect may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITIONS 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.1 The Contractor shall furnish in writing to the Owner and the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to


a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work (“list of proposed subcontractors”) within ten (10) working days after award of the Contract (except those proposed subcontractors that are required to be identified and have already been identified by Contractor on the Bid Form). The Architect will promptly, but no later than seven (7) days after receipt of the information, reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply within seven (7) days after receipt of the information shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. No payments shall be made to the Contractor prior to receipt by the Owner and the Architect of the “list of proposed contractors.” 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. The Contract Sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. However, no increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such change. 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contract that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.


5.3.2 Neither the Owner nor the Architect shall be obligated to pay or to insure the payment of any monies to subcontractors due to any non-payment to the Contractor or non-payment of subcontractors by the Contractor. 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that:

.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor in writing; and

.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights and obligations of the surety, if any,

obligated under bond relating to the Contract; and .3 the subcontractor provides bonds as required by law of prime contractors and

by Owner. 5.4.2 Owner shall only be responsible for compensating subcontractors for Work performed or materials furnished from and after the date on which the Owner gives written notice of its acceptance of the subcontract agreement. Owner shall not be respojnjsible for any Work performed or materials furnished by subcontractors prior to the date of Owner’s written notice of acceptance. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. The Owner further reserves the right to perform other non-Project-related construction work, maintenance and repair work, and school program operations at the site and near the site during the time period of the Work. 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor


Agreement. 6.1.3 Contractor shall cooperate with other separate contractors to ensure that the Work remains on schedule. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule and Contract Sum deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. 6.2 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.1 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to assist, review and coordinate the scheduling of work performed by any of the Owner’s separate contractors. The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable site access and opportunity for introduction, storage or staging of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report in writing to the Architect and Owner apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results, and shall promptly report in writing to the Architect and Owner if Owner’s separate contractors fail in any way to timely perform their services or negatively impact Contractor’s schedule or ability to perform the Work. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgement that the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work and is performed in a timely manner, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. 6.2.3 Costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be borne by the party responsible therefor. 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5 6.2.5 Claims and other disputes and matters in question between the Contractor and a

separate contractor shall be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 4.3 provided the separate contractor has reciprocal obligations.

6.2.6 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the contractor in Paragraph 3.14.


6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish as described in Paragraph 3.15, the Owner may clean up and allocate the cost among those responsible as the Architect determines to be just. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 CHANGES 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. A properly prepared written request for a change in the Work by Contractor shall be accompanied by sufficient supporting data and information to permit the Architect to make a recommendation to Owner. 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor. An order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect. 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. Contractor shall not make any claim for an adjustment of time or Contract Sum due to: a change in the materials used; a change in the specified manner of constructing and/or installing the Work; or additional labor, services, or materials beyond that actually required by the terms of the Contract Documents, unless made pursuant to a written order or directive from Owner authorizing Contractor to proceed with a Change in the Work. No claim for an adjustment of time or Contract Sum shall be valid unless so ordered or directed.


7.1.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 7.1.4.1 All unit prices stated in the Contract Documents shall include allowances for overhead and profit. 7.1.5 All proposals for a change involving an increase or decrease in the amount of the Contract shall be submitted by the Contractor in a completely itemized breakdown form, with specific information on all items listed in Paragraph 7.1.6. 7.1.6 If changes in the Work (initiated by Proposed Change Order (PCO) issued by the Architect or Contractor) provide for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment (increase or decrease) shall be based on the following, unless noted otherwise:

.1 Material quantities and unit prices (separated into trades; include sales tax).

.2 Labor costs (raw cost; separated into labor hours and cost).

.3 Labor burden, applied to labor only, including but not limited to, workers’ compensation and public liability, social security tax, old age and unemployment insurance, union welfare fund and fringe benefits. Contractor shall be required to substantiate the labor burden percentage applied to any change in contract amount. Labor burden percentage shall not exceed 30% in any case.

.4 Construction equipment cost.

.5 Overhead and profit combined (on claims for net increase only), as defined in Subparagraph 7.3.10.

.6 Cost of Premiums/Bonds (for General Contractor only) based on net increase or decrease only. Evidence of additional premium/bond costs shall be submitted with claim.

7.1.7 On proposals involving both increases and decreases in the amount of the Contract, commission will be allowed on the net increase only. 7.1.8 When a change in the Work could affect the cost of the Work, the Architect may issue a written Proposed Change Order to the Contractor. Contractor shall respond promptly to any Proposed Change Order, and in no event later than fourteen (14) days after receipt of the Request, unless upon agreement between the Contractor and Architect. Any delays, damages, cost escalations, or revisions in the scope of the work necessary to implement the contemplated change, resulting from the failure of the Contractor to respond within fourteen (14) days to the Architect's Proposed Change Order, shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS


7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following:

.1 a change in the Work;

.2 the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any; and

.3 the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any. 7.2.2 Except as provided in Subparagraphs 7.1.4, 7.1.4.1, 7.1.5, and 7.1.6, methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7.3.3. 7.2.3 All Change Order proposed pricing shall be valid for a minimum of thirty (30) days. 7.2.4 Contractor agrees that acceptance of a Change Order by the Contractor constitutes full accord and satisfaction from any and all Claims, whether direct or indirect, arising from the subject matter of the Change Order. 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods:

.1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation;

.2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;

.3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually

acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or

.4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.1.6.


7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. Failure of the Contractor to provide the written notice required herein shall result in a waiver of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time. 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an allowance for overhead and profit in accordance with the schedule set forth in Subparagraph 7.3.10 below. In such case, and also under Subparagraph 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Subparagraph 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following:

.1 actual costs of labor, including social security, unemployment insurance, and workers' compensation insurance;

.2 actual costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of

transportation used in performing the Change in the Work; and

.3 actual rental costs of machinery and equipment rented from third parties, exclusive of hand tools,; and

.4 actual costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance and permit fees; and

.5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable

to the change.

The Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect or Owner may prescribe, an itemized accounting of the items listed above, together with appropriate supporting documentation. 7.3.7 Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, amounts not in dispute may be included in Applications for Payment. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor


to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change. 7.3.8 If the Owner and Contractor do not agree with the adjustment in Contract Time or the method for determining it, the adjustment or the method shall be referred to the Architect for determination. 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. 7.3.10 In Subparagraphs 7.1.4.1, 7.1.5, 7.1.6, 7.2.2 and 7.3.6, the allowance for overhead and profit combined, included in the total cost to the Owner, shall be based on the following schedule:

.1 for the Contractor, for any Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, 10 percent of the cost;

.2 for the Contractor, for Work performed by his Subcontractor, 5 percent of the amount due the Subcontractor;

.3 for each Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor involved, for any Work performed by that Contractor's own forces, 15 percent of the cost;

.4 for each Subcontractor, for Work performed by his Subcontractors, 5 percent of the amount due the Subcontractor;

.5 cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Paragraph 7.3.6.

.6 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change involving over $500.00 be approved without such itemization.

7.3.11 In Subparagraphs 7.1.6, 7.2.2 and 7.3.6, the following conditions shall apply:

.1 The cost or credit to the Owner, resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined on the basis of the actual cost to the Contractor for making the change. In order to expedite the Work, Change Orders may be written based on estimates of cost when such procedure is acceptable to the Owner and the Contractor, and on unit prices when unit prices have been agreed upon. Change Orders based on estimated costs or unit prices shall be amended to reflect actual cost when the actual costs are submitted by the Contractor to


the Architect and approved by the Owner. Procedures for submittal of estimates, actual costs, and Proposals for Change Orders shall be in accordance with the requirements specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

.2 Subcontractor's cost shall be limited to the cost of materials, rental value of

tools and equipment (not to include hand tools or other tools and equipment owned and used by subcontractor on a frequent basis), the cost of labor (including Social Security, Union Welfare fund, unemployment, and Workers' Compensation Insurance). Labor cost may include a pro rata share of Superintendent's time only when an extension of Contract Time is granted by the change. Labor cost may include bond premiums only if bond premiums change due to the change in the Work. The allowance for overhead and profit combined shall be as cited in Paragraph 7.3.10.

.3 Subcontractor's overhead shall include the following: Bond premiums

(unless the change in the Work causes an increase or decrease), supervision, superintendence, wages of time keepers, watchmen, and clerks, small tools, incidentals, general office expense, and all other expenses not included in "Cost" as set forth in 7.3.11.2 above.

.4 The total fee paid to the Contractor for handling the Change Order includes

general office expense, overhead, profit, insurance premium, and all incidental field work relating to the change, including field office coordination and supervision.

.5 If the net value of the change results in a credit from the subcontractor, the

credit given shall be the net cost without overhead or profit. The cost as used herein shall include all items of labor, materials, and equipment.

7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.4.1 With prior written notice to the Owner’s representative, the Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. Minor changes in the Work shall not include changes that involve the outward appearance of the structure, color schemes, floor plans, building materials, landscaping or mechanical equipment. 7.4.2 Allowance balances may be used to fund changes in the Work. The Contractor will not be allowed an overhead, profit or fee mark-up when changes in the Work are funded by one of the Allowances.


ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Final Completion of the Work. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the first business day after Contractor’s written Notice to Proceed. The Notice to Proceed shall not be issued by the Architect until the Agreement has been signed by the Contractor, approve by the School Board and signed by the Owner’s authorized representative, and the Owner and Architect have received, and approved as to form, all requirement payment and performance bonds and insurance verifications, in compliance with Article 11. . The date shall not be postponed by the failure to act of the Contractor or of persons or entities for whom the Contractor is responsible. 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9.8. As to all acts or failure to act occurring prior to the relevant Date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such Date of Substantial Completion; as to all acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant Date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment. The date of Final Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with paragraph 9.10. Unless otherwise agreed in writing by Owner, Contractor agrees that Final Completion shall occur not more than 30 days after the date of Substantial Completion. 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Contractor stipulates that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance.


8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial and Final Completion within the Contract Time. 8.2.4 Whenever it becomes apparent to the Architect and Owner, through review of the submitted progress schedules or through visual observations of the progress of construction, that the Contract completion dates may not be met, the Contractor shall be required to take as many of the following actions, at no additional cost to the Owner, as may be necessary.

.1 Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as required to substantially eliminate, in the judgment of the Architect, and the Owner's project representative, the uncompleted backlog of work.

.2 Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per day, days per

week, amount of construction equipment, or any combination of the above sufficiently to substantially eliminate, in the judgment of the Architect and Owner's project representative, the uncompleted backlog of work.

8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by governmental actions, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay authorized in writing by the Owner, or by other causes which the Architect and Owner determine may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect and Owner may determine. Notwithstanding any other provisions to the contrary, any delay occasioned by the Contractor, Subcontractors, or Sub-subcontractors or the employees or agents of same, shall not warrant an extension of the contract time. 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Paragraph 4.3. 8.3.3 The Contractor's remedies for delay as described above shall be limited to an extension of the Contract time.


ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Within two weeks after award of this Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect or Owner may require, and shall be revised if later found by the Architect or Owner to be inaccurate. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect or Owner, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 At the time or times established in the Agreement, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. The format and number of copies of such Applications for Payment shall be as directed by the Architect. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage. 9.3.1.1 Such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives but not yet included in Change Orders. 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment of amounts that have not yet been invoiced by a Subcontractor or that the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier because of a dispute or other reason. 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect


the Owner's interest, and shall include applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. 9.3.2.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Architect a completed Application for Payment on AIA Document G702, Application and Certificate for Payment, and must include the Contractor's notarized signature. The Schedule of Values as specified in 9.2.1 shall be attached thereto with every column and total completed. The Contractor shall submit such supporting data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require. Until Final Completion, the Owner shall pay 95% of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. 9.3.2.2 Contractor shall provide invoices, package slips or other form of supporting data for materials stored on-site claimed on the progress payment, unless it can be verified through on-site observations. 9.3.3 Applications for Payment shall be for not more than ninety-five percent (95%) of the cost of labor and material actually incorporated into the project during the previous month, less previous payments. The five percent (5%) retainage shall be retained in full until the final payment application at the completion of ALL work, including "punch list" items. The final payment application shall also include a completed affidavit in accordance with 9.10.2. 9.3.4 Applications for Payment must be received by the Architect not later than two (2) weeks prior to Second Monday of the month. A Certificate for Payment due will be submitted to the Owner as soon as the Application can be checked and certified by the Architect. Owner will make payment promptly, and not later than 30 days after receipt of Architect's certification. 9.3.5 By signing each Application for Payment, the Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment: (1) all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work; (2) the information presented in the Application for Payment is true, correct, accurate and complete; (3) that the Contractor has made the necessary detailed examinations, audits and arithmetic verifications; (4) that the work has been completed to the extent represented in the Application for Payment; (5) that the materials and supplies indentified in the Application for Payment have been purchased, paid for and received; (6) that the subcontractors have been paid as identified in the Application for Payment or that Contractor has been invoiced for same; (7) that it has made the necessary on-site inspections to confirm the accuracy of the Application for Payment; and (8) that all due and payable bills with respect to the Work have been paid to date or are


included in the amount requested in the current application. 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's observations at the site and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 9.4.3 The issuance of a Certificate of Payment shall constitute a recommendation to the Owner regarding the amount to be paid. This recommendation is not binding on the Owner if Owner knows of other reasons under the Contract Documents why payment should be withheld. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1 The Architect may decide not to certify payment and may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also decide not to certify payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of:


.1 defective Work not remedied;

.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims;

.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for

labor, materials or equipment;

.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

.5 damage to the Owner or another contractor;

.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract

Time.

.7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents;

.8 failure of mechanical trade or electrical trade subcontractors to comply with

mandatory requirements for maintaining record drawings. The Contractor shall check record drawings each month. Written confirmation that the record drawings are current will be required by the Architect before approval of the Contractor's monthly payment requisition; or

.9 failure to submit a written plan indicating action by the Contractor to regain

the time schedule for completion of Work within the Contract time. 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. 9.5.3 Notwithstanding any provision contained in this Article, if the Work has not attained Substantial Completion or Final Completion by the required dates, subject to extensions of time allowed under these Conditions, then Architect may withhold any further Certificate for Payment to Contractor to the extent necessary to preserve sufficient funds to complete construction of the Project and to cover liquidated damages. The Owner shall not be deemed in default by reasons of withholding payment as provided for in Article 9. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment for undisputed amounts in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. Payments to the Contractor shall not be construed as releasing the Contractor or his Surety from any obligations under the Contract


Documents. 9.6.2 Contractor shall, within seven (7) days after receipt of amounts paid by Owner for work under this Contract, either (1) pay the subcontractor for the proportionate share of the total payment received from Owner attributable to the work performed by the subcontractors under the contract; or (1) notify the Owner, Architect and subcontractor, in writing, of Contractor’s intention to withhold all or a part of the subcontractor’s payment with the reason for the nonpayment. Contractor agrees to pay interest to any subcontractor on all amounts owed by the Contractor by remain unpaid after seven (7) days except for amounts properly withheld pursuant to the Contract Documents. Contractor further agrees that it shall include in any contracts with subcontractors provisions requiring payment by subcontractors to its lower-tiered subcontractors within (7) days except for amounts property withheld pursuant to applicable subcontracts between the parties, and requiring that unless otherwise provided under the terms of any subcontracts, the subcontractors pay interest on any unpaid amounts at the rate of one percent per month. Interest on payments due hereunder shall accrue at the rate of one (1) percent per month from the due date of such payments.

9.6.3 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material supplier. 9.6.4 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within ten (10) days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within ten (10) days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect and undisputed by the Owner, then the Contractor may, upon ten (10) additional days written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the undisputed amount owed has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down, delay and start-up, which shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7. 9.7.2 If the Owner provides written notice to the Contractor that (1) payment has been made; or (2) a bona fide dispute for payment exists, listing the specific reasons for nonpayment, then Contractor shall be liable for damages resulting from suspension of the Work. If a reason specified is that labor, services or materials provided by the Contractors are not provided in compliance with the Contract Documents, then the Contractor shall be provided a reasonable opportunity to cure the noncompliance or to compensate Owner for any failure to cure the noncompliance. No amount shall be added to the Contract Sum as a


result of a dispute between Owner and Contractor unless and until such dispute is resolved in Contractor’s favor. 9.7.3 If the Owner is entitled to reimbursement or payment from the Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents, then such payment shall be made promptly upon demand from the Owner. Notwithstanding anything contained in the Contract Documents to the contrary, if the Contractor fails to promptly make any payment due to Owner pursuant to the Contract, or if the Owner incurs any costs and expenses, including attorney’s fees and fees for additional services of architects or consultants, to cure any default of the Contractor or to correct defective Work, then the Owner shall have an absolute right to offset such amount against the Contract Sum and, in the Owner’s sole discretion and without waiving any other remedies, may elect either to: .1 deduct an amount equal to that which the Owner is entitled from any

payment then and thereafter due to Contractor from Owner, or .2 issue a written notice to the Contractor reducing the Contract Sum by an

amount equal to that which the Owner is entitled. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the date determined by the Architect when the Work is sufficiently complete (including completion of “punchlist” items) that the Owner can fully occupy and utilize the Work for its intended purpose, with all of the Project's parts and systems operable as required by the Contract Documents, and a Final Occupancy Permit has been obtained. To be Substantially Compete, all Project systems included in the Work have been successfully tested and are fully operational; all required governmental inspections and certifications required of the Work have been made, approved and posted; designated initial instruction of Owner’s personnel in the operation of Project systems has been completed; and all the required finishes set out in the Contract Documents are in place. The only remaining Work shall be minor in nature so that the Owner can occupy the Work for its intended purposes on that date, and the completion of the Work by the Contractor will not materially interfere with or hamper Owner’s normal school operations or intended use. Only incidental cleaning, if required beyond cleaning needed for the Owner's full use, may remain for final completion. As a further condition of a determination of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall certify that all remaining Work shall be completed within 30 days. Refer to the Project Manual and Owner’s specifications for for additional requirements for Substantial Completion. 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof designated in the Contract Documents for separate completion, is substantially complete and the premises comply with subparagraph 3.15.1, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect (1) a list of items to be completed or corrected, (2) all special warranties required by the Contract Documents, endorsed by the Contractor and in a form reasonably acceptable to the Architect and (3) the permits and certificates referred to in subparagraph 13.5.4. The failure to include any items on the list mentioned in the preceding sentence does not alter


the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect on the basis of an inspection determines that the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete and the other conditions have been met, the Architect will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the Date of Substantial Completion, shall state the responsibilities of the Owner and the Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work, and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall complete the items listed therein. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. 9.8.3 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof, the Owner shall not adjust retainage. Any payments due shall be made subject to subparagraph 9.3.3. The payment shall be as recommended by the Architect and agreed to by the Owner and less such amounts as the Architect shall determine is necessary for all incomplete Work, retainage applicable to such Work, liquidated damages and unsettled Claims. 9.8.4 Should the Architect charge the Owner for excessive numbers of inspections of the Work or a designated portion thereof to confirm it has attained Substantial Completion in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor for amounts paid to the Architect for the additional inspections. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Subparagraph 11.2.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached by decision of the Architect. 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in


order to determine and record the condition of the Work. 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon in writing, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents, nor shall it constitute evidence of Substantial Completion or Final Completion. 9.9.4 In the event the Owner takes partial occupancy or installs furnishings and equipment prior to Substantial Completion of the Project, Contractor shall obtain an endorsement to Contractor’s Builder’s Risk Policy to provide extended coverage for partial occupancy if Contractor’s Builder’s Risk Coverage required by Article 11 would not otherwise provide such coverage. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly prepare, sign and issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's observations and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in said final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. The Owner shall deduct from final Certificate of Payment any costs associated with Architect’s inspections conducted pursuant to this Section in excess of two (2). 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment, (5) Contractor’s warranties, (6) maintenance and instruction manuals, (7) record drawings and “as built” drawings and (8) if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interest or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor


may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. The “as built” drawings shall be submitted by the Contractor showing all changes made during construction, including concealed mechanical, electrical and plumbing items. 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully complete or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of claims as provided in Subparagraph 4.3.5. 9.10.4 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. Such waivers shall be in addition to the waiver described in Subparagraph 4.3.5. 9.10.5 If and to the extent that, through no fault of the Owner, Architect, or the Architect's Consultants, the Date of Substantial Completion initially established in the Contract for Construction between Owner and Contractor to fully complete all construction is exceeded/extended or if the Architect's services are required for more than sixty days after the Date of Substantial Completion, compensation to the Architect for his services required for such extended administration of the Construction Contract shall be reimbursed to the Owner by the Contractor. 9.11 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 9.11.1 The Owner requires that the Project shall be issued a Final Occupancy Permit and shall be Substantially Complete with all systems fully operational, all punch list work completed, and the Work fully acceptable by the Owner, no later than the date, or dates in case of multiple areas, indicated in the Contract Documents. The Project shall be Finally Complete no later than thirty (30) days after the date required for Substantial Completion. 9.11.2 The Contractor agrees that the Owner may retain such sum as is designated by the Contract Documents from the amount of compensation to be paid him for each calendar day after the above mentioned Substantial Completion date[s] until the following two


requirements have been met: (1) the Work has been issued a permanent and final County Occupancy Permit; and (2) the Work is Substantially Complete. 9.11.3 The Liquidated Damages amount of $1000.00 per calendar day is agreed upon as the proper measure of liquidated damage that the Owner will sustain per day by the failure of the Contractor to substantially complete the Work at the stipulated time. The Contractor and Owner agree that the exact amount of damages that would be suffered by Owner is difficult to precisely quantify and the aforementioned amount is a reasonable estimate thereof and not in the nature of a penalty. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. 10.1.2 Contractor’s employees, agents, Subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone else for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall not perform any service for Owner while under the influence of any amount of alcohol or any controlled substance, or use, possess, distribute, or sell alcoholic beverages while on Owner’s premises. No person shall use, possess, distribute or sell illicit or unprescribed controlled drugs or drug paraphernalia; misuse legitimate prescription drugs; or act in contravention of warnings on medications while performing the Work or on Owner’s premises. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:

.1 employees on the Work, school personnel, students, and other persons on Owner’s premises and other persons who may be affected thereby, including the installation of fencing between the Work site and the occupied portion of a connecting or adjacent educational facility; and

.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in

storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors; and


.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as other buildings, and their contents, fencing, trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, athletic fields, facilities and tracks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction; and

.4 any other property of the Owner, whether or not forming part of the Work,

located at the site or adjacent thereto in areas to which the Contractor has access; and

.5 all work and materials which may be caused by the effects of weather (rain,

wind, ice, freezing, and heat); and

.6 building elements and equipment when subject to damage. 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. The Contractor shall also be responsible, at the Contractor’s sole cost and expense, for all measures necessary to protect any property adjacent to the Project and improvements therein. Any damage to such property or improvements shall be promptly repaired by Contractor. Contractor shall provide reasonable full protection safeguards and provide approved all protection safety equipment for use by all exposed Contractor employees. 10.2.4 When use or storage of hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel, and shall only conduct such activities after giving reasonable advance written notice of the presence or use of such materials, equipment or methods to Owner and Architect. The storage of explosives on Owner’s property is prohibited. The use of explosive materials on Owner’s property is prohibited unless expressly approved in advance in writing by Owner and Architect. 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss to property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clause 10.2.1, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18.


10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. 10.2.8 The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good operating condition suitable and adequate fire protection equipment and services, and shall comply with all reasonable recommendations regarding fire protection made by the representatives of the fire insurance company carrying insurance on the Work or by the local fire chief or fire marshal. The area within the site limits shall be kept orderly and clean, and all combustible rubbish shall be promptly removed from the site. 10.2.9 The Contractor shall at all times protect excavations, trenches, buildings and materials, from rain water, ground water, backup or leakage of sewers, drains and other piping, and from water of any other origin and shall remove promptly any accumulation of water. The Contractor shall provide and operate all pumps, piping and other equipment necessary to this end. The Contractor shall provide all shoring, bracing, and sheathing required for safety and proper execution of the Work and shall have the same removed when Work is complete. All shoring, bracing, and sheathing shall be constructed in accordance with accepted engineering procedures and shall meet the requirements of all applicable federal, state and local regulations. 10.2.10 The Contractor shall remove snow and ice that might result in damage or delay. 10.2.11 During the progress of the Work and at all times prior to the date of Substantial Completion or occupancy of the Work by the Owner, whichever is earlier, the Contractor shall provide temporary heat, ventilation, and enclosure, adequate to permit the Work to proceed in a timely fashion, and to prevent damage to completed Work or Work in progress, or to materials stored on the premises.

The permanent heating and ventilation systems may be used for these purposes when available unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. When so used, and prior to substantial completion, Contractor shall provide new filters, clean the systems thoroughly, touch up paint, and take other measures to provide systems in the condition they would otherwise be found without such temporary use. In addition, the Contractor shall provide an extended warranty, if necessary, for the items so used so that the full warranty required by the Contract Documents is provided to the Owner.

All fuel used or electric power consumed hereunder shall be at the full expense of the Contractor.


10.2.12 The Contractor shall do all things necessary to protect the Owner’s premises and all persons from damage or injury, when all or a portion of the Work is suspended for any reason. 10.3 EMERGENCIES 10.3.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph 4.3 and Article 7. 10.3.2 If Contractor imports hazardous materials into the project site, then Contractor hereby agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, its consultants, agents and employees against any claims arising out of or relating to such importation, including but not limited to costs and expenses the owner incurs for remediation of a material or substances the contractor brings to the sight 10.4 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS CERTIFICATION The Contractor shall provide written certification that no materials used in the Work contain lead or asbestos materials in them in excess of amounts allowed by federal, state or local standards, laws, codes, rules and regulations; the Federal Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) standards; and/or the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standards, whichever is most restrictive. The Contractor shall provide this written certification as part of submittals prior to Final Completion. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall purchase and maintain or cause to be purchased and maintained such insurance as will protect the Contractor, and the Owner, from claims which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by any subcontractor, lower tier contractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them be liable.

All insurance companies writing coverage for this project shall be approved or licensed to operate within the Commonwealth of Virginia. Written certification of this requirement shall be presented to the Owner through the Architect. All insurance required


herein shall be underwritten by a company rated not less than A- in A.M. Best’s Key Rating Guide, Property-Casualty, and that permits waivers of subrogation. All insurance required herein shall name the Owner, its officers, agents and employees as an additional insured, except the Contractor’s Worker’s Compensation insurance. All insurance shall be written on an occurrence basis, if available, and shall contain a waiver of subrogation in favor of Owner on all claims arising out of the Project. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.

The Contractor shall not be allowed to commence work under the Contract until the Contractor has obtained all of the minimum amounts of insurance required under this Article 11, and such insurance has been approved by the Owner, nor shall the Contractor allow any subcontractor or lower tier contractor to commence work on any subcontract or lower tier contract until the same insurance has been obtained by the subcontractor and lower tier contractor and approved by the Owner.

The Contractor shall provide to the Owner written certification that each of the Contractor's subcontractors or lower tier contractors either have their own insurance as specified herein, or that the Contractor has included in this insurance coverage, Contractors' Protective Liability on a "blanket" basis to cover the operations of any subcontractor or lower tier contractor.

Any insurance company writing policies for this project must be acceptable to the Owner, which acceptance shall not be unreasonably withheld.

It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide the Owner with written certification of renewal of insurance in sufficient time so as to be in possession of the Owner no less than thirty (30) days prior to policy expiration date. The Contractor shall provide the Architect with a copy of said renewal certification. Allowing the insurance to expire becomes negligence on the part of the Contractor and shall be grounds to immediately stop the work by direction of the Owner. No work shall proceed until renewal insurance has been reviewed and approved by the Owner. ALL INSURANCE AND BONDS REQUIRED UNDER THIS ARTICLE 11 SHALL REMAIN IN EFFECT FOR A MINIMUM PERIOD OF ONE YEAR FROM DATE OF FINAL COMPLETION AND ALSO IN EFFECT FOR THE DURATION OF PORTIONS OF THE WORK STIPULATED AS HAVING EXTENDED WARRANTIES BEYOND THE NORMAL ONE YEAR WARRANTY.

Before starting work, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, through the Architect, duly executed certificates of all required insurance. The certificates shall also state that such insurance is in force and cannot be canceled or released except, upon thirty (30) days prior written notice to the Owner, with a copy to the Architect and Owner. All policies shall be written specifically for this project, with the name of the project on said policies. If requested by Owner, the Contractor shall furnish the Owner with true copies of each policy


required of him, his subcontractor or lower tier contractors. 11.1.1 Workers’ Compensation and Employer's Liability: Insurance shall be maintained by the Contractor, to cover all the Contractor's employees employed at, or in connection with, the work to be performed, all in accordance with the laws of the Commonwealth of Virginia. The Contractor shall carry Workers’ Compensation Insurance as required under Virginia law. 11.1.2 Comprehensive General Liability Insurance: The Contractor shall maintain comprehensive general liability including, but not limited to:

Premises and Operations: including, but not limited to, bodily injury, including death at any time resulting there from, to any person, or property damage resulting from execution of the Work provided for in this Contract, or due to or arising in any manner from, any act or any omission or negligence of the Contractor and any subcontractor, their respective employers, or agents.

Completed Operation and Products: including, but not limited to, bodily injury including death at any time resulting there from, to any person, or property damage because of goods, products, materials or equipment used or installed under this Contract, or because of completed operations, which may become evident within two (2) years after acceptance of the building, including damage to the building or its contents.

Contractual: each and every policy for liability insurance carried by each contractor, subcontractor or lower tier contractor, as required by this Article 11 shall specifically include contractual liability (hold harmless clause) coverage with respect to Article 3.18 of these General Conditions.

Minimum Limits of Liability shall be:

1. Bodily Injury $3,000,000 -- CSL Each Occurrence $3,000,000 -- CSL Aggregate,

2. Property Damage $3,000,000 – Each Occurrance The Employee Exclusion will be deleted from the Personal Injury Liability coverages.

3. Products and Completed Operations $3,000,000 Aggregate (to be maintained for a period of two years after Final Payment; Contractor shall continue to provide evidence of such coverage to Owner on an annual basis during this period.)


11.1.3 Comprehensive Automobile Liability: The Contractor shall maintain comprehensive automobile liability (including all automotive equipment owned, operated, rented, or leased). Minimum Limits of Liability shall be:

1. Bodily Injury and Property Damage $3,000,000 CSL Each Accident

2. Uninsured Motorist Coverages $1,000,000 -- Each Claim

11.1.4 "X.C.U.": Insurance required under 11.1.2 of this Article 11, shall specifically include property damage caused by conditions otherwise subject to exclusions "X, C, U" (explosion, collapse, or underground damage) as defined by the National Bureau of Casualty Underwriters. 11.1.5 Additional Insurance: In addition to the insurance referred to in Paragraphs 11.1.2 through 11.1.4, the Contractor shall also procure and keep in effect until completion of the Work, the following kinds of insurance with the following minimum limits:

1. Excess liability (umbrella coverage) in excess of and applicable to the coverage in 11.1.2, 11.1.3, and 11.1.4 above, in an amount of not less than $5,000,000 each occurrence.

2. Aircraft Insurance: Any contractor using or contemplating use of any type of

aircraft either owned, hired, leased, rented or borrowed, in connection with the Work in any manner whatsoever, shall, prior to use of such aircraft, provide the Owner with proof of adequate insurance coverage for liability and property damage. The amount and type of coverage shall be acceptable to the Owner. If the amount and type of coverage normally carried by the Contractor is not acceptable to the Owner, the Contractor shall obtain additional coverage as needed to comply with the Owner's requirements. The Contractor shall submit proof of coverage to the Owner through the Architect. If aircraft is not intended for use on this project, a statement shall be provided on an attachment to the Certificate of Insurance to the effect that "no aircraft is intended for use and said insurance for same is not required."

3. Also, the Contractor's owned, leased, hired and/or borrowed equipment,

including supplies, materials, and tools, not forming a part of or incorporated into the completed work, is not covered by the Owner's insurance. Therefore, the Contractor shall determine whether or not it desires coverage for same, and if so, shall provide coverage at its own expense. The Contractor, lender, or other type of owner of said mentioned equipment, shall not have claim against the Owner of this project, for any reason whatsoever, which is used on this project.


11.1.6 The Contractor shall either (1) provide Owner's Protective Liability insurance with the following minimum limits in favor of the Owner:

1. Bodily Injury and Property Damage: $3,000,000 -- CSL Each Occurrence $3,000,000 -- CSL Aggregate

or (2) provide a certificate of insurance for this project which identifies the Owner as an additional insured under the Contractor's policy. 11.1.7 The Contractor’s failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor that entitles the Owner to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the Owner. 11.2 PROPERTY INSURANCE / BUILDER’S RISK INSURANCE 11.2.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the Commonwealth of Virginia, property insurance in the amount of the initial Contract Sum as well as subsequent modifications thereto for the entire Work at the site on a replacement cost basis without voluntary deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Paragraph 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Paragraph 11.3 to be covered, whichever is earlier. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work. 11.2.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an all-risk policy form and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false work, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. Coverage for other perils shall not be required unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 11.2.1.2 If the property insurance requires minimum deductibles and such deductibles are identified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. 11.2.1.3 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, this property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the


value established in the approval, and also portions of the Work in transit. 11.2.2 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.2 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. 11.2.3 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 11.2.4 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers. 11.2.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies. 11.3 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.3.1 The Contractor shall furnish bonds fully covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract, or as required by law. The surety on said bonds shall be a company approved by the Owner, and must have a minimum of an A – rating by A.M. Best.


11.3.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. 11.3.3 The Contractor shall deliver copies of the required bonds to the Owner and Architect not later than five business days after execution of the Contract by Owner. All bonds will be reviewed by the Architect for compliance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's or Owner’s request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Architect or Owner, be uncovered for the Architect's observation and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect or Owner has not specifically requested to observe prior to its being covered, the Architect or Owner may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. 12.1.2.1 The above shall also apply to surveys and tests as well as examinations of completed work. In any case, costs shall include cost of professional advice and services necessary to complete examinations, surveys and tests.

12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK

12.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or Owner or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect's and other consultant’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, any cost, loss, or damages to the Owner resulting from such failure or defect, including attorney’s fees, and all costs associated with having to re-bid any portion of the project which Contractor fails to correct.


12.2.1.1 If seasonal limitations prevent performance of required tests for heating or air conditioning equipment or other equipment as of the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, the warranty period for such systems shall begin after the tests have been successfully performed. The use of permanent equipment for temporary heat or other construction activities shall in no way affect warranty period for equipment. Warranty period shall commence when above mentioned tests have been successfully performed.” 12.2.1.2 The Owner may make emergency repairs to the Work or take such other measures necessary under the circumstances, if the Contractor does not promptly respond to a notice of defect or nonconforming Work. Contractor shall be responsible to Owner for this cost if the reason for the repairs is attributable to the Contractor. If payments then or thereafter due to the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such costs, then the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner on demand. 12.2.2 If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Subparagraph 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. Contractor shall respond with due diligence to any such written notice from the Owner, and shall be responsible for any damages resulting from a failure to respond with due diligence. Any defect or deficiency in any Warranty item that could affect the safety of persons or property shall be considered an emergency and must be corrected by Contractor as soon as practicable without delay to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall be responsible for any damages resulting from a failure to correct any defect or deficiency in such emergency, and shall be responsible for all costs incurred by Owner in responding to such emergency and in mitigating damages to persons or property in the event of Contractor's failure to correct. This period of one year shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. This obligation under this Subparagraph 12.2.2 shall survive acceptance of the Work under the Contract and termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. All damages recoverable hereunder shall be in addition to any and all damages recoverable under any other provision of this contract including those recoverable under Section 12.2.1 of these General Conditions. 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. 12.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work or damages resulting from nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct it in accordance with


Paragraph 2.4. If the Contractor does not proceed with correction of such nonconforming Work within a reasonable time fixed by written notice from the Architect, the Owner may remove it and store the salvable materials or equipment at the Contractor's expense. If the contractor does not pay costs of such removal and storage within ten days after written notice, the Owner may upon ten additional days written notice sell such materials and equipment at auction or at private sale and shall account for the proceeds thereof, after deducting costs and damages that should have been borne by the Contractor, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby. If such proceeds of sale do not cover costs that the Contractor should have borne, the Contract Sum shall be reduced by the deficiency. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. 12.2.5 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractor caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 12.2.6 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2. shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one year as described in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 12.2.7 All construction costs resulting from Contractor’s negligence, lack of oversight, inattention to detail, failure to investigate or failure to follow the Contract documents will be borne by the Contractor. 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. Owner has the right, based upon the circumstances surrounding the nonconforming work, to consider any of the following in determining the appropriate and equitable amount of reduction of the Contract Sum:

a. Contractor's savings due to Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents, including savings in labor and material costs;


b. Costs of correcting such nonconforming work, including costs of additional material and labor, less costs incurred in performing nonconforming work; or

c. Costs of correcting such nonconforming work, including costs of additional

material and labor. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the Commonwealth of Virginia. Any dispute arising out of the Contract Documents, their performance, or their interpretation shall be litigated only in the Circuit Court of the County of Spotsylvania, Virginia. 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract, in whole or in part, without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing.


13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority. The Contractor shall bear costs of such tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect may observe such procedures. 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Subparagraph 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect may observe such procedures. The Owner shall bear such costs except as provided in Subparagraph 13.5.3. 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses. 13.5.4 The Contractor shall obtain and deliver promptly to the Architect, with a copy to the Owner, any occupancy permit and any certificate of final inspection of any part of the Contractor's work and operating permits for any mechanical apparatus, such as elevators, escalators, boilers, air compressors, etc., which may be required by law to permit full use and occupancy of the premises by the Owner. Receipt of such permits or certificates by the Architect shall be a condition precedent to Substantial Completion of the Work. 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. 13.5.7 Owner's Right to Operate Equipment: When the required test of a system or systems has not been successfully completed at the time the Work under the Contract has otherwise been finally completed, the Contractor shall operate these services when


required until the tests have been successfully completed or he shall give the Owner the right to operate them. 13.6 LEGAL CLAIMS 13.6.1 Should the contractor make a legal claim, institute legal proceedings, or take legal action of any kind pursuant to this project, such action shall be filed only in Spotsylvania County, Virginia. Contractor agrees that prior to taking any such legal action, all such claims shall have first been made in accordance with the provisions of Section 4.3. Contractor hereby agrees to the waiver of any and all claims not made in accordance with Section 4.3, and understands that the procedures set forth in Section 4.3 are mandatory prerequisites to the institution of any legal proceedings. 13.6.2 Contractor stipulates that Owner, as a public School Board, is a political subdivision of the Commonwealth of Virginia, and as such, that it enjoys immunities from certain suits and liabilities provided by the Constitution and laws of Virginia. By entering into this Agreement, Owner does not waive any of its immunities from suit and/or liability. 13.7 COOPERATION WITH GOVERNMENTAL AGENCIES, PUBLIC UTILITIES, ETC. 13.7.1 Contractor's Responsibilities 13.7.1.1 Contractor shall be responsible for making necessary arrangements with governmental departments, public utilities, public carriers, services companies, and corporations owning, or controlling roadways, water, sewer, gas, electricity, telephone, and telegraph facilities, such as pavement, piping, wires, cables, conduits, poles, and guys, including incidental structures connected therewith, that are encountered in the Work in order that such items may be properly shored, supported, protected, or relocated. 13.7.1.2 Contractor shall give proper notices, comply with requirements of such parties in the performance of the Work, permit entrance of such parties on the project in order that they may perform their necessary work. 13.8 RECORDS 13.8.1 Contractor shall at all times through the date of Final Completion maintain Job Records, including, but not limited to, invoices, payment records, daily reports, diaries, logs, instructions, drawings, receipts, subcontracts, purchase orders, vouchers, memoranda, and other financial data and job meeting minutes applicable to the Project, in a manner which maintains the integrity of the documents. Job Records must be retained by Contractor for at least five (5) years after the date of Final Completion of the Project. Within ten (10) days of Owner’s request, Contractor shall make such Job Records available for inspection, copying and auditing by the Owner, Architect or their respective representatives, as


Owner’s central office. 13.8.2 In the event that an audit by the Owner reveals any errors/overpayments by the Owner, then the Contractor shall refund to the Owner the full amount of such overpayments within thirty (30) days of Owner’s demand based upon such audit findings, or the Owner, at its option, reserves the right to deduct such amounts owed to the Owner from any payments due to the Contractor. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of ninety (90) days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work, for any of the following reasons:

.1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction;

.2 an act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, making material unavailable; or

.3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not

notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment of undisputed sums on an approved Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents.

14.1.2 If one of the above reasons exists, the Contractor may, upon seven (7) additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and damages. 14.1.3 If the Work is stopped for a period of ninety (90) days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 14.1.2.


14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER 14.2.1 If the Contractor is adjudged a bankrupt, or if the Contractor makes a general assignment for the benefit of the Contractor's creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of the Contractor's insolvency, or if the Contractor persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials, or if the Contractor fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor, or fails to furnish the Owner, upon request, with assurances satisfactory to the Owner evidencing the Contractor’s ability to complete the Work in compliance with all the requirements of the Contract, or persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction or disregards an instruction, order or decision of the Architect, or otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of any provision of the Contract, then the Contractor shall be in default, and the Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy and upon written notice to the Contractor and its Surety, take possession of all materials, tools, appliances, equipment, construction equipment and machinery and vehicles, offices and other facilities on the Project site, and all materials intended for the work, wherever stored, and seven (7) days after such notice, may terminate the employment of the Contractor, accept assignment of any or all subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.4, and finish the Work by whatever method the Owner may deem expedient. The Owner shall be entitled to collect from the Contractor all direct, indirect, and consequential damages suffered by the Owner on account of the Contractor's default, including without limitation additional services and expenses of the Architect and other consultants made necessary thereby, attorney’s fees, and costs associated with any necessary rebidding of any portion of the Work. The Owner shall be entitled to hold all amounts due the Contractor at the date of termination until all of the Owner's damages have been established, and to apply such amounts to such damages. 14.2.2 If the costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect’s and other consultant’s services, attorney’s fees, and costs associated with any necessary rebidding of any portion of the Work and any other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, exceed the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Owner shall be certified by the Architect upon application. The obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. 14.3 SUSPENSION OR TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine or terminate the Contract in its entirety. 14.3.2 An adjustment may be made for increases in the cost of performance of the Contract, including profit on the increased cost of performance, caused by termination, suspension, delay or interruption. No adjustment shall be made to the extent:

.1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or


interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or

.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of this Contract.

14.3.3 Adjustments made in the cost of performance may have a mutually agreed fixed or percentage fee. 14.3.4 In the event of such termination, the Contractor shall be entitled to reimbursement for reasonable demobilization expenses, and for proven unrecoverable loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools and construction equipment and machinery incurred to the date of termination. Such payment shall not cause the Contract Sum to be exceeded. Such payment shall not include overhead and profit for Work not executed. 14.3.5 Upon determination by a Court of competent jurisdiction that termination of the Contractor pursuant to Section 14.2 was wrongful, such termination will be deemed converted to a termination for convenience pursuant to Section 14.3, and Contractor’s remedy for wrongful termination shall be limited to the recovery of payments permitted for termination for convenience as set forth in Section 14.3. END OF GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION


SAMPLE FORMS 001400 - 1

SAMPLE FORMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Unless otherwise required in the Contract Documents, AIA Documents shall be used. The documents

normally used include, but are not limited to, the following:

AIA Document No. Title

A310 Bid Bond A312 Performance and Payment Bond G701 Change Order G702/G703 Application and Certificate for Payment, and Continuation

Sheet(s) G704 Certificate of Substantial Completion G705 Certificate of Insurance G706 Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims G706A Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens G707 Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment G709 Proposal Request G710 Architect's Supplemental Instructions G713 Construction Change Authorization G714 Construction Change Directive

1.2 These Documents may be reviewed at the Architect's office. Copies for the Contractor's use may be

purchased from AIA Virginia, 2501 Monument Avenue, Richmond, Virginia, 23220, telephone (804) 644-3041. END OF SAMPLE FORMS


GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING STUDY 001500 - 1

GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING STUDY

A Geotechnical engineering study has been prepared for this project by Atlantic Geotechnical Services dated August 28, 2017. This study is bound in these Specifications.

The soil investigation data is for general information only and is not intended as a complete analysis of the project soil conditions. The Owner does not warrant the accuracy or completeness of the report and will not be held responsible for deviations or unrecorded conditions that may be found at the actual site. Locations shown on boring plans are approximate.

This study is provided as information only for use by the Contractor as he deems appropriate.


GENERAL SITEWORK REQUIREMENTS 01 0200 - 1

SECTION 01 0200 – GENERAL SITEWORK REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The provisions of the Contract Documents apply to the work of this Section.

1.2 SITEWORK LAYOUT

A. Monuments and Benchmarks

1. Maintain all monuments, property corners, bench marks and other reference points.

2. If these are disturbed or destroyed during construction operations, have them replaced by a surveyor licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia. This replacement shall be at no additional expense to the Contract.

B. Laying out the Work.

1. Locate all existing bench marks and other reference points.

2. Protect these points throughout construction.

3. Layout work utilizing these reference points.

C. Record Drawings

1. Maintain a record of the horizontal and vertical locations of all underground utilities and piping, both newly installed and existing encountered.

2. Maintain a record of any variations of the work.

3. Record Drawings shall be certified by a Land Surveyor registered in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

4. Maintain record drawings throughout construction, recording information as work is performed. Record Drawings shall be available for periodic inspection during the course of the project.

5. Submit final, complete record drawings at Substantial Completion.

1.3 EASEMENTS

A. Verify the acquisition of all off-site easements and Rights-of-Way prior to the start of off-site construction. This may be done by contacting the Architect.

B. Restore all off-site easements to the condition existing prior to the start of work.

1.4 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC

A. Maintain vehicular and pedestrian traffic across the frontage of this project. Comply with all applicable safety requirements.

1.5 CORRELATION OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

A. Review construction documents thoroughly prior to the start of construction.

B. Report any conflict or discrepancy discovered in the Construction Documents to the Architect prior to the start of construction.


GENERAL SITEWORK REQUIREMENTS 01 0200 - 2

C. Report any conflict or discrepancy discovered between the Construction Documents and state and local governmental regulations to the Architect prior to the start of construction.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. The conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by the Owner to the extent practical. However, minor variations may occur due to natural occurrences prior to the start of clearing work.

B. The location of existing underground utilities indicated is approximate only. Field locate all existing underground utilities in the area of work, regardless of whether or not they are indicated. Call “Miss Utility” prior to the start of demolition work for assistance in the location of existing underground utilities.

C. Should charted, uncharted or incorrectly charted utilities be encountered during demolition, contact the Architect immediately for instructions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies to keep services and facilities in operation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Applicable

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 PROJECT CLEAN UP

A. Clean site as construction progresses. Do not allow trash or other waste materials to accumulate.

B. Prior to requesting the punch-list inspection, clean the site to the following requirements:

1. Power wash all walks and pavements.

2. The remainder of the site shall be broom clean.

3. Remove all trash and debris.

3.2 EXISTING FACILITIES

A. Preserve existing signs, markers, guardrails, fences and other amenities in their original condition unless written permission is obtained for their removal and replacement.

B. Replace damaged items at no additional cost to the Contract.

END OF SECTION 01 0200

SUMMARY 011000 - 1


SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Type of Contract. 4. Work under other contracts. 5. Owner-furnished products. 6. Access to site. 7. Work restrictions. 8. Miscellaneous provisions. 9. Examination of site.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Courtland High School Renovation

1. Project Location: 6701 Smith Station Road. Spotsylvania, VA 22553.

B. Owner: Spotsylvania County Public Schools, 8020 River Stone Drive, Fredericksburg, VA 22407.

1. Owner's Representative: Russell Davis, Supervisor of Facilities and Operations

C. Architect: BCWH Architects, 1840 West Broad Street, Suite 400, Richmond, VA 23220.

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. The project generally consists of the renovation of Courtland High School and associated

sitework as described in the Drawings and Project Manual. The renovated building area total is approximately 174,000 sq. ft. Work includes, but is not limited to the selective demolition and renovation / replacement of building structural, architectural, mechanical, electrical, plumbing and life-safety components and systems along with site, landscape and utility upgrades and a fire suppression system. Selective replacement / alteration of building envelope components is also included. The project includes additions of

SUMMARY 011000 - 2


approximately 13,200 sq. ft and a metal building of approximately 2,200 sq.

B. The Work includes:

1. Coordination with subcontractors, vendors, material suppliers, inspectors, Spotsylvania

County officials, and representatives. 2. Coordination with testing laboratories as designated in the documents. 3. Coordination of construction activities, building and services utilities to allow the Owner’s

continued operation of the building and site as high school.

C. Special Considerations: An asbestos inspection was performed and asbestos-containing

materials were identified and known to exist on this project. The sampling report is included in the specifications.

1. Remove and dispose of asbestos-containing materials in accordance with all local, state

and Federal laws. 2. The Ccontractor shall be responsible for developing a project approach for abatement and

hazardous materials management by coordinating with their subcontractors performing the components of the contract.

3. Asbestos-containing materials may be present in addition to the areas identified. The

Contractor is responsible to ensure that any remaining asbestos-containing materials are

not disturbed or damaged, and will be responsible for all costs associated with clean-up

and clearance of the building due to disturbance or damage to asbestos-containing

materials not included in the scope of work.

4. If suspect asbestos containing material is found or uncovered during the course of the

project, the Contactor shall notify the Architect and Owner immediately.

1.5 COMPLETION OF WORK

A. Work shall be completed in phases as described in the Documents. Refer to Drawings G020

and G021 for the general scope of work of each phase. The Work includes enabling construction and maintaining of existing building services and utilities as required for the continued operation of the school and the site. Contractor shall coordinate temporary facilities, safety barriers and protective measures with the phases of the work. The Contractor shall start Phase 2 work only after completion of Phase 1 and 1A.

1. It is intended that the execution of the work be continuous. The Contractor shall

schedule work such that required materials and resources are on hand; and that work progresses in a manner providing the shortest construction schedule. All after work hours shall be built into the schedule as necessary to accomplish the work and included in the contract.

B. Phase 1 (As specified in the Notice to Proceed, anticipated to be issued no later than January

1, 2018, through December 2, 2018):

1. Work indicated in this phase shall be Substantially Complete on or before December 2,

SUMMARY 011000 - 3


2018 in order to allow the next phase of work to utilize the respective portions of site and building as indicated.

2. Final completion: 30 days after substantial completion.

C. Phase 1A (June 16, 2018 through August 1, 2018):

1. Work indicated in this phase shall be Substantially Complete on or before August 1, 2018 in order to allow the next phase of work to utilize the respective portions of site and building as indicated.

2. Final completion: 30 days after substantial completion.

D. Phase 2 (January 1, 2019 through August 1, 2019):

1. Work shall be Substantially Complete on or before August 1, 2019 in order to allow the next phase of work to utilize the respective portions of site and building as indicated.

2. Final completion: 30 days after Substantial Completion.

E. Phase 2A (May 25, 2019 – August 1, 2019):

1. Work shall be Substantially Complete on August 1, 2019.

2. Final completion: 30 days after Substantial Completion.

1.6 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried

out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

B. Concurrent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction

operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.

1. Furniture, Furnishings, and Loose Equipment: A separate contract will be awarded for

acquiring and installing furniture and loose equipment not included in the base bid.

1.7 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling,

storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making plumbing, mechanical and electrical connections.

1. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to

Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective or missing, Owner will arrange for

replacement. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest delivery date for Owner-furnished products.

Using Owner-furnished earliest delivery dates, Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule.

4. The Owner is responsible for receiving, unloading, and storage of Owner-furnished items at Project site. The Contractor shall be responsible for transporting the Owner-furnished items from the Owner's on-site storage location(s) and placing these items in locations indicated in the documents or otherwise incorporating them into the Work as indicated in the documents.

SUMMARY 011000 - 4


5. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations; Contractor shall repair or replace item(s) to the Owner's satisfaction.

6. Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate Owner-furnished items into the Work.

B. Owner-Furnished Products:

1. Commercial Laundry Equipment

1.8 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as

indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. Refer to Drawings for the extent of the limits of disturbance.

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to building and site areas required for

construction.

2. Enabling construction may be required in other areas of the building as required to

facilitate completion of work for each phase. Contractor shall schedule such work to allow and maintain continued operation of the school and site during the phase.

1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction.

2. During periods of Standardized Testing including SOL Testing construction activities

deemed by the Owner to be disruptive or distracting (including but not limited to unacceptable noise levels, visual distractions in areas directly adjacent to such testing or in areas that impact such testing) shall be disallowed. Tentative testing schedules will be provided by the Owner to the Contractor at the start of each semester. The Contractor shall allow five 8-hour school days per semester in his construction schedule for testing and a restricted work schedule, and shall closely coordinate work and schedules with the Owner and school administration during such testing periods. The Contractor shall be prepared to work other than normal hours on such days to accomplish the work. Limitations to construction activities during such testing periods will not be accepted as the basis for claims for extension of Contract Time.

B. Nonsmoking Building and Site: Smoking of cigarettes, cigars, pipes, or use of any tobacco

products is not permitted. No exceptions.

C. Controlled Substances: Use of controlled substances within the existing building and project

site is not permitted.

D. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on

Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.

SUMMARY 011000 - 5


1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the

50-division format and CSI/CSC's "Master Format" numbering system.

1. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated

otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work

of all Sections in the Specifications.

1.11 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

A. Permits and Fees:

The cost of any permits issued by the Office of Building Construction and Inspections of Spotsylvania County will be paid directly by the Owner and will not be included in the bid amount. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to apply for and diligently pursue the applicable Building Permits from the County. It shall be the responsibility of the Owner to provide payment for the Building Permits. However, in a cooperative and expedient effort, the Owner may apply and pay for the Building Permits prior to receipt of bids.

1. The Contractor shall pay for all other fees as may be required by authorities, including those other than Spotsylvania County, having jurisdiction over the project.

2. Inspections: Apply for, obtain and pay for all required inspections to perform the work.

a. Submit copies of inspection reports, notices and similar communications to the

Owner within 24 hours of receipt. Provide copies of preliminary reports or notices

when received.

B. Building Security:

1. The General Contractor is responsible for maintaining security of project areas and shall secure all appropriate areas during construction.

2. Fencing of construction areas is to be installed and maintained by the Contractor at his cost. Fencing shall be provided between the Contractor’s area of operations and areas of school operation.

C. IAQ Site Maintenance Protocols:

1. The Contractor shall endeavor to keep the workplace as clean and dust free as practical

and "broom clean" as a daily minimum. 2. Stored materials shall be raised above grade or finished floor. If stored outside the

immediate work area, care shall be taken to protect the materials and/or fixtures from moisture absorption, dirt, dust or other contaminants.

3. When possible, paper or cardboard wrapping shall be removed and taken off site and recycled

4. Floor tracks or other fastening devices which will be encased by drywall or other finish materials shall be free from rust, scale, dirt and debris.

5. Casual or minor spills shall be immediately mopped up. 6. No food or drink shall be allowed in the building during construction. 7. No drywall or building insulation work shall occur until building is “dried-in”.

SUMMARY 011000 - 6


D. Use of vulgar, suggestive or abusive language or gestures is strictly prohibited on school grounds.

E. Construction workers will be properly dressed at all times. This includes the wearing of shirts

and pants worn properly (pulled up to waist).

F. The use or possession of weapons, firearms, or archery equipment of any type, including those

intended for hunting, are strictly prohibited on school property.

G. There will be absolutely no interaction (verbal or visual) between construction workers and the

students, faculty, staff, or visitors to the school. VIOLATORS WILL BE PERMANENTLY REMOVED FROM THE JOB.

H. This project shall be free from new asbestos containing building materials. The Contractor

shall submit certification at the completion of the project that no asbestos containing materials have been used in the construction.

I. This project shall be free from new lead containing paint or plumbing materials. The

Contractor shall submit certification at the completion of the project that no lead containing materials have been used in the construction.

1.12 OWNER'S SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

A. The Owner reserves the right to employ separate contractors during construction operations of this

contract.

B. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to coordinate his schedule and construction activities with the Owner's separate contractors.

1.13 EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS

A. Prior to the commencement of construction operations the Owner will remove existing loose furnishings and equipment including computers, data racks, printers and copiers.

a. Existing Servers and equipment in existing second floor MDF must remain operational until new equipment is installed and operational at MDF Room F209. Contractor shall protect existing equipment, power source and associated cabling system to ensure continued, uninterrupted system operations.

B. The Contractor will be responsible for covering and protecting of existing building improvements.

1.14 SPECIAL PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor shall coordinate work with the Owner’s Project Representative. Contractor shall submit written notification of any schedule changes.

B. The Contractor shall give the Owner and Architect a minimum of seventy-two (72) hours notice if work will is to be performed on a weekend or a holiday.

1.15 EXAMINATION OF SITE

A. Bidders are required to attend the pre-bid conference as defined in the Invitation to Bid in order to

visit the site, compare the drawings and specifications with existing conditions and inform

SUMMARY 011000 - 7


themselves of all conditions. Failure to visit the site and examine the existing conditions in relation

to the work to be performed will in no way relieve the Contractor from necessity of furnishing any

materials or performing any work that may be required to complete the work in accordance with

drawings and specifications without any additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000


ALLOWANCES 012100 - 1

SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.

B. Types of allowances include the following:

1. Lump-sum allowances. 2. Unit-cost allowances.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders for allowances.

2. Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices. 3. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for items of Work covered by allowances.

1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.

B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders.

B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.



C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF LUMP SUM ALLOWANCES

A. Lump Sum Allowance #1 - Video Surveillance

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance of $120,000 for the video surveillance system including cameras, servers, patch panels, DVR’s, monitors and miscellaneous equipment. Software, licenses and training are included in the allowance. Outlet boxes, conduits, pathways and cabling for the video surveillance system shall be provided by the Contractor in the Base Bid.

B. Lump Sum Allowance #2 - Firelane Striping and Signage

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance of $1,500 for firelane striping and signage as directed by the Architect, in addition to that which is shown on the construction documents.

C. Lump Sum Allowance #3 - Circuit Breaker Revisions – Short Circuit Coordination Study

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance of $10,000 for electrical circuit revisions and changes required by the specified “Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Study”.

D. Lump Sum Allowance #4 - Signage

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance of $75,000 for signage.



E. Lump Sum Allowance #5 – Miscellaneous Construction Allowance

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance of $15,000 miscellaneous construction items to be determined.

3.4 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICE ALLOWANCES

A. Unit Price Allowance #1 - Additional Excavation

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance of 200 c.y. for excavation of material, where authorized or directed, below or in addition to the levels required for the Work. Dispose of excavated material in a legal manner off-site. Backfill with imported structural fill material compacted per specifications. Credit or additions to the Contract Price for actual quantities removed and replaced (based on volume of material cut) shall be made per the Unit Prices contained in the Bid Form. Include in the unit price the cost of quantity verification by a Surveyor Licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

B. Unit Price Allowance #2 - Additional Excavation in Trenches

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance of 100 c.y. for excavation of material in trenches, where authorized or directed, below or in addition to the levels required for the Work. Dispose of excavated material in a legal manner off on-site. Backfill with stone compacted per specifications. Credit or additions to the Contract Price for actual quantities removed and replaced (based on volume of material cut) shall be made per the Unit Prices contained in the Bid Form. Include in the unit price the cost of quantity verification by a Surveyor Licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia

C. Unit Price Allowance #3 - Additional Excavation in Footings

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance of 25 c.y. for excavation of material in footings, where authorized or directed, below or in addition to the levels required for the Work. Dispose of excavated material in a legal manner off on-site. Backfill with stone compacted per specifications. Credit or additions to the Contract Price for actual quantities removed and replaced (based on volume of material cut) shall be made per the Unit Prices contained in the Bid Form. Include in the unit price the cost of quantity verification by a Surveyor Licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia

D. Unit Price Allowance #4 – Mass Rock Removal

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance of 10 c.y. for mass rock removal where authorized or directed, below or in addition to the levels required by the Work. Dispose of excavated rock material in a legal manner off-site. Backfill excavation with stone. Credit or additions to the Contract Price for actual quantities removed and replaced (per the pay limits established in the Specifications shall be made per the Unit Prices contained in the Bid Form. Include in the unit price the cost of quantity verification by a Surveyor Licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

E. Unit Price Allowance #5 - VDOT Std. No. 21B Stone

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance of 10 c.y. of VDOT Std. No. 21B Stone, placed and compacted in accordance with the requirements of section 31 2000, where authorized of directed. Amounts indicated are in addition to the amounts required for the Work indicated.



F. Unit Price Allowance #6 - VDOT Std. No. 57 Stone

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance of 10 c.y. of VDOT Std. No. 57 Stone, placed and compacted in accordance with the requirements of section 31 2000, where authorized of directed. Amounts indicated are in addition to the amounts required for the Work indicated.

G. Unit Price Allowance #7 - Woven Geotextile Fabric

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance of 200 s.y. for woven geotextile fabric as defined in Specification 31 2000. Amount indicated is in addition to the amounts required for the Work indicated.

H. Unit Price Allowance #8 - Sidewalk Removal and Replacement

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance of 75 s.y. for removal and replacement of concrete sidewalk, where authorized or directed, in addition to that which is shown on the construction drawings. Dispose of excavated material in a legal manner off-site. Credit or additions to the Contract Price for actual quantities removed and replaced (based on square yardage of material) shall be made per the Unit Prices contained in the Bid Form.

I. Unit Price Allowance #9 - Asphalt Removal and Replacement

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance of 200 s.y. for removal and replacement of existing asphalt, where authorized or directed, in addition to that which is shown on the construction drawings. Dispose of excavated material in a legal manner off-site. Replace existing asphalt with heavy duty asphalt pavement section. Credit or additions to the Contract Price for actual quantities removed and replaced (based on square yardage of material) shall be made per the Unit Prices contained in the Bid Form.

J. Unit Price Allowance #10 – Smoke Detectors

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance for five (5) smoke detectors, installed and hooked up to the fire alarm system, beyond that required by the Work as specified in Division 28 Section "283111 Addressable Fire Detection And Alarm System" and as shown in Drawings.

K. Unit Price Allowance #11 – Duct Smoke Detectors

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance for five (5) fire alarm duct mounted smoke detectors, installed and hooked up to the fire alarm system, beyond that required by the Work as specified in Division 28 Section "283111 Addressable Fire Detection And Alarm System" and as shown in Drawings.

L. Unit Price Allowance #12 – Fire Alarm Horns/Strobes

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance for five (5) fire alarm horns/strobes, installed and hooked up to the fire alarm system, beyond that required by the Work as specified in Division 28 Section "283111 Addressable Fire Detection And Alarm System" and as shown in Drawings.

M. Unit Price Allowance #13– Fire Alarm Pull Stations

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance for five (5) fire alarm pull stations, installed and hooked up to the fire alarm system, beyond that required by the Work as specified in



Division 28 Section "283111 Addressable Fire Detection And Alarm System" and as shown in Drawings.

N. Unit Price Allowance #14 – Double Face Exit Signs

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance for five (5) double face exit signs, installed and wired beyond that required by the Work as specified in Division 26 Section "265100 Interior Building Lighting".

O. Unit Price Allowance #15 – Single Face Exit Signs

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance for five (5) single face exit signs, installed and wired, beyond that required by the Work as specified in Division 26 Section "265100 Interior Building Lighting".

P. Unit Price Allowance #16 – Quarry tile replacement in kitchen

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance of an additional 100 sq.ft. of quarry tile to remove and patch existing areas of deteriorated quarry tile in kitchen and serving areas.

3.5 ADMINISTRATION OF SITEWORK UNIT PRICE ALLOWANCES

A. Unit Prices for each allowance shall be given on the Bid Form.

B. Allowances required by this Section shall be included in the Base Bid amount.

C. Allowances required by this Section shall be indicated on the Schedule of Values and shall be determined by multiplying the quantity indicated by the unit price given on the Bid Form.

D. Submit invoices or surveyor’s certificate, as required, with pay requests that involve the Unit Price Allowances.

E. Credit unused amount of Unit Price Allowance (if any) to Owner by Change Order at Project Closeout.

3.6 ADMINISTRATION OF LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES

A. Conform to the requirements of the General Conditions.



UNIT PRICES 012200 - 1

SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 00 Section "Bid Form" for indicating unit prices.

2. Division 01 Section "Allowances" for procedures for using unit prices to adjust quantity allowances and for Unit Price Allowances to be included in the Bid..

3. Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.

1. The Owner reserves the right to negotiate said Unit Prices prior to the award of the Contract.

B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections.

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.

1. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES

A. Unit Price No. 1 - Additional Excavation:

1. Description: Provide Additional Excavation below or in addition to the levels required by the Work. Dispose of excavated material in a legal manner off-site. Backfill with imported structural fill material compacted per specifications. Quantities shall be verified by a Surveyor Licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia, and is to be included in the Unit Price cost. Provide according to Division 31 Section "312000 Earthwork."

2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard

B. Unit Price No. 2 - Additional Excavation in Trenches:

1. Description: Provide Additional Excavation in Trenches where authorized or directed, below or in addition to the levels required by the Work. Dispose of excavated material in a legal manner off-site. Backfill with VDOT 21A Aggregate compacted per specifications. Quantities shall be verified by a Surveyor Licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia, and is to be included in the Unit Price cost. Provide according to Division 31 Section "312000 Earthwork."


C. Unit Price No. 3 - Additional Excavation in Footings:

1. Description: Provide Additional Excavation in Footings where authorized or directed, below or in addition to the levels required by the Work. Dispose of excavated material in an approved location off-site. Backfill with VDOT 21A Aggregate compacted per specifications. Quantities shall be verified by a Surveyor Licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia, and is to be included in the Unit Price cost. Provide according to Division 31 Section "312000 Earthwork."


D. Unit Price No. 4 - Mass Rock Removal

1. Description: Provide mass rock removal where authorized or directed, below or in addition to the levels required by the Work. Dispose of excavated rock material in a legal manner off-site. Backfill excavation with stone. Credit or additions to the Contract Price for actual quantities removed and replaced (per the pay limits established in the Specifications) shall be made per the Unit Prices contained in the Bid Form. Include in the unit price the cost of quantity verification by a Surveyor Licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard.

E. Unit Price No. 5 - VDOT Std. No. 21B Stone:

1. Description: Provide VDOT Std. No. 21B Stone, placed and compacted in accordance with the requirements of section 31 2000, where authorized of directed. Amounts



indicated are in addition to the amounts required for the Work indicated.


F. Unit Price No. 6 - VDOT Std. No. 57 Stone:

1. Description: Provide VDOT Std. No. 57 Stone, placed and compacted in accordance with the requirements of section 31 2000, where authorized of directed. Amounts indicated are in addition to the amounts required for the Work indicated.


G. Unit Price No. 7 – Woven Geotextile Fabric:

1. Description: Provide woven geotextile fabric as defined in Specification 31 2000. Amounts indicated are in addition to the amounts required for the Work indicated.

2. Unit of Measurement: Square Yard.

H. Unit Price No. 8 - Sidewalk Removal and Replacement

1. Description: Provide removal and replacement of concrete sidewalk, where authorized or directed, in addition to that which is shown on the construction drawings. Dispose of excavated material in a legal manner off-site.

2. Unit of Measurement: Square Yard

I. Unit Price No. 9 - Asphalt Removal and Replacement

1. Description: Provide removal and replacement of asphalt, where authorized or directed, in addition to that which is shown on the construction drawings. Dispose of excavated material in a legal manner off-site.

2. Unit of Measurement: Square Yard

J. Unit Price No. 10 - Additional Smoke Detectors:

1. Include smoke detector, installed and hooked up to the fire alarm system, beyond that required by the Work as specified in Division 28 Section "283111 Addressable Fire Detection And Alarm System."

2. Unit of Measurement: Per Piece

K. Unit Price No. 11 - Additional Duct Smoke Detectors:

1. Include duct smoke detector, installed and hooked up to the fire alarm system, beyond that required by the Work as specified in Division 28 Section "283111 Addressable Fire Detection And Alarm System"


L. Unit Price No. 12 - Additional Fire Alarm Horns/Strobes:

1. Include fire alarm horn/strobe, installed and hooked up to the fire alarm system, beyond that required by the Work as specified in Division 28 Section "283111 Addressable Fire



Detection And Alarm System".


M. Unit Price No. 13 - Additional Fire Alarm Pull Stations:

1. Include fire alarm pull station, installed and hooked up to the fire alarm system, beyond that required by the Work as specified in Division 28 Section "283111 Addressable Fire Detection And Alarm System".


N. Unit Price No. 14 - Additional Double Face Exit Signs:

1. Include double face exit sign, installed and wired, beyond that required by the Work as specified in Division 26 Section "265100 Interior Building Lighting".


O. Unit Price No. 15 - Additional Single Face Exit Signs:

1. Include single face exit sign, installed and wired, beyond that required by the Work as specified in Division 26 Section "265100 Interior Building Lighting".


P. Unit Price Allowance #16 – Quarry tile replacement in kitchen

1. Provide in the Base Bid an allowance of an additional 100 sq.ft. of quarry tile to remove and patch existing areas of deteriorated quarry tile in kitchen and serving areas.



ALTERNATES 012300 - 1

SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

a. Include in credit work in Base Bid not required to accomplish Additive Alternate ltern scope.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

C. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. Work on all drawings that is not labeled with the alternate number shall be included as part of the base bid.


ALTERNATES 012300 - 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Additive Bid Item #I: includes all work related to the site improvements, landscaping and construction of the 2 story, six classroom addition at the northeast corner of the building. Scope includes pre-manufactured aluminum canopy.



CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.


1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for procedural requirements for handling and processing allowances.

2. Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for procedural requirements for handling and processing unit prices.

3. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Within 10 business days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.



B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 016000 "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: Use forms provided by Architect.

1.5 ALLOWANCE ADJUSTMENTS

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.

1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance.

2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed.

3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances.

4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place y independent quantity survey, measure, or count.

B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 21 days after such authorization.

1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.



1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Change Directive contains a complete description ofchange in the Work.It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material bsis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit and itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adustments to the Contract.





PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.


1. Division 01 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing handling and processing of allowances.

2. Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.

3. Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing use of unit prices.

4. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 14 days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least two line items for each Specification Section to include adequate breakdown of materials and labor costs for ease and convenience of evaluation and recommendation for action.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number.



d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for operation and for project closeout activities including Maintenance and Operations manuals, Project Record Documents, and demonstration and training in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum.

4. Provide material and labor line items for scope. 5. Coordinate with project phased construction, break down by Phase 1 and Phase 2 scope. 6. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 7. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. If acceptable to the Owner and Architect, provide evidence of insurance and bonded warehousing for products stored away from the site.

8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

9. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

1. Submit electronic copy of the Draft Application to Architect and Owner 24 hours in advance of project progress meeting at which draft application is to be reviewed. Architect, Owner and Contractor will review application at the progress meeting. Adjustments as necessary to ensure funds requested are commensurate with the progress of the work will be made by the Contractor subsequent to the review. Upon review and approval by the Architect, the Application shall be submitted to the Architect for certification.

C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation



Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

E. Transmittal: Submit 4 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours.

1. Transmit 4 copies of supporting documentation as required by the General Conditions.

F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Schedule of unit prices. 5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance

of the Work. 9. Report of preconstruction conference. 10. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

H. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 4. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 5. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 6. Evidence that claims have been settled. 7. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

8. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.


PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Coordination Drawings. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Project meetings. 4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor.


1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to

ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.



1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre-installation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

b. Indicate required installation sequences. c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of

dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit 4 opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return one

copy.

a. Submit five copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing.

4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections.



B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: The Architect will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. c. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. e. Procedures for RFIs. f. Procedures for testing and inspecting. g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. h. Distribution of the Contract Documents. i. Submittal procedures. j. Preparation of Record Documents. k. Use of the premises and existing building. l. Work restrictions. m. Owner's occupancy requirements. n. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. o. Construction waste management and recycling. p. Parking availability. q. Office, work, and storage areas. r. Security. s. Progress cleaning. t. Working hours.

3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Pre-installation Conferences: The Contractor shall conduct a pre-installation conference at project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and



installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect and Owner’s Representative of scheduled meeting dates.

a. Schedule conferences in advance of onsite construction activities. b. Coordinate scheduling of meetings to allow attendance of Owner’s Representative,

Architect and appropriate Engineering Consultants.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. The Contract Documents. b. Related RFIs. c. Related Change Orders. d. Submittals. e. Review of mockups. f. Time schedules. g. Weather limitations. h. Manufacturer's written recommendations. i. Warranty requirements. j. Acceptability of substrates. k. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. l. Testing and inspecting requirements. m. Coordination with other work. n. Protection of adjacent work. o. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: The Architect shall conduct progress meetings at bi-monthly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, the Contractor shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Status of submittals.



2) Status deficient items and schedule for correction of deficiencies. 3) Field observations. 4) RFIs. 5) Status of proposal requests. 6) Pending changes. 7) Status of Change Orders. 8) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute to Contractor the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who

should have been present.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

1.6 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

3. Time and materials of the design professional(s) required to respond to unnecessary, unwarranted, or frivolous RFIs will be paid for by the Contractor.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data,

Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.

C. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above.



1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

D. Architect’s Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow five working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architecting writing within 5 days of receipt of the RFI response. Notifications shall provide specific information identifying potential impacts related to the RFI response. Non-specific, generic response will not be considered notification.

E. On receipt of Architect’s action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within 5 days if Contractor disagrees with response.

F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log bi-monthly coinciding with progress meetings. Software log with not less than the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect’s response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.





CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submittals Schedule.


1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 3. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

B. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals Schedule: Submit electronic copies of submittal schedule. Arrange the information in a tabular format.

B. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies.

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.

1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of



construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.

1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule.

a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately.

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling."

B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Final Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

C. Activities: Treat each Phase and Subphase as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 5 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.



D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by

Owner. 3. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include

delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control.

5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Fabrication. b. Installation. c. Tests and inspections. d. Adjusting. e. Placement and startup of building equipment and building systems.

6. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:

a. Structural completion. b. Permanent space enclosure. c. Completion of mechanical installation. d. Completion of electrical installation. e. Permanent connection of services and utilities. f. Substantial Completion.

E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.

F. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragments to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

G. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.



B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized, cost- and resource-loaded, time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.

1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for commencement of the Work.

a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.

2. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule.

D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.

1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities:

a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Fabrication. d. Utility interruptions. e. Installation. f. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. g. Testing and commissioning.

2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates.

3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.

E. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:

1. Description of activity. 2. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 3. Early and late start dates. 4. Early and late finish dates. 5. Activity duration in workdays. 6. Total float or slack time.

F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following:



1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time.

2.4 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial Completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within [one] <Insert number> day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE



A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each monthly payment meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in

the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.



PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1

SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction video recordings.


1. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

2. Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for photographic documentation before selective demolition operations commence.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Video Recordings: Submit video recordings within seven days of recording.

1. Submit video recordings in digital format acceptable to Owner and Architect.

2. Identification: With each submittal, provide the following information:

a. Name of Project.

b. Date video recording was recorded.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: Engage a qualified videographer. Qualifications shall be reviewed and approved by the Owner’s representative.

1.5 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic and videographic documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video format acceptable to Owner and Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. Video Recording Photographer: Engage a qualified videographer to record construction video recordings.

B. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording unless otherwise necessary to show area of construction. Display continuous running time and date. At start of each video recording, record weather conditions from local newspaper or television and the actual temperature reading at Project site.


PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 2

C. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed, recent events, and planned activities. At each change in location, describe vantage point, location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction.

1. Confirm date and time at beginning and end of recording.

2. Begin each video recording with name of Project, Contractor's name, videographer's name, and Project location.

D. Preconstruction Video Recording: Before starting demolition, record video recording of Project site and surrounding properties from different vantage points, as directed by Owner’s Representative.

1. Show existing building, site improvements and equipment in the area of construction operations or that may be impacted by construction operations to accurately record physical conditions at the start of demolition.

2. Document protection measures placed by Contractor to protect existing building and improvements.



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the Schedule of Values.

2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings.

3. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.

4. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements.

5. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.

6. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

7. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

8. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Newforma: Architect's Project Management / Web Portal Software used for electronically transferring project data between Owner, Architect and Contractor.

B. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.

C. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES



A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals upon receipt of the CADD Release Agreement located at the end of this section.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. Submittals received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 15 number days for initial review of each submittal.

a. Interior product and material finish color selections: allow 30 days from the date of the last material color submittal to Architect for final color package selection.

E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.

2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name.

b. Date.



c. Name and address of Architect.

d. Name and address of Contractor.

e. Name and address of subcontractor.

f. Name and address of supplier.

g. Name of manufacturer.

h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include the letter "r" for resubmittal and the resubmittal number after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.r1).

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

l. Other necessary identification.

4. Submittal organization: Each submittal shall be organized as follows:

a. Submittal shall be created as one PDF file that includes the required components (Product Data, Qualifications, Shop Drawings etc.).

b. Each component of the submittal shall be separated in the PDF file by a page marker that clearly indicates the component. (i.e. Product Data, Qualifications, Shop Drawings etc.)

F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

G. Revisions: Highlight, encircle revisions of information provided in previous submittals.

H. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

1. Submit one electronic copy of submittal through Newforma to concurrent reviewer in addition to electronic copy to Architect.

2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned.

I. Transmittal: Transmit each submittal electronically through Newforma. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents,



including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal.

J. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "No Exceptions Taken or Furnish as Corrected."

K. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

1. Contractor shall also be responsible for furnishing hard copies of final submittals to the Owner, if the Owner requires a copy during Construction. This copy will be in addition to the Record Submittals furnished as part of the Closeout Documents.

L. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "No Exceptions Taken or Furnish as Corrected" taken by Architect.

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES

A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions:

1. Submission by the Contractor and all sub-contractors of an executed waiver of liability form as provided by the Architect/Consultant and any required payment of electronic file conversion fees noted on the liability form.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

1. Submit electronic submittals directly through Newforma.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

3. Include the following information, as applicable: (Do not include information not applicable to the requirements of project)

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.



c. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

d. Standard color charts.

e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

g. Printed performance curves.

h. Operational range diagrams.

i. Mill reports.

j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals.

k. Compliance with specified referenced standards.

l. Testing by recognized testing agency.

m. Application of testing agency labels and seals.

n. Notation of coordination requirements.

4. Submit Product Data concurrent with Shop Drawings and Samples.

5. Number of Copies: Submit one copy of Product Data electronically through Newforma, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return one copy electronically through Newforma. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions.

b. Identification of products

c. Fabrication and installation drawings.

d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.

e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring.

f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.

g. Templates and patterns.

h. Schedules.

i. Design calculations.



j. Compliance with specified standards.

k. Notation of coordination requirements.

l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. Illustrate adjoining construction conditions. Coordinate with products and scope of other subcontractors and material suppliers.

n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.

3. Number of Copies: Submit one copy electronically through Newforma of each submittal. Architect will return one copy through Newforma.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together

in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control

comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property,

are the property of Contractor.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern,

texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.



a. Number of Samples: Submit five sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. Contractor shall retain one set of samples at the job site. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying

products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Number of Copies: Architect will return one copy electronically through Newforma of

subcontractor list unless otherwise indicated.


A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit one copy of each submittal electronically using the Architect's

Newforma web portal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.



G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

L. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

M. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

N. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

O. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

P. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized

service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making

report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements

and, if not, what corrective action was taken.



5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements.

6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other requirements items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

Q. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of

insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

R. Safety Data Sheets/Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to

Owner; do not submit to Architect. 1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal

for resubmittal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents prior to forwarding to the Architect or reviewing party. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

1. Submittals that do not reflect appropriate review by the Contractor will not be reviewed by the Architect or reviewing party and shall be returned to the Contractor with No Action Taken.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it through Newforma. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.

1. Final Unrestricted Release: Where submittals are marked “No Exceptions Taken,” that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will be contingent upon that compliance.

2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked “Furnish as Corrected,” that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will be contingent on that compliance.

3. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "Submit Specified Item," "Revise and



Resubmit," or "Rejected" do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark.

a. Do not permit submittals so marked to be used at the Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress.

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.



CADD / ELECTRONIC FILE TRANSFER AGREEMENT 01 3310 - 1

SECTION 013310 – CADD / ELECTRONIC FILE TRANSFER AGREEMENT

To (User): (Contractor’s or Sub-Contractor’s Name)

Project: Courtland High School Renovation Project No: 2016.53 Owner: Spotsylvania County Public Schools Architect: BCWH Architects, Inc. and consultants

1.1 Architect’s electronic files are compatible with Architect’s current version of Audtodesk REVIT 2017 and AutoCAD. Architect makes no representation as to the compatibility of these files with User’s files, hardware, or software.

1.2 Data contained on these electronic files are part of Architect’s Instruments of Service, and Architect reserves all rights to the original files. These electronic files shall not be used by User or anyone else receiving this data through or from you for any purpose other than for review and as a reference in User’s preparation of drawings for the referenced project and are provided as a courtesy. Any other use or reuse by User or by others will be at User’s sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to Architect. User agrees to make no claim and hereby waive, to the fullest extent permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature against Architect, and Architect’s officers, directors, employees, agents or sub-consultants that may arise out of, or in connection with, User’s use of the electronic files.

1.3 The use of these electronic files will save the User considerable time and expense in the coordination and management of this project, which represents good and valuable consideration for the following indemnification and release: User agrees, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to indemnify and hold Architect and Architect’s officers, directors, employees, agents or sub-consultants harmless against all damages, liabilities or costs, including reasonable attorney’s fees and defense costs, arising out of, or resulting from, User’s use of these electronic files.

1.4 These electronic files distributed at multiple times over the duration of the project do not constitute the Contract Documents for this project. Differences may exist between these electronic files and corresponding hard-copy documents. The Architect makes no representation regarding the accuracy or completeness of the electronic files you receive. It shall be User’s sole responsibility to compare the electronic files and corresponding hard-copy documents to insure the accuracy and completeness of the electronic files.

1.5 Because information presented on the electronic files can be modified, unintentionally or otherwise, Architect reserves the right to remove all indicia of ownership and / or involvement from each electronic display.

1.6 The electronic data on the storage media provided to User can deteriorate or become corrupted over a period of time. Therefore, User agrees to review the electronic files, within ten (10) days of


CADD / ELECTRONIC FILE TRANSFER AGREEMENT 01 3310 - 2

receipt of such, to determine their accuracy and / or completeness. User shall immediately notify Architect of any corrupted files, at which time we shall replace the file. Architect reserves the right to charge a service fee if notified after the ten (10) day period.

1.7 Under no circumstances shall delivery of the electronic files for use by User be deemed a sale by Architect, and we make no warranties, either express or implied, of merchantability and fitness for any particular purpose. In no event shall Architect be liable for any loss or profit or any consequential damages as a result of users use or reuse of these electronic files.

1.8 The Architect will provide electronic files of plan views only. It is the not intent of this Section to provide electronic files other than plan views. (List Sheet / Drawing Titles).

1.9 User understands and accepts these terms and conditions for the use of the electronic files.

Signed: Date:

(Name & Title)


QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.


1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.

D. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

E. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation



of the Work and for completed Work.

F. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

G. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.

H. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for



installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

G. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."

C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work.



2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

E. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency and special inspector as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect’s reference during normal working hours.

1. Identify items noted as non-compliant. 2. Record when non-compliant work has been corrected and accepted as compliant. 3. Review status of Log at project progress meetings.



3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES 014100 - 1

SECTION 014100 - SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Special Inspection services.

B. Certain structural components of the Project will be subject to the requirements for Special Inspections. Special Inspections will be applicable to the following specification sections:

1. Section 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 2. Section 042000 Unit Masonry 3. Section 051200 Structural Steel Framing 4. Section 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 5. Section 078100 Applied Fireproofing 6. Section 312000 Earthwork

C. Requirements for Special Inspections are outlined in the Statement and Schedule of Special Inspections included at the end of this section.

D. The Owner will procure and bear all costs of the Special Inspector and Special Inspector’s Testing Laboratory, except as otherwise noted. The Special Inspector will be the manager of the Special Inspection process. The Special Inspector checks the certification of all other inspecting agents required by Special Inspections and coordinates their activities. The Special Inspector carries the exclusive responsibility for assuring that the inspections indicated are performed. The Statement of Special Inspections will be required by the Building Official as a condition for building permit issuance.

1. The Contractor shall bear the cost of retesting and additional inspections where initial testing or inspection failed to achieve compliance with project requirements.

2. The Contractor shall bear the cost additional testing or inspections due to the contractor’s failure to provide timely notification to testing agency or Special Inspector resulting in excessive or additional charges to the Owner.

E. Special Inspections are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements. Specific quality-assurance and control requirements for individual

construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.



F. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" specifies requirements for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by inspection and testing activities.

1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor Responsibilities: Contractor shall provide and include in the Contract Sum, inspections, tests, and other similar quality-control services specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required by authorities having jurisdiction except where they are specifically indicated to be the Owner’s responsibility, or are provided by another identified entity.

1. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections, tests, or other quality-control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was Contractor's responsibility.

a. The Contractor shall correct deficiencies in work that inspections and laboratory test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements.

b. The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the Contractor's responsibility where required tests performed on original construction indicated noncompliance with Contract Document requirements.

2. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

a. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and similar services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Provide access to the Work. b. Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. c. Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require

testing or assist the agency in taking samples. d. Provide and maintain for the sole use of the Special Inspector or Special Inspectors

adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of test samples on the Project Site.

e. Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency.

f. Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site. g. The Contractor shall designate a representative (the superintendent or an assistant

to the superintendent) who shall be the direct point-of-contact with the Special Inspector during each phase of the work. Discrepancies noted during the progress of the work will be reported to the Contractor’s representative for corrective action. Communications given by the Special Inspector to the Contractor’s representative shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.

B. Special Inspector Responsibilities:



1. The Special Inspector shall conduct and interpret tests, state in each report whether test specimens comply with requirements, specifically state any deviations therefrom, and record work required and performed to correct deficiencies.

2. The Special Inspector will keep records of all inspection and tests which will be furnished to the Building Official, the Architect, and the Structural Engineer of Record.

3. The Special Inspector shall notify the Architect, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. All discrepancies will be brought to the immediate attention of the Contractor for correction. If discrepancies are not corrected, the discrepancies will be brought to the attention of the Building Official and the Structural Engineer of Record.

4. A final report documenting completion of all required special inspections and corrections of any discrepancies noted will be submitted to the Building Official by the Special Inspector prior to, and as a condition of, issuance of the Certificate of Use and Occupancy.

5. The Special Inspector shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.

C. Special Inspections Testing Agent Responsibilities: The independent agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Sections shall cooperate with the Architect and the Contractor in performance of the agency's duties. The testing agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Shall not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

D. Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform inspection, tests and similar services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. In addition the Contractor and each agency shall coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests.

1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar activities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. The Special Inspector and the Independent Testing Agency shall submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service to the Architect, unless the Contractor is responsible for this service. If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service through the Contractor.

1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the authority so directs.

2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are not limited to, the following:



a. Date of issue. b. Project title and number. c. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. f. Designation of the Work and test method. g. Identification of product and Specification Section. h. Complete inspection or test data. i. Test results and an interpretation of test results. j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing. k. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies

with Contract Document requirements. l. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. m. Recommendations on retesting.


A. Qualification for Special Inspector: The Special Inspector, if other than the Engineer of Record, shall be a Registered Professional Engineer, Licensed in the State of Virginia, experienced in performing special inspections and shall be approved by the Architect. The qualifications of all personnel performing Special Inspection activities are also subject to the approval of the Building Official. The credentials of all Inspectors and testing technicians shall be provided if requested.

B. Qualifications for Testing Service Agencies / Special Inspector: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, that are prequalified as complying with the American Council of Independent Laboratories' "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" and that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed.

1. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the Project is located.

2. Each independent Inspection and Testing Agency engaged on the Project shall demonstrate that it has the experience and capability to conduct the required field and laboratory testing without delaying the progress of the work. The minimum requirements shall be as follows:

a. American Concrete Institute - Level I Certified Concrete Field Testing Technician. This certification is appropriate for individuals performing concrete sampling, slump tests, air-content tests, temperature tests, unit weight tests, and casting compression test cylinders.

b. American Welding Society - Certified Welding Inspector (CWI). This certification is appropriate for individuals performing visual inspection of welds.

c. American Society of Non-Destructive Testing – Level II or III. This certification is appropriate for individuals performing ultra-sonic testing of welds.

d. Structural Masonry Special Inspector – certification by ICBO. e. Structural Steel and Welding Special Inspector – certification by ICBO. f. Spray-Applied Fireproofing Special Inspector – certification by ICBO. g. Reinforced Concrete Special Inspector – certification jointly sponsored by ACI,

ICBO, BOCA and SBCCI.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect repaired construction.

C. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services.


Spotsylvania County Special Inspections 2012

SCC rev. 04/29/16 - 45 -

SPOTSYLVANIA COUNTY SPECIAL INSPECTIONS PROGRAM

STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

Project Name: _________________________ Permit Number:______________________

Project Address: _______________________ Seismic Design Category:_______________

Permit Applicant: __________________________ VUSBC Edition:___________________ __________________________ Group: _________________________ __________________________ Construction Type: _______________

Building Owner: ______________________________________________________________ Name Company

Owner’s Address: _____________________________________________________________ Architect of Record: ___________________________________________________________

Name & License Company Structural Engineer of Record: __________________________________________________

Name & License Company Geotechnical Engineer of Record: ________________________________________________

Name & License Company Special Inspector: _______________________________________________________________

Name & License Company General Contractor: ____________________________________________________________

Name & License Company Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge: __________________________________________________________

Name & License Company

This Statement of Special Inspections is submitted as a condition for permit issuance in accordance with the International Building Code (IBC) as stated in the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (USBC). It includes a Schedule of Special Inspection Services applicable to this project as well as the name of the Special Inspector, and the identity of other testing laboratories or agencies intended to be retained for conducting these inspections.

The Special Inspector shall keep records of all inspections and shall furnish inspection reports to the building official, the registered design professional in responsible charge, the owner and the general contractor. All discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the General Contractor for correction. If such discrepancies are not corrected, the discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the building official and to the registered design professional in responsible charge prior to the completion of that phase of the work.

A Final Report of Special Inspections documenting completion of all required Special Inspections and correction of any discrepancies noted in the inspections shall be submitted prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy.

All fees and costs related to the performance of special professional services shall be the responsibility of the owner.

Reviewed by Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge: Registered Design Professional In Responsible Charge Seal

____________________________________________Signature & Date

Owner’s Authorization: Building Safety Department’s Acceptance:

____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ Signature & Date Signature & Date

Courtland High School Renovation6701 Smith Station RoadSpotsylvania, VA 22553 B

2012E

IIA

Shawn Hockaday, Spotsylvania County Public Schools

8720 Courthouse Road, Spotsylvania, VA 22553Roger D. Richardson 008056 BCWH, Inc.

Jeffrey S. Davis - 026187 Dunbar Milby Williams Pittman & Vaughan

Michael O. Noggle - 019495 - AGS

Spot

sylv

ania

Cou

nty

Spec

ial I

nspe

ctio

ns

2012

SCC

rev.

04/

29/1

6- 4

6 -

PRO

JEC

T N

AM

E:

APP

LIC

AB

LE

TO

TH

IS

PRO

JEC

T

PER

MIT

NU

MB

ER

: D

AT

E

MA

TE

RIA

L/A

CT

IVIT

Y

TY

PE O

F IN

SPE

CT

ION

Y

/N

EX

TE

NT

/RE

FER

EN

CE

A

GE

NT

CO

MPL

ETE

D

EA

RT

HW

OR

K (S

OIL

S)

Site p

repara

tion

(bu

ildin

g)

Fie

ld inspection o

f pro

per

excavation

F

ield

re

vie

w, IB

C 1

705

.6,

Soils

re

port

depth

an

d h

ave r

each

ed p

roper

mate

rial,

rem

oval of

dele

teri

ous m

ate

rial, e

tc.

Fill

mate

rial (b

uild

ing)

Cla

ssific

ation a

nd t

esting o

f f

ill m

ate

ria

ls

Fie

ld r

evie

w, IB

C 1

705

.6,

Soils

re

port

Fill

pla

cem

ent (b

uild

ing)

Fie

ld inspect sub

gra

de p

rio

r to

pla

cem

ent

Fie

ld r

evie

w, IB

C 1

705

.6,

Soils

re

port

of

com

pacte

d f

ill,

verify

pro

per

pre

para

tion

Fill

pla

cem

ent (b

uild

ing)

Co

nti

nu

ou

s v

erification

of

fill

mate

rials

and

Fie

ld r

evie

w, IB

C 1

705

.6,

Soils

re

port

maxim

um

lift th

ickness

Fill

com

paction (

bu

ildin

g)

Co

nti

nu

ou

s In-p

lace d

ry d

ensity tests

F

ield

re

vie

w, IB

C 1

705

.6,

Soils

re

port

Found

ation s

ubgra

de

F

ield

inspect sub

gra

de p

rio

r to

pla

cem

ent

Fie

ld r

evie

w, IB

C 1

705

.6,

Soils

re

port

of

concre

te, verify

beari

ng c

apacity

DR

IVE

N D

EE

P FO

UN

DA

TIO

N E

LE

ME

NT

S M

ate

rials

, siz

es &

len

gth

s

Co

nti

nu

ou

s v

erification

with d

ocum

ents

IB

C 1

705

.7,

So

ils r

eport

Test ele

ment capacitie

s

Dete

rmin

e c

apacitie

s o

n a

co

nti

nu

ou

s

basis

,

IBC

1705

.7,

So

ils r

eport

Cond

uct ad

ditio

nal te

sts

as r

equir

ed

Ele

ment in

sta

llatio

n

Co

nti

nu

ou

s o

bserv

ation o

f drivin

g

opera

tio

ns

IBC

1705

.7,

So

ils r

eport

Main

tain

com

ple

te &

accura

te r

ecord

s

Ele

ment surv

ey (

inclu

de

tip

& b

utt

C

on

tin

uo

us

observ

ation. R

ecord

# o

f blo

ws

ele

vs.)

, e

lem

ent lo

catio

ns &

per

ft.o

f penetr

atio

n, d

ete

rmin

e r

eq'd

pene

tr.

IBC

1705

.7,

So

ils r

eport

plu

mbness, T

yp

e &

siz

e o

f ham

mer

to a

ch

ieve d

esig

n c

ap.,

docum

ent dam

age

Ste

el e

lem

ents

A

dd

itio

nal in

spections in a

ccord

ance w

ith

IB

C 1

705

.7,

So

ils r

eport

IBC

Section 1

70

5.2

Concre

te e

lem

ents

& c

oncre

te

fille

d

Add

itio

nal in

spections in a

ccord

ance w

ith

IB

C 1

705

.7,

So

ils r

eport

ele

ments

IB

C S

ection 1

70

5.3

Specia

lty e

lem

ents

A

dd

itio

nal in

spections in a

ccord

ance w

ith

A

ppro

ve

d c

onstr

uction d

ocum

ents

the R

DP

in r

esp

onsib

le c

ha

rge

&

specific

ations

Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N

Spot

sylv

ania

Cou

nty

Spec

ial I

nspe

ctio

ns

2012

SCC

rev.

04/

29/1

6- 4

7 -

PRO

JEC

T N

AM

E:

APP

LIC

AB

LE

TO

TH

IS

PRO

JEC

T

PER

MIT

NU

MB

ER

: D

AT

E

MA

TE

RIA

L/A

CT

IVIT

Y

TY

PE O

F IN

SPE

CT

ION

Y

/N

EX

TE

NT

/RE

FER

EN

CE

A

GE

NT

CO

MPL

ETE

D

CA

ST-I

N-P

LA

CE

FO

UN

DA

TIO

N E

LE

ME

NT

S

Ele

ment in

sta

llatio

n

Co

nti

nu

ou

s o

bserv

ation o

f drilli

ng

opera

tio

ns

IBC

1705

.8,

So

ils r

eport

Main

tain

com

ple

te &

accura

te r

ecord

s

Ele

ment surv

ey,

ele

ment lo

cations

Co

nti

nu

ou

s o

bserv

ation. R

ecord

dia

mete

rs,

IBC

1705

.8,

So

ils r

eport

& p

lum

bness

bell

dia

mete

rs, le

ngth

s,

em

bedm

ent in

to

bedro

ck &

ade

qua

te e

nd

-bearin

g s

trata

capacity. R

ecord

concre

t o

r gro

ut

vo

lum

es.

Concre

te e

lem

ents

A

dd

itio

nal in

spections in a

ccord

ance w

ith

IB

C 1

705

.8,

So

ils r

eport

IBC

Section 1

70

5.3

CO

NC

RE

TE

M

ate

rials

R

evie

w p

rod

uct supp

lied v

ers

us

Subm

itta

l &

fie

ld r

evie

w

cert

ific

ate

s o

f com

plia

nce a

nd m

ix d

esig

n

IBC

1904

.2.2

, 19

10.2

, 1

910

.3

AC

I 3

18:C

h. 4

, 5.2

- 5

.4

Rein

forc

ing s

tee

l R

ebar

inspection

an

d

Fie

ld R

evie

w,

IBC

191

0.4

,

Fie

ld inspection o

f pla

cem

ent

AC

I 3

18:3

.5,

7.1

- 7

.7

Rein

forc

ing s

tee

l w

eld

ing

V

erify

weld

ab

ility

of

rein

forc

ing s

teel oth

er

Fie

ld R

evie

w,

AW

S D

1.4

,

than A

ST

M A

70

6

AC

I 3

18:3

.5.2

Anchors

wh

ere

allo

wa

ble

lo

ads

have

In

spection p

rior

to a

nd d

uri

ng

IB

C 1

908

.5,

190

9.1

been

incre

ased

pla

cem

ent of

concre

te

AC

I 3

18:8

.1.3

,21

.2.8

Form

work

, shoring &

resho

ring

F

ield

inspection o

f in

sta

llation

F

ield

Re

vie

w,

AC

I 318

:6.1

.1

Concre

ting o

pera

tio

ns &

pla

cem

ent

Co

nti

nu

ou

s f

ield

inspectio

n o

f pla

cem

ent,

F

ield

Re

vie

w,

AC

I 318

:5.9

-10,

inclu

din

g s

ho

tcre

te

pro

per

app

licatio

n tech

niq

ues

IBC

1910

.6,

191

0.7

, 19

10.8

When s

am

plin

g f

resh c

oncre

te t

o

Co

nti

nu

ou

s s

lum

p test, a

ir c

onte

nt te

st

and

F

ield

Re

vie

w,

IBC

191

0.1

0,

fabricate

str

eng

th t

est specim

ens

dete

rmin

e c

oncre

te tem

pera

ture

A

ST

M C

172, C

31,

AC

I 31

8:5

.6,5

.8

Concre

te c

uri

ng

F

ield

inspection o

f curing t

em

pera

ture

F

ield

Re

vie

w,

AC

I 318

:5.1

1-1

3,

and t

echn

iqu

es

IBC

1910

.9

Concre

te s

tre

ngth

E

valu

ation o

f in

-situ c

oncre

te s

trength

Lab.T

esting

, A

CI 3

18:6

.2

Anchors

in h

ard

en

ed c

oncre

te

Fie

ld inspection o

f in

sta

llation

IB

C 1

909

.1,

AC

I 318:3

.8.6

,8.1

.3,2

1.1

.8

N N N Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y

Spot

sylv

ania

Cou

nty

Spec

ial I

nspe

ctio

ns

2012

SCC

rev.

04/

29/1

6- 4

8 -

PRO

JEC

T N

AM

E:

APP

LIC

AB

LE

TO

TH

IS

PRO

JEC

T

PER

MIT

NU

MB

ER

: D

AT

E

MA

TE

RIA

L/A

CT

IVIT

Y

TY

PE O

F IN

SPE

CT

ION

Y

/N

EX

TE

NT

/RE

FER

EN

CE

A

GE

NT

CO

MPL

ETE

D

PRE

STR

ESS

ED

CO

NC

RE

TE

P

restr

essin

g f

orc

es

Co

nti

nu

ou

s inspection d

uri

ng a

pplic

ation

A

CI 3

18:1

8.2

0

of

pre

str

essin

g f

orc

es

Gro

utin

g o

f bo

nde

d p

restr

essin

g

Co

nti

nu

ou

s inspection d

uri

ng g

routing

A

CI 3

18:1

8.1

8.4

tend

ons in th

e s

eis

mic

forc

e

of

bonde

d p

restr

essin

g t

en

dons

resis

ting s

yste

m

PRE

CA

ST C

ON

CR

ET

E

Ere

ctio

n a

nd insta

llation

F

ield

inspection o

f in

-pla

ce p

recast

AC

I 3

18:C

h. 1

6

MA

SON

RY

(LE

VE

L 1

) S

ite p

repare

d m

ort

ar

pro

po

rtio

ns

Verify

as m

asonry

constr

uction

be

gin

s

Fie

ld r

evie

w,

AC

I 5

30.1

; A

rt. 2.6

A

Constr

uction o

f m

ort

ar

join

ts

Verify

as m

asonry

constr

uction

be

gin

s

Fie

ld r

evie

w,

AC

I 5

30.1

; A

rt. 3.3

B

Rebar,

co

nnecto

rs &

ancho

r lo

cation

V

erify

as m

asonry

constr

uction

be

gin

s

Fie

ld r

evie

w,

AC

I 5

30.1

; A

rt. 3.4

, 3.6

A

Pre

str

essin

g t

echn

iqu

e

Verify

as m

asonry

constr

uction

be

gin

s

Fie

ld R

evie

w,A

CI

530.1

; A

rt. 3.6

B

Gra

de a

nd s

ize o

f pre

str

essin

g

Verify

as m

asonry

constr

uction

be

gin

s

Fie

ld R

evie

w,A

CI

530.1

; A

rt. 2.4

B,

2.4

H

tend

ons a

nd a

nchora

ges

Siz

e &

location o

f str

uct. e

lem

ents

R

evie

w s

um

bitta

ls &

insp

ection

of

mate

rials

F

ield

Re

vie

w,

AC

I 530

.1;

Art

3.3

F

Type,

siz

e &

location o

f anchors

In

spection o

f anch

ora

ges

Fie

ld R

evie

w,

AC

I 530

; S

ec. 1.1

6.4

.3,

1.1

7.1

Specifie

d s

ize,

gra

de &

typ

e o

f re

inf.

R

evie

w s

um

bitta

ls &

insp

ection

of

mate

rials

F

ield

Re

vie

w,

AC

I 530

; S

ec. 1.1

6,

AC

I 5

30.1

; A

rt. 2.4

, 3.4

Weld

ing o

f re

info

rcin

g b

ars

C

on

tin

uo

us inspection o

f w

eld

ing p

rocess

Fie

ld R

evie

w,

AC

I 530

; S

ec. 2.1

.7.7

.2,

3.3

.3.4

(c)

Masonry

pro

tectio

n d

urin

g c

old

In

spection o

f pro

tectio

n techniq

ues

Fie

ld R

evie

w,

IBC

210

4.4

,

wea

ther

(bel

ow 4

0˚ F

) or h

ot

AC

I 5

30.1

; A

rt. 1.8

C, 1

.8D

wea

ther

(abo

ve 9

0˚ F

)

Pre

str

essin

g f

orc

e

Co

nti

nu

ou

sIn

sp.o

f app

lication

,measure

ment

Fie

ld R

evie

w,

AC

I 530

.1;

Art

. 3.6

B

Gro

ut space is c

lea

n

Verify

prior

to g

routing

F

ield

Re

vie

w,

AC

I 530

.1;

Art

. 3.2

D,

3.2

F

N N N Y YY N N Y Y Y Y Y N Y

Spot

sylv

ania

Cou

nty

Spec

ial I

nspe

ctio

ns

2012

SCC

rev.

04/

29/1

6- 4

9 -

PRO

JEC

T N

AM

E:

APP

LIC

AB

LE

TO

TH

IS

PRO

JEC

T

PER

MIT

NU

MB

ER

: D

AT

E

MA

TE

RIA

L/A

CT

IVIT

Y

TY

PE O

F IN

SPE

CT

ION

Y

/N

EX

TE

NT

/RE

FER

EN

CE

A

GE

NT

CO

MPL

ETE

D

MA

SON

RY

(LE

VE

L 1

) (C

ON

T.)

Pla

cem

ent of

rebar

& c

on

necto

rs,

Verify

prior

to g

routing

F

ield

Re

vie

w,

AC

I 530

; S

ec. 1.1

6,

pre

str

essin

g t

end

ons &

anchors

A

CI 5

30.1

; A

rt. 3.4

, 3.4

E, 3.6

A

Pro

port

ions o

f site

-pre

pare

d g

rout

&

Verify

prior

to g

routing

F

ield

Re

vie

w,

AC

I 530

.1;

Art

. 2.6

B

Pre

str

essin

g g

rout fo

r b

ond

ed

tend

ons.

Constr

uction o

f m

ort

ar

join

ts

Verify

prior

to g

routing

F

ield

Re

vie

w,

AC

I 530

.1;

Art

3.3

B

Gro

utin

g o

f pre

str

essin

g b

onded

C

on

tin

uo

us inspection o

f gro

ut

pla

cem

ent

Fie

ld R

evie

w,

AC

I 530

.1;

Art

3.5

, 3.6

C

tend

ons

Pre

para

tion o

f gro

ut specim

ens,

Peri

odic

observ

ation o

f pre

para

tions

Fie

ld R

evie

w,

IBC

210

5.2

.2, 210

5.3

, A

CI

mort

ar

specim

ens a

nd/o

r pri

sm

s

530.1

; A

rt. 1.4

B.2

a.3

, 1.4

B.2

.b.3

,

1.4

B.2

.c.3

, 1.4

B.3

, 1.4

B.4

Inspection c

om

plia

nce

V

erify

com

plia

nce w

ith r

eq'd

insp

ectio

n

Fie

ld R

evie

w,

AC

I 530

.1;

Art

. 1.5

pro

vis

ions o

f th

e c

onstr

uction d

ocum

ents

and t

he a

ppro

ve

d s

ubm

itta

ls

f'm &

f'a

ac

Verify

prior

to c

onstr

uction

A

CI 5

30.1

; A

rt. 1.4

B

Self-c

onsolid

atin

g g

rout

Co

nti

nu

ou

s inspection o

f slu

mp f

low

A

CI 5

30.1

; A

rt. 1.5

B.1

.b.3

& V

SI

as d

eliv

ere

d to t

he s

ite

MA

SON

RY

(LE

VE

L 2

) P

roport

ions o

f th

e s

ite

-mix

ed

mort

ar,

V

erify

fro

m the b

eg

inn

ing o

f m

asonry

F

ield

re

vie

w,

AC

I 5

30.1

; A

rt. 2.1

, 2.6

A-

C,

gro

ut a

nd p

restr

essin

g g

rou

t fo

r constr

uction

2

.4G

.1b

bond

ed t

end

ons

Pla

cem

ent of

masonry

units a

nd

V

erify

fro

m the b

eg

inn

ing o

f m

asonry

F

ield

re

vie

w,

AC

I 5

30.1

; A

rt. 3.3

B

constr

uction o

f m

ort

ar

join

ts

constr

uction

Pla

cem

ent of

rebar,

co

nnecto

rs

and

V

erify

fro

m the b

eg

inn

ing o

f m

asonry

F

ield

Re

vie

w,A

CI

530;

Sec. 1.1

6,

pre

str

essin

g t

end

ons &

anchora

ges

AC

I 5

30.1

; A

rt. 3.2

E,

3.4

, 3.6

A

Gro

ut space p

rior

to g

rou

tin

g

Co

nti

nu

ou

s inspection d

uri

ng

constr

uction

F

ield

Re

vie

w,

AC

I 530

.1;

Art

3.2

D,3

.2F

Y Y Y N N Y Y N N N N N

Spot

sylv

ania

Cou

nty

Spec

ial I

nspe

ctio

ns

2012

SCC

rev.

04/

29/1

6- 5

0 -

PRO

JEC

T N

AM

E:

APP

LIC

AB

LE

TO

TH

IS

PRO

JEC

T

PER

MIT

NU

MB

ER

: D

AT

E

MA

TE

RIA

L/A

CT

IVIT

Y

TY

PE O

F IN

SPE

CT

ION

Y

/N

EX

TE

NT

/RE

FER

EN

CE

A

GE

NT

CO

MPL

ETE

D

MA

SON

RY

(LE

VE

L 2

) (C

ON

T.)

Pla

cem

ent of

gro

ut

Co

nti

nu

ou

s inspection d

uri

ng

constr

uction

F

ield

Re

vie

w,

AC

I 530

.1;

Art

. 3.5

Pla

cem

ent of

pre

str

essin

g g

rout

Co

nti

nu

ou

s inspection d

uri

ng

constr

uction

F

ield

Re

vie

w,

AC

I 530

.1;

Art

. 3.6

C

Siz

e &

location o

f str

uct. e

lem

ents

R

evie

w s

um

bitta

ls &

insp

ection

of

mate

rials

F

ield

Re

vie

w,

AC

I 530

.1;

Art

3.3

F

Type,

siz

e &

location o

f anchors

C

on

tin

uo

us i

nspection o

f anchora

ges

Fie

ld R

evie

w,

AC

I 530

; S

ec. 1.1

6.4

.3,

1.1

7.1

Specifie

d s

ize,

gra

de &

typ

e o

f re

inf.

R

evie

w s

um

bitta

ls &

insp

ection

of

mate

rials

F

ield

Re

vie

w,

AC

I 530

; S

ec. 1.1

5,

anchor

bolts,t

end

ons &

anchors

A

CI 5

30.1

; A

rt. 2.4

, 3.4

Weld

ing o

f re

info

rcin

g b

ars

C

on

tin

uo

us inspection o

f w

eld

ing

pro

cess

Fie

ld R

evie

w,

AC

I 530

; S

ec. 2

.1.7

.7.2

,

3.3

.3.4

(b),

(c)

Pro

tection o

f m

asonry

duri

ng c

old

In

spection o

f pro

tectio

n techniq

ues

Fie

ld R

evie

w,

AC

I 530

.1;

Art

. 1.8

C,

1.8

D,

wea

ther

(tem

p. b

elow

40˚

F) o

r hot

wea

ther

(tem

p. a

bove

90˚

F)

Pre

str

essin

g f

orc

e

Co

nti

nu

ou

s inspection o

f applic

ation a

nd

F

ield

Re

vie

w,

AC

I 530

.1;

Art

. 3.6

B

measure

ment of

pre

str

essin

g f

orc

e

Pre

para

tion o

f gro

ut specim

ens,

Co

nti

nu

ou

s o

bserv

ation o

f pre

para

tio

ns

Fie

ld R

evie

w,

AC

I 530

.1;

Art

. 1.4

B.2

.9.3

,

mort

ar

specim

ens a

nd/o

r pri

sm

s

1.4

B.2

.b.3

, 1.4

B.2

.c.3

, 1.4

B.3

, 1.4

B.4

Inspection c

om

plia

nce

V

erify

com

plia

nce w

ith r

eq'd

insp

ectio

n

Fie

ld R

evie

w,

AC

I 530

.1;

Art

. 1.5

pro

vis

ions o

f th

e c

onstr

uction d

ocum

ents

and t

he a

ppro

ve

d s

ubm

itta

ls

f'm &

f'a

ac

Verify

prior

to c

onstr

uction &

every

50

00

A

CI 5

30.1

; A

rt. 1.4

B

square

ft. d

uri

ng c

ontr

uctio

n

Pre

mix

ed o

r pre

ble

nded

mort

ar

and

V

erify

pro

port

ions o

f m

ate

rials

as

deliv

ere

d

AC

I 5

30.1

; A

rt. 1.5

B

gro

ut

to

th

e s

ite

Self-c

onsolid

atin

g g

rout

Co

nti

nu

ou

s inspection o

f slu

mp f

low

A

CI 5

30.1

; A

rt. 1.5

B.1

.b.3

& V

SI

as d

eliv

ere

d to t

he s

ite

N N N N N N N N N N N N N

Spot

sylv

ania

Cou

nty

Spec

ial I

nspe

ctio

ns

2012

SCC

rev.

04/

29/1

6- 5

1 -

PRO

JEC

T N

AM

E:

APP

LIC

AB

LE

TO

TH

IS

PRO

JEC

T

PER

MIT

NU

MB

ER

: D

AT

E

MA

TE

RIA

L/A

CT

IVIT

Y

TY

PE O

F IN

SPE

CT

ION

Y

/N

EX

TE

NT

/RE

FER

EN

CE

A

GE

NT

CO

MPL

ETE

D

STR

UC

TU

RA

L S

TE

EL

Fabricato

rs o

f str

uctu

ral lo

ad

In

-pla

nt

inspection

of

deta

iled f

abrication

&

IB

C 1

704

.2.5

, 17

04.2

.5.1

beari

ng m

em

bers

& a

ssem

blie

s

qua

lity c

on

trol pro

ced

ure

s**

AIS

C C

ert

ifie

d

Verify

fabricato

r cert

ific

atio

n

AIS

C 3

60, C

h. N

Str

uctu

ral ste

el in

spections

verify

in a

ccord

ance w

ith th

e q

ualit

y

AIS

C 3

60, C

h. N

, IB

C 1

70

5.2

.1

assura

nce inspection r

equir

em

ents

of

AIS

C 3

60.

Inspection o

f w

eld

s

Inspections r

eq

uire

d p

rior

to w

eld

ing,

durin

g

AIS

C 3

60, C

h. N

, IB

C 1

70

5.2

.1

weld

ing a

nd a

fter

we

ldin

g

Hig

h-s

tren

gth

bo

lts (

HS

B)

Inspections r

eq

uire

d p

rior

to b

oltin

g,

durin

g

AIS

C 3

60, C

h. N

, IB

C 1

70

5.2

.1

boltin

g a

nd a

fter

boltin

g

Fra

me join

t d

eta

ils:

bra

cin

g a

nd

In

spection o

f jo

int de

tails

for

com

plia

nce

F

ield

re

vie

w, IB

C 1

704

.3.2

stiff

enin

g, m

em

ber

location &

join

t d

eta

ils a

t each

conn

ection

Cold

-form

ed s

teel tr

usses

Verify

insta

llation o

f te

mpora

ry b

racin

g

Appro

ve

d tru

ss s

ubm

itta

l, I

BC

1705

.2.2

.2

and p

erm

anent in

div

idu

al tr

uss m

em

ber

bra

cin

g.

STE

EL

CO

NST

RU

CT

ION

OT

HE

R T

HA

N S

TR

UC

TU

RA

L S

TE

EL

C

old

-form

ed s

teel d

eck

Mate

rial id

entification m

ark

ings &

S

ubm

itta

l &

fie

ld r

evie

w,

Ap

plic

able

Revie

w c

ert

ifie

d m

ill t

est re

port

A

ST

M m

ate

rial sta

ndard

s

Flo

or

and r

oof

deck w

eld

s

Peri

odic

inspectio

n o

f w

eld

ing p

rocess

Fie

ld R

evie

w,

IBC

170

5.2

.2.1

.1,

AW

S D

1.3

Weld

abili

ty o

f re

info

rcin

g s

teel

oth

er

Revie

w r

eport

of m

ate

rial p

ropert

ies &

F

ield

re

vie

w, IB

C 1

705

.2.2

.1.2

,

than A

ST

M A

70

6

perio

dic

inspection o

f w

eld

ing p

rocess

AW

S D

1.4

, A

CI

318

:3.5

.2

N Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y N

Spot

sylv

ania

Cou

nty

Spec

ial I

nspe

ctio

ns

2012

SCC

rev.

04/

29/1

6- 5

2 -

PRO

JEC

T N

AM

E:

APP

LIC

AB

LE

TO

TH

IS

PRO

JEC

T

PER

MIT

NU

MB

ER

: D

AT

E

MA

TE

RIA

L/A

CT

IVIT

Y

TY

PE O

F IN

SPE

CT

ION

Y

/N

EX

TE

NT

/RE

FER

EN

CE

A

GE

NT

CO

MPL

ETE

D

STE

EL

CO

NST

RU

CT

ION

OT

HE

R T

HA

N S

TR

UC

TU

RA

L S

TE

EL

(CO

NT

.)

Rein

forc

ing s

tee

l re

sis

ting f

lexura

l C

on

tin

uo

us inspection o

f w

eld

ing

pro

cess

Fie

ld r

evie

w, IB

C 1

705

.2.2

.1.2

,

& a

xia

l fo

rces in inte

rmedia

te a

nd

A

WS

D1.4

, A

CI

318

:3.5

.2

specia

l m

om

ent fr

am

es, and

boun

dary

ele

ments

of

specia

l

str

uctu

ral w

alls

of

concre

te a

nd

shear

rein

forc

em

ent.

She

ar

rein

forc

em

ent

Co

nti

nu

ou

s inspection o

f w

eld

ing

pro

cess

Fie

ld r

evie

w, IB

C 1

705

.2.2

.1.2

,

AW

S D

1.4

, A

CI

318

:3.5

.2

Oth

er

rein

forc

ing s

tee

l P

eri

odic

inspectio

n o

f w

eld

ing p

rocess

Fie

ld r

evie

w, IB

C 1

705

.2.2

.1.2

,

AW

S D

1.4

, A

CI

318

:3.5

.2

WO

OD

Fabricato

rs o

f pre

fabricate

d

In-p

lant

inspection

of

deta

iled f

abrication

&

IB

C 1

704

.2.5

str

uctu

ral e

lem

ents

qua

lity c

on

trol pro

ced

ure

s**

Pre

fabricate

d s

tructu

ral e

lem

ents

R

evie

w s

ubm

itta

l a

nd v

eri

fy insta

llation

IB

C 1

704

.5.5

Hig

h-l

oa

d d

iap

hra

gm

s d

esig

ned

V

erify

sh

eath

ing g

rade &

th

ickness, verify

IB

C 1

704

.5.5

.1

in a

ccord

ance w

ith T

ab

le 2

306.2

fr

am

ing m

em

ber

siz

e a

t a

djo

inin

g p

anel

edges, fa

ste

ner

dia

mete

r &

len

gth

, num

ber

of

faste

ner

lines a

nd f

aste

ner

spacin

g.

Meta

l-pla

te c

onnecte

d w

oo

d

trusses

Verify

insta

llation o

f te

mpora

ry b

racin

g

Appro

ve

d tru

ss s

ubm

itta

l, I

BC

1705

.5.2

and p

erm

anent in

div

idu

al tr

uss m

em

ber

bra

cin

g.

N N N N N N N

Spot

sylv

ania

Cou

nty

Spec

ial I

nspe

ctio

ns

2012

SCC

rev.

04/

29/1

6- 5

3 -

SPR

AY

ED

FIR

E-R

ESI

STA

NT

MA

TE

RIA

LS

Surf

ace c

ond

itio

ns

Fie

ld r

evie

w o

f str

uctu

ral m

em

ber

surf

ace

IB

C 1

705

.13.2

conditio

ns p

rior

to a

pp

lication

App

licatio

n

Fie

ld r

evie

w o

f app

lication o

pera

tio

ns

IBC

1705

.13.3

Thic

kness

Fie

ld r

evie

w o

f app

lied t

hic

kness

IBC

1705

.13.4

, A

ST

M E

60

5

Density

Fie

ld r

evie

w o

f m

ate

rial d

en

sity

IBC

1705

.13.5

, A

ST

M E

60

5

Bon

d s

treng

th

Fie

ld r

evie

w o

f cohesiv

e/a

dhesiv

e b

ond

IB

C 1

705

.13.6

, A

ST

M E

60

5

MA

STIC

AN

D IN

TU

ME

SCE

NT

FIR

E R

ESI

STA

NT

CO

AT

ING

S S

tructu

ral e

lem

ents

& d

ecks

Fie

ld r

evie

w o

f app

lication/insta

llation

IB

C 1

705

.14,

AW

CI 12-B

EX

TE

RIO

R IN

SUL

AT

ION

AN

D F

INIS

H S

YST

EM

S (E

IFS)

A

pp

licatio

n

Fie

ld r

evie

w o

f app

lication/insta

llation

IB

C 1

705

.15

EIF

S W

AT

ER

-RE

SIS

TIV

E B

AR

RIE

R C

OA

TIN

G

App

licatio

n o

ver

sh

eath

ing

F

ield

re

vie

w o

f app

lication/insta

llation

IB

C 1

705

.15.1

, A

ST

M E

25

70

SPE

CIA

L C

ASE

S A

ltern

ative M

ate

rials

& S

yste

ms

As r

equ

este

d b

y B

uild

ing O

ffic

ial

IBC

1705

.1.1

SEIS

MIC

RE

SIST

AN

CE

S

eis

mic

Requ

irem

ents

A

s r

equ

ired a

nd

specifie

d b

y R

DP

IB

C 1

705

.11 &

170

5.1

2

SMO

KE

CO

NT

RO

L

Specia

l in

sp

ectio

n o

f sm

oke

contr

ol

1.Le

akage testing a

nd r

ecord

ing o

fdevic

e

IBC

1705

.17

syste

ms (

2 s

tages )

lo

cation.

2.

Pre

ssure

diffe

rence te

sting

, flow

measure

ments

, &

dete

ction

and c

ontr

ol

verification

4

Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N

Spot

sylv

ania

Cou

nty

Spec

ial I

nspe

ctio

ns

20

12

SCC

rev.

04/

29/1

6 - 5

4 -

IN

SP

EC

TIO

N A

GE

NT

S

FIR

M

AD

DR

ES

S

TE

LE

PH

ON

E

Specia

l In

specto

r

Specia

l In

specto

r

Specia

l In

specto

r

Specia

l In

specto

r

Specia

l In

specto

r

Specia

l In

specto

r

Testing L

ab

ora

tory

Testing L

ab

ora

tory

Testing L

ab

ora

tory

* T

he q

ualif

icat

ions

of t

he S

peci

al In

spec

tor a

nd T

estin

g La

bora

torie

s are

subj

ect t

o th

e ap

prov

al o

f the

Bui

ldin

g O

ffici

al.

** In

spec

tion

of q

ualit

y co

ntro

l pro

cedu

res r

equi

red

only

if fa

bric

ator

is n

ot re

gula

rly in

spec

ted

by a

n in

depe

nden

t ins

pect

ion

agen

cy.

Add

ition

al sp

ecia

l ins

pect

ions

are

requ

ired

for s

eism

ic re

sist

ance

in a

ccor

danc

e w

ith se

ctio

n IB

C 1

705.

11 &

170

5.12

. _

__ Y

es _

__ N

o If

addi

tiona

l ins

pect

ions

are

requ

ired

for s

eism

ic re

sist

ance

, the

regi

ster

ed d

esig

n pr

ofes

sion

al in

resp

onsi

ble

char

ge sh

all i

nclu

de th

e re

quire

d in

spec

tions

in

an

atta

chm

ent t

o th

is fo

rm, a

nd a

writ

ten

stat

emen

t of r

espo

nsib

ility

from

the

cont

ract

or is

requ

ired

in a

ccor

danc

e w

ith IB

C S

ectio

n 17

04.4

.

Rev

iew

ed b

y R

egis

tere

d D

esig

n Pr

ofes

sion

al in

Res

pons

ible

Cha

rge:

R

egis

tere

d D

esig

n Pr

ofes

sion

al

In

Res

pons

ible

Cha

rge

Seal

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_

____

____

____

____

____

Sign

atur

e

Dat

e

Acc

epte

d by

Bui

ldin

g Sa

fety

Dep

artm

ent:

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

_

Sign

atur

e

Dat

e


TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-1

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.

1.4 USE CHARGES

A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

D. Existing on-site utilities may be used by the Contractor for reasonable and customary building operation and construction purposes as long as the privilege is not abused. Utilities required above and beyond those present on site shall be procured and paid for by the Contractor.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.



B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.


A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Building and Site Use Plan: Show temporary facilities, temporary utility hookups, staging areas, and temporary toilet facilities for construction personnel.

B. Life Safety / Egress Plan:

1. Show fencing at perimeter of construction areas and site areas utilized by the Contractor for construction operations. Show gates and other means provided and control access into and out of such areas.

2. Show temporary partitions, barriers and signage used to maintain egress to exits.

3. Indicate measures employed to maintain functionality of existing life safety and existing fire protection systems. Include areas of demolition, areas impacted by construction operations, and areas where temporary egress paths are provided.

4. Show temporary partitions, barriers and signage employed to restrict access to construction work areas, and to isolate construction noise, dirt, dust and debris from areas of ongoing occupancy by the Owner.

5. Coordinate with sequence of construction for phased construction and occupancy of designated areas of the project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch , 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete bases for supporting posts.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND STORAGE

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Contractor’s Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:



1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.

2. Meeting space of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 12 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack board.

3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68

to 72 deg F. 5. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. 6. Telephone service (one line) and high speed internet service.

C. Owner's Field Office: The Contractor shall provide and set up a separate office area within the Contractor’s Field Office for the Owner's use until Substantial Completion or as otherwise indicated by the Owner. Minimum size 10'x10'.

D. The Contractor shall have a computer at the site with high speed internet connection for

transmitting and receiving email and electronic data transfers.

E. The Contractor shall have a printer and digital camera at the site to support construction and

administrative activities.

F. Ground storage areas on the property will be available in areas as designated by the Owner

and indicated in the documents. The contractor shall be responsible for securing materials in

storage areas.

G. Demolished material and debris shall not be allowed to accumulate on-site and shall be removed

in a timely manner, not to exceed 7 calendar days.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

3. Permanent HVAC and/or existing system: If Owner authorizes use of permanent or existing HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.



1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

1. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will not be permitted.

E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

G. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.

H. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. Power supply will be limited to what is available (and is spare capacity) in the existing service. The contractor shall provide any additional power if required.

1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.

I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.



1. Temporary lighting levels shall be equivilant to levels anticipated at project completion when installing finishes including but not limited to paint, ceramic tile and epoxy flooring.

2. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

J. Communications List:

1. Provide and post emergency communications list and phone numbers as follows:

a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor’s emergency contact list e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.

K. Electronic Communication Service: Provide digital communication and high speed internet service. Service shall be available to architect and Owner’s representative.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide non-combustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roadways and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.

1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas.

2. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing.

C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment to the building and to fire hydrants 3. Maintain access to building facilities for trash and recycling, and deliveries to Cafeteria /

Kitchen and building services.

D. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.



E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

F. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs as indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Do not operate crane or hoist over occupied portions of the building. Do not hoist materials over occupied portions of the building or site.

2. Provide Owner with a plan indicating location of hoist, lifts and cranes. Coordinate scheduling of such operations with Owner.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."

B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing."

C. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

D. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to adequately and safely enclose areas of construction operations.

E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

1. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining building and site security in the area of



construction operations and shall secure areas during construction. The Contractor shall take necessary actions to maintain project security and to defer theft and vandalism in the areas of construction operations.

2. Any opening in an outside or project perimeter wall or roof shall be made secure from intrusion. At the end of day's work close temporary enclosures and securely lock up the construction area.

F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

1. Contractor shall erect suitable barricades and take any other precautions necessary to fully protect the public and other trades from dangerous conditions involved with his work.

G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Any opening in the building envelope including the exterior wall or roof shall be made watertight before the end of the daily work period.

2. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures.

H. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise.

1. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas. 2. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. 3. Protect air-handling equipment. 4. Weather strip openings. 5. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

I. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and fire-protection program for

personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities to minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Coordinate with phased construction operations and project delivery.

C. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.



1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000-1

SECTION 016000 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.


1. Division 01 Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Division 01 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract

closeout. 4. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and

installations specified to be warranted.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents, proposed by Contractor.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.



D. Substitution Request: Request for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered a Substitution Request. The following are not considered substitutions:

1. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or the Architect. 2. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents. 3. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders

issued by governing authorities. 4. Reference Supplementary General Conditions and Supplementary Instructions to Bidders

for additional information

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Contractor shall submit a “Substitution Request Form – After Receipt of Bids” for all substitutions to be considered after receipt of bids.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use form provided at end of Section.

2. No substitutions will be considered unless submitted using the referenced “Substitution Request Form – After Receipt of Bids.”

3. All substitutions must be submitted by the Contractor, and shall include the Contractor’s certification and signature. a. Substitution requests submitted directly from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors,

manufacturers, vendors, installer, and suppliers will be rejected.

4. Failure to submit the form, or a fully completed form, shall result in the rejection of the proposed substitution.

5. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.

f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.



l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

6. If the proposed substitution is found to be acceptable to the Architect, the request will be forwarded to the Owner for their approval.

7. If the Owner approves the substitution, it will then be included in a Change Order or Construction Change Directive.

8. Only substitutions included in Change Orders or Construction Change Directives shall be allowed to be included in the Work

9. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated.

B. Comparable Product Requests: Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with other products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent



overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that

are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's.

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.

8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.

9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.

10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected



from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements.

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 30 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when all of the following conditions are satisfied. If all of the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. 1) Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect

for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.

f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.

g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.

i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

j. If requested substitution involves or impacts more than one subcontractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all subcontractors involved.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.



2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, appearance, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.



SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM FOLLOWS



SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM - AFTER RECEIPT OF BIDS Contractor requests for substitutions will be considered upon receipt of the completed Substitution Request Form below along with all required supporting documentation. Substitutions made without completion of this form shall be returned to the Contractor.

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

PROJECT:

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST NO.: DATE:

Description:

Section Number: Page: Paragraph:

The undersigned Contractor request consideration of the following PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION:

Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. The undersigned Contractor certifies that the following paragraphs, unless modified by attachments, are correct:

1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings. 2. The undersigned Contractor will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering

design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. 3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or

specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution.

The undersigned Contractor further states that the function, appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to the specified item.

Subcontractor Approval:

Firm:

Address:

Signature:

Date:

Contractor Approval:

Firm:

Address:

Signature:

Date:

Architect/Engineer:

No Exceptions Taken

Submit Specified Item

Furnish as Corrected

Revise and Resubmit

Rejected

Signature:

Date:

Owner Approval:

Signature:

Date:


EXECUTION 017300-1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General installation of products.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.

B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping, underground electrical services and natural gas piping.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

3. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by Dominion Virginia Power, Telecommunications and Data Companies serving Project site.

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


EXECUTION 017300-2

Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at


EXECUTION 017300-3

heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.



CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 1

SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.


1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to

cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services, Mechanical/Electrical Systems and Life Safety Systems: List

services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted. Indicate how continuity of services will be maintained.

6. Communications, Auxiliary Services, AV, IT and Data Systems: List services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted. Indicate how continuity of services will be maintained.

7.



8. Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.


A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the following:

1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-suppression systems. 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5. Control systems. 6. Communication systems. 7. Electrical wiring systems. 8. Life Safety Systems 9. AV, IT and Data Systems

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following:

1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

E. Maintain continuity of building systems to ensure continued, uninterrupted operation of the facility.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or



adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections

where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather tight condition.

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700-1

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning.


1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,

Final Completion construction photographs [and photographic negatives], damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

4. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

5. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

6. Complete startup testing of systems. 7. Submit test/adjust/balance reports. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 10. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. 11. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled



requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes.

a. Provide two hard copies of manual and a CD containing an electronic version of the manual in PDF format to the owner after completion of the engineer's review.

b. Provide two sets of record drawings when work is completed.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will process a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Page number.



1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

C. Additional copy of each warranty shall be included in Operation and Maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.


3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-1

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of systems and equipment.


1. Division 01 Section 017700 “Close Out Procedures”

2. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Final Submittal: Submit two (2) copies of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15days after final inspection.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:



1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

6. Copy of product and/or system warranty. See Section 017700.

2.2 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in



individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.



1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

C. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 -1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications.


1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 3. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents

of the Work in those Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup

before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. d. Revisions to electrical circuitry. e. Actual equipment locations. f. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.


PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 -2

g. Changes made following Architect's written orders. h. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.

3. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Provide two sets of Record Specifications. 2. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect’s reference during normal working hours.



DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900-1

SECTION 017900 – DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.


1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Instruction Program: Submit two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. Prior to start of training, submit completed Operations & Maintenance Manuals and two complete training manuals for Architect's review and Owner's use.

B. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

C. Demonstration and Training Videotapes: Submit one copy within seven days of end of each training module.

1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of photographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date videotape was recorded.


A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and



maintenance procedures and training.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master.

1. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project Record Documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

2. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Special operating instructions and procedures.

3. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Normal shutdown instructions.



4. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

5. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual.

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.

C. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDING

A. Video Format: Provide high-quality digital recording in format acceptable to Owner.



ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS ABATEMENT 018000-C

ASBESTOS REPORT / ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS ABATEMENT AND HAZARDOUS

MATERIALS MANAGEMENT SPECIFICATION

“Asbestos-Containing Materials Abatement Specifications For Courtland High School Renovations” dated October

24, 2017 has been prepared for the Owner for this project by TJL Environmental Health Consultants, Inc, 2304

Jefferson Park Avenue, Charlottesville, Virginia 22903. Asbestos abatement will be performed under this

Contract. This information is contained in the Project Manual to assist the Contractor in the scheduling,

sequencing and execution of the asbestos abatement and the work.

The scope of this project includes selective demolition. Construction personnel shall be aware of the presence of

these materials and shall employ demolition work practices complying with OSHA and applicable regulatory

requirements.

Courtland High School Renovations ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS ABATEMENT 018000-1

ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS ABATEMENT SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

COURTLAND HIGH SCHOOL RENOVATIONS

SPOTSYLVANIA COUNTY SCHOOLS SPOTSYLVANIA, VIRGINIA

ASBESTOS PROJECT DESIGN BY

T. JOEL LOVING, M.S., C.E.I. ASBESTOS PROJECT DESIGNER VIRGINIA LICENSE #3305-000025

TJL ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH CONSULTANTS, INC. CHARLOTTESVILLE, VA 22903

October 24, 2017


COURTLAND HIGH SCHOOL RENOVATIONS SECTION 018000 - ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS ABATEMENT Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. SECTION 18000 INDEX PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.02 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS 1.03 PROJECT COORDINATION 1.04 DEFINITION OF TERMS 1.05 CODES AND REGULATIONS 1.06 PERSONNEL PROTECTION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION OF OWNER’S PERSONNEL AND PROPERTY 3.02 AIR MONITORING 3.03 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OPERATIONS 3.04 DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTE 3.05 DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES 3.06 ALTERNATE USE OF GLOVE BAGS PART 4 - LEGAL RIGHTS, ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 4.01 OWNER’S RIGHTS 4.02 OWNER’S INDUSTRIAL HYGIENIST’S RIGHTS 4.03 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS PART 5 - INDUSTRIAL HYGIENIST REPORT FORMS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK The work to be performed under this contract comprises the satisfactory completion of all items specified herein within the time period specified herein including the following: A. Furnishing of all labor, tools, materials, equipment, and waste disposal services

necessary for and reasonably incidental to the completion of removal and disposal of asbestos-containing materials (ACM) within the Courtland High School Building. Types of ACM to be removed include floor tiles and related mastics, red sealant on metal duct joints, tan sealant on pipe wrap joints, composite casework tops, fume hood panels, tack/chalk/white board mastics, and fire-rated doors.

B. The work as specified herein shall be performed as required to accommodate final EPA

AHERA and NESHAP air clearance testing of all interior work sites where standard negative air enclosures have been established, and satisfactory visual inspections and environmental air testing for all areas where there is asbestos abatement of non-friable ACM removed in-tact without disturbance, and ACM abatement which takes place on exterior building components. None of the negative air enclosures shall be removed until visual inspections and air clearance testing results are satisfactory for the contained work site(s), nor the barricades removed until the final visual inspections and environmental testing results are satisfactory for areas not inside negative air containments.

C. The specific daily work schedules and timing for each area of ACM abatement in this

project shall be coordinated with and approved by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist (Project Designer/Monitor) and then specified in the Contractor's asbestos abatement plan prior to commencing work.

D. Description of Asbestos-Containing Materials to be removed. Known ACM and presumed ACM (PACM) that will be impacted by these renovations and additions are listed below, along with approximate locations, descriptions and asbestos concentrations/forms. Determination of the actual quantities of these ACM and related ACM debris shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

ACM TYPE

APPROXIMATE LOCATION(S) ASBESTOS CONTENT

12”x12” and 18”x18” Floor tiles and related mastics (See *NOTE below)

Throughout the original 1978 part of this high school building, both where exposed as well as beneath carpeting, casework, newer vinyl floor coverings, etc. (Not beneath ceramic or concrete flooring)

3-5% Chrysotile Asbestos in floor tiles 2% Chrysotile Asbestos in mastics (All are currently non-friable, in-tact and in stable condition)

Red sealant on metal HVAC duct joints and seams (See *NOTE below)

Throughout the original 1978 part of this high school building; in mechanical rooms, above lay-in ceilings, inside chases, etc.

2% Chrysotile Asbestos (All are currently non-friable, in-tact and in stable condition)

Tan sealant on pipe insulation wrap joints (See *NOTE below)

Throughout the original 1978 part of this high school building; in mechanical rooms, above lay-in ceilings, inside chases, etc.

4-5% Chrysotile Asbestos (All are currently non-friable, in-tact and in stable condition)


Composite casework bench tops (See *NOTE below)

Laboratory classrooms and pottery art room 10-20% Chrysotile Asbestos (All are currently non-friable, in-tact and in stable condition)

Panels inside chemical fume hoods (See *NOTE below)

Laboratory classrooms 15% Chrysotile Asbestos (All are currently non-friable, in-tact and in stable condition)

Fire rated door insulation (See **NOTE below)

Insulation inside fire-rated doors in corridors, mechanical rooms and stairwells throughout the original part of this highs school building

Presumed ACM (Likely friable, if present, but currently well encased)

Glue pucks (See **NOTE below)

Behind chalk, tack and white boards throughout the original 1978 part of this high school building

Presumed ACM (Likely non-friable, if present, and currently well encased)

*NOTE: All of these ACM, including those that are currently accessible (including above lay-in ceiling tiles), as well as those which may be inside chases, above plaster ceilings, etc., shall be removed under this contract. **NOTE: All of these presumed ACM shall be removed as part of this contract. These presumed ACM shall be tested by the Owner’s IH once access to them has been made by the Contractor. If they are confirmed positive ACM by such testing, they shall be removed by the Contractor, in accordance with these specified methods, as part of the base bid for this Contract. If they are confirmed negative, they can be removed as non-ACM, with an appropriate unit price per door or per board credit to the Owner by the Contractor, as approved by the Owner or Owner’s Representative.

In the ACM inspection of the original 1978 part of this building, no asbestos was detected within samples of the following materials:

1. Acoustic lay-in ceiling tiles 2. Pipe fitting insulation cement 3. Concrete block surface filler 4. Cementitious ceiling plaster 5. 4” Vinyl base cove and related mastic 6. Drywall and related joint compound 7. Sprayed-on fireproofing 8. Stair treads and related mastic in stairwells 9. Acoustic ceiling surfacing material in auditorium 10. Joint sealant on fiberglass HVAC duct wrap joints 11. Exterior caulking around window frames, door frames, and along expansion joints

E. Quantity of Asbestos-Containing Materials

The actual quantities and measurements of the ACM and related debris within the areas listed above will be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall deal with any encounters of these ACM in full accordance with all applicable federal and state laws, rules and regulations. All related costs shall be included in the basic contract price. If, during the course of work, the Contractor encounters other materials in this building that are not specified above, which are suspected to contain asbestos, and are not on the lists of materials that were previously tested and determined negative, he shall halt work and immediately notify the Owner's Industrial Hygienist for a positive determination of asbestos content and instruction as to procedure.


F. Construction Schedule

The Contractor shall anticipate working overtime (including nights, weekends, or holidays) as necessary to complete the work on schedule.

G. Description of Work

Asbestos abatement work includes the complete and proper removal and disposal of asbestos-containing materials, using the procedures specified by these contract documents. Asbestos abatement work for the specified ACM and within the specified areas shall be performed under the base bid.

H. Project Conditions

The building (outside of enclosed work sites) will be occupied at any given time. All such occupants shall be notified of the locations of asbestos abatement activities and the schedule of such activities in accordance with these specifications, and as required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 (k). The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner and other contractors on site all activities such as waste load-out or periods of electrical power outage or usage that could effect nearby work areas or buildings.

I. Save Harmless

The Contractor shall agree to indemnify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents, employees, the Architect, and the Owner's Industrial Hygienist (Asbestos Abatement Project Designer/ Monitor) and all its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions or claims of any character, name and description brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person, persons or property by or from the said Contractor or by or in consequence of any neglect in safeguarding the Work, or through the use of unacceptable materials in the construction of improvements, or by or on account of any act or omission, neglect, misconduct or negligence of the Contractor.

1.02 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

The following shall be submitted for review prior to commencing work involving asbestos materials:*

A. Asbestos Abatement Plan

Submit a detailed plan of work procedures to be used in the removal and demolition of materials containing asbestos. Such plan shall include for each work site, location of enclosed areas, change rooms, layout of change rooms, interface of trades involved in the construction, sequencing of asbestos related work, disposal plan, type of wetting agent and asbestos sealer to be used, air monitoring procedures and a detailed description of the method to be employed in order to control pollution and decontaminate building materials. This plan must be acceptable to the Owner's Industrial Hygienist prior to the start of any asbestos work. The work plan shall be coordinated with the project phasing and the Contractor’s sequencing of the work.

B. Testing Laboratory

Submit the name, address and telephone number of the testing laboratory selected for analyzing personal air monitoring filters along with certification that persons counting the samples have successfully completed NIOSH course #582 or a proven equivalent, that the lab has been judged proficient by successful participation in the National Institute for


Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Proficiency Analytical Testing (PAT) Program, and is licensed by the Virginia Department of Professional and Occupational Regulation (DPOR) as an Asbestos Analytical Laboratory.

C. Landfill Plan

Submit written evidence that the landfill to be used for disposal is approved to accept asbestos by the USEPA and Virginia Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ).

D. Supervisory Personnel Listing

Submit the name, work and home telephone number of each full-time asbestos abatement project supervisor who will be working on the project, and evidence that he or she has met the training, licensing, and "Competent Person" requirements as specified herein.

E. Contingency Plan

Submit a copy of the contingency plan that will be used for emergency actions during this project as specified herein.

F. Notifications of Regulatory Agencies

Submit copies of all asbestos abatement notification forms sent to regulatory agencies as specified herein.

G. Material Safety Data Sheets

The Contractor shall submit the Material Safety Data Sheet, or equivalent, in accordance with the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) for each surfactant, encapsulating material, spray glue, mastic removal agent, or other chemical products for use on the work. Include a separate attachment for each sheet indicating the specific worker protective equipment proposed for use with the material indicated.

* NOTE: No work shall be performed nor any payment shall be approved under this Contract until

the Contractor has submitted all of these items and they have been approved by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist (I.H.). To verify that such submittals have been approved and are complete, an "Asbestos Abatement Contractor Submittals Review" form shall be completed by the Owner's I.H. and submitted to the Owner's Representative and/or Architect. A copy of this form can be found in PART 5 of these asbestos abatement specifications.

1.03 PROJECT COORDINATION

A. Administrative and Supervisory Personnel

The Contractor shall provide a full-time Asbestos Abatement Project Supervisor who is experienced in administration and supervision of asbestos abatement projects including work practices, protective measures for building and personnel, disposal procedures, etc. This person is the "Competent Person" as required by OSHA in 29 CFR 1926.1101(o) for the Contractor and is the Contractor's representative responsible for compliance with all applicable federal, state and local regulations, particularly those relating to asbestos containing materials. This person must have successfully completed an EPA and Va. State accredited course in the supervision of asbestos abatement projects, have had a minimum of two (2) years on-the-job training, be licensed as a project supervisor by the Virginia DPOR, and meet any additional requirements set forth in 29 CFR 1926.1101(o) for a "Competent Person."


B. Daily Log

1. The Project Supervisor shall keep a daily log book used to describe in writing each

day's activities, in addition to all special events as noted below. The log shall also include times of work, names of persons entering work sites, discussions with Owner's Representatives, and all other such matters relating to the ongoing work.

2. The daily log book shall be turned over to the Owner upon the completion of work

related to this contract, and prior to final payment for work performed.

C. Special Reports

1. General: Except as otherwise indicated the Contractor shall submit special reports directly to Owner's Representative within one day of occurrence requiring special report, with copy to others affected by occurrence.

2. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of unusual and significant nature occurs

at site (examples: failure of negative pressure system rupture of temporary enclosures, etc.), the Contractor shall prepare and submit a special report listing chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information to the Owner's Industrial Hygienist. When such events are known or predictable in advance, advise Owner's Industrial Hygienist in advance at earliest possible date.

3. Reporting Accidents: The Contractor shall prepare and submit reports of any

significant accidents to the Owner's Representative. Record and document data and actions; comply with industry standards. For this purpose, a significant accident is defined to include events where personal injury is sustained, or where the event posed a significant threat of loss or personal injury.

D. Contingency Plan

1. The Contractor shall prepare a contingency plan for emergencies including fire,

accident, power failure, negative air system failure, supplied air system failure, or any other event that may require modification or abridgment of decontamination or work area isolation procedures. Include in plan specific procedures for decontamination or work area isolation. Note that nothing in this specification should impede safe exiting or providing of adequate medical attention in the event of an emergency.

2. The Contractor shall post this plan in clean room of each personnel decontamination

unit. It shall also contain telephone numbers and locations of emergency services including but not limited to fire, ambulance, doctor, hospital, police, power company, and telephone company.

E. Notifications

1. In accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101(k), the Contractor shall notify all other

entities at the job site of the nature of the asbestos abatement activities, location of asbestos-containing materials, requirements relative to asbestos set forth in these specifications and applicable regulations.

2. The records of all such notifications shall be maintained in the Contractor's daily log.


1.04 DEFINITION OF TERMS

A. Contract Terms

1. Architect:

BCWH Architects 1840 West Broad Street, Suite 400 Richmond, VA 23220 804-545-7494 www.bcwh.com

2. Contractor's Asbestos Project Supervisor: The Contractor's representative at the

work site. This person will be the "Competent Person" required by OSHA in 29 CFR 1926.1101(o), and the Virginia State Licensed Asbestos Project Supervisor.

3. General Explanation: A substantial amount of specification language constitutes

definitions for terms found in other contract documents, including the drawings. (Drawings must be recognized as diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of the requirements indicated thereon.) Certain terms used in the contract document are defined in this article. Definitions and explanations of this section are not necessarily either complete nor exclusive, but are general for the work to the extent they are not stated more explicitly in another element of the contract document.

4. Owner:

Spotsylvania County Public Schools Spotsylvania, Virginia

5. Owner's Industrial Hygienist (Asbestos Project Designer/Project Monitor):

TJL Environmental Health Consultants, Inc. 2304 Jefferson Park Avenue Charlottesville, VA 22903 Cell: 1-434-962-8721

Fax: 1-434-977-1409 E-Mail: [email protected] Website: www.tjlenvironmental.com

Principle Agent: T. Joel Loving VA State Asbestos Project Designer License #3305-000025 VA State Asbestos Inspector License #3303-000057 VA State Asbestos Management Planner License #3304-000075 VA State Asbestos Project Monitor License #3309-000116

6. Testing Laboratory: The term "testing laboratory" is defined as an independent entity

to perform specific inspections or tests of the work, either at project site or elsewhere, to report, and if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests.

B. Asbestos Abatement Terms

1. Abatement: "Asbestos Abatement" means any activity involving job set-up, removal, encapsulation, enclosure, renovation, repair, demolition, construction, alteration, or maintenance of asbestos-containing material. The abatement activity shall be considered to begin with enclosure set-up and to end after enclosure removal is complete.

http://www.bcwh.com/

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.tjlenvironmental.com/


2. Accredited: A person or laboratory which has been fully approved in accordance with

section 206 of Title II of the Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA) and the AHERA regulation.

3. Aerosol: A system consisting of particles, solid or liquid, suspended on air. 4. Air Cell: Insulation normally used on pipes and duct work that is comprised of

corrugated cardboard which is frequently comprised of asbestos combined with cellulose or refractory binders.

5. Airlock: System for permitting ingress or egress without permitting air movement

from a contaminated area into an uncontaminated area. 6. Air Monitoring: The process of measuring the fiber content of a specific volume of air

in a stated period of time. 7. Amended water: Water containing a wetting agent or surfactant. 8. Area Air Monitoring: Sampling of asbestos fiber concentrations within the asbestos

removal area and outside the asbestos removal area which is representative of the airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers which may reach the breathing zone.

9. Asbestos: The asbestiform varieties of serpentinite (chrysotile), riebeckite

(crocidolite), cummingtonite-grunerite (amosite), anthophyllite, and actinolite-tremolite. For purpose of determining respiratory and non-worker protection, both the asbestiform and non-asbestiform varieties of the above minerals and any of these materials that have been chemically treated and/or altered shall be considered as asbestos.

10. Asbestos-Containing Materials Debris: Visible pieces of ACM that can be identified

by color, texture, or composition, or dust, if the dust is determined by an accredited inspector to be ACM.

11. Asbestos-Containing Material (ACM): Any material containing more than 1% by area

of asbestos of any type or mixture of types. 12. Asbestos-Containing Waste Material: Any material that is or is presumed to be

ACM, or any material contaminated with asbestos that is to be removed from a work area for disposal.

13. Asbestos Contractor's License: An authorization issued by the Virginia DPOR

permitting a person to enter into contracts for a project to remove or encapsulate ACM.

14. Asbestos Control Area: An area where ACM removal operations are performed

which is isolated by physical boundaries to prevent the spread of asbestos dust, fibers, or debris. Each separate enclosure within this project represents a separate asbestos control area.

15. Asbestos Fibers: This expression refers to fibers identified by NIOSH Method 7400

having an aspect ratio of 3:1 and longer than 5 micrometers, or to any fibers identified as asbestos by transmission electron microscopy (TEM) using the AHERA protocol.

16. Asbestos Inspector: Any person licensed by the Virginia DPOR performing on-site

investigations to identify, classify, record, sample, test and prioritize by exposure


potential, all friable and non-friable asbestos containing materials located within a structure.

17. Asbestos Project: An activity involving the inspection for, removal or encapsulation

of asbestos or involving the insulation, removal or encapsulation of asbestos-containing roofing, flooring or siding materials.

18. Asbestos Project Designer's License: An authorization issued by the Virginia DPOR

permitting a person to design an asbestos abatement project. 19. Asbestos Supervisor's License: An authorization issued by the Department of

Commerce permitting an individual to supervise and work on an asbestos project.

20. Asbestos Worker's License: An authorization issued by the Virginia DPOR

permitting an individual to work on an asbestos project. 21. Authorized Visitor: The building Owner's Representative, the Owner's Industrial

Hygienist, or a representative of any regulatory or other agency having jurisdiction over the project.

22. Barrier: Any surface that seals off the work area to inhibit the movement of dust

fibers. 23. Barricade: A rope or tape signifying an asbestos control area that is used in

conjunction with DANGER signs to restrict entry into the control area. 24. Breathing Zone: A hemisphere forward of the shoulders with a radius of

approximately 6 to 9 inches from the worker's nose and mouth. 25. Ceiling Concentration: The concentration of an airborne substance that shall not be

exceeded. 26. Clean Room: An uncontaminated area or room that is part of the worker

decontamination enclosure system, with provisions for storage of worker's street clothes and protective equipment.

27. Critical Barriers: All temporary enclosure surfaces, in addition to primary barriers,

which seal off the work area from the outside environment, such as doors, windows, HVAC vents, etc.

28. Curtained Doorway: A device to allow ingress or egress from one room to another

while permitting minimal air movement between the rooms, typically constructed by placing two overlapping sheets of plastic over an existing or temporarily framed doorway and by securing the one along one vertical side of the doorways, and the vertical edge of the other along the opposite vertical side.

29. Demolition: The wrecking or taking out of any building component, system, finish or

assembly of a facility together with any related handling operations. 30. Disposal Bag: Minimum 6 mil thick leak-tight plastic bags used for transporting

asbestos waste from work and to disposal site. Each is labeled with the Owner's name, telephone number and asbestos removal site address, Contractor's name, address and telephone number, as well as the following information:

DANGER CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST


CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD RQ WASTE ASBESTOS MIXTURE NA 2212

31. Encapsulant: A liquid material which can be applied to asbestos-containing material and which controls the possible release of asbestos fibers from the material either by creating a membrane over the surface (bridging encapsulant) or by penetrating into the material and binding its components together (penetrating encapsulant).

32. Encapsulation: Procedures necessary to coat all asbestos containing materials with

an encapsulant to control the possible release of asbestos fibers into the ambient air.

33. Enclosure: The construction or installation over or around the ACM of any solid or flexible coverings, which will not deteriorate for an extended period of time, so as to conceal the ACM, contain ACM fibers, and render the ACM inaccessible.

34. Equipment Room: A contaminated area or room that is part of the worker

decontamination enclosure system, with provisions for storage of contaminated clothing and equipment.

35. Excursion Limit: The average concentration of airborne substance that shall not be

exceed during any 30 minute period (In the case of asbestos fibers, this is 1 fiber/cc by PCM Method 7400.)

36. Filter: A media component used in respirators or other air filtration devices to remove

solid or liquid particles from the inspired air. 37. Fixed Object: A unit of equipment or furniture in the work area which cannot be

removed from the work area without first being dismantled or unconnected. 38. Friable Asbestos Material: Material that contains more than one percent asbestos by

area which, when dry, can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure, and includes previously non-friable material after such previously non-friable material becomes damaged to the extent that when dry it may be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure.

39. Functional Space: A room, group of rooms, or homogeneous area including crawl

spaces or the space between a dropped ceiling and the floor or roof deck above), as designated by a licensed asbestos inspector.

40. Glovebag: A sack (typically constructed of 6 mil transparent polyethylene or

polyvinylchoride plastic) with two inward projecting longsleeve gloves, which are designed to enclose an object from which an asbestos-containing material is to be removed. All such glove bags used in this project shall be under negative pressure, unless glove bags are used inside negative air enclosures (containment).

41. HEPA Filter: A high efficiency particulate absolute (HEPA) filter capable of trapping

and retaining 99.97% of asbestos fibers greater than 0.3 micrometer in length. 42. HEPA Filter Vacuum Collection Equipment (or Vacuum Cleaner): HEPA filtered

vacuum collection equipment with a filter system capable of collecting and retaining asbestos fibers. Filters should be of 99.97% efficiency for retaining fibers of 0.3 microns or larger.

43. High-Efficiency Filter: A filter which removes from air 99.97% or more of


monodispersed dioctyl phthalate (DOP) particles having a mean particle diameter of 0.3 micrometer.

44. Homogeneous Area: An area of asbestos-containing surfacing material, thermal

system insulation material, or miscellaneous material that is uniform in color and texture.

45. Miscellaneous ACM: ACM that does not include surfacing material or thermal

system insulation.

46. Movable Object: A unit of equipment or furniture in the work area that can be removed from the work area.

47. Negative Pressure: Air pressure lower than surrounding areas, generally caused by

exhausting air from a sealed space (work area). 48. Negative Pressure Glovebag: A glovebag that is placed under negative pressure by

use of a small HEPA filtered negative air device, such as a variable exhaust HEPA air vacuum. All such glove bags used in this project shall be under negative pressure, unless glove bags are used inside negative air enclosures (containment).

49. Negative Pressure Respirator: A respirator in which the air pressure inside the

respiratory-inlet covering is positive during exhalation in relation to the air pressure of the outside atmosphere, and negative during inhalation in relation to the air pressure of the outside atmosphere.

50. Negative Pressure Ventilation System: A local exhaust system, utilizing HEPA

filtration capable of maintaining a negative pressure inside the work area and a constant air flow from adjacent areas into the work area and exhausting that air outside the work area.

51. Non-Friable Asbestos Material: Material that contains asbestos in which the fibers

have been locked-in by a bonding agent, coating, binder, or other material so that the asbestos is well bound and will not release fibers in excess of the asbestos control limit during any appropriate use, handling, demolition, storage, transportation, processing, or disposal.

52. Permissible Exposure Limit: OSHA allowable 8-hour TWA personal exposure above

which employees are required to wear appropriate personal protective equipment. In the case of asbestos, the PEL is 0.1 fiber/cc.

53. Personal Monitoring: Sampling of the asbestos fiber concentrations within the

breathing zone of an employee. 54. Plastic Sheeting: Polyethylene sheet material of thickness specified. 55. Project Designer: The person or persons licensed by the Virginia DPOR and

selected by the building Owner to provide the asbestos removal project design and specifications. In this case, the project designer is also the Owner's Industrial Hygienist.

56. Project Monitor: The person or persons licensed by the Virginia DPOR to provide

daily inspections of the asbestos abatement project to periodically monitor compliance by the Contractor with project specifications. The Project Monitor shall also provide area air quality monitoring exterior to the work area during abatement operations and final air clearance testing after ACM removal is complete. In this case, the Project Monitor is the Owner's Industrial Hygienist.


57. Protection Factor: The ratio of the ambient concentration of an airborne substance

to the concentration of the substance inside the respirator at the breathing zone of the wearer. The protection factor is a measure of the degree of protection provided by a respirator to the wearer.

58. Removal: The act of removing asbestos-containing or contaminated materials from

the structure or work site to a suitable disposal site in accordance with all applicable regulations.

59. Respirator: A device designed to protect the wearer from the inhalation of harmful

atmospheres. 60. Response Action: A method, including removal, encapsulation, enclosure, repair,

operations and maintenance, that protects human health and the environment from friable ACM.

61. Shower Room: A room constituting an airlock between the clean room and the

equipment room in the worker decontamination enclosure system, with hot and cold or warm running water suitably arranged for complete showering during decontamination. The shower room always comprises an airlock.

62. Surfacing ACM: Any surfacing material such as sprayed or troweled-on acoustical

plaster, structural member insulation, etc., that is ACM.

63. Surfactant: A chemical wetting agent added to water to improve penetration, thus reducing the quantity of water required for a given operation or area.

64. Tent Containment: This type of containment area is similar to an asbestos control

area except that the control area is limited to the tent itself. In this way, asbestos removal can be limited to portions of a room rather that utilizing the entire room as an asbestos control area.

65. Thermal System Insulation (TSI): ACM applied to pipes, fittings, boilers, breeching,

tanks, ducts, or other interior building components to prevent heat loss or gain, or water condensation, or for other purposes.

66. Time Weighted Average (TWA): The average concentration of a contaminant in air

during a specific time period. 67. Visible Asbestos Emissions: Any emissions containing particulate asbestos material

that are visually detectable without the aid of instruments. This does not include condensed uncombined water vapor.

68. Waste Load-out Decontamination System: A waste container decontamination

enclosure system, separate from the worker decontamination system, typically consisting of a wash-down room and clean room, with an air lock between each room.

69. Wet Cleaning: The process of eliminating asbestos contamination from building

surfaces and objects by using cloths, mops, or other cleaning utensils which have been dampened with amended water or diluted removal encapsulant and afterwards thoroughly decontaminated or disposed of as asbestos contaminated waste.

70. Work: Includes Contractor's labor or materials, or both. 71. Work Area: The area where asbestos related work or removal operations are


performed which is defined and/or isolated to prevent the spread of asbestos dust, fibers or debris, and entry by unauthorized personnel. Work area is a Regulated Area as defined by 29 CFR 1926.1101(e).

72. Work Site: The specific individual separately enclosed site (room, group of rooms,

crawl space, etc.) in which the Contractor is working. 73. Worker Decontamination System: A decontamination enclosure system for workers,

typically consisting of a clean room, a shower room, and equipment room with an airlock between each room.

C. Abbreviations and Names

The following acronyms or abbreviations as referenced in this contract document are defined to mean these associated names. Both names and addresses are subject to change, and are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up-to-date as of date of this contract document:

ACM Asbestos-Containing Materials ACBM Asbestos-Containing Building Materials

ACRM Asbestos-Containing Roofing Materials

AHERA Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act; refers to EPA regulation 40 CFR Part 763 entitled "Asbestos-Containing Materials in Schools" in Vol. 52, No. 210, October 30, 1987.

AIA American Institute of Architects

1735 New York Ave. NW; Washington, DC 20006 202/626-7474

ANSI American National Standards Institute

1430 Broadway; New York, NY 10018 212/354-3300

ASHRAE American Society for Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle NE; Atlanta, GA 30329 404-636-8400

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race St.; Philadelphia, PA 19103

CFR Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office; Washington, DC 20402 (usually first published in Federal Register)

CGA Compressed Gas Association 1235 Jefferson Davis Highway; Arlington, VA 22202 703/979-0900

CS Commercial Standard of NBS (U.S. Dept. of Commerce) Government Printing Office; Washington, DC 20402

DPOR Virginia Dept. of Professional and Occupational Regulation

3600 West Broad Street Richmond, VA 23230-4917


804-367-8500

EIA Environmental Information Association 6935 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 306 Chevy Chase, MD 20815-6112

888-343-4342

EPA Environmental Protection Agency 401 M St., SW; Washington, DC 20460 202-382-3949

FS Federal Specification (General Services Admin.) Obtain from your Regional GSA Office, or purchase from GSA Specifications Unit

(WFSIS); 7th and D Streets, SW, Washington, DC 20406 202-472-2205 or 2140

GA Gypsum Association 1603 Orrington Ave.; Evanston; IL 60201 312-491-1744

GSA General Services Administration F St. and 18th St., NW; Washington, DC 20450 202-655-4000

MIL Military Standardization Documents (U.S. Dept. of Defense) Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Ave.; Philadelphia, PA 19120

NBS National Bureau of Standards (U.S. Dept. of Commerce) Gaithersburg, MD 20234 301-921-1000

NEC National Electrical Code (by NFPA)

NFPA National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 617/770-3000

NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology, U.S. Dept. of Commerce

NVLAP National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program

OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration/ Virginia Occupational Safety and Health Division of the Dept. of Labor and Industry U.S. Department of Labor

PAT NIOSH Proficiency Analytical Testing Program.

PCM Phase Contrast Microscopy - Analytical Method used to determine airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers according to NIOSH Method 7400.

PEL Permissible Exposure Limit - OSHA allowable 8 hour TWA personal exposure above

which employees are required to wear appropriate respiratory and


personal protective equipment.

PLM Polarized Light Microscopy - Analytical method used to determine asbestos content in bulk material samples.

PS Product Standard of NBS (U.S. Dept. of Commerce)

Government Printing Office; Washington, DC 20402

STEL Short Term Exposure Limit - OSHA allowable 30 minute TWA personal exposure above which employees are required to wear appropriate respiratory and personal protective equipment

TEM Transmission Electron Microscopy - Analytical method used to identify and determine

airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers according to EPA AHERA protocol.

TWA Time-Weighted-Average - Average unit of exposure to a substance over a general period of time.

UL Underwriters Laboratories

333 Pfingsten Rd.; Northbrook, IL 60062 312/272-8800

1.05 CODES AND REGULATIONS

This section sets forth governmental regulations and industry standards that are included and incorporated herein by reference and made a part of these specifications. This section also sets forth those notifications and permits that are known to the Owner and which either must be applied for and received, or which must be given to governmental agencies before start of work.

A. General Applicability

Except to the extent that more explicit or more stringent requirements are written directly into the contract document, all applicable codes, regulations, and standards have the same force and effect (and are made a part of this contract document, by reference as if copied directly into this contract document, or as if published copies are bound herewith).

B. Contractor Responsibility

The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for the compliance with all applicable Federal, State and local regulations pertaining to work practices, hauling, disposal, and protection of workers, visitors to the site, and persons occupying areas adjacent to the site. The Contractor is responsible for providing medical examinations and maintaining medical records of personnel as required by the applicable Federal, State, and local regulations. The Contractor shall hold the Owner, Owner's Representative, and Owner's Industrial Hygienist harmless for failure to comply with any applicable work, hauling, disposal, safety, health or other regulation on the part of itself, its employee, or its subcontractors.

C. Federal Requirements

Federal regulations which govern asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos waste materials include but are not limited to the following regulations and all current amendments to these regulations:

1. U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, (OSHA),

including but not limited to:


a. Occupational Exposure to Asbestos, Tremolite

Anthophyllite, and Actinolite; Final Rules Title 29, Part 1910, Section 1001 and Part 1926, Section 1101 of the Code of Federal Regulations

b. Respiratory Protection

Title 29, Part 1910, Section 134 of the Code of Federal Regulations

c. Construction Industry

Title 29, Part 1926, of the Code of Federal Regulations

d. Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records


e. Hazard Communication


f. Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags, Title 29, Part 1910,

Section 145 of the Code of Federal Regulations

g. Confined Space Standard Title 29, Part 1910, Section 146 of the Code of Federal Regulations

h. Fire Safety Requirements

Title 29, Part 1910, Sections 35 & 36 and Part 1926, Section 150 of the Code of Federal Regulations

i. Lead Standard Subpart D, Title 29, Part 1926, Section 1926.62 of the Code of Federal Regulations

2. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) including but not limited to:

a. Asbestos Abatement Projects Rule

40 CFR Part 762 CPTS 62044, FRL 2843-9 Federal Register, Vol 50 No. 134, July 12, 1985 P28530-28540

b. Regulation for Asbestos

Title 40, Part 61, Sub-parts A and B of the Code of the Federal Regulations

c. National Emission Standard for Asbestos

Title 40, Part 61, Sub-part M (Revised Sub-part B) of the Code of Federal Regulations

d. Asbestos-Containing Materials in Schools (AHERA Rule)

40 CFR Part 763 OPTS-62048E; FRL-3269-8 Federal Register, Vol. 52, No. 210, October 30, 1987, P41826-41905

e. Toxic Substances; Asbestos Abatement Projects


40 CFR, Part 763 OPTS-62044A; FRL 2965-7 Federal Register, Vol. 51, No. 80, April 25, 1986, P15722-15733

f. Excursion Limit Rule, 29 CFR Parts 1910 and 1926, Federal Register,

Volume 53, No. 178, September 14, 1988, P 35610-35627 g. Lead Renovation, Repair and Painting Rule

40 CFR, Part 745

D. Virginia State Requirements

1. Code of Virginia, Title 54.1 Chapter 5, Sections 54.1-517 et. seq. "Asbestos and Lead Contractors and Workers".

2. Commonwealth of Virginia Department of Environmental Quality Solid Waste

Regulations #VR672-20-10, December, 1988. 3. Commonwealth of Virginia Occupational Safety and Health Codes Board, Virginia

Department of Labor and Industry, Confined Space Standard #425-02-12.

E. Local Requirements

The Contractor shall abide by all local requirements which govern asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos waste materials.

F. Notification Requirements

1. The Contractor shall send written Notifications as required by the USEPA National

Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPS) Asbestos Regulations (40CFR 61, Subpart M) to the regional Asbestos NESHAPS Contact, notifications and any permit fees, as required by Code of Virginia Title 54-145:10 to the State Department of Labor and Industry, at least 20 days prior to beginning the asbestos abatement activity. Send separate notification for each non-contiguous phase of this asbestos abatement project to the following addresses:

a. U.S. EPA, Region 3

Asbestos NESHAPS Contact Air and Waste Management Division 841 Chestnut Street Philadelphia, PA 19107 Attn: John Daley (215) 597-9325

b. Virginia State Department of Labor and Industry

Asbestos Control Clerk Powers-Taylor Building 13 South Thirteenth Street Richmond, VA 23219 Attn: Ron Graham, Director of Enforcement (804) 786-0574 FAX Number (804) 371-7634

2. The Contractor shall send to each of these contacts, a completed Va. Dept. of Labor

and Industry standard "Asbestos Project 20-Day Notification" form

G. Licenses


The Contractor shall maintain current licenses as required by applicable state or local jurisdictions for the removal, transporting, disposal or other regulated activity relative to the work of this contract. These include but are not limited to the following:

1. Asbestos Contractor's License

Code of Virginia, Title 54.1, Chapter 5 2. Asbestos Worker's License

Code of Virginia, Title 54.1, Chapter 5 3. Asbestos Supervisor's License

Code of Virginia, Title 54.1, Chapter 5 4. Class A or Class B Contractor's License

Code of Virginia, Title 54, Chapter 7

H. Posting Requirements

The Contractor shall maintain two (2) copies of applicable federal, state and local regulations above. Post one copy of each at the job site. Keep on file Contractor's office one copy of each.

1.06 PERSONNEL PROTECTION

This section describes the minimum standards for equipment and procedures required for use by the Contractor in protecting workers against asbestos contamination and other workplace hazards.

A. Personnel Training

1. The Contractor shall train all workers by requiring each of them to successfully

complete an EPA and Virginia DPOR accredited asbestos worker training program prior to beginning this work and annually from the date of first training thereafter. In the case of abatement of NESHAP Category I or II non-friable ACM, only the appropriate OSHA-required worker training is necessary.

2. The Contractor shall train all general superintendents by requiring each of them to

successfully complete an EPA and Virginia DPOR accredited program on the supervision of asbestos abatement projects prior to beginning this work, and annually from the date of training thereafter. In the case of abatement of NESHAP Category I or II non-friable ACM, only the appropriate OSHA-required “competent person” training is necessary.

3. The Contractor shall train in accordance with 20 CFR 1926.1101(k), all workers and

general superintendents in the dangers inherent in handling asbestos and breathing asbestos dust and in proper work procedures and personal and area protective measures. Include but do not limit the topics covered in the course to the following:

a. Methods of recognizing asbestos. b. Health effects associated with asbestos. c. Relationship between smoking and asbestos in producing lung cancer. d. Nature of operations that could result in exposure to asbestos.


e. Importance of and instruction in the use of necessary protective controls, practices and procedures to minimize exposure including:

(1) Engineering Controls (2) Work Practices (3) Respirators (4) Housekeeping Procedures (5) Hygiene Facilities (6) Protective Clothing (7) Decontamination Procedures (8) Emergency Procedures (9) Waste Disposal Procedures

f. Purpose, proper use, fitting, instructions, and limitations of respirators as

required by 29 CFR 1910.134. g. Appropriate work practices for the work. h. Requirements of medical surveillance program.

i. Review of OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1926.1101, EPA 40 CFR Part 763, and

Virginia State Code Title 54.1, Chapter 5. j. Negative air systems. k. Work practices including hands on or on-job training.

l. Personal decontamination procedures. m. Air monitoring, personal and area.

B. Respiratory Protection

1. General Requirements:

a. The Contractor shall instruct and train each worker involved in asbestos

abatement or maintenance and repair of friable asbestos-containing materials in proper respiratory equipment use and require that each worker always wear a respirator, properly fitted on the face in the work area from the start of any operation which may cause airborne asbestos fibers until the work area is completely decontaminated. Use respiratory protection appropriate for the fiber level encountered in the work place and with a protection factor capable of providing less than 0.01 f/cc inside the worker's respirator, or as required for other toxic or oxygen-deficient situations encountered.

b. The Contractor shall provide fit tests for workers and provide them with

respiratory equipment in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101(h), as suitable for the asbestos exposure during any activity which could cause the release of asbestos fibers in the work area. Unless the Contractor can supply the Owner's Industrial Hygienist with acceptable historical personal air monitoring data for similar ACM (similar asbestos material, mineral composition and concentration), initial respirator selection must be based on the assumption that fiber concentrations are in excess of 100 times the permissible exposure limit (PEL) until it is shown to be otherwise by personal air monitoring. If acceptable historical air monitoring data is not submitted, this will require at a minimum, the initial use of full face powered air purifying respirators (PAPR) for employees


doing the work.

c. The Contractor shall have a copy of his written respirator protection program available on the job site at all times. This program shall comply with ANSI Z88.2-1980 "Practices for Respiratory Protection" and OSHA 29 CFR 1910 and 1926.

2. Standards:

Except to the extent that more stringent requirements are written directly into this contract document, the following regulations and standards have the same force and effect (and are made a part of this contract document by reference) as if copied directly into this contract documents, or as if published copies were bound herewith. Where there is a conflict in requirements set forth in these regulations and standards, meet the more stringent requirement.

a. OSHA - U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health

Administration, Safety and Health Standards 29 CFR 1910, Section 1001 and Section 1910.134 and 29 CFR 1926.1101.

b. CGA - Compressed Gas Association, Inc., New York, Pamphlet G-7,

"Compressed Air for Human Respiration", and Specification G-7.1 "Commodity Specification for Air".

c. CSA - Canadian Standard Association, Rexdal, Ontario, Standard Z180.1-

1978, "Compressed Breathing Air."

d. ANSI - American National Standard Institute, Practices for Respiratory Protection, ANSI Z88.2-1980.

e. NIOSH - National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. f. MSHA - Mine Safety and Health Administration.

C. Medical Examinations and Records

1. The Contractor shall provide medical examinations for all workers who may

encounter an airborne fiber level of 0.1 f/cc or greater for an 8 hour time weighted average. In the absence of specific airborne fiber data provide medical examination for all workers who will enter the work area for any reason. Examination shall as a minimum meet OSHA requirements as set forth in 29 CFR 1926.1101(m) and, in addition, provide an evaluation of the individuals' ability to work in environments capable of producing heat stress in the worker.

2. The Contractor shall maintain complete and accurate records of employees' medical

examinations for a period of 30 years after termination of employment as required by 29 CFR 1926.1101(n) and make records of the required medical examinations available for inspection and copying to: The Assistant Secretary for Occupational Safety and Health, The Director of The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), authorized representatives of either of them, and an employee's physician upon the request of the employee or former employee.

D. Protective Clothing

1. Worker's Protective Clothing

a. The Contractor shall provide work clothes consisting of disposable full body


coveralls, disposable head covers, disposable footwear, hard hats, goggles and gloves as required by OSHA for the complete protection of the workers.

b. The Contractor may provide non-disposable work boots for workers to wear

over disposable clothing while in the work area. These boots shall be considered contaminated however, and shall not be allowed outside of the contaminated work site at any time, unless double bagged and sealed in the same manner as asbestos waste. At the completion of the project, such non-disposable clothing shall either be disposed of regularly as asbestos waste, or kept double bagged to be opened only within a future contaminated asbestos abatement work site.

c. Provide a sufficient number of each article of protective clothing for all

required changes, for all workers in the work area.

2. Inspector's Protective Clothing

a. Appropriate NIOSH/MSHA approved respirators, disposable coveralls, head covers, footwear covers, hard hats, goggles and gloves shall be provided by the Contractor for the Owner's Representatives, Industrial Hygienist, and other authorized representatives who may inspect the job site.

3. Execution

a. The Contractor shall provide worker protection as required by the most

stringent OSHA and/or EPA standards applicable to the work. The procedures specified herein are minimums to be adhered to regardless of fiber count in the work area.

b. Each time the work area is entered, the workers shall remove all street

clothes in the changing room of the personnel decontamination unit and put on new disposable coverall, new head cover, new footwear cover, new gloves, and a clean respirator. Proceed through shower room to equipment room and put on work boots, hard hat, and goggles.

E. Decontamination Procedures

1. When using type C supplied air or powered air-purifying respirators require that all

workers use the following decontamination procedures as a minimum requirement whenever leaving the work area:

a. When exiting area, remove disposable coveralls, disposable head covers,

and disposable footwear covers, gloves, goggles, hard hats or boots in the equipment room.

b. Still wearing respirators, proceed to showers. Showering is mandatory. Care

must be taken to follow reasonable procedures in removing the respirator to avoid asbestos fibers while showering. The following procedure is required as a minimum.

(1) Thoroughly wet body including hair and face. If using a Powered Air-

Purifying Respirator (PAPR) hold blower unit above head to keep canisters dry.

(2) With respirator still in place thoroughly wash body, hair, respirator

face piece, all parts of the respirator except the blower unit and battery pack on a PAPR. Pay particular attention to seal


between face and respirator and under straps. (3) Take a deep breath, hold it and/or exhale slowly, completely wet

hair, face, and respirator. While still holding breath, remove respirator and hold it away from face before starting to breathe.

(4) Carefully wash facepiece of respirator inside and out. (5) If using PAPR: shut down in the following sequence; first cap inlets

to filter cartridges, then turn off blower unit (this sequence will help keep debris which has collected on the inlet side of filter from dislodging and contaminating the outside of the unit.) Thoroughly wash blower unit and hoses. Carefully wash battery pack with wet rag. Be extremely cautious of getting water in battery pack as this will short out and destroy battery.

(6) Shower completely with soap and water. (7) Rinse thoroughly. (8) Rinse shower room walls and floor prior to exit. (9) Proceed from shower to changing rooms and change into street

clothes or into new disposable work items.

2. When using air purifying negative pressure respirators require that all workers use the following decontamination procedure as a minimum requirement whenever leaving the work area with a half or full face cartridge type respirator:

a. When existing area, remove disposable coveralls, disposable headcovers,

and disposable footwear covers or boots in the equipment room. b. Still wearing respirators, proceed to showers. Showering is mandatory. Care

must be taken to follow reasonable procedures in removing the respirator and filters to avoid asbestos fibers while showering. The following procedure is required as a minimum:

(1) Thoroughly wet body from neck down. (2) Wet hair as thoroughly as possible without wetting the respirator

filter. (3) Take a deep breath, hold it and/or exhale slowly, complete wetting of

hair, thoroughly wetting face, respirator and filter. While still holding breath, remove respirator and hold it away from face before starting to breathe.

(4) Dispose of wet filters from air purifying respirator. (5) Carefully wash facepiece of respirator inside and out.

(6) Shower completely with soap and water.

(7) Rinse thoroughly.

(8) Rinse shower room walls and floor prior to exit. (9) Proceed from shower to changing room and change into street


clothes or into new disposable work items.

3. Within Work Area

The Contractor shall require that workers NOT eat, drink, smoke, chew gum or tobacco in the work area. To eat, chew, drink or smoke, workers shall follow the procedure described above, then dress in street clothes before entering the non-work areas of the building.

4. Project Supervisor Responsibilities

The Contractor's on-site asbestos abatement project supervisor shall ensure that all workers follow the established decontamination sequence utilizing the aforementioned procedures. He shall also ensure that all visible contamination and debris is removed from protective clothing and equipment prior to egress from the work area and entrance into the contaminated equipment room.

5. Posting Requirements

The Contractor shall provide, and post at the entrance to the work site at all times, a written plan for receipt, inspection, cleaning and storage of respiratory protective equipment and all other such non-disposable personal protective equipment in such a manner as to avoid contamination of clean areas and to ensure the integrity and decontamination of this equipment.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCTS AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS A. Materials

1. Plastic Sheeting: Minimum six mil thick (or as specified) polyethylene sheets in sizes

to minimize the frequency of joints. Sheeting shall be clear, frosted, or black as indicated or approved by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist.

2. Tape: Glass fiber or other type capable of sealing joints between plastic sheets and

for attaching plastic sheets to various surfaces. 3. Surfactant: Shall consist of 50% polyoxyethylene ether and 50% polyoxyethylene

ester and shall be mixed with water to provide a concentration of one ounce of surfactant to five gallons of water. NOTE: For amosite-containing materials, Foster #3260 encapsulant/removal agent, or approved equivalent, shall be used as the asbestos wetting agent.

4. Impermeable containers: Suitable to receive and retain any asbestos-containing or

contaminated materials until disposal at an approved site. The containers shall be labeled in accordance with OSHA regulation 29 CFR Part 1926.1101(k). Containers must be both air and water tight and must be resistant to damage and rupture. The containers shall be of the following parts:

a. Two six mil minimum thickness polyethylene bags of size to fit within the

drum listed (when required) and capable of being sealed. b. 55 gallon capacity metal, fiberglass, or fiber drums with tightly fitting lids,

unless transported in an enclosed vehicle.

5. Danger labels and signs: As required by OSHA regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101(k). 6. Lumber: Shall be stud or standard grade for 2" thick, 4" to 6" wide, and species of

specified grade. Fire-retardant treatment to comply with AWPA C20 and C27. 7. Plywood: 5/8" thick CDX fire-retardant treatment to comply with AWPA C20 and C27. 8. Encapsulant/sealant: Penetrating type Foster Protector Sealant - Clear 32-22,

manufactured by H. B. Fuller Co., or approved equal in writing by Owner's Representative. The encapsulant/sealant shall also have the following characteristics:

a. Non-toxic. Shall release no toxic substance into the air either during

application or after drying. It shall not release toxic substance or undue smoke even when burned.

b. Non-flammable once applied. Encapsulant shall not burn or impair the

resistance of the fireproofing, etc., upon which it is applied.

c. Water-insoluble when cured. d. Color to be selected by Owner's Representative.

9. Mastic Removal Solvent: Shall be "Low or No-Odor" type, American Coatings #555

or equivalent, and must be specified by Contractor in asbestos abatement plan, and MSDS submitted with plan for approval by Owner's Industrial Hygienist. Mastic Removal Solvent shall have the following characteristics:


a. Non-toxic. Shall release no toxic substance into the air either during

application or after drying. It shall not release toxic substance or undue smoke even when burned.

b. Any residue left after the abatement project shall not release toxic

substances into the air or onto the skin upon physical contact, either dry or upon wetting with water.

c. Flash point shall be above 140 degrees F.

d. "Low or No-odor" type as specified above. e. Any residue left after abatement project shall not release any noticeable

odors. Should odors be noticeable by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist or Representative, the enclosure and/or negative air exhaust system shall remain in operation until odors are eliminated.

10. Gypsum drywall: Shall be type "X" for fire resistant rated assemblies where

indicated. Edges shall be square and thickness a minimum of 5/8". 11. Spray cement: Shall be provided in aerosol cans and specifically formulated to stick

tenaciously to sheet polyethylene.

B. Equipment

1. Negative air pressure units (Either the following shall be used, or equivalent negative air pressure units that are acceptable to the Owner's Industrial Hygienist.):

a. The cabinet shall be ruggedly constructed and made of durable materials to

withstand damage from rough handling and transportation. The width of the cabinet should be less than 30 inches to fit through standard-size doorways. The cabinet must be appropriately sealed to prevent asbestos containing dust from being emitted during use, transport, or maintenance. There should be easy access to all air filters from the intake end, and the filters must be easy to replace. The unit should be mounted on casters or wheels so it can be easily moved. It also should be accessible for easy cleaning.

b. The fan for each unit shall be sized to draw a desired air flow through the

filters in the unit at a specified static pressure drop. The unit shall have an air-handling capacity of 1,000 to 2,000 ft3/min. (under "clean" filter conditions). The fan should be of the centrifugal type. Smaller capacity units (e.g., 1,000 ft.3/min.) equipped with appropriately sized fans and filters may be used to ventilate smaller work areas. The desired air flow could be achieved with several units.

c. Filters

(1) The final filter must be the HEPA type. Each filter should have a

standard nominal rating of at least 1,100 ft3/min with a maximum pressure drop of 1 inch H2O clean resistance. The filter media (folded into closely pleated panels) must be completely sealed on all edges with a structurally rigid frame and cross-braced as required. The exact dimension of the filter should correspond with the dimensions of the filter housing inside the cabinet or the dimensions of the filter-holding frame. The recommended standard size HEPA filter is 24 inches high x 24 inches wide x


11-1/2 inches deep. The overall dimensions and squareness should be within 1/8 inch.

(2) A continuous rubber gasket must be located between the filter

and the filter housing to form a tight seal. The gasket material should be 1/4 inch thick and 3/4 inch wide.

(3) Each filter should be individually tested and certified by the

manufacturer to have an efficiency of not less than 99.97 percent when challenged with 0.3 micrometer dioctylphthalate (DOP) particles. Testing should be in accordance with Military Standard Number 282 and Army Instruction Manual 136-300-175A. Each filter should bear a UL586 label to indicate ability to perform under specified condition.

(4) Each filter should be marked with the name of the manufacturer,

serial number, air flow rating, efficiency and resistance and the direction of test air flow.

(5) One (minimum) or two (preferred) stages of prefiltration may be

used. The first-stage prefilter should be a low efficiency type (e.g., for particles 10 micrometers and larger).

(6) The second stage (or intermediate) filter should have a medium

efficient (e.g., effective for particles down to 5 micrometers). Prefilters and intermediate filters shall be installed either on or in the grid of the unit and held in place with special housings or clamps.

(a) Each unit shall be equipped with a magnehelic gauge or

manometer to measure the pressure drop across the filters and indicate when filters have become loaded and need to be changed. The static pressure across the filters (resistance) increases as they become loaded with dust, affecting the ability of the unit to move air at its rated capacity.

(b) The electrical system shall have a remote fuse

disconnect. The fan motor shall be totally enclosed, fan coiled, and the non- overloading type. The unit must use a standard 115-volt, single phase, 60 cycle service. All electrical components must be approved by the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and Underwriter's Laboratories UL).

(c) The motor, fan, fan housing, and cabinet shall be

grounded. The unit shall have an electrical or mechanical lockout to prevent the fan from operating without a HEPA filter.

(d) There shall be an automatic shutdown system that would

stop the fan in the event of a major rupture in the HEPA filter or blocked air discharge. Each unit shall be equipped with an audible alarm that cuts on in the event of clogged or damaged filters. Warning lights are required to indicate normal operation, too high of a pressure drop across the filters (i.e., filter overloading), and too low of a pressure drop (i.e., major rupture in


HEPA filter or obstructed discharge).

(7) If mastic removal solvents are used, and if so directed by the Owner’s I.H., then negative air pressure units shall be equipped with activated carbon-impregnated filters as required to totally remove all vapors and odors from work site prior to exhausting air to outside of building.

2. Surfactant sprayer: Airless or other low pressure sprayer for amended water

application. 3. Encapsulant Sprayer: Airless or other low pressure sprayer suitable for encapsulant

application. 4. Communication Equipment: Suitable for communication between contaminated and

uncontaminated areas, such as walkie-talkies. 5. Personal Protective Equipment: Shall meet all codes and regulations referenced in

this contract document and all specifications described herein.

6. Glove bags: Shall comply with specification of this contract document. 7. Air Monitors: Shall comply with specifications of this contract document. 8. Decontamination units: Shall comply with specifications of this contract document. 9. HEPA Filtered Vacuum Cleaners: Shall consist of a blower filter system which, at a

minimum, continuously traps asbestos fibers of sizes greater than or equal to 0.3 micrometer diameter at a 99.9% efficiency.

10. Mechanical Cutting Devices: Shall be equipped with HEPA exhaust/dust trapping

vacuum cleaners such that all dust emitted during cutting is trapped at the same efficiency stated above.

11. Continuous Negative Pressure Recording Devices: Shall be capable of maintaining

and recording pressure differentials between inside and outside of each work site enclosure continuously throughout asbestos abatement activities.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PROTECTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL AND PROPERTY

A. Work Area Enclosure

The Contractor shall perform the following tasks in enclosing each work site, unless otherwise directed in writing by the Owner's Representative or Industrial Hygienist. The Contractor's asbestos abatement plan shall specify the methods to be used to comply with this section.

1. Completely isolate each work site from other parts of the building or general work

area so as to prevent asbestos-containing dust or debris from passing beyond the isolated work site. Should the area beyond the work site(s) become contaminated with asbestos-containing dust or debris as a consequence of the work, clean those areas in accordance with the work area decontamination procedures indicated in this contract document. Perform all such required cleaning or decontamination at no additional cost to Owner.

2. Place all tools, scaffolding, staging, etc., necessary for the work in the area to be

isolated prior to erection of the work site enclosure. 3. The Owner shall be responsible for removing all uncontaminated removable furniture,

equipment, and/or supplies from each work site before the Contractor commences work. Any non-removable furniture, equipment, and/or supplies shall be completely covered with a minimum of two (2) layers of polyethylene sheeting, at least 6 mil in thickness, securely taped in place with duct tape and spray glue. Such furniture and equipment shall be considered outside the work site unless covering plastic or seal is broached. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to this furniture, equipment and/or supplies while covered.

4. Disable ventilating system or any other system bringing air into or out of each work

site. Disable system by disconnecting wires, removing circuit breakers, by lockable switch or other positive means that will prevent accidental premature restarting of equipment.

5. Permit access to each work site only through a personnel decontamination unit. All

other means of access shall be closed off and sealed and danger signs displayed on the clean side of the sealed access.

6. Visual Observation Window: Where the work site is immediately adjacent to or within

view of occupied areas, provide a visual observation window of transparent plexiglass, at least 1/4" in thickness, in conjunction with transparent 6-mil polyethylene enclosure materials, so that the work procedures are visible to the Owner's Representatives.

7. Physical Barrier: Where the area adjacent to an interior work site is accessible to the

public, construct a solid barrier on the public side of the regulated area, separate and at least two feet from the negative air containment. Construct this barrier with metal studs 16" on center, securely anchored to prevent movement, covered with minimum 1/4 inch thick hardboard, 1/2" gypsum wall board, or 1/2" plywood, to the height of the ceiling. If the work site is outdoors (roofing material, caulking, glazing, etc. removal) construct a barrier tape enclosure at least 50 feet from each asbestos removal work site, including the staging, waste loading, and personnel decontamination sites. Construct barrier with nominal 2" wide asbestos DANGER barricade tape at a height of 3-4 feet from roof or ground level.


8. Individually seal all ventilation openings (supply and exhaust), lighting fixtures, clocks,

doorways, windows, converters and speakers, and other openings into each work site with duct tape alone or with polyethylene sheeting at least 6 mil in thickness, taped securely in place with duct tape. Maintain seal until all work including project decontamination is completed. Take care in sealing off lighting fixtures to avoid melting or burning of sheeting.

9. For exterior ACM or roofing material removal, individually seal all critical openings

which open onto the work site or are connected to and on the same level as the work site (e.g. building windows or doors opening onto a roof at the same level as the roof removal work site), including ventilation openings (supply and exhaust), doorways, windows, access hatches, skylights and other openings within 50 feet of each work site with duct tape alone or with polyethylene sheeting taped securely in place with duct tape. In the case of window caulking or glazing materials removal, individually seal each window frame on the inside of building using minimum 6-mil polyethylene sheeting in a manner which will prevent ACM from entering the building during abatement or window removal. Maintain all seals until all work, including project clearance, is completed.

10. For exterior ACM or roofing material removal, the enclosure preparation shall include

provisions for ensuring that no ACM debris is allowed to fall from the side or top of the building during the abatement activity. This shall include polyethylene sheeting - covered scaffolding, etc., which is designed to effectively catch all loose ACM debris and prevent such debris from being released into the environment in any way.

11. Provide sheet plastic critical barriers at least 6 mil in thickness as required to

completely seal openings (doors, windows, etc.) from each interior work site into adjacent areas. Seal the perimeter of all sheet plastic barriers with duct tape or spray cement.

12. Mechanically support sheet plastic independently of duct tape or spray cement seals

so that seals do not support the weight of the plastic. Following are acceptable methods of supporting sheet plastic barriers. Alternative support methods may be used if approved in writing by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist.

a. Plywood squares 6" x 6" x 3/8" held in place with one 6d smooth masonry

nail or electro-galvanized common nail driven through center of the plywood and duct tape on plastic so that plywood clamps plastic to the wall. Locate plywood squares at each end, corner and at maximum 4' on centers.

b. Nylon or polypropylene rope minimum 1/4" in diameter suspended between

supports securely fastened on either side of opening at maximum 1' below ceiling. Tighten rope so that it has 2" maximum dip. Drape plastic over rope from outside work area so that a 2' flap of plastic extends over rope into work area. Staple or wire plastic to itself 1" below rope at a maximum 6" on centers to form a sheath over rope. Lift flap and seal to ceiling with duct tape or spray cement. Seal loop at bottom of flap with duct tape. Erect entire assembly so that it hangs vertically without a "shelf" upon which debris could collect.

13. Provide decontamination units as per these specifications. In the case of exterior

ACM removal, decontamination units shall be within 10 feet of the base of the building where the work site access will be made.

14. Provide negative pressure system as per these specifications.


15. Pre-clean all surfaces in each work site, using HEPA-filtered vacuum techniques and

wet wiping, prior to installation of any polyethylene sheeting over critical barriers, interior surfaces, etc.

16. Clean all contaminated furniture, equipment, and/or supplies with a HEPA filtered

vacuum cleaner or by wet cleaning, as specified herein under Work Area and Equipment Decontamination prior to its being moved or covered.

17. Enclose interior of each work site with two (2) layers of plastic sheeting on floor and

one (1) layer on walls, or as otherwise directed on the contract drawings or in writing by the Owner's Representative or Industrial Hygienist. NOTE: When ACM to be removed is floor tile and/or floor tile mastic, this floor covering enclosure shall not be required. Also, when ACM to be removed is the wall material itself, the wall covering shall not be required.

18. Cover floor of work area with 2 individual layers of clear polyethylene sheeting, each

at least 6 mil in thickness, turned up walls at least 12 inches. Form a sharp right angle bend at junction of floor and wall so that there is no radius which could be stepped on causing the wall attachment to be pulled loose. Both spray-glue and duct tape all seams in floor covering. Locate seams in top layer six feet (6') from, or at right angles to, seam in bottom layer. Install sheeting so that top layer can be removed independently of bottom layer. NOTE: When ACM to be removed is floor tile and/or floor tile mastic, this floor covering enclosure shall not be required.

19. Cover any carpeting that is to remain during asbestos abatement with three (3)

layers of polyethylene sheeting at least 6 mil in thickness. Place corrugated cardboard sheets between the top and middle layers of polyethylene.

20. Cover sheet plastic in carpeted areas where scaffolding is to be used with a single

layer of 1/2" CDX plywood or 1/4" tempered hardboard. Wrap edges and corners of each sheet with duct tape. At completion of abatement work wrap plywood or hardboard with 2 layers of 6 mil polyethylene and move to next work area or dispose of as an asbestos contaminated waste material in accordance with the asbestos waste disposal section of this contract document.

21. Remove all uncontaminated general construction items such as cabinets, casework,

doors and window trim, moldings, ceilings, trim, etc., which cover the surface of the work as required to prevent interference with the work if so directed by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist. Clean, decontaminate and reinstall all such materials, upon completion of all removal work with materials, finishes, and workmanship to match existing installations before start of work.

22. Cover all walls in each interior work site including "Critical Barrier" sheet plastic

barriers with a minimum of one layer of polyethylene sheeting, at least 6 mil in thickness, mechanically supported and sealed with duct tape or spray-glue in the same manner as "Critical Barrier" sheet plastic barriers. Tape all joints including the joining with the floor covering with duct tape and spray glue.

23. Stairs and Ramps: Do not cover stairs or ramps with unsecured sheet plastic.

Where stairs or ramps are covered with plastic, provide 3/4" exterior grade plywood treads held securely in place, over plastic. Do not cover rungs or rails with any type of protective materials.

24. Interior Lighting: The Contractor shall supply interior lighting inside each work site

using quartz-halogen lights (or equivalent) on stands to effectively provide light for all workers to see all interior spaces and ACM to be removed. The number


and type of temporary light fixtures used shall be subject to approval by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist.

B. Danger Signs

1. The Contractor shall provide danger signs on the outside of the critical barriers

including all locked and sealed doors.

Doors of decontamination unit entrance used as the main entrance to each work area are to be locked shut after working hours. A danger sign shall also be posted on the uncontaminated side of this door at all times. All danger signs shall conform to 29 CFR 1910.1001(j)(4)(ii)(A), shall be a minimum of 20"x14" and shall read as follows:

DANGER ASBESTOS MAY CAUSE CANCER CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS AUTHORIZED PERSONAL ONLY RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA.

C. Negative Pressure Systems

1. The Contractor shall provide a fully operational negative air system within each work

site maintaining continuously a minimum pressure differential across work area enclosures of 0.02 inches of water. Demonstrate to the Owner's Industrial Hygienist the pressure differential by use of a pressure differential meter before disturbance of any asbestos containing materials.

2. The negative pressure system shall be a high efficiency particulate absolute (HEPA)

filtration system equipped with filtration equipment in compliance with ANSI 29.2-79, local exhaust ventilation.

3. The Contractor shall provide auxiliary generator located outside of the building in a

location protected from the weather. Arrange so that if a power failure occurs the generator automatically starts and supplies power to a minimum of 50% of the negative air machines in operation.

4. The Contractor shall provide a means to monitor and record or display the pressure

differential between each interior work site and the building or area outside of the work site with continuous monitoring devices. The sources of these measurements shall be made within the work sites in areas most remote from the negative air pressure units, and also as approved by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist. At least one negative pressure monitoring device shall be used per 4,000 cfm exhausted air per each work site. Recording of this pressure differential shall be performed either automatically by chart recording, or at least once every two hours by the Contractor's Project Supervisor to assure maintenance of minimum pressure differential of 0.02 inches W.C. Written records of these readings shall be maintained within the Project Manual at the office of the Contractor's Project Supervisor. At least one measurement per each work site shall be taken continuously by use of an appropriate strip chart recorder or data logger to assure maintenance of minimum pressure differential of 0.02" w.c.

5. The Contractor shall provide fully operational negative pressure systems supplying a

minimum of one air change every 15 minutes. Determine the volume in cubic feet of each work site by multiplying floor area by ceiling height. Determine total


ventilation requirement in cubic feet per minute (cfm) for the work site by dividing this volume by the air change rate. Determine and use the number of units needed to achieve the 15 minute change rate by dividing the ventilation requirement by the capacity of the exhaust units used assuming fully loaded filters.

6. The Contractor shall locate exhaust unit(s) so that make-up air enters work site

primarily through decontamination facilities and traverses work area as much as possible. This may be accomplished by positioning the exhaust unit(s) at a maximum distance from the worker access opening or other make-up air sources. The location of these units shall be specified on the Contractor's asbestos abatement plan and approved by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist.

7. The Contractor shall place end of unit or its exhaust duct through an opening in the

plastic barrier or wall covering. The plastic around the unit or duct shall then be sealed with tape and spray glue.

8. The Contractor shall vent each negative air unit to outside of building (or

decontamination unit equipment room), unless authorized differently by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist. All areas where negative air is vented to the outside shall have the exhaust duct stabilized by plywood panels with an opening of the same size as the diameter of the duct, or as approved by the Owner's I.H.

9. Provide make up air where required for proper air flow through the work space in

location approved by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist by making openings in the plastic sheeting that allow air from outside the building into the work site. Locate auxiliary make-up air inlets as far as possible from the exhaust unit (s) (e.g., on an opposite wall), off the floor (preferably near the ceiling), and away from barriers that separate the work area from occupied clean areas. Cover the flaps to reseal automatically if the negative pressure system should shut down for any reason. Spray flap and around opening with spray adhesive so that flap seals if it closes.

10. Each negative pressure unit shall be serviced by a dedicated minimum 115V-20A

circuit with overload device tied into an existing building electrical panel which has sufficient spare capacity to accommodate the load of all negative pressure units connected. Dedication of an existing circuit may be accomplished by shutting down existing loads on the circuit.

11. The negative air pressure system shall be operated in accordance to Appendix J.,

pages J-1 through J-8, of the EPA Guidance Manual No. EPA 560/5-85-024, entitled "Recommended Specifications and Operating Procedures for the Use of Negative Pressure Systems for Asbestos Abatement", in addition to 29 CFR 1926.1101(g).

12. The Contractor shall start exhaust units before beginning work before any asbestos-

containing material is disturbed). After abatement work has begun, run units continuously to maintain a constant negative pressure until decontamination of the work site and decontamination unit is complete and clearance air testing (where applicable) has passed. Do not turn off units at the end of the work shift or when abatement operations temporarily stop. Do not shut down negative air system during encapsulating procedures.

13. The Contractor shall start abatement work at a location farthest from the exhaust

units and proceed toward them. If an electric power failure occurs, immediately stop all abatement work and do not resume until power is restored and exhaust units are operating again.


14. If during the removal, cleaning or encapsulation process negative pressure is not maintained in accordance to these specifications in the work site, all abatement operations are to stop immediately, the Owner's Industrial Hygienist notified immediately and work shall be halted until the problem is identified, solved and negative pressure is re-established and working properly.

15. When a final inspection and the results of final air clearance tests indicate that the

work site tested has been decontaminated and after directed by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist, exhaust units may be removed from the work site. Before removal from the work site, remove and properly dispose of pre-filter, and seal intake to the machine with 6 mil polyethylene to prevent environmental contamination from the filters.

D. Decontamination Units

1. Personnel (Worker) Decontamination Units: The Contractor shall provide a personnel

decontamination unit in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101(j) for each work site consisting of a serial arrangement of connected rooms or spaces, including changing room, shower room, and equipment room. Require all persons without exception to pass through this decontamination unit for entry into and exiting from the work area for any purpose. Do not allow parallel routes for entry or exit. Do not remove equipment or materials through personnel decontamination unit. Provide temporary lighting within decontamination unit as necessary to reach a lighting level of 100 foot candles. Provide connected rooms as follows:

a. Changing Room

(1) The Contractor shall provide a clean changing room that is physically

and visually separated from the rest of the building for the purpose of allowing workers to change into protective clothing. Construct using polyethylene sheeting, at least 6 mil in thickness, to provide an airtight seal between the changing room and the rest of the building. Locate so that access to work area from changing room is through shower room. Separate changing room from the building by a sheet polyethylene flapped doorway.

(2) Require workers to remove all street clothes in the changing room,

dress in clean disposable coveralls, and don respiratory protection equipment. Do not allow asbestos contaminated items to enter this room. Require workers to enter this room either from outside the structure dressed in street clothes, or naked from the showers.

(3) An existing room may be utilized as the changing room if it is suitably

located and of a configuration whereby workmen may enter the changing room directly from the shower room. Protect all surfaces of room with sheet plastic as set forth in these specifications on work area enclosures. Authorization for this must be obtained from the Owner's Industrial Hygienist prior to start of construction.

(4) Maintain floor of changing room dry and clean at all times. Do not

allow overflow water from shower to wet floor in changing room.

(5) Provide a continuously adequate supply of disposable bath towels.

(6) Provide posted information here containing all emergency phone


numbers and procedures, copies of all Virginia State licenses, personnel air sampling results, and any other requirements of these specifications.

b. Shower room

(1) The Contractor shall provide a completely water tight operational

shower to be used for transit by cleanly dressed workers heading for the work site from the changing room, or for showering by workers headed out of the work site after undressing in the equipment room.

(2) Construct room by providing a shower pan and 2 shower walls in a

configuration that will cause water running down walls to drip into pan.

(3) Separate this room from the rest of the building with air tight walls

fabricated of minimum 6 mil polyethylene. (4) Separate this room from the changing and equipment rooms with air

tight walls fabricated of 6 mil polyethylene. Provide splash proof entrances to changing and equipment rooms with a 2-door air lock system, with a minimum distance of 3 feet between doors.

(5) Provide shower head and controls. (6) Provide temporary extensions of existing hot and cold water and

drainage, as necessary for a complete and operable shower. (7) Provide a continuously adequate supply of liquid antibacterial soap

and maintain in sanitary condition. (8) Arrange so that water from showering does not splash into the air

locks or changing or equipment rooms.

(9) Arrange water shut off and drain pump operation controls so that a single individual can shower without assistance from either inside or outside of the work site.

(10) Provide flexible hose shower head. (11) Pump waste water to sanitary sewer drain. Provide 5.0 micrometer

final stage waste water filter in line to drain. Change pre-filters or final filters daily or more often if necessary. Locate filters inside shower unit so that water lost during filter changes is caught by shower pan.

(12) Provide hose bib taps and any necessary extensions.

c. Equipment Room (contaminated area)

(1) The Contractor shall require work equipment, footwear and

additional contaminated work clothing to be left here. This is a change and transit area for workers.

(2) Separate this room from the work area by a 6 mil polyethylene flap

doorway. Separate this room from the rest of the building with


air tight walls fabricated of 6 mil polyethylene. Separate this room from the shower room and from work area with a minimum 3 foot air lock and air tight walls fabricated of 6 mil polyethylene. Separate work site from the equipment room by polyethylene barriers.

(3) If the airborne asbestos level in the work site is expected to be high,

as in dry removal, add an intermediate cleaning space between the equipment room and the work area. Damp wipe clean all surfaces after each shift change.

2. Construction of Personnel (Worker) Decontamination Unit

a. The Contractor shall construct air tight walls and ceiling using polyethylene

sheeting, at least 6 mil in thickness. Attach to existing building components or a temporary framework.

b. Use 2 layers (minimum) of 6 mil. polyethylene sheeting to cover the floors in

the equipment, shower (underneath shower pan), and changing rooms. Provide an additional layer in the equipment room for every shift change expected. Roll one layer of plastic from equipment room into work area after each shift change. Provide a minimum of two (2) layers of plastic at all times. Use only clear plastic to cover floors.

c. Fabricate doors from 3 overlapping sheets with openings a minimum of three

feet (3') wide. Configure so that sheeting overlaps adjacent surfaces. Weight sheets at bottoms as required so that they quickly close after being released. Put arrows on sheets to indicate direction of overlap and/or travel. Provide a minimum of six feet (6') between entrance and exit of any room.

d. Fabricate air-locks on either side of shower room in a similar manner and

such that a minimum of three (3) feet exists between entrance and exit of air locks.

e. If the decontamination area is located within an area containing friable

asbestos on overhead ceilings, ducts, piping, etc., provide the area with a minimum 1/4 inch hardboard 1/2 inch plywood "ceiling" with polyethylene sheeting, at least 6 mil in thickness covering the top of the "ceiling".

f. Where the decontamination area is immediately adjacent to and within view of

occupied areas, provide a visual barrier of opaque polyethylene sheeting at least 4 mil in thickness so that worker privacy is maintained and work procedures are not visible to building occupants. Where the decontamination unit is accessible to the public, construct a solid barrier on the public side of the sheeting to protect the sheeting. Construct barrier with wood or metal studs covered with minimum 1/4 inch thick hardboard or 1/2 inch plywood. Where the solid barrier is provided, sheeting need not be opaque.

NOTE: Alternate methods of providing personnel decontamination facilities may be

submitted in the Contractor's asbestos abatement plan to the Owner's Industrial Hygienist for approval. Do not proceed with any such methods without authorization of the Owner's Industrial Hygienist.

3. Entering the Work Site


a. Workers shall enter changing room and remove street clothing, put on clean disposable overalls and respirator, and pass through the shower room into the equipment room.

b. Any additional clothing and equipment left in the equipment room needed by

the workers are put on in the equipment room. c. Workers proceed to work site.

4. Exiting the Work Site

a. Before leaving the work site, require workers to remove all gross

contamination and debris from coveralls and feet. The workers then proceed to the equipment room and remove all clothing except respiratory protection equipment. Extra work clothing may be stored in contaminated end of equipment room. Disposable coveralls are placed in a bag for disposal with other material. Decontamination procedures as specified herein shall be followed by all individuals leaving the work site.

b. After showering, the workers move to the changing room and dress in either

new coveralls for another entry or street clothes if leaving.

5. Equipment and Waste Load-out Decontamination Units (Interior ACM Removal Only)

a. Provide an equipment and waste load-out decontamination unit for each work site) consisting of a serial arrangement of rooms, including clean room, holding room, and wash room for removal of equipment and waste material from work area. Do not allow personnel to enter or exit work area through equipment and waste load-out decontamination unit.

b. Wash Down Station: Provide an enclosed shower unit located in work site

just outside wash room as an equipment, bag and container cleaning station.

c. Wash Room: Provide wash room for cleaning of bagged or containerized

asbestos-containing waste materials passed from the work site. Construct wash room of 2"x 2" wood framing, or equivalent, and polyethylene sheeting, at least 6 mil in thickness and located so that packaged materials, after being wiped clean can be passed to the holding room. Separate this room from the work site by a single flap of 6 mil polyethylene sheeting.

d. Holding Room: Provide holding room as a drop location for bagged asbestos-

containing materials passed from the wash room. Construct holding room of 2"x 2" wood framing, or equivalent, and polyethylene sheeting, at least 6 mil in thickness and located so that bagged materials cannot be passed from the wash room through the holding room to the clean room. Separate this room from the adjacent rooms by double flaps fabricated from 1/16" +/-thick single ply rubber roofing material either EPDM or Neoprene.

e. Clean Room: Provide clean room to isolate the holding room from the

building exterior. Construct clean room of 2"x 2" wood framing, or equivalent, and polyethylene sheeting, at least 6 mil thick and locate to provide access to the holding room from the building exterior. Separate this room from the exterior by a single flap of 6 mil polyethylene sheeting.

f. Equipment or Waste Materials: Take all equipment or waste material from the


work site through the equipment and waste load-out decontamination unit according to the following procedure:

(1) At washdown station, thoroughly wet-clean contaminated equipment

or sealed polyethylene bags and pass into wash room.

(2) When passing equipment or containers into the wash room, close all

doorways of the equipment and waste decontamination unit, other than the doorway between the washdown station and the wash room. Keep all outside personnel clear of the equipment and waste decontamination unit.

(3) Once inside the washroom, wet-clean the waste bags and/or

equipment.

(4) When cleaning is complete pass items into holding room. Close all doorways except the doorway between the holding room and the clean room.

(5) Workers from the building exterior enter holding area and remove

decontaminated equipment and/or waste containers for disposal. (6) Require these workers to wear full protective clothing and the

appropriate respiratory protection. (7) At no time is a worker from an uncontaminated area to enter the

enclosure when a removal worker is inside.

NOTE: Alternate methods of providing equipment and waste load-out decontamination facilities may be submitted in the Contractor's asbestos abatement plan to the Owner's Industrial Hygienist for approval. Do not proceed with any such methods without authorization of the Owner's Industrial Hygienist.

6. Cleaning of Decontamination Units

a. Clean debris and residue from inside of decontamination units on a daily

basis. Damp wipe or hose down all surfaces after each shift change. Clean debris from shower pans on a daily basis.

b. If the changing room of the personnel decontamination unit becomes

contaminated with asbestos-containing debris, abandon the entire decontamination unit and erect a new decontamination unit. Use the former changing room as an inner section of the new equipment room.

E. Inspection of Work Site Preparation by Owner's Industrial Hygienist

1. After set up of work site enclosure(s), danger signs, the HEPA negative air pressure

system and decontamination units within each work site and prior to removal of any asbestos-containing materials, each work site shall be inspected by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist to ensure it is adequately and properly sealed. The Contractor shall arrange a time for this inspection with the Owner's Industrial Hygienist at least 48 hours in advance.

2. To document this approval, the Owner's Industrial Hygienist shall complete an

"Asbestos Abatement Project Pre-Removal Checklist" form. A copy of this form can be found in PART 5 of these specifications.


3. Should any faults or inadequacies in the work site(s) preparation be noted by the

Owner's Industrial Hygienist within the inspection checklist, the Contractor shall modify or correct these problems and then arrange for another inspection. No asbestos disturbance or removal work can be started until this inspection has been made and approval granted.

F. Contractor's Responsibilities

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to the building(s) and the

contents, including fixed equipment, structure, etc., resulting from leakage or spillage of water, or from any other intentional or negligent acts or omissions. Any such damage shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own expense and replaced with materials of equal or better quality.

2. Operations shall be discontinued immediately and the Owner's Industrial Hygienist

contacted any time visible emissions are observed emanating from the work area, or if asbestos airborne fiber concentrations exceed 0.01 fiber/cc outside the containment(s) in areas of highest risk of contamination. If sampling results outside the containment are found to be in excess of 0.01 fiber/cc, the Contractor shall perform whatever action is necessary to reduce these fiber concentrations to accepted levels, and additional samples shall be made in other adjacent areas as determined to be necessary by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist. NOTE: Should there be difficulty in achieving this maximum allowable work site exterior environmental air quality level of 0.01 fiber/cc when samples are analyzed by PCM using NIOSH Method 7400, the Contractor may request that the samples be analyzed by TEM using the AHERA EPA Level II protocol. If this TEM analytical method is used however, the Contractor is responsible for paying all laboratory fees and associated handling charges for the TEM analyses.

3. The Contractor shall be responsible for any asbestos fiber contamination of adjoining areas and/or properties which occur as a result of the asbestos abatement activities. All equipment and/or materials within these areas and/or properties shall be totally decontaminated or disposed of and replaced by the Contractor with equipment and/or materials of equal or higher quality.

4. The Contractor shall agree to indemnify and save harmless the Owner and Owner's

Industrial Hygienist and all of their officers, agents, and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any character, name, and description brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person, persons, or property by or from the said Contractor or by or in consequence of any neglect in safeguarding the work, or though the use of unacceptable materials in the course of the project, or by or on account of any act or omission, neglect, misconduct or negligence of the said Contractor.

3.02 AIR MONITORING A. Air Monitoring by Contractor

1. The Contractor shall provide daily 8-hour TWA PEL and daily 30-minute Excursion

Limit personal breathing zone air monitoring in accordance with and in addition to 29 CFR 1926.1101(f), including all amendments, and Appendix A of the OSHA standard within the work sites throughout all asbestos work site enclosure, material stripping, removal, cleaning encapsulation operations, or any other activities which might disturb asbestos-containing materials to ensure that the workers are adequately protected at all times.


2. Samples shall be collected by calibrated pumps whose flow rates can be determined to an accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent. Calibrate pumps both prior to and after each use with a representative filter in line.

3. Analysis of samples shall be done in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101(f) and

Appendix A of the OSHA standard. The results of all samples shall be posted outside the containment area within 48 hours of sampling and maintained there until the project has been concluded. This data shall include both the results of individual samples and the results of 8 hour TWA and 30-minute Excursion Limit determinations. Posted results shall include a synopsis of work activities for which the results are representative. Records shall be made of each employee's personal monitoring results and the employee shall be notified of these results within 15 days either individually or by posting them in a central location in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101(f).

4. Throughout each work site enclosure process, asbestos removal, cleaning and

encapsulation operations, air samples shall be taken by the Contractor in accordance with methods prescribed in Chapter X of the Federal OSHA Industrial Hygiene Field Operations Manual or by equivalent procedures and analyzed using NIOSH Method 7400 by a competent person who has successfully completed NIOSH Course #582, "Sampling and Evaluating Airborne Asbestos Dust," or proven equivalent to ensure that the Contractor is complying with applicable EPA and OSHA regulations. This laboratory performing the analysis of air samples must have been judged proficient in the NIOSH PAT program for the most recent testing period, and shall hold a current license from the Virginia DPOR.

5. All analytical results from the Contractor's air monitoring shall be posted at the work

site entrance as soon as they become available and not more than 48 hours from the time in which the samples were taken. Copies of these results shall be presented to the Owner's Industrial Hygienist and Owner's Representative as signed "Certificates of Analysis". Form shall state:

a. Date and time sampling began. b. Flow rate of samples. c. Sampling time elapsed. d. Concentration of fibers (fibers greater than 5 micrometers/cc air). e. Location from which sample taken (person, building, floor, room, area within

room). f. Activity occurring during sampling (removal, clean-up, encapsulation, etc.). g. Personal protective equipment worn by the person monitored. h. Name and phone number of person taking sample. i. Name and phone number of laboratory analyzing sample. j. Name and phone number of Contractor. k. Method of analysis.

6. The Contractor shall maintain records of all air monitoring required by this section.

Records shall be maintained for a period of at least 30 years and shall be made available upon request to the Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health, the Director of the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, and to authorized representatives of either.

7. With the exception of work site exterior and the first post-abatement clearance

monitoring of each work site, and analyses of these samples using PCM or TEM, which shall be the responsibility of the Owner, all cost of all air monitoring services are to be paid by the Contractor. Also, if AHERA TEM post-abatement clearance testing fails in any work site and testing must be repeated, the Contractor_shall pay for the additional laboratory fees and sample handling


charges associated with all the re-testing.

B. Air Monitoring by Owner

1. The Owner's Industrial Hygienist shall be responsible for air sampling exterior to each work site during asbestos removal, cleaning and encapsulation activities daily as necessary to reasonably and periodically monitor the integrity of the Contractor's enclosure(s). These exterior samples shall be collected in areas of highest risk of contamination. The Owner's Industrial Hygienist shall also perform post-abatement environmental sampling within each asbestos abatement work site as required by AHERA for final Contractor clearance monitoring and documentation of job completion. (Note to Contractor: The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying any necessary AC power to the Owner's Industrial Hygienist's air monitoring devices, as requested by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist at any time during or after the abatement activities.)

2. Copies of all analytical results from the Owner's Industrial Hygienist monitoring shall

be presented to the Owner's Representative and Contractor as signed "Certificates of Analysis" as they become available. Form shall state:

a. Date and time sampling began. b. Flow rate of samples. c. Sampling time elapsed. d. Concentration of fibers (fibers greater than 5 micrometers/cc air). e. Location from which sample taken (person, building, floor, room area within

room). f. Activity occurring during sampling (removal, clean-up, post-removal

clearance, etc.). g. Name and phone number of person taking sample. h. Name and phone number of laboratory analyzing sample. i. Name and phone number of Contractor j. Method of analysis.

3. Final work site post-abatement clearance monitoring for interior building ACM

removal shall be performed by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist no sooner than 24 hours after the Contractor has completely removed the asbestos-containing materials, cleaned and applied the final lockdown encapsulant to the work site(s). This air monitoring shall be performed after the final visual inspection by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist and after the Contractor has removed all work site enclosure materials from floors, walls, fixtures, or other surfaces, but before critical barriers separating the work site from the rest of the building and sheets covering doors, vents or windows are removed. The negative air ventilation shall continue operating while this air monitoring is in progress.

4. All area samples taken during Contractor's asbestos abatement activities by the

Owner's Industrial Hygienist shall be analyzed using PCM NIOSH Method 7400 by a competent person who has successfully completed NIOSH Course #582, "Sampling and Evaluation of Airborne Asbestos Dust," or proven equivalent. The laboratory utilized for the PCM analysis shall have been judged proficient in the NIOSH PAT program for the most recent testing period, and shall be licensed by the Virginia DPOR.

5. All post-abatement clearance air samples taken by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist

shall be analyzed using either the PCM or TEM EPA-AHERA protocol according to the procedures described in 40 CFR Part 763, Vol. 52, No. 210, "Asbestos-Containing Materials in Schools." The laboratory or laboratories used to perform these TEM or PCM analyses shall be licensed by the Virginia DPOR.


3.03 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT OPERATIONS

A. Project Monitoring by Owner's Industrial Hygienist

1. During all phases of the asbestos abatement activity, the Contractor's work shall be

inspected by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist (Project Monitor) on a daily basis. The Project Monitor shall look for all items specified herein and determine if the Contractor is in compliance with this contract document.

2. The Owner's Industrial Hygienist shall complete an "Asbestos Abatement Project

Daily Checklist" after each daily inspection. A copy of this form may be found in PART 5 of these specifications. All items on this checklist must be checked off by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist in order for the Contractor to proceed with the asbestos abatement activity.

B. Removal of Interior Asbestos-Containing Materials

1. The Contractor shall thoroughly wet asbestos containing materials to be removed

prior to stripping and/or tooling to reduce fiber dispersal into the air. Accomplish wetting by a fine spray (mist) of amended water or appropriate removal encapsulant. In the case of amosite-containing materials, use Foster #3260 encapsulant/removal agent or approved equivalent by Owner's Industrial Hygienist. Saturate material sufficiently to wet the substrate without causing excess dripping. Allow time for water or removal encapsulant to penetrate material thoroughly. If amended water is used, spray material repeatedly during the work process to maintain a continuously wet condition. If a removal encapsulant is used, apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Perforate outer covering of any installation which has been painted/or jacketed in order to allow penetration of amended water or removal encapsulant, or where necessary, carefully remove or strip away while simultaneously spraying amended water or removal encapsulant on the installation to minimize dispersal of asbestos fibers into the air.

2. Mist work sites continuously with amended water or encapsulant/removal agent

whenever necessary to reduce airborne fiber levels. 3. Remove saturated asbestos-containing material in small sections from all areas. Do

not allow material to dry out. As it is removed, simultaneously pack material while still wet into disposal bags. Twist neck of bags, bend over and seal with minimum three wraps of duct tape. Clean outside and move to wash-down station adjacent to material decontamination unit.

4. If asbestos-containing material is pipe or pipe fitting insulation, spray with a mist of

amended water or removal encapsulant. Allow amended water or removal encapsulant to saturate material to substrate. If a removal encapsulant is used, use in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Cut bands holding performed pipe insulation, slit jackets and seams, remove and hand-place in a disposal bag. Remove job molded fitting insulation in chunks and hand place in a disposal bag. Do not drop to floor. Remove any residue on pipe or fitting with stiff bristle nylon hand brush. In locations where pipe fitting insulation is removed from pipe with straight runs insulated with fibrous glass or other non-asbestos-containing material, remove material 6" from the point where it contacts the asbestos-containing insulation.

NOTE: In cases where pipe insulation materials are above suspended ceiling tiles, plaster

or drywall, and have potentially contaminated the upper surface of these ceiling materials, remove all such ceiling materials, including any metal grid and related


built-in light fixtures and dispose of as asbestos waste. However, the removal of any non-contaminated ceiling materials can be performed prior to asbestos abatement activities. This demolition work shall be performed in a manner which shall not disturb the ACM. The proper disposal of this non-asbestos waste shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

5. If asbestos-containing material is "Maronite" or "Transite" paneling material, or similar ACM (eg. lab bench tops, fume hood panels, sinks, etc.) spray all wall surfaces with a mist of amended water or removal encapsulant. Allow time to adequately saturate wall panels. Remove panels in whole sheets by unscrewing each panel and separating at joints. (Should panels require cutting, only HEPA-filtered mechanical cutting, devices shall be used. Immediately wrap and seal wall panel material in minimum two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheeting for disposal.

6. If ACM is thermal system gasket or rope, spray ACM with a mist of removal

encapsulant to completely saturate material. Do not oversaturate to cause excess dripping. Pull or scrape or rope from substrate and immediately place into asbestos waste bags. Clean any remaining asbestos-contaminated materials from substrate using stiff nylon-bristled brushes. Hold the nozzle from an operating HEPA filtered vacuum cleaner in the immediate vicinity of and below the work while brushing the substrate surface.

7. If asbestos-containing material is vinyl asbestos floor tile, sheet floor covering, or

related mastic, spray floor covering with a mist of amended water during removal. Remove floor covering without crumbling or chipping in as large pieces as possible and place directly into disposal bag. Remove all other loose asbestos-containing debris in a similar manner, and then completely HEPA vacuum floor from which floor covering materials and related debris were removed. Should the asbestos-containing floor tile or covering material be carpeted over, the carpet may be removed prior to ACM abatement activities provided this removal operation does not physically disturb the floor tile or covering materials. If such carpet removal does disturb the floor tile or covering, then this procedure shall be considered part of the ACM abatement activity and the carpet shall be treated and disposed of as asbestos in accordance with methods specified herein. The asbestos-containing mastic shall be removed using either wet scraping, appropriate no or low odor chemical solvents, or by completely removing and disposing (as asbestos waste) the contaminated floor surface (e.g. removal of wooden flooring). The bidder's asbestos abatement plan shall describe the exact or any alternate methods which will be used in this project to remove all mastic and mastic-contaminated materials, and should chemical solvents be utilized, the type(s) of personnel protection which will be used and the methods of chemical waste disposal planned for full compliance with all applicable Federal, State, and Local hazardous waste regulations and/or the requirements as stated in Section 3.04 of these specifications.

8. If asbestos-containing material is sprayed-on fireproofing, architectural or acoustical

finish, or acoustic ceiling tile and/or related mastic on scratch coat, spray with a fine mist of amended water or removal encapsulant. Allow time for amended water or removal encapsulant to saturate materials to substrate. Do not over saturate to cause excess dripping. Scrape materials from substrate. Remove materials in manageable quantities and control the decent by staging material through decent. If using amended water, spray mist surface continuously during work process. If using removal encapsulant follow manufacturer's written instructions. Remove residue remaining on substrate with scraper, or nylon-bristled brush. If a removal encapsulant is used, remove residue completely before encapsulant dries. If substrate dries before complete removal of residue, re-wet with amended water or removal encapsulant.


9. If asbestos-containing material is fireproofing or architectural finish on wire or wood

lath, spray asbestos material with a fine mist of amended water or removal encapsulant. Allow time for amended water or removal encapsulant to completely saturate material. Do not over saturate to cause excess dripping. If surface of material has been painted or otherwise coated, cut small holes as required and apply amended water or removal encapsulant from above. Cut lath into 2' x 6' sections and cut hanger wires. Roll up complete with asbestos-containing material and hand place in disposal bag. Do not drip on floor. After removal of lath and asbestos-containing material, remove any overspray on decking and structure above using stiff nylon bristled brush. Hold the nozzle from an operating HEPA filtered vacuum cleaner in the immediate vicinity of and below the work while cutting the wire lath or otherwise disturbing the asbestos-containing material. Use a two worker crew for cutting, with one worker cutting and one worker holding HEPA vacuum nozzle.

10. If asbestos-containing material is HVAC unit or HVAC duct "finish coat" insulation on

wire lath over fiberglass wrap, spray asbestos finish with a fine mist of amended water or removal encapsulant. Allow time for amended water or removal encapsulant to completely saturate material. Do not over-saturate to cause excess dripping. If surface of material has been painted or otherwise coated, cut small holes as required and apply amended water or removal encapsulant from above. Cut wire lath into maximum 2' x 6' sections. Roll up complete with asbestos-containing material and hand place in disposal bag. Remove all underlying fiberglass wrap (if present) from metal HVAC unit or duct surface using stiff nylon-bristled brush and dispose of as asbestos-contaminated materials. Hold the nozzle from an operating HEPA filtered vacuum cleaner in the immediate vicinity of and below the work which cutting the wire lath or otherwise disturbing the asbestos-containing material. Use a two-worker crew for cutting, with one worker cutting and one worker holding HEPA vacuum nozzle.

11. If asbestos-containing material is mastic on HVAC duct or pipe fiberglass wrap

insulation, spray entire surface of fiberglass insulation and mastic adhesive with a mist of amended water or removal encapsulant. Allow time for amended water or removal encapsulant to completely saturate material. Do not over-saturate to cause excess dripping. Cut and pull off all fiberglass wrap insulation in sections, small enough to dispose of in asbestos waste bags. Continue misting with amended water or removal encapsulant throughout removal and bagging process. Take care to minimize cutting through the mastic adhesive material by cutting the fiberglass wrap insulation in areas where there is minimal or no mastic adhesive present. Clean any remaining asbestos-contaminated materials from metal HVAC duct or pipe surface using stiff nylon-bristled brush. Hold the nozzle from an operating HEPA filtered vacuum cleaner in the immediate vicinity of and below the work while cutting the fiberglass wrap insulation and while brushing the duct surface.

12. If asbestos-containing material is metal HVAC duct joint sealant, spray entire surface

of duct and sealant with a mist of amended water or removal encapsulant. Allow time for amended water or removal encapsulant to completely saturate material. Do not over-saturate to cause excess dripping. Cut HVAC duct in locations where there are no sealant into sections small enough to dispose of in asbestos waste bags. Continue misting with amended water or removal encapsulant throughout removal and bagging process.

13. If asbestos-containing material is an insulated fire door, disconnect door from frame

by removing hinge screws from frame. Do not remove any hardware from fire door. Immediately wrap and seal entire door and attached hardware in minimum


two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheeting for disposal. 14. The Contractor shall use work procedures that result in an 8 hour time weighted

average (TWA) personal airborne fiber count less than 0.1 fibers/cc air and a 30-minute TWA personal airborne fiber count less than 1.0 fiber/cc of air. If airborne fiber counts exceed either of these levels, immediately mist the area with amended water to lower fiber counts and revise work procedures to maintain airborne fiber levels within the required limits.

C. Removal of Exterior Asbestos-Containing Materials

1. The Contractor shall thoroughly wet asbestos containing materials to be removed

prior to cutting, stripping and/or removing to reduce fiber dispersal into the air (unless wet methods are not feasible or will create safety hazards). Accomplish wetting by a fine spray (mist) of amended water or appropriate removal encapsulant. Saturate material sufficiently to wet the substrate without causing excess dripping or risk of building interior water damage or contamination. Allow time for water or removal encapsulant to penetrate material thoroughly. If amended water is used, spray material repeatedly during the work process to maintain a continuously wet condition. If a removal encapsulant is used, apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Perforate outer covering of any installation which has been painted/or jacketed in order to allow penetration of amended water or removal encapsulant, or where necessary, carefully strip away small sections of exterior asbestos containing roofing materials while simultaneously spraying amended water or removal encapsulant on the installation to minimize dispersal of asbestos fibers into the air.

2. Mist each work site continuously with amended water whenever necessary to reduce

airborne fiber levels. Remove saturated asbestos-containing roofing, siding, paneling, painted coating, caulking or glazing materials in small sections from all areas. Do not allow materials to dry out at any time. Do not crack, break or abrade asbestos siding or paneling materials if such action can be avoided.

3. The Contractor shall use work procedures that result in an 8 hour time weighted

average (TWA) airborne personal fiber count less than 0.1 fibers/cc air and a 30-minute TWA personal fiber count less than 1.0 fibers/cc of air. If airborne fiber counts exceed either of these levels, immediately mist the area with amended water to lower fiber counts and revise work procedures to maintain airborne fiber levels within the required limits.

4. For asbestos-containing roofing materials, cutting machines shall be continuously

misted during use, unless a Competent Person determines that misting substantially decreases worker safety. When removing asbestos-containing roofing felts using power roof cutter, all dust resulting from the cutting operation shall be collected by a HEPA dust collector, or shall be HEPA vacuumed along the cut line.

5. As asbestos-containing roofing, roofing cement, siding, paneling, painted coating,

caulking or glazing materials are removed, simultaneously pack material while still wet into waste disposal bags. HEPA vacuum excess air from within bags, twist neck of bags, bend neck over, and seal with a minimum of three wraps of duct or bag sealing tape. If approved by the Owner’s I.H., and the ACM are NESHAP Category I or II non-friable, and the work may be categorized as an OSHA Class II activity, it may not require bagging. In these cases, the ACM shall be carefully placed within a poly-lined truck bed or waste roll-off, covered and sealed prior to transport, and properly transported and disposed of within a disposal site which is EPA approved to accept such non-friable ACM waste.


6. ACM that has been removed from a roof shall not be dropped or thrown to the ground. Unless the material is carried or passed to the ground by hand, it shall be lowered to the ground via covered, dust-tight chute, crane or hoist. Any ACM that are intact or not intact shall be lowered to the ground as soon as practicable, but in any event, no later than the end of the work shift. While any non-intact ACM remains on the roof, it shall either be kept wet, placed in impermeable waste bags, or wrapped in plastic sheeting. Upon being lowered, unwrapped materials shall be transferred to closed receptacles in such a manner so as to preclude the dispersion of dust.

7. Wipe down outside of bags with clean wetted cloths, HEPA vacuum, and then move

to waste staging/double bagging area outside of immediate removal site, but inside of barricaded area.

8. Using washdown station with waste water properly filtered to 1 micron, or further wipe

down and HEPA vacuuming procedures while in the waste staging area, reclean outside of bag, insert into second waste bag, HEPA vacuum excess air from inside bag, twist neck, bend neck over, and seal with a minimum three wraps of duct or bag sealing tape.

9. All remaining asbestos-containing materials debris shall be similarly wetted and

placed into disposal bags, or HEPA vacuumed from all work site surfaces, and the bags sealed and cleaned in the same manner as above.

10. For any roofing or siding materials removal project, all workers shall use proper

safety ropes and harnesses throughout the work, as required by OSHA, or as required by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist.

11. In addition to these procedures, the Contractor shall follow all applicable work

procedures described within OSHA 1926.1101 (g) Methods of Compliance.

*NOTE: Alternate methods of removing exterior ACM shall be described in the Contractor's asbestos abatement plan, and shall be subject to the approval by the Owner's I.H. prior to the Contractor proceeding with them.

3.04 DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTE

A. Procedure

1. The procedure for hauling and disposal of asbestos waste shall comply with 40 CFR 61 (Subpart B), Virginia Department of Environmental Quality #VR672-20-10, OSHA regulations in 29 CFR 1926. 58, regional and local standards. All asbestos waste, scrap, debris, containers and asbestos-contaminated clothing and equipment which may produce airborne concentrations in asbestos fibers shall be collected and placed in sealed and properly labeled, 6 mil impermeable bags, or wrapped and sealed in two layers of properly labeled 6 mil polyethylene sheeting. NESHAP Category I or II ACM which have not become friable, if approved by the Owner’s I.H., may be disposed of directly into a poly-lined truck or roll-off. Once full, the waste materials shall be covered, properly sealed for transport, and then disposed of in a facility which is EPA-approved for accepting such non-friable ACM waste in this form.

2. The Contractor shall provide waste generator and DANGER labels and affix to

containers of all asbestos materials, scrap, waste, debris and other products contaminated with asbestos. Waste generator labels shall list the generator's name, address and phone number along with the Contractor's name, address


and phone number. Danger labels shall be of sufficient size to be clearly legible, displaying the following:

DANGER

CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST

CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD RQ WASTE ASBESTOS MIXTURE

NA 2212

3. When transporting properly bagged and labeled ACM waste from the work site(s) to the waste disposal vehicle, sealed containers such as garbage cans with sealed or locking lids, shall be used. Any other methods of waste transport through the building must have prior approval from the Owner's Industrial Hygienist.

4. For ACM from building roofs or side-mounted scaffolding, etc., all double-bagged or

polyethylene-wrapped asbestos waste materials shall be let down from the roof or scaffold surface using rope and pulley, crane, elevator or other appropriate equipment which will prevent any possible rupture of the polyethylene. Also, if approved by the Owner’s I.H., roofing materials waste may be lowered to the sealed waste vehicle or roll-off by use of an enclosed chute on the side of the building. If this procedure is used, the disposal container on ground level shall be enclosed with polyethylene plastic, reinforced by an outer tarp, and the chute shall enter through the poly and tarp in a way that allows no roofing waste, debris or dust to exit the path from roof to ground container.

5. Once exterior ACM is on the ground or interior ACM outside of building, carefully load

containerized waste on trucks with sealed storage compartments lined with removable 6-mil polyethylene sheets or other appropriate sealed vehicles for transport. Exercise care before and during transport, to ensure that no unauthorized persons have access to the material.

6. Do not store disposal bagged or wrapped material outside of the barricaded work

area. Take bags or wrapped ACM from the work area directly to a sealed truck or dumpster without exiting barricaded area. For temporary storage, store sealed impermeable bags in approved asbestos waste containers (drums, skips, etc.) inside the barricaded work area.

7. Carefully load containerized waste on sealed trucks or other appropriate enclosed

body vehicles for transport. Exercise care before and during transport, to ensure that no unauthorized persons have access to the material.

*NOTE: Alternate methods of waste handling shall be approved of by the Owner's Industrial

Hygienist prior to proceeding with them.

B. Disposal - Landfill

1. Advise the sanitary landfill operator, at least 24 hours in advance of transport, of the quantity of material to be delivered.

2. This waste material shall be disposed of only at a USEPA and Virginia State

Department of Environmental Quality approved sanitary landfill. The procedure for hauling and disposal shall comply with NESHAPS 40 CFR 61 (Subpart B), state, regional, and local standards. All asbestos waste must be accompanied by appropriate manifest shipping papers as required by the EPA NESHAPS (Nov. 20, 1990) final regulation to identify the waste, its origin, and its destination. No waste may be received at a disposal facility without these waste shipment documents. Sealed plastic bags must be hand placed from containers into the


burial site unless the bags have been broken or damaged. Damaged bags shall remain in the container and the entire contaminated containers may be recycled. Workers unloading containers shall wear appropriate respirators and personal protective equipment when handling asbestos materials at the disposal site.

C. Certificate of Disposal

1. The Contractor will submit copies of the signed certificates of receipt from the landfill,

as well as copies of the NESHAPS waste shipment manifests to the Owner's Representative within one week after each load of asbestos waste is deposited in the landfill.

2. This certificate shall list the quantity of materials delivered to the disposal site, a

description of these materials, the location of the site and a statement attesting to the fact that the site is an EPA and State of Virginia Department of Environmental Quality (if inside the Commonwealth of Virginia) approved disposal location. The signatures of the Contractor, transporter and landfill operator must appear on the certificates.

*NOTE: Final payment to the Contractor shall not be made until all such certificates of

disposal are presented to the Owner as per the "Final Asbestos Abatement Project Completion Report" requirements.

3.05 DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES

A. Equipment and Waste Container Decontamination

1. The Contractor shall wipe clean all surfaces of all non-disposable equipment and asbestos waste containers in each work site with wetted cotton cloths, sponges, or tack rags and vacuum these surfaces with a HEPA filtered vacuum.

2. The equipment and asbestos waste containers shall then be removed from each work

site through the equipment and waste decontamination unit in accordance with the procedures specified herein.

B. Work Area Decontamination

1. The Contractor shall carry out a first cleaning of all surfaces of each work site

including items of remaining sheeting, tools, scaffolding and/or staging by use of damp-cleaning and mopping, and/or a HEPA filtered vacuum. (Note: A HEPA vacuum will fail if used with wet material). Do not perform dry dusting or dry sweeping. Use each surface of a cleaning cloth one time only and then dispose of as contaminated waste. Continue this cleaning until there is no visible debris from removed materials or residue on plastic sheeting or other surfaces. The Contractor shall supply each worker with a flashlight or portable electric utility light during all phases of work area decontamination and fine cleaning. This light shall be used to assist the worker in locating asbestos dust and/or debris.

2. Wait 24 hours to allow negative air machines to clean air of airborne asbestos fibers.

Use oscillating fans as necessary to assure circulation of air in all parts of work areas during this period. Maintain negative pressure system in operation for the entire 24 hour period.

3. Carry out a second cleaning of all surfaces in the work area in the same manner as

the first cleaning. Immediately following the second cleaning of all surfaces in the work area, the Contractors on-site project supervisor shall perform a complete visual inspection of the work site using effective portable lighting to


ensure that it is dust free and no visible asbestos containing materials remain. If dust or asbestos-containing materials remain, the second cleaning-procedure shall be repeated.

4. After passing the Contractor's project supervisor's inspection, the work area shall be

visually inspected by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist as specified herein. 5. After approval has been granted by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist and the primary

inspection checklist is completed in total, any existing areas from which asbestos has been removed shall receive two sprayed coats of Foster Protector Sealant Clear 32-22, manufactured by H.B. Fuller Company, or a proven equivalent. After the encapsulant has sufficiently dried, the polyethylene sheeting shall be removed from floors, walls, and other surfaces and disposed of by the Contractor as asbestos-contaminated waste. (Note: Polyethylene barriers are not to be removed from doors, vents, windows, or any areas separating the work site from the rest of the building. Polyethylene sheeting over light fixtures clocks, speakers or other equipment in the work area shall also not be removed at this time.) After the removal of this polyethylene sheeting, all surfaces in the entire work site will be thoroughly HEPA vacuumed, wet mopped, and sprayed with encapsulant if necessary. Again, portable lighting shall be used to assist each worker in this fine cleaning operation.

6. After 24 hours, the Contractor's general superintendent shall perform a complete

visual inspection of the entire work area including: decontamination unit, all plastic sheeting, seals over ventilation openings, doorways, windows, and other openings; look for debris from any sources, residue on surfaces, dust or other matter. If any such debris residue on surfaces, dust, or other matter is found, repeat final cleaning and continue decontamination procedure from that point.

C. Work Area Visual Inspection by Owner's Industrial Hygienist

1. Following the removal and disposal of all asbestos-containing materials, and after the

asbestos-contaminated equipment and waste containers have been decontaminated and removed from the work site, after the initial cleaning of the work site surfaces, and after the inspection and approval by the Contractor's project supervisor, the Owner's Industrial Hygienist shall inspect the work site for visible evidence of remaining asbestos-containing materials, dust or debris. The Contractor shall arrange for this inspection with the Owner's Industrial Hygienist at least 48 hours in advance.

2. To verify that each work site has passed the post-removal inspection, the Owner's

Industrial Hygienist shall complete an "Asbestos Abatement Project Post-Removal Checklist" form. A copy of this form may be found in PART 5 of these specifications. All items within Section 1 of this form entitled, "Primary Inspection" must be checked-off by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist prior to the Contractor proceeding with encapsulant application and/or polyethylene sheeting removal.

3. Should any work site not pass this visual inspection and completion of the primary

inspection checklist by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist, remaining asbestos containing material, dust or debris shall be removed, and initial cleaning and decontamination repeated by the Contractor, and arrangements made for another inspection by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist.

4. Only after the work site has successfully passed this inspection by the Owner's

Industrial Hygienist and the final inspection checklist completed in total shall the Contractor proceed with the application of encapsulant, primary polyethylene sheeting removal, and second cleaning process as per these specifications.


D. Encapsulant/Enclosure Material Application (Interior ACM abatement only)

1. After satisfactorily passing the visual inspection and completing the primary

inspection checklist in total by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist, the Contractor shall apply to all exposed surfaces within the work site, including the substrate from which the asbestos-containing material was removed, the polyethylene sheeting, and all other covered or uncovered items or structures, two sprayed-on coatings of an appropriate sealant-type encapsulant. The second application of sealant shall be performed only after the first has dried. The brand and type of sealant to be used shall be specified in the Contractor's Asbestos Abatement Plan and shall be approved of in advance by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist.

2. After the second application of sealant has dried, the Contractor shall then remove all

polyethylene sheeting covering light fixtures, clocks, speakers, or other equipment in the work site (but not critical barriers). This equipment shall then be properly cleaned and decontaminated.

E. Pre-Clearance Visual Inspection by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist

1. After final cleaning, encapsulation and, where appropriate, enclosure processes are

completed within a work site, the Owner's Industrial Hygienist shall perform a pre-clearance visual inspection. This inspection shall be performed while the work site is still under negative pressure and prior to removal of any critical barriers of the work site enclosure.

2. This inspection shall confirm that the encapsulant has dried, all poly sheeting is

removed except for critical barriers, all surfaces of the work site and equipment are completely free of visible dust, all waste bags are removed and properly stored or transported off-site, all abatement tools and equipment are properly decontaminated and removed from work site, and the decon unit is free of supplies and visible dust.

3. The Owner's Industrial Hygienist shall not proceed with work site clearance air testing

until all items within the "Pre-Clearance Inspection" portion of the "Asbestos Abatement Project Post-Removal Checklist" form (copy in PART 5 of these specifications) have been checked off.

F. Work Area Clearance (Interior ACM abatement only)

1. After all items within the Pre-Clearance Visual Inspection Checklist have been

completed in total, the Owner's Industrial Hygienist shall proceed with final work area post-abatement air monitoring. This air monitoring shall be performed while the Contractor's negative pressure HEPA filtration system is operating, and prior to the removal of any critical barriers of the work area enclosure. The Contractor shall arrange for this air monitoring at least 24 hours in advance.

2. After final air testing by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist shows the airborne asbestos

levels within each site to be acceptable and all items within the Clearance Testing Checklist have been completed in total, the remaining asbestos barriers and clean room shall be dismantled and disposed of as contaminated waste, and the HEPA filtration system may be dismantled. If this final air testing does not show the air quality within the work area to be acceptable, the Contractor will repeat the HEPA vacuuming and wet mopping process, and the Owner's Industrial Hygienist will repeat this final testing. This process shall be repeated as necessary with the Contractor paying for all additional lab fees and handling charges until final air testing shows acceptable airborne asbestos levels within the work site.


G. Project Completion Requirements

1. After each work site passes the post-abatement air test, the Contractor may remove

remaining critical barriers, decontamination unit, etc.. All polyethylene sheeting and other disposable materials shall be removed and disposed of as asbestos waste. All surfaces from which the critical barriers are removed shall be re-cleaned at this time using wet wiping in addition to HEPA vacuum techniques.

2. The Owner's I.H. shall not report the project as "complete" to the Owner until each

work site has been visually re-inspected after the re-cleaning has been performed and all items within the Asbestos Abatement Project Post-Removal Checklist (copy in Section III of these specifications) have been checked off.


PART 4 LEGAL RIGHTS, ROYALTIES AND PATENTS

4.01 OWNER'S RIGHTS

A. The Owner reserves the right to halt the project work until hazardous or potentially hazardous

conditions are corrected by the Contractor. B. The Owner reserves the right to independently perform air analyses and other tests at any

time as it deems necessary to ensure and protect the safety of the project. C. The Contractor shall agree to indemnify and save harmless the County and all of its officers,

agents, and employees from all suits, actions or claims of any character, name and description brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person, persons or property by or from the said Contractor or by or in consequence of any neglect in safeguarding the work, or through the use of unacceptable materials in the construction of the improvement, or by or on account of any act or omission, neglect, misconduct or negligence of the Contractor.

4.02 OWNER'S INDUSTRIAL HYGIENIST'S RIGHTS

A. All sampling by the Owner's Industrial Hygienist (I.H.) shall be done in full accordance with applicable federal, state, and local regulations and guidelines. Analysis of samples so obtained will be conducted by one or more qualified independent laboratories. The test results obtained from the analyses conducted by the independent laboratories shall be interpreted by the Owner's I.H. and reported to the Owner as required herein. In making its interpretation of the test results provided by the independent laboratories, the Owner's I.H. will rely upon, and be entitled to rely upon the validity and accuracy of the test results so obtained. The Owner's I.H. makes no affirmations, warranties, representations or guarantees of any kind concerning the validity or accuracy of the test results and assumes no responsibility or liability thereof. The method of laboratory analysis used by the independent laboratories shall be selected by the Owner with the understanding and agreement that the method or methods selected will vary in accuracy of results obtained, depending upon the sophistication and expense of the method or methods selected.

B. The Owner's I.H. is an independent consultant with respect to the Owner and to the

Contractor. The Owner's I.H. shall not be deemed an agent, servant or employee of the Owner or the Contractor with respect to any matters relating to this contract.

C. The Owner's I.H. shall make no affirmations, warranties, representations or guarantees

concerning the compliance by the Contractor or any other party who performs services in connection with this contract with federal, state or local regulations or guidelines, or any other obligation of any such Contractor, including the quality of such Contractor's work. The Owner's I.H.'s sole obligation hereunder shall be to monitor and report to the Owner any conduct on the part of the Contractor or other party actually observed by the Owner's I.H. which is or may be inconsistent with the terms and requirements of this contract. All such monitoring and reporting conducted by the Owner's I.H. will be done on a periodic basis as required in this contract and the Owner's I.H. has no obligation to, and does not undertake to, observe and/or report all incidences of conduct or actions inconsistent with the terms and requirements of this contract. The Owner's I.H. shall not assume any supervisory or other responsibility for the performance or conduct of any of the agents, servants or employees of the Contractor, the Owner or other parties associated with the work involved in this contract. The Owner's I.H. also shall assume no responsibility for the adherence of any such agent, servant or employee to applicable federal, state or local regulations or guidelines.

D. The Owner's I.H. shall make no affirmations, warranties, representations or guarantees that


the performance of its obligations hereunder, or of the Contractor or any other party performing work related to this contract, shall totally eliminate the source of all health hazards, or prevent the risk of illnesses or injuries.

E. The Owner's I.H. shall make no affirmations, warranties, representations or guarantees that it

has identified and reported all instances of harmful or hazardous materials located on the premises which are the subject of this contract, or that the actions taken or work performed by the Contractor or any other party or entity in connection with this contract shall have totally removed all such harmful or hazardous materials.

F. The Contractor and any other party or entity in connection with this contract shall indemnify

and hold harmless the Owner's I.H. from all claims, demands, suits, and actions of any character, name or description brought for or on account of any injuries or damages, whether to person or property, on account of any act or omission of the Owner's I.H. relating to this contract, unless such act or omission shall have been the result of intentional misconduct.

4.03 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS

The Contractor shall obtain all licenses necessary to use any invention, article, appliance, process or technique of whatever kind and shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall hold and save the Owner, its officers, agents and employees, and the Owner's Industrial Hygienist, its officers, agents and employees, harmless from any loss or liability for or on account of the infringement of any patent rights in connection with any invention, process, technique, article or appliance manufactured or used in the performance of the Contract, including its use by the Owner or the Owner's Industrial Hygienist, unless such invention, process, article or appliance is specifically named in the specifications or drawings as acceptable for use in carrying out the work. If, before using any invention, process, article or appliance specifically named in the specifications or drawings as acceptable for use in carrying out the Work, the Contractor has or acquires information that the same is covered by letters of patent making it necessary to secure the permission of the patentee, or other, for the use of the same, he shall promptly advise the Owner and the Owner's Industrial Hygienist. The Owner may direct that some other invention, process, article or appliance be used. Should the Contractor have reason to believe that the invention, process, article or appliance so specified is an infringement of a patent, and fail to inform the Owner and the Owner's Industrial Hygienist, he shall be responsible for any loss due to the infringement. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and shall hold the Owner and The Owner's Industrial Hygienist harmless from loss on account thereof.


PART 5 - I.H. REPORT FORMS


Asbestos Abatement Contractor Submittals Review

Project: _____________________________________________________________________________ Date: _____________ Asbestos Abatement Contractor: ______________________________________ Project Manager (Owner’s Representative):_________________________________________________ The Asbestos Abatement Contractor submittals for the above referenced project have been reviewed by TJL Environmental Health Consultants, Inc.. All items checked below are satisfactory. Missing items should be completed by the Contractor and sent to our attention for further review.

Asbestos abatement plan

Respirator program

Medical surveillance program

Laboratory qualifications

Landfill qualifications

MSDS forms for chemical products

Project supervisor information

Contingency plan

HEPA filtration equipment certification

Project notification forms

Daily log format

Building\fixture damage report

Other:__________________________________________________________________ Comments: __________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________ Project Designer:____________________________________ cc: __________________ __________________ __________________


Asbestos Abatement Project Pre-Removal Checklist

Project:______________________________________________________________________________ Work Site:___________________________________________________________________________ Date:_______________ Asbestos Abatement Contractor:_____________________________________ Project Supervisor:_______________________ Project Manager:_______________________________ I. Posting Requirements

Project notifications and permits

Contractor, supervisor and worker licenses

Contingency plan

Supervisor’s emergency contact information

Warning signs (barricade tape, etc.)

MSDS forms

OSHA standard

Respiratory protection plan

Other:__________________________________________________________________ II. Work Site Preparation

HVAC system disabled

Critical barriers properly sealed

Adequate or temporary power sources provided

All movable objects decontaminated (if required) and removed

All fixed objects pre-cleaned and properly enclosed

Work site has proper lighting

GFCI for all equipment inside enclosure

Negative pressure achieved and smoke testing performed

Decontamination units properly constructed

Other:__________________________________________________________________ Comments:__________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ Project Monitor:__________________________________ cc: _________________ _________________ _________________


Asbestos Abatement Project Daily Checklist

Project:______________________________________________________________________________ Date:_____________ Asbestos Abatement Contractor:_______________________________________ Project Supervisor:_______________________ Project Manager:_______________________________

Air monitoring results posted and acceptable

Warning signs posted

Daily project log book completed

Negative pressure maintained

Work site enclosure(s) maintained

Decontamination unit and shower functioning properly

Respiratory protection properly used

Protective clothing properly used

Contaminated reusable equipment properly stored

First aid items and fire extinguishers on-site

Supervisor at job site

Work practices/methods acceptable

Work area well kept

Waste material doubled-bagged, labeled and stored

Other:_____________________________________________________________ Comments:__________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ Project Monitor:____________________________________ cc:______________ ______________ ______________


Asbestos Abatement Project Post-Removal Checklist

Project:______________________________________________________________________________ Work Site:___________________________________________________________________________ Date:____________ Asbestos Abatement Contractor:________________________________________ Project Supervisor:______________________ Project Manager:________________________________ I. Primary Inspection

Supervisor present during inspection

All bulk asbestos removed per scope of specifications

Any remaining asbestos enclosed/encapsulated and labeled

All surfaces wet-cleaned and/or HEPA vacuumed

All surfaces free of visible dust

Decontamination unit wet-cleaned and/or HEPA vacuumed

Approval given to encapsulate work site

Other:__________________________________________________________________ ` II. Pre-Clearance Inspection (N/A ____)

Supervisor present during inspection

Encapsulant dry

All poly removed except for critical barriers

All surfaces of work site and equipment free of visible dust

All waste bags removed and stored properly

All abatement tools and equipment properly removed from work site

Decontamination unit free of supplies and visible dust

Other:__________________________________________________________________ III. Clearance Testing (N/A____)

All clearance samples less than 0.01 f/cc by PCM or average less than 70 s/mm by TEM

Approval given to remove enclosure

Other:__________________________________________________________________ Comments:__________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ Project Monitor:_________________________________________ cc:_______________ _______________ _______________


Final Asbestos Abatement Project Completion Report

Project:______________________________________________________________________________ Date:______________ Asbestos Abatement Contractor:______________________________________ Project Supervisor:____________________ Project Manager:__________________________________

All asbestos removed per scope of project specifications

Remaining asbestos properly encapsulated and labeled

Visual inspection satisfactory

All clearance samples satisfactory

All personal employee air sample results acceptable

Copies of all required notifications received and acceptable

Landfill receipts and waste manifests received and acceptable

Project daily log book received and acceptable

Other:____________________________________________________________ Comments:____________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ Project Monitor:______________________________________ cc:________________ ________________ ________________ END OF SECTION 18000


GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 1

SECTION 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Commissioning in relation to Testing and Verification Protocols. 1. General requirements for coordinating and scheduling commissioning. 2. Commissioning meetings. 3. Commissioning reports. 4. Use of test equipment, instrumentation, and tools for commissioning. 5. Construction checklists, including, but not limited to, installation checks, startup,

performance tests, and performance test demonstration. 6. Commissioning tests and commissioning test demonstration. 7. Adjusting, verifying, and documenting identified systems and assemblies.

B. Commissioning shall be coordinated with phased delivery of project systems, equipment and scope.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1-2010.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Acceptance Criteria: Threshold of acceptable work quality or performance specified for a commissioning activity, including, but not limited to, construction checklists, performance tests, performance test demonstrations, commissioning tests and commissioning test demonstrations.

B. Commissioning Authority: An entity engaged by Owner to evaluate Commissioning-Process Work.

C. Commissioning Plan: A document, prepared by Commissioning Authority, that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of commissioning.

D. Commissioning: A quality-focused process for verifying and documenting that the facility and all of its systems and assemblies are planned, designed, installed, and tested to comply with owner's project requirements. The requirements specified here are limited to the construction phase commissioning activities.

E. Construction Phase Commissioning Completion: The stage of completion and acceptance of commissioning when resolution of deficient conditions and issues discovered during commissioning and retesting until acceptable results are obtained has been accomplished. Owner will establish in writing the date Construction Phase Commissioning Completion is achieved. 1. Commissioning is complete when the work specified in this Section and related Sections

has been completed and accepted, including, but not limited to, the following:



a. Completion of tests and acceptance of test results. b. Resolution of issues, as verified by retests performed and documented with

acceptance of retest results. c. Completion and acceptance of submittals and reports.

F. Commissioning Coordinator: Person coordinating Contractor's commissioning activities.

G. Owner's Witness: Commissioning Authority, Owner's Project Manager, or Architect-designated witness authorized to authenticate test demonstration data and to sign completed test data forms.

H. "Systems," "Assemblies," "Subsystems," "Equipment," and "Components": Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components.

I. Test: Performance tests, performance test demonstrations, commissioning tests, and commissioning test demonstrations.

1.5 COMMISSIONING TEAM

A. Members Appointed by Contractor(s): 1. Project superintendent. Commissioning Coordinator and other employees that Contractor

may deem appropriate for a particular portion of the commissioning. 2. Subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and specialists that Contractor may deem

appropriate for a particular portion of the commissioning. 3. Appointed team members shall have the authority to act on behalf of the entity they

represent.

B. Members Appointed by Owner: 1. Commissioning Authority (CxA), plus consultants that Commissioning Authority may

deem appropriate for a particular portion of the commissioning. 2. Owner representative(s), facility operations and maintenance personnel, plus other

employees, separate contractors, and consultants that Owner may deem appropriate for a particular portion of the commissioning.

3. Engineer, plus employees and consultants that Engineer may deem appropriate for a particular portion of the commissioning.


A. Comply with requirements in Division 1 for submittal procedures general requirements for commissioning.

B. Commissioning Plan Information: 1. List of Contractor-appointed commissioning team members to include specific personnel

and subcontractors to the performance of the various commissioning requirements. 2. Schedule of commissioning activities, integrated with the construction schedule. 3. Contractor personnel and subcontractors to participate in each test. 4. List of instrumentation required for each test to include identification of parties that will

provide instrumentation for each test.

C. Commissioning schedule.

D. Two-week look-ahead schedules.

E. Commissioning Coordinator Letter of Authority:



1. Within 10 days after approval of Commissioning Coordinator qualifications, submit a letter of authority for Commissioning Coordinator, signed by a principal of Contractor's firm. Letter shall authorize Commissioning Coordinator to do the following: a. Make inspections required for commissioning. b. Coordinate, schedule, and manage commissioning of Contractor, subcontractors,

and suppliers. c. Obtain documentation required for commissioning from Contractor, subcontractors,

and suppliers. d. Report issues, delayed resolution of issues, schedule conflicts, and lack of

cooperation or expertise on the part of members of the commissioning team.

F. Commissioning Coordinator Qualification Data: For entity coordinating Contractor's commissioning activities to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. 1. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having

successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

G. List test instrumentation, equipment, and monitoring devices. Include the following information: 1. Make, model, serial number, and application for each instrument, equipment, and

monitoring device. 2. Brief description of intended use. 3. Calibration record showing the following:

a. Calibration agency, including name and contact information. b. Last date of calibration. c. Range of values for which calibration is valid. d. Certification of accuracy. e. N.I.S.T. traceability certification for calibration equipment. f. Due date of the next calibration.

H. Test Reports: 1. Pre-Startup Report: Prior to startup of equipment or a system, submit signed, completed

construction checklists. 2. Test Data Reports: At the end of each day in which tests are conducted, submit test data

for tests performed. 3. Commissioning Issues Reports: Daily, at the end of each day in which tests are

conducted, submit commissioning issue reports for tests for which acceptable results were not achieved.

4. Weekly Progress Report: Weekly, at the end of each week in which tests are conducted, submit a progress report.

5. Data Trend Logs: Submit data trend logs at the end of the trend log period. 6. System Alarm Logs: Daily, at the start of days following a day in which tests were

performed, submit print-out of log of alarms that occurred since the last log was printed.

I. Construction Checklists: 1. Material checks. 2. Installation checks. 3. Startup procedures, where required.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Commissioning Report: 1. At Construction Phase Commissioning Completion, include the following:

a. Pre-startup reports. b. Approved test procedures c. Test data forms, completed and signed. d. Progress reports.



e. Commissioning issues report log. f. Commissioning issues reports showing resolution of issues. g. Correspondence or other documents related to resolution of issues. h. Other reports required by commissioning. i. List unresolved issues and reasons they remain unresolved and should be

exempted from the requirements for Construction Phase Commissioning Completion.

j. Report shall include commissioning work of Contractor.

B. Request for Certificate of Construction Phase Commissioning Completion.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For proprietary test equipment, instrumentation, and tools to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Commissioning Coordinator Qualifications: 1. Documented experience commissioning systems of similar complexity to those contained

in these documents on at least three projects of similar scope and complexity. 2. Certification of commissioning process expertise. The following certifications are

acceptable. Owner reserves the right to accept or reject certifications as evidence of qualification. a. Certified Commissioning Professional, by Building Commissioning Association. b. Commissioning Process Management Professional, by American Society of

Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers. c. Accredited Commissioning Process Authority Professional d. Accredited Commissioning Process Manager

B. Calibration Agency Qualifications: Certified by The American Association of Laboratory Accreditation that the calibration agency complies with minimum requirements of ISO/IEC 17025.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT, INSTRUMENTATION, AND TOOLS

A. Test equipment and instrumentation required to perform the commissioning shall remain the property of Contractor unless otherwise indicated.

B. Test equipment and instrumentation required to perform commissioning shall comply with the following criteria: 1. Be manufactured for the purpose of testing and measuring tests for which they are being

used and have an accuracy to test and measure system performance within the tolerances required to determine acceptable performance.

2. Calibrated and certified. a. Calibration performed and documented by a qualified calibration agency according

to national standards applicable to the tools and instrumentation being calibrated. Calibration shall be current according to national standards or within test equipment and instrumentation manufacturer's recommended intervals, whichever is more frequent, but not less than within six months of initial use on Project. Calibration tags permanently affixed.

b. Repair and recalibrate test equipment and instrumentation if dismantled, dropped, or damaged since last calibrated.

3. Maintain test equipment and instrumentation.



4. Use test equipment and instrumentation only for testing or monitoring Work for which they are designed.

2.2 REPORT FORMAT AND ORGANIZATION

A. General Format and Organization: 1. Electronic Data: Portable document format (PDF); a single file with outline-organized

bookmarks for major and minor tabs and tab contents itemized for specific reports.

B. Commissioning Report: 1. Include a table of contents and an index to each test. 2. Include major tabs for each Specification Section. 3. Include minor tabs for each test. 4. Within each minor tab, include the following:

a. Test specification. b. Pre-startup reports. c. Approved test procedures. d. Test data forms, completed and signed. e. Commissioning issue reports, showing resolution of issues, and documentation

related to resolution of issues pertaining to a single test. Group data forms, commissioning issue reports showing resolution of issues, and documentation related to resolution of issues for each test repetition together within the minor tab, in reverse chronological order (most recent on top).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Review preliminary construction checklists and preliminary test procedures and data forms.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS

A. Construction checklists cannot modify or conflict with the Contract Documents.

B. Create construction checklists based on actual systems and equipment to be included in Project.

C. Material Checks: Compare specified characteristics and approved submittals with materials as received. Include factory tests and other evaluations, adjustments, and tests performed prior to shipment, if applicable. 1. Services connection requirements, including configuration, size, location, and other

pertinent characteristics. 2. Included optional features. 3. Delivery Receipt Check: Inspect and record physical condition of materials and

equipment on delivery to Project site, including agreement with approved submittals, cleanliness and lack of damage.

4. Installation Checks: a. Location according to Drawings and approved Shop Drawings. b. Configuration. c. Compliance with manufacturers' written installation instructions. d. Attachment to structure. e. Access clearance to allow for maintenance, service, repair, removal, and

replacement without the need to disassemble or remove other equipment or building elements. Access coordinated with other building elements and



equipment, including, but not limited to, ceiling and wall access panels, in a manner consistent with OSHA fall-protection regulations and safe work practices.

f. Utility connections are of the correct characteristics, as applicable. g. Correct labeling and identification. h. Startup Checks: Verify readiness of equipment to be energized. Include

manufacturer's standard startup procedures and forms.

D. Startup: Perform and document initial operation of equipment to prove that it is installed properly and operates as intended according to manufacturer's standard startup procedures, minimum.

E. Performance Tests: 1. Static Tests: As specified elsewhere, including, but not limited to, duct and pipe leakage

tests, insulation-resistance tests, and water-penetration tests. 2. Component Performance Tests: Tests evaluate the performance of an input or output of

components under a full range of operating conditions. 3. Equipment and Assembly Performance Tests: Test and evaluate performance of

equipment and assemblies under a full range of operating conditions and loads. 4. System Performance Tests: Test and evaluate performance of systems under a full range

of operating conditions and loads. 5. Intersystem Performance Tests: Test and evaluate the interface of different systems

under a full range of operating conditions and loads.

3.3 GENERAL EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Schedule and coordinate commissioning with the construction schedule, providing minimum 2 week notice to the Commissioning Agent.

B. Perform activities identified in construction checklists, including tests, and document results of actions as construction proceeds.

C. Perform test demonstrations for Owner's witness. Unless otherwise indicated, demonstrate tests for 100 percent of work to which the test applies. In some instances, demonstration of a random sample of other than 100 percent of the results of a test is specified. 1. Where sampling is specified, the sampling plan and procedure for the test demonstration

shall be determined using ASQ Z1.4. 2. The "lot size" in ASQ Z1.4 is the sum of the number of items to which the test

demonstration applies, as described in the scope subparagraph of each test. 3. On determination of the sample size, the samples shall be selected randomly by Owner's

witness at the time of the test demonstration. 4. Include in the Commissioning Plan a detailed list of the test demonstrations with lot and

sample quantities for each test.

D. Report test data and commissioning issue resolutions.

E. Schedule personnel to participate in and perform Commissioning-Process Work.

F. Installing contractors' commissioning responsibilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Operating the equipment and systems they install during tests. 2. In addition, installing contractors may be required to assist in tests of equipment and

systems with which their work interfaces.

3.4 COMMISSIONING COORDINATOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Management and Coordination: Manage, schedule, and coordinate commissioning, including, but not limited to, the following:



1. Coordinate with subcontractors on their commissioning responsibilities and activities. 2. Obtain, assemble, and submit commissioning documentation. 3. Attend periodic on-site commissioning meetings. 4. Develop and maintain the commissioning schedule. Integrate commissioning schedule

into the construction schedule. Update schedule at specified intervals. 5. Review and comment on preliminary test procedures and data forms. 6. Report inconsistencies and issues in system operations. 7. Verify that tests have been completed and results comply with acceptance criteria, and

that equipment and systems are ready before scheduling test demonstrations. 8. Direct and coordinate test demonstrations. 9. Coordinate witnessing of test demonstrations by Owner's witness. 10. Coordinate and manage training. Be present during training sessions to direct video

recording, present training and direct the training presentations of others. 11. Prepare and submit specified commissioning reports. 12. Track commissioning issues until resolution and retesting is successfully completed. 13. Retain original records of Commissioning-Process Work, organized as required for the

commissioning report. Provide Owner's representative access to these records on request.

14. Assemble and submit commissioning report.

3.5 COMMISSIONING TESTING

A. Quality Control: Construction checklists, including tests, are quality-control tools designed to improve the functional quality of Project. Test demonstrations evaluate the effectiveness of Contractor's quality-control process.

B. Owner's witness will be present to witness commissioning work requiring the signature of an owner's witness, including, but not limited to, test demonstrations. Owner's project manager will coordinate attendance by Owner's witness with Contractor's published commissioning schedule. Owner's witness will provide no labor or materials in the commissioning work. The only function of Owner's witness will be to observe and comment on the progress and results of commissioning.

C. Construction Checklists: 1. Complete construction checklists as Work is completed. 2. Distribute construction checklists to installing contractors before they start work. 3. Installers:

a. Verify installation using approved construction checklists as Work proceeds. b. Complete and sign construction checklists for work performed during the preceding

time period. 4. Provide Commissioning Authority access to construction checklists.

D. Installation Compliance Issues: Record as an installation compliance issue Work found to be incomplete, inaccessible, at variance with the Contract Documents, nonfunctional, or that does not comply with construction checklists. Record installation compliance issues on the construction checklist at the time they are identified. Record corrective action and how future Work should be modified before signing off the construction checklist.

E. Pre-Startup Audit: Prior to executing startup procedures, review completed installation checks to determine readiness for startup and operation. Report conditions, which, if left uncorrected, adversely impact the ability of systems or equipment to operate satisfactorily or to comply with acceptance criteria. Prepare pre-startup report for each system.

F. Test Procedures and Test Data Forms: 1. Test procedures shall define the step-by-step procedures to be used to execute tests and

test demonstrations.



2. Test procedures shall be specific to the make, model, and application of the equipment and systems being tested.

3. Completed test data forms are the official records of the results of tests. 4. Commissioning Authority will provide to Contractor preliminary test procedures and test

data forms for performance tests and commissioning tests after approval of Product Data, Shop Drawings, and preliminary Operation and Maintenance manual.

5. Review preliminary test procedures and test data forms and provide comments within 14 days of receipt from Commissioning Authority. Review shall address the following: a. Equipment protection and warranty issues, including, but not limited to,

manufacturers' installation and startup recommendations, and operation and maintenance instructions.

b. Applicability of the procedure to the specific software, equipment, and systems approved for installation.

6. After Contractor has reviewed and commented on the preliminary test procedures and test data forms, Commissioning Authority will revise and reissue the approved revised test procedures and test data forms marked "Approved for Testing."

7. Use only approved test procedures and test data forms marked "Approved for Testing" to perform and document tests and test demonstrations.

G. Performance of Tests: 1. The sampling rate for tests is 100 percent. The sampling rate for test demonstrations is

100 percent unless otherwise indicated. 2. Perform and complete each step of the approved test procedures in the order listed. 3. Record data observed during performance of tests on approved data forms at the time of

test performance and when the results are observed. 4. Record test results that are not within the range of acceptable results on commissioning

issue report forms in addition to recording the results on approved test procedures and data forms according to the "Commissioning Compliance Issues" Paragraph in this Article.

5. On completion of a test, sign the completed test procedure and data form. Tests for which test procedures and data forms are incomplete, not signed, or which indicate performance that does not comply with acceptance criteria will be rejected. Tests for which test procedures and data forms are rejected shall be repeated and results resubmitted.

H. Performance of Test Demonstration: 1. Perform test demonstrations on a sample of tests after test data submittals are approved.

The sampling rate for test demonstrations shall be 100 percent unless otherwise indicated in the individual test specification.

2. Notify Owner's witness at least three days in advance of each test demonstration. 3. Notify Commissioning Agent at least two weeks in advance of each test demonstration. 4. Perform and complete each step of the approved test procedures in the order listed. 5. Record data observed during performance of test demonstrations on approved data

forms at the time of demonstration and when the results are observed. 6. Provide full access to Owner's witness to directly observe the performance of all aspects

of system response during the test demonstration. On completion of a test demonstration, sign the completed data form and obtain signature of Owner's witness at the time of the test to authenticate the reported results.

7. Test demonstration data forms not signed by Contractor and Owner's witness at the time of the completion of the procedure will be rejected. Test demonstrations for which data forms are rejected shall be repeated and results shall be resubmitted. a. Exception for Failure of Owner's Witness to Attend: Failure of Owner's witness to

be present for agreed-on schedule of test demonstration shall not delay Contractor. If Owner's witness fails to attend a scheduled test, Contractor shall proceed with the scheduled test. On completion, Contractor shall sign the data form for Contractor and for Owner's witness, and shall note the absence of Owner's witness at the scheduled time and place.



I. Commissioning Compliance Issues: 1. Test results that are not within the range of acceptable results are commissioning

compliance issues. 2. Track and report commissioning compliance issues until resolution and retesting are

successfully completed. 3. If a test demonstration fails, determine the cause of failure. Direct timely resolution of

issue and then repeat the demonstration. If a test demonstration must be repeated due to failure caused by Contractor work or materials, reimburse Owner for billed costs for the participation in the repeated demonstration.

4. Test Results: If a test demonstration fails to meet the acceptance criteria, perform the following: a. Complete a commissioning compliance issue report form promptly on discovery of

test results that do not comply with acceptance criteria. b. Submit commissioning compliance issue report form within 24 hours of the test. c. Determine the cause of the failure. d. Establish responsibility for corrective action if the failure is due to conditions found

to be Contractor's responsibility. 5. Commissioning Compliance Issue Report: Provide a commissioning compliance issue

report for each issue. Do not report multiple issues on the same commissioning compliance issue report. a. Exception: If an entire class of devices is determined to exhibit the identical issue,

they may be reported on a single commissioning compliance issue report. (For example, if all return-air damper actuators that are specified to fail to the open position are found to fail to the closed position, they may be reported on a single commissioning issue report. If a single commissioning issue report is used for multiple commissioning compliance issues, each device shall be identified in the report, and the total number of devices at issue shall be identified.

b. Complete and submit Part 1 of the commissioning compliance issue report immediately when the condition is observed.

c. Record the commissioning compliance issue report number and describe the deficient condition on the data form.

d. Resolve commissioning compliance issues promptly. Complete and submit Part 2 of the commissioning compliance issue report when issues are resolved.

6. Diagnose and correct failed test demonstrations as follows: a. Perform diagnostic tests and activities required to determine the fundamental

cause of issues observed. b. Record each step of the diagnostic procedure prior to performing the procedure.

Update written procedure as changes become necessary. c. Record the results of each step of the diagnostic procedure. d. Record the conclusion of the diagnostic procedure on the fundamental cause of

the issue. e. Determine and record corrective measures. f. Include diagnosis of fundamental cause of issues in commissioning compliance

issue report. 7. Retest:

a. Schedule and repeat the complete test procedure for each test demonstration for which acceptable results are not achieved. Obtain signature of Owner's witness on retest data forms. Repeat test demonstration until acceptable results are achieved. Except for issues that are determined to result from design errors or omissions, or other conditions beyond Contractor's responsibility, compensate Owner for direct costs incurred as the result of repeated test demonstrations to achieve acceptable results.

b. For each repeated test demonstration, submit a new test data form, marked "Retest."

8. Do not correct commissioning compliance issues during test demonstrations. a. Exceptions will be allowed if the cause of the issue is obvious and resolution can

be completed in less than five minutes. If corrections are made under this exception, note the deficient conditions on the test data form and issue a



commissioning compliance issue report. A new test data form, marked "Retest," shall be initiated after the resolution has been completed.

3.6 COMMISSIONING MEETINGS

A. Commissioning Authority will schedule and conduct commissioning meetings.

3.7 SEQUENCING

A. Sequencing of Commissioning Verification Activities: For a particular material, item of equipment, assembly, or system, perform the following in the order listed unless otherwise indicated: 1. Construction Checklists:

a. Material checks. b. Installation checks. c. Start up, as appropriate. Some startup may depend on component performance.

Such startup may follow component performance tests on which the startup depends.

d. Performance Tests: 1) Static tests, as appropriate. 2) Component performance tests. Some component performance tests may

depend on completion of startup. Such component performance tests may follow startup.

3) Equipment and assembly performance tests. 4) System performance tests. 5) Intersystem performance tests.

2. Commissioning tests.

B. Before performing commissioning tests, verify that materials, equipment, assemblies, and systems are delivered, installed, started, and adjusted to perform according to construction checklists.

C. Verify readiness of materials, equipment, assemblies, and systems by performing tests prior to performing test demonstrations. Notify Architect if acceptable results cannot be achieved due to conditions beyond Contractor's control or responsibility.

D. Commence tests as soon as installation checks for materials, equipment, assemblies, or systems are satisfactorily completed. Tests of a particular system may proceed prior to completion of other systems, provided the incomplete work does not interfere with successful execution of test.

3.8 SCHEDULING

A. Commence commissioning as early in the construction period as possible.

B. Commissioning Schedule: Integrate commissioning into Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Commissioning Schedule shall be coordinated with construction sequence and phased

delivery of project systems, equipment and scope. 2. Include detailed commissioning activities in monthly updated Contractor's construction

schedule and short interval schedule submittals. 3. Schedule the start date and duration for the following commissioning activities:

a. Submittals. b. Preliminary operation and maintenance manual submittals. c. Installation checks. d. Startup, where required.



e. Performance tests. f. Performance test demonstrations. g. Commissioning tests. h. Commissioning test demonstrations.

4. Schedule shall include a line item for each installation check, startup, and test activity specific to the equipment or systems involved.

5. Determine milestones and prerequisites for commissioning. Show commissioning milestones, prerequisites, and dependencies in monthly updated critical-path-method construction schedule and short interval schedule submittals.

C. Two-Week Look-Ahead Commissioning Schedule: 1. Two weeks prior to the beginning of tests, submit a detailed two-week look-ahead

schedule. Thereafter, submit updated two-week look-ahead schedules weekly for the duration of commissioning.

2. Two-week look-ahead schedules shall identify the date, time, beginning location, Contractor personnel required, and anticipated duration for each startup or test activity.

3. Use two-week look-ahead schedules to notify and coordinate participation of Owner's witnesses.

D. Owner's Witness Coordination: 1. Coordinate Owner's witness participation via Architect. 2. Notify Architect of commissioning schedule changes at least two work days in advance

for activities requiring the participation of Owner's witness.

3.9 COMMISSIONING REPORTS

A. Test Reports: 1. Pre-startup reports include observations of the conditions of installation, organized into

the following sections: a. Equipment Model Verification: Compare contract requirements, approved

submittals, and provided equipment. Note inconsistencies. b. Preinstallation Physical Condition Checks: Observe physical condition of

equipment prior to installation. Note conditions including, but not limited to, physical damage, corrosion, water damage, or other contamination or dirt.

c. Preinstallation Component Verification Checks: Verify components supplied with the equipment, preinstalled or field installed, are correctly installed and functional. Verify external components required for proper operation of equipment correctly installed and functional. Note missing, improperly configured, improperly installed, or nonfunctional components.

d. Summary of Installation Compliance Issues and Corrective Actions: Identify installation compliance issues and the corrective actions for each. Verify that issues noted have been corrected.

e. Evaluation of System Readiness for Startup: For each item of equipment for each system for which startup is anticipated, document in summary form acceptable to Owner completion of equipment model verification, preinstallation physical condition checks, pre-installation component verification checks, and completion of corrective actions for installation compliance issues.

2. Test data reports include the following: a. "As-tested" system configuration. Complete record of conditions under which the

test was performed, including, but not limited to, the status of equipment, systems, and assemblies; temporary adjustments and settings; and ambient conditions.

b. Data and observations, including, but not limited to, data trend logs, recorded during the tests.

c. Signatures of individuals performing and witnessing tests. d. Data trend logs accumulated overnight from the previous day of testing.

3. Commissioning Compliance Issues Reports: Report as commissioning compliance issues results of tests and test demonstrations that do not comply with acceptance criteria.



Report only one issue per commissioning compliance issue report. Use sequentially numbered facsimiles of commissioning compliance issue report form included in this Section, or other form approved by Owner. Distribute commissioning compliance issue reports to parties responsible for taking corrective action. Identify the following: a. Commissioning compliance issue report number. Assign unique, sequential

numbers to individual commissioning compliance issue reports when they are created, to be used for tracking.

b. Action distribution list. c. Report date. d. Test number and description. e. Equipment identification and location. f. Briefly describe observations about the performance associated with failure to

achieve acceptable results. Identify the cause of failure if apparent. g. Diagnostic procedure or plan to determine the cause (include in initial submittal) h. Diagnosis of fundamental cause of issues as specified below (include in

resubmittal). i. Fundamental cause of unacceptable performance as determined by diagnostic

tests and activities. j. When issues have been resolved, update and resubmit the commissioning issue

report forms by completing Part 2. Identify resolution taken and the dates and initials of the persons making the entries.

k. Schedule for retesting. 4. Weekly progress reports include information for tests conducted since the preceding

report and the following: a. Completed data forms. b. Equipment or system tested, including test number, system or equipment tag

number and location, and notation about the apparent acceptability of results. c. Activities scheduled but not conducted per schedule. d. Commissioning compliance issue report log. e. Schedule changes for remaining Commissioning-Process Work, if any.

5. Data trend logs shall be initiated and running prior to the time scheduled for the test demonstration. a. Trend log data format shall be multiple data series graphs. Where multiple data

series are trend logged concurrently, present the data on a common horizontal time axis. Individual data series may be presented on a segmented vertical axis to avoid interference of one data series with another, and to accommodate different axis scale values. Graphs shall be sufficiently clear to interpret data within the accuracy required by the acceptance criteria.

b. Attach to the data form printed trend log data collected during the test or test demonstration.

c. Record, print out, and attach to the data form operator activity during the time the trend log is running. During the time the trend log is running, operator intervention not directed by the test procedure invalidates the test results.

6. System Alarm Logs: Record and print out a log of alarms that occurred since the last log was printed. Evaluate alarms to determine if the previous day's work resulted in any conditions that are not considered "normal operation." a. Conditions that are not considered "normal operation" shall be reported on a

commissioning issue report attached to the alarm log. Resolve as necessary. The intent of this requirement is to discover control system points or sequences left in manual or disabled conditions, equipment left disconnected, set points left with abnormal values, or similar conditions that may have resulted from failure to fully restore systems to normal, automatic control after test completion.

3.10 CERTIFICATE OF CONSTRUCTION PHASE COMMISSIONING COMPLETION

A. When Contractor considers that construction phase commissioning, or a portion thereof which Owner agrees to accept separately, is complete, Contractor shall prepare and submit to Owner



and Commissioning Authority through Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter Contractor's responsibility to compete commissioning.

B. On receipt of Contractor's list, Commissioning Authority will make an inspection to determine whether the construction phase commissioning or designated portion thereof is complete. If Commissioning Authority's inspection discloses items, whether included on Contractor's list, which is not sufficiently complete as defined in "Construction Phase Commissioning Completion" Paragraph in the "Definitions" Article, Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Construction Phase Completion, complete or correct such items on notification by Commissioning Authority. In such case, Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by Commissioning Authority to determine construction phase commissioning completion.

C. Contractor shall promptly correct deficient conditions and issues discovered during commissioning. Costs of correcting such deficient conditions and issues, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for Architect's and Commissioning Authority's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at Contractor's expense.

D. When construction phase commissioning or designated portion is complete, Commissioning Authority will prepare a Certificate of Construction Phase Commissioning that shall establish the date of completion of construction phase commissioning. Certificate of Construction Phase Commissioning Completion shall be submitted prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion.


SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION 02 4113 - 1


11-02-2017

SECTION 02 4113 - SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The provisions of the Contract Documents apply to the work of this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Demolition and removal of existing asphalt and/or concrete pavement, concrete and/or asphalt walks, curbs and gutters, and other exterior site items indicated or not indicated which interfere with the Work.

2. Removal and/or relocation of existing underground utilities.

3. Removal and disposal of existing sanitary sewer pipe, water pipe, storm drainage pipe and appurtenances indicated. Filling of existing pipes to be abandoned in place.

4. Removal and replacement of fencing

5. Removal and relocation of existing light poles.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain the Owner's property.

B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner's property. Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contents of containers and deliver to Owner's designated storage area.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them for reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in locations indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Protect items indicated to remain against damage and soiling. When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner's property, remove demolished materials from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's option.

B. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.

C. Historical items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to the Owner, which may be encountered, remain the Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to the Owner.



11-02-2017

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by the Work.

B. Record drawings at Project closeout.

1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions.

C. Proposed dust-control measures.

D. Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity.

2. Interruption of utility services.

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

4. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's on-site operations.

5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

6. Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.

E. Inventory of items to be removed and salvaged or turned over to Owner.

F. Landfill records indicating receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.


A. Regulatory Requirements: All work shall comply with Federal, State and Local laws and regulations concerning hauling and disposal of demolition debris.

B. Notify the proper agencies prior to the start of work and obtain all necessary permits for this work.


A. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. Conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by the Owner to the extent practical. However, minor variations may occur due to Owner’s removal and salvage operations prior to the start of demolition work.

B. The location of existing underground utilities indicated is approximate only. Field locate all existing underground utilities in the area of work, regardless of whether or not they are indicated. Call “Miss Utility” prior to the start of demolition work for assistance in the location of existing underground utilities.

C. Should charted, uncharted or incorrectly charted utilities be encountered during demolition, contact the Architect immediately for instructions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies to keep services and facilities in operation.

D. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the Owner and others, except when permitted in writing by the Owner. Provide acceptable temporary utility service as required to maintain Owner’s operations.



11-02-2017

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to the Work. Conduct selective demolition so that the Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

B. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations.

C. Notify and coordinate any required relocation and/or removal of existing underground utilities, poles, meters or other above ground appurtenances with the appropriate utility company (i.e. power, telephone, cable and natural gas/propane) prior to the start of selective demolition work.

1.9 USE OF EXPLOSIVES

A. Do not use explosives to perform selective site demolition work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Call “Miss Utility” prior to the start of demolition work for assistance in the location of existing underground utilities. Field locate all existing underground utilities in the area of work, regardless of whether or not they are indicated.

B. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted existing utilities be identified, contact the Architect immediately for instructions. Provide a scale drawing with the location of the uncharted or incorrectly charted utilities for use by the Architect in preparing additional direction.

C. Verify that utilities indicated as removed, abandoned and/or relocated have been disconnected and capped.

D. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

E. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged and turned over to the Owner.

3.2 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

A. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations.

B. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.

C. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area.



11-02-2017

1. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.

D. Barricade areas of demolition occurring as part of this work, and post with warning lights as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Protect structures, buildings, utilities, walks, pavements, existing vegetation and other facilities to remain from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by demolition operations.

3.3 POLLUTION CONTROLS

A. Perform all work in accordance with the requirements of the latest edition of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook and those of the local Erosion Control official.

B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by the Work. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition.

3.4 DEMOLITION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

A. Utilities

1. Coordinate the removal and/or relocation of existing utilities with the appropriate utility companies.

2. Remove existing utilities as indicated and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility and to local jurisdictional codes.

3. Provide adequate means of support and protection during demolition and other construction operations for existing utilities that are to remain in place. Repair utilities damaged by construction operations to the satisfaction of the utility owner.

B. Asphalt Pavement

1. Remove asphalt concrete pavement by sawcutting to the full depth of the pavement. Provide neat sawcuts at the limits of pavement removal indicated.

C. Concrete Pavement, Walks and Curbs

1. Remove concrete pavement and walks to the nearest joint. Sawcut concrete if joints are not present adjacent to the area of demolition.

2. Sawcut concrete along straight lines to a depth of not less than 2 inches. Break out remainder of concrete, provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished work, and the remaining concrete is sound. At locations where the broken face cannot be concealed, grind smooth or sawcut entirely through concrete.

D. Light Poles

1. Remove and relocate light poles as indicated. If light poles are owned by a public utility, coordinate the relocation with them.

E. Fencing

1. Remove existing fencing as indicated on the drawings.



11-02-2017

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

B. Do not burn demolished materials or debris.

C. Transport and legally dispose of demolished materials off of Owner's property.

3.6 CLEANUP AND REPAIR

A. Upon completion of demolition work remove all tools, equipment and demolition materials from site. Remove demolition work area protection and leave areas clean.

B. Repair any demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to the condition existing prior to the start of construction. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by demolition work.

END OF SECTION 02 4113


SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 4. Temporary shoring of existing structure. 5. Reference Section 024113 “Selective Site Demolition.”

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 018000 “Asbestos Containing Materials Abatement.” 2. Section 126100 “Fixed Auditorium Seating.”

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse unless otherwise indicated.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered during selective demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:



1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building.

B. Pre-demolition Videotapes: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Comply with Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For design of temporary shoring of existing structure, include analysis data and design sketches signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Shoring Designer Field Inspection Report.

E. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.

G. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition.

H. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.


A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.

D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.


A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

1. Schedule disruptive demolition activities during non-instructional hours. Coordinate this work with the Owner and the school staff.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.



1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:

a. All loose furnishings and equipment the Owner wishes to reuse.

C. A Pre-Demolition Conference shall be held by the Contractor for Owner Salvaged Materials prior to start of demolition for each phase

D. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

E. Coordination of Selective Demolition Activities: Coordinate the following with Owner:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted and how continuity of such services will be provided to allow the Owner’s continued, uninterrupted operation of the facility.

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

4. Use of stairs.

5. Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions

6. Means of egress.

7. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

8. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building.

F. Hazardous Materials: Asbestos Containing Materials are present within the area and scope of building materials and elements to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of ACM included in Section 018000. Examine Report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.

1. Materials containing asbestos shall be removed by the Contractor as indicated in Section 018000.

2. All other identified hazardous materials shall be removed, managed, transported and disposed by the Contractor in accordance with all governing laws, codes and regulations.”

G. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

H. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities and building systems indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Provide necessary measures to maintain continuity of existing utilities and building services to ensure the Owner’s continued, uninterrupted operation of the facility.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction videotapes.

1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."

2. Provide necessary measures to protect and ensure continuity of existing utilities and building services including AV, IT and Data Systems to ensure the Owner’s continued, uninterrupted operation of the facility.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before

proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place.



c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place.

C. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.

5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 “Temporary Facilities and Controls.”

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.4 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection.

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.



2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

2. Professional engineer responsible for temporary shoring design shall inspect installed temporary shoring for compliance with his sealed shoring design sketches. Submit report from site inspection to the Architect.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during and for at least two (2) hours after flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly and in accordance to industry

standards.

B. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items to be returned to the Owner:



1. Projector Screens

2. Wi-Fi receivers

C. Spare parts specified to be turned over to Owner shall be accompanied with a transmittal originated by the General Contractor and turned over for signature by one (1) designated SCPS Construction Department employee. Contractor to keep a copy of the signed turnover transmittal and provide the original for the Owners records.

D. Salvaged items to be removed and reinstalled by the Contractor include but are not limited to the following: 1. Fixed Auditorium Seating.

a. Quantities in excess of those required for reinstallation shall be turned over to the Owner.

2. (2) Electric Water Coolers with Bottle Fill Stations 3. Whirlpool 4. Icemaker for Training Room 5. Kiln at Art Room

E. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.

3. Protect all items from damage during transport and storage.

4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

F. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.

B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.

C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.

D. Floor Finishes: After removal of existing floor finishes including backings, underlayments, and thick-set mortar beds; remove all residual adhesives and glue. Provide grinding, sanding, or shot-blasting of existing concrete floor slab to achieve the proper surface to receive new indicated floor finish. Coordinate slab surface preparations required for each new indicated floor finish with appropriate subcontractor.



E. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to to recommendations in RFCI's “Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings.” Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers.

F. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. .

G. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants.

3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will

convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Disposal: Do not burn demolished materials. Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.


CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1


SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.


1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of thefollowing: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume;materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examineprocedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of eachentity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent.b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.d. Concrete Subcontractor.e. Special concrete finish Subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field qualitycontrol, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures,curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips,semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoringprocedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installationtolerances, steel reinforcement installation, methods for achieving specified floor and slabflatness and levelness floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concreterepair procedures, and concrete protection.


COURTLAND HS RENOVATIONS 11-02-2017


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. 2. Indicate locations on the project where each mix design is intended to be used.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.

E. Samples: For and vapor retarder/barrier.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Curing compounds. 7. Floor and slab treatments. 8. Bonding agents. 9. Adhesives. 10. Vapor retarders and vapor barriers. 11. Repair materials.

D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:

1. Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

E. Minutes of preinstallation conference.




A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M.

1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:



1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301. 2. ACI 117.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,

and as follows:

a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge

sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

3. Overlaid Finnish birch plywood.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface.



2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, as drawn.

D. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 36, smooth, galvanized steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780/A 780M.

C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 120.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal, typical. Provide 3/8" maximum coarse-aggregate size for concrete toppings less than 3" thick.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.



D. Lightweight Aggregate: Expanded shale or slate aggregate by rotary-kiln method or expanded clay aggregate by rotary-kiln or sintered-grate method per ASTM C 330/C 330M, 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

F. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

G. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.

2.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT

A. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Fibrillated polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches long.

1. Available Products

a. Fibrillated Fibers:

1) Euclid Chemical Company; Fiberstrand F. 2) Grace Construction Products, W.R. Grace & Co.; Grace Fibers. 3) Propex Concrete Systems; Fibermesh, 300.

B. Synthetic Macro-Fiber: Polyolefin macro-fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1 to 2-1/4 inches long.

1. Available Products

a. Grace Construction Products: Strux 90/40 b. Propex Concrete Systems: Fibermesh 650 c. Euclid Chemical Company: TUF-Strand SF

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS AND BARRIERS

A. Vapor Retarder: A 10 mil vapor retarder with a permeability of 0.04 perms or lower when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96; meeting or exceeding the requirement of ASTM E 1745 Class A; and wherein the vapor retarder component (plastic) is no less than 10 mils thick in accordance with ACI 302.1 R-96, and consists of multi-layer extruded virgin polyolefin plastic. Ungraded polyethylene sheet is not acceptable. Include companion joint tape, mastic, and accessory materials.

1. Available products include:

a. Stego Wrap “10A” (10 mil) by Stego Industries LLC.



b. Griffolyn 10 Mil Green by Reef Industries. c. Perminator 10 by W.R. Meadows

B. Vapor Barrier: A 15 mil vapor barrier with a water vapor transmission rate (WVTR) of 0.008 grains/h-sq. ft. or lower when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96; meeting or exceeding the requirement of ASTM E 1745 Class A; and wherein the vapor barrier component (plastic) is no less than 15 mils thick in accordance with ACI 302.1 R-96, and consists of multi-layer extruded virgin polyolefin plastic. Ungraded polyethylene sheet is not acceptable. Include companion joint tape, mastic, and accessory materials.

1. Available products include:

a. Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15 mil) by Stego Industries LLC. b. Perminator 15 by W.R. Meadows c. Griffolyn 15 Mil Green by Reef Industries

2.8 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. AWRC Corporation. b. ChemMasters, Inc. c. ChemTec Int'l. d. Curecrete Distribution Inc. e. Dayton Superior. f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. g. Kaufman Products, Inc. h. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. i. Metalcrete Industries. j. Nox-Crete Products Group. k. PROSOCO, Inc. l. SpecChem, LLC. m. US SPEC, Division of US MIX Company. n. Vexcon Chemicals Inc.

2.9 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A, certified by manufacturer that the product will not interfere with bonding of floor covering.



2.10 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Slag Cement: 50 percent.



3. Limit total percentage of portland cement substitutes to 50 percent.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement, typical.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50.

2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. All normal weight concrete except slabs-on-grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated at 28 days. 2. Slump Limit: 5 inches, 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before

adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.

3. Air Content:

a. At exterior exposed conditions. 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

b. All other conditions: No air entrainment required. Do not allow air content of trowel finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

B. Slabs-on-Grade and Suspended Slabs: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated at 28 days. 2. Slump Limit: 5 inches, 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before


3. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 4. Synthetic Micro Fiber: As indicated. 5. Synthetic Macro Fiber: As indicated.

C. Lightweight Concrete at Suspended Slabs: Proportion structural lightweight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated. 2. Calculated Equilibrium Unit Weight: 107 lb/cu ft. to 116 lb/cu. ft. as determined by

ASTM C 567. 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before


4. Air Content: 4 percent to 7 percent at point of delivery.



2.14 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.15 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.



J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.

1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.



3.5 VAPOR-RETARDER AND VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders and Vapor Barriers: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

F. Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material according to ASTM A 780/A 780M. Use galvanized-steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated steel reinforcement.

3.7 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset

joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.



5. Space vertical joints in walls at 30 feet on center maximum unless indicated otherwise. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install bond-breaking polyethylene strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend bond-breaking polyethylene strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width bond-breaking polyethylene strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install bond-breaking polyethylene strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, overlap pieces a minimum of six inches.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Notify the Owner's Inspection Service to permit inspection of sub-base a minimum of 24 hours prior to placement of reinforcing steel and concrete. The Inspection Service shall inspect and approve all foundation subgrades prior to placing concrete.

C. Notify the Owner's Inspection Service to permit inspection of reinforcing steel a minimum of 24 hours prior to concrete placement. Notify Inspection Service 24 hours prior to any scheduled concrete pour.

D. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless withheld at the plant as indicated on delivery ticket and approved by Architect.

E. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

F. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of



weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

G. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.



B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in one direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor toppings and to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish or to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.-long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch.

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:



1. Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. 2. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 3. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings,

templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper

attachment to supported equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.

3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.



3. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.13 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENT APPLICATION

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs.

2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than 28 days' old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and

repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.



3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs. 8. Post-installed anchor installation.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.



2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567/C 567M, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure one set of six 4 x 8 cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M.

a. 4 x 8 Specimens: Test two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of three specimens at 28 days. Test one specimen at 56 days if required.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

3.16 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.


PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 034500 - 1

SECTION 034500 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Architectural precast concrete window sills. 2. Architectural precast concrete masonry veneer units. 3. Architectural precast concrete seat wall caps.


1. Division 03 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for installing connection anchors in concrete.

2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for face brick. 3. Division 08 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for windows set on

architectural precast concrete sills.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and water-absorption tests.

C. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units. Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit. Indicate joints, reveals, and extent and location of each surface finish. Indicate details at building corners.

1. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail loose and cast-in hardware and connections.

2. Indicate locations, tolerances, and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in or attached to structure or other construction.

3. Include plans and elevations showing unit location and sequence of erection for special conditions.

4. Indicate location of each architectural precast concrete unit by same identification mark placed on panel.

5. Indicate relationship of architectural precast concrete units to adjacent materials. 6. Design Modifications: If design modifications are proposed to meet performance

requirements and field conditions, submit design calculations and Shop Drawings. Do not adversely affect the appearance, durability, or strength of units when modifying details or materials and maintain the general design concept.

7. Comprehensive engineering analysis signed and sealed by the qualified professional



engineer responsible for its preparation. Show governing panel types, connections, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement. Indicate location, type, magnitude, and direction of loads imposed on the building structural frame and gabion walls from architectural precast concrete.

D. Samples: For each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units, in sets of 3, illustrating full range of finish, color, and texture variations expected; approximately 4 by 4 by 2 inches .

1. When other faces of precast concrete unit are exposed, include Samples illustrating workmanship, color, and texture of backup concrete as well as facing concrete.

E. Welding certificates.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer fabricator.

G. Material Test Reports: For aggregates.

H. Material Certificates: For the following items, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Reinforcing materials and prestressing tendons. 3. Admixtures. 4. Bearing pads. 5. Structural-steel shapes and hollow structural sections. 6. Stone anchors.

I. Source quality-control test reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural precast concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Participates in PCI's plant certification program and is designated a PCI-certified plant for Group A, Category A1 - Architectural Cladding and Load Bearing Units.

B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 and design recommendations of PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of architectural precast concrete units indicated.

C. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products."

D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D.1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel"; and AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

E. Sample Panels: After sample approval and before fabricating architectural precast concrete units, produce a minimum of 2 sample sills approximately 4-foot long and 2 sample seat wall caps approximately 4-foot long for review by Architect. Incorporate full-scale details of



architectural features, finishes, textures, and transitions in sample panels.

1. Locate panels where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Damage part of an exposed-face surface for each finish, color, and texture, and

demonstrate adequacy of repair techniques proposed for repair of surface blemishes. 3. After acceptance of repair technique, maintain one sample panel at manufacturer's plant

and one at Project site in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

4. Demolish and remove sample panels when directed.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management And Coordination."


A. Deliver architectural precast concrete units in such quantities and at such times to limit unloading units temporarily on the ground.

B. Support units during shipment on nonstaining shock-absorbing material.

C. Store units with adequate dunnage and bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil, to prevent staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage.

D. Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible, and units can be inspected.

E. Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design in order to avoid excessive stresses which would cause cracking or damage.

F. Lift and support units only at designated points shown on Shop Drawings.

1.6 SEQUENCING

A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MOLD MATERIALS

A. Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that will provide continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances indicated; nonreactive with concrete and suitable for producing required finishes.

1. Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced liquid-release agent that will not bond with, stain or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 , unless otherwise indicated.



B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place according to PCI MNL 117.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use only one brand, type, and source of supply of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.

2. Use white portland cement for concrete mix if required.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33, with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project.

1. Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that reacts with cement or causes staining; to match selected finish sample.

a. Gradation: Fine.

2. Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of same material as coarse aggregate, unless otherwise approved by Architect.

C. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading.

1. Required to match Architect's control sample. 2. Resistant to lime and other alkalies.

D. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117.

E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures.

F. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of admixture.

1. Water-Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic or steel shims, anchoring rods and sleeves, anchor grouts and epoxies, and other accessories required to install architectural precast concrete units.

B. Provide bearing pads for architectural precast concrete units as recommended by the precast fabricator for application.



2.5 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 144 or ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 3 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.

B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast plant personnel at architectural precast concrete fabricator's option.

C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318 or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.

D. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion face and backup mixtures or full-depth mixtures, at fabricator's optionby either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi minimum. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Total Air Content: Not less than 4 percent nor more than 6 percent.

E. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to PCI MNL 117.

F. Submit written reports to Architect of proposed mix for each type of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of precast unit production. Do not begin concrete production until mixes and evaluations have been reviewed by Architect.

2.7 MOLD FABRICATION

A. Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to concrete-placement operations and temperature changes and for prestressing and detensioning operations. Coat contact surfaces of molds with release agent before reinforcement is placed. Avoid contamination of reinforcement and prestressing tendons by release agent.

B. Maintain molds to provide completed architectural precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified.

1. Form joints are not permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work. 2. Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly radiused.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of



main reinforcement or concrete placement.

1. Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."

B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing architectural precast concrete units to supporting and adjacent construction.

C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

D. Cast-in openings larger than 10 inches in any dimension. Do not drill or cut openings or prestressing strand without Architect's approval.

E. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concrete-placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to prevent exposure on finished surfaces.

2. Place reinforcement to maintain at least 3/4-inch minimum coverage. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces.

F. Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses.

G. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added.

H. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units.

I. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117.

J. Comply with PCI MNL 117 for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement.

K. Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that will not show in finished structure.

L. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on performance or appearance of final product.

M. Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 117 and Architect's approval.



2.9 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and corners precise and true so each finished panel complies with PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well as position tolerances for cast-in items.

2.10 FINISHES

A. Panel faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Corners, including false joints shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match approved [design reference sample] [sample panels] [mockups] and as follows:

1. Acid-Etched Finish: Use acid and hot-water solution, equipment, application techniques, and cleaning procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces. Protect hardware, connections, and insulation from acid attach.

B. Finish exposed top, bottom and back surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match face-surface finish.

C. Finish unexposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units by float finish.

2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117 requirements. If using self-consolidating concrete, also test and inspect according to PCI TR-6, "Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants."

B. Strength of precast concrete units will be considered deficient if units fail to comply with ACI 318 requirements for concrete strength.

C. Testing: If there is evidence that strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or may not comply with ACI 318 requirements, precaster will employ an independent testing agency to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine compressive strength according to ASTM C 42/C 42M.

1. A minimum of three representative cores will be taken from units of suspect strength, from locations directed by Architect.

2. Cores will be tested in an air-dry condition.

D. Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast concrete units comply with requirements, clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with precast concrete mixture that has no coarse aggregate, and finish to match adjacent precast concrete surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance.



B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Do not install precast concrete units until supporting cast-in-place building structural framing has attained minimum allowable design compressive strength or supporting steel or other structure is complete.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting architectural precast concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.

B. Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment as units are being permanently connected.

1. Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims or bearing pads as precast concrete units are being erected. Tack weld steel shims to each other to prevent shims from separating.

2. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses.

3. Remove projecting lifting devices and grout fill voids within recessed lifting devices flush with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, maintain uniform joint widths of 3/8 inch.

C. Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.

1. Do not permit connections to disrupt continuity of roof flashing.

D. Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4 for welding, welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Protect architectural precast concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field welding or cutting operations, and provide noncombustible shields as required.

2. Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds, using no less than the minimum fillet as specified by AWS.

3. Clean weld-affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing, and reprime damaged painted surfaces.

4. Remove, reweld, or repair incomplete and defective welds.

E. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent loosening of nuts after final adjustment.

1. Where slotted connections are used, verify bolt position and tightness. For sliding connections, properly secure bolt but allow bolt to move within connection slot. For friction connections, apply specified bolt torque and check 25 percent of bolts at random by calibrated torque wrench.

F. Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or hardens.



3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I.

3.4 REPAIRS

A. Repair architectural precast concrete units if permitted by Architect. The Architect reserves the right to reject repaired units that do not comply with requirements.

B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20 feet .

C. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not comply with requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view.

B. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.

C. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.

1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's recommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with detergent and water, using stiff fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.

2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.



UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 1

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:

1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 2. Clay face brick. 3. Building (common) brick. 4. Hollow brick. 5. Mortar and grout. 6. Steel reinforcing bars. 7. Masonry-joint reinforcement. 8. Ties and anchors. 9. Embedded flashing. 10. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 11. Masonry-cell fill. 12. Cavity-wall insulation.

B. Products Installed but not Furnished under This Section:

1. Steel lintels in unit masonry. 2. Steel shelf angles for supporting unit masonry. 3. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under Division 07

Section "Roof Accessories."


1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing dovetail slots for masonry

anchors. 2. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for installing anchor sections of adjustable

masonry anchors for connecting to structural steel frame. 3. Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for metal framed walls. 4. Division 07 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing" for dampproofing applied to cavity face of

backup wythes of cavity walls. 5. Division 07 Section "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing" for waterproofing applied to

cavity face of backup wythes of cavity walls. 6. Division 07 Section "Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers" for air barriers installed inside

unit masonry walls. 7. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing

and for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints. 8. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping at openings in masonry

walls. 9. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for fire-resistive joint systems at heads

of masonry walls.



10. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry.

11. Division 08 Section "Lovers and Vents" for louvers and vents.

D. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame,

installed under Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.

B. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths (f'm) at

28 days.

1. For clay unit masonry: f'm = 1,500 psi. 2. For concrete unit masonry: f'm = 1,500 psi.

B. Determine net-area compressive strength (f'm) of masonry from average net-area compressive

strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry reinforcing.

2. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 3. Prefabricated masonry arches showing sizes, profiles, details and locations of each arch

required. 4. Cast Masonry Trim Units: Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each stone trim unit

required. 5. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing

bars. Comply with ACI 315. Show elevations of reinforced walls. 6. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications..

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. Cast stone masonry units. 2. Special brick shapes and arch bricks.



3. Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project.

4. Weep holes. 5. Accessories embedded in masonry; including but not limited to, flexible flashing, masonry

anchors, joint reinforcing, control joint materials, etc.

D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

E. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with

requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations

establishing average net-area compressive strength of units. c. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within

specified tolerances. d. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. e. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations

establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of

ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Reinforcing bars. 6. Joint reinforcement. 7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

F. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions

of ingredients.

1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property

specification. 2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with

compressive strength requirement.

G. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type

and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

H. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be

used to comply with cold-weather requirements.


A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and

color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,

including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious



component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.

D. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to

perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 140.

E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to

those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for mockups.

1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes

approximately 24 inches x 24 inches high by full thickness. Coordinate location in field with Architect.

2. Allow for construction of up to three (3) sample panels for each face brick type for the purpose of color selections or verification. Coordinate location in the field with the Architect.

3. Allow for construction of up to three (3) sample panels for brick pointing and patching. 4. Build sample panels facing south. 5. Where masonry is to match existing, build panels adjacent and parallel to existing

surface. 6. Clean exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated. 7. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 8. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;

relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing.

G. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in sample panels unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

H. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 1. Build mockups of a typical wall area as shown on Drawings and as described in this

Section. 2. Build mockups for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately

96 inches long by 96 inches high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories. Include mortar. Coordinate location in field with Architect. a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in each mockup. b. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of exterior wall mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of flashing). c. Include metal studs, sheathing, veneer anchors, flashing, and weep holes in exterior masonry-veneer wall mockup. d. Include all exterior materials including masonry, architectural precast concrete, metal panel system and storefront/curtain wall system.



3. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 4. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 5. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of

mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities

specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing.

6. Sequencing of Mockup: a. Time requirements of the approval process shall be coordinated by the Contractor

with the project construction schedule. The Contractor shall allow sufficient time for delivery of materials, construction, and review and approval of mockup by Architect and Owner's Representative.

b. Allow time for initial review and subsequent review of each mockup. c. Provide minimum two week advance notice of mockup review to Architect and

Owner's Representative. 7. Maintain mockups throughout duration of project.

I. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements

in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an

enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not

use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and

contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry

mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt

and oil.


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with

waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely

in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,

secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe, and hold cover in place.



B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left

exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading

coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice

or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40

deg Fand higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in

TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and

color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including

color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.


A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28

days.

1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area

compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.



2.3 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by

requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to

contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work and will be within 20 feet vertically and horizontally of a walking surface.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly designs

indicated.

1. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed and labeled by

a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed

faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,

bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

B. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive

strength of 2150 psi. 2. Density Classification: Lightweight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 4. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's

sample. 5. Versalite is not considered to be non-conforming to ASTM C90.

C. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55.


strength of 2800 psi. 2. Density Classification: Normal weight. 3. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches depth by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long.

2.5 CONCRETE MASONRY LINTELS

A. Masonry Lintels: Built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs matching adjacent

CMUs in color, texture, and density classification, with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.



2.6 BRICK

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and

color of exposed faces of adjacent units:

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose

unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.

2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels.

3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.

4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

5. Provide special shapes for window sills as indicated on the drawings.

B. Clay Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 4400 psi.

2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67.

3. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced."

4. Size (Actual Dimensions): Utility, 3-5/8 inches wide by 3-5/8 inches high by 11-5/8 inches long.

5. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated. . 6. Color and Texture: Furnish blend of brick in percentages as noted for each product. 7. Available Products:

a. Provide the following: 1) Where new brick is required for patches to existing brick veneer walls:

a) Continental Brick Company: #470 2) For face brick at new construction provide the following:

a) The Belden Brick Company: Canyon Velour b) Or other as approved by Architect as a match for appearance, including

color, texture, size and other project requirements.

C. Building (Common) Brick: ASTM C 62, Grade SW


strength of 4400 psi. 2. Size: Match size of face brick. 3. Application: Use where brick is indicated for concealed locations. Face brick complying

with requirements for grade, compressive strength, and size indicated for building brick may be substituted for building brick.

2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for

cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C 114.



B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing

no other ingredients.

D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.

1. Available Products:

a. Capital Materials Corporation; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement. b. Essroc, Italcementi Group; Brixment. c. Holcim (US) Inc.; Mortamix Masonry Cement. d. Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Masonry Cement.

E. Masonry Cement at Decorative Concrete Masonry Units and Face Brick: ASTM C 91, Type N.

1. Use WR Grace Dry Block mortar additive in the mortar to increase bond strength and

complete the water repellant wall system.

F. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329/C 1329M.

G. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use

in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.


a. Bayer Corporation, Industrial Chemicals Div.; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. b. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. c. Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors.

H. Colored Cement Products: Packaged blend made from masonry cement and mortar pigments,

all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients.

1. Colors:

a. Provide custom color mortar to match the existing mortar at all patches to existing brick veneer. Provide one sample panel with proposed match for review by Architect. Provide subsequent sample panels with color variations as required to achieve match.

b. Basis-of-Design mortar color for new construction (new exterior masonry veneer walls): As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range.

2. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 3. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight. 4. Up to three masonry cement colors may be selected from manufacturer’s full range. 5. Colored Masonry Cement:

a. Capital Materials Corporation; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement. b. Essroc, Italcementi Group; Brixment-in-Color. c. Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Masonry Cement. d. Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Masonry Cement. e. National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement.

6. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected

from manufacturer's standard colors. 7. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 8. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight.



I. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16ieve.

3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce

required mortar color.

J. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

K. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with

CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer.


a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Tite. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block

Mortar Admixture.

L. Water: Potable.

2.8 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60.

B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry

unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inchsteel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.


a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817. b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner. d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.

C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.

D. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder or truss type with single pair of

side rods.

E. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:

1. Ladder type with one side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4

incheswide, plus one side rod at each wythe of masonry 4 incheswide or less.



2. Tab type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with rectangular tabs sized to extend at least halfway through facing wythe, but with at least 5/8-inchcover on outside face.

3. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum horizontal play of 1/16 inch and maximum vertical adjustment of 1-1/4 inchesSize ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.

2.9 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at least

a 5/8-inchcover on outside face.

1. At walls with cavities greater than 4-1/2 inches, brick anchor supplier shall provide

documentation verifying the hangers provided are adequate for cavity widths indicated in the Documents. Anchors shall be designed for a wind speed of 120 MPH, Risk Category III per VUSBC 2012.

B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that

comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with ASTM A 153/A 153M,

Class B-2 coating. 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,

with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch wide with corrugations having a

wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch made from steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication not less than 0.053 inch thick.

D. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 incheswide.

1. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 incheslong

may be used for masonry constructed from solid units. 2. Where withes are of different materials, use adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye

connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches.

E. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow

vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- diameter, hot-dip

galvanized steel wire. 2. Tie Section for Steel Frame: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of

masonry face, made from 0.188-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

F. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal

adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached

to tie section; formed from 0.060-inch- thick steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. 2. Corrugated-Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 1 inchwide with corrugations having a

wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inchand an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inchmade from



[0.060-inch-thick steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication with dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete.

G. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 incheswide by 1/4 inchhick by 24 incheslong,

with ends turned up 2 inchesor with cross pins unless otherwise indicated.

1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

H. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:

1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist a 100-lbfload in both

tension and compression perpendicular to plane of wall without deforming or developing play in excess of 1/16 inch.

a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in

both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch.

2. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Wire tie and a rib-stiffened, sheet metal anchor section with screw holes top and bottom, with a projecting vertical tab having a slotted hole for inserting wire tie.

a. Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom,

2-3/4 inches wide by 3 inches high; with projecting tabs having slotted holes for inserting vertical legs of wire tie specially formed to fit anchor section. Provide 40 mil, self-adhering, self-sealing dual barrier membrane, X-Seal by H & B, at each anchor.

b. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.097-inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

c. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.188-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

d. Available Products:

1) Heckman: #213 Wire Veneer Anchor System with #282 Double Pintle Wire Ties

2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: 200 Adjustable Veneer Anchor. 3) Wire-Bond: #2401 RJ-711 Adjustable Veneer Anchor with #2402 hook.

2.10 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal

Manual" and as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.016 inch thick. 2. Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00, cold-rolled copper sheet, 16-oz./sq. ft. weight or

0.0216 inchthick or ASTM B 370, Temper H01, high-yield copper sheet, 12-oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0162 inch thick.

3. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.

4. Fabricate metal drip edges from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

B. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: 7-oz./sq. ft. copper sheet coated with flexible

asphalt. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. a. Products of manufacturers listed below meeting indicated standards and specified



manufacturer's product data characteristics, except as modified below, are acceptable for use, subject to compliance with specified requirements. 1) York Manufacturing, Inc.; Multi-Flash 2) STS Coatings, Inc.; Gorilla Flash GF-500 3) Wire-Bond, Inc.; Copper Seal

C. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:

1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use flexible flashing in combination

with counterflashing receiver. 2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use

flexible flashing in combination with stainless steel drip edge. 3. Where flashing is fully concealed, use flexible flashing with stainless steel support angle. 4. Where flashing terminates at the face of wall, extend flashing to within 1/4-inch of the

exterior face of masonry.

D. Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:

1. Elastomeric Sealant: One part 100% solids, solvent-free formulated silyl-terminated

polyether (STPE), ASTM C902-11, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50.

E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products

or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

F. Accessories:

1. Outside Corner and inside corner material; manufacturer’s standard available units using:

a. Stainless Steel: 26 Ga stainless steel. 2. End dam: Product may be folded in line with the flashing material or utilize preformed

end dams by manufacturer using: a. Stainless steel: 26 gauge stainless steel

3. Splice material: Product standard of quality is York304 SS by York. Manufacturer’s standard self-adhered metal material; material matching system material or use Multi-Flash Stainless Steel 6” lap piece and polyether sealant as a splice.

4. Termination bar: Product standard of quality is York T-96 termination bar. Manufacturer's standard 1" composite material bar or a 1” 26 gauge stainless steel termination bar with sealant lip.

5. Weep vent protection: Product standard of quality is York’s Weep Armor. Geotextile drainage fabric at least 12” in height.

6. Repair and other materials/accessories: Manufacturer’s standard. 7. Fasteners: Domestic manufactured fastener types and sizes recommended by flashing

manufacturer for intended use.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;

compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene.



B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I

(No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Weep/Cavity Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant

polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inchless than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

a. Products:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent. 2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents. 3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent. 4) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent. 5) Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.

E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade

within the wall cavity.

1. Configuration: Provide one of the following:

a. Strips, full depth of cavity and 10 inches high, with dovetail-shaped notches 7

inchesdeep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings.


a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break. b. Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat. c. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop. d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.

2.12 CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation with Increased R-Value: ASTM C 578, Type IV, but

with an aged thermal resistance (R-value) for 1-inch thickness of 5.6 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F at 5 years; closed-cell product with a carbon-black filler and extruded with an integral skin.

B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated.



2.13 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing

mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc.

2.14 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime. 2. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.

Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the

following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry.

1. For CMU, use Type S. 2. For Brick or other exterior masonry veneer, use Type N.

D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product.

1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight. 3. Mix to match mortar in existing masonry walls.

E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will

comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches measured according to

ASTM C 143/C 143M.




A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality-control

testing indicated below:

1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.

B. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit furnished, per ASTM C 140.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental

to performance of the Work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual

locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness

shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing

equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous

pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and

textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.

G. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.per

minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.



3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch

minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or

minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or

minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than

1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inchmaximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary

from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. 3. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inchmaximum.

4. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

5. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet or 1/2-inchmaximum.

6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8

inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more

than 1/8 inch. 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8

inch or minus 1/4 inch. 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus

1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch

5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint

thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry:

1. At existing masonry walls, match bond pattern and coursing of existing face brick. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in 1/3 staggered running bond.

Do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at



corners or jambs.

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inchhorizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in

course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill

in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.

Mix mortar (or grout) to a 4-inch maximum slump consistency and trowel into place in accordance with Steel Door Institute (SDI-100).

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of

metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.

H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inchesunder bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and

similar items unless otherwise indicated.

I. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof

structure above unless otherwise indicated. 1. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells

of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inchclearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 incheso.c. unless otherwise indicated.

2. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 07 Section "Joint Firestopping."

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow brick as follows:

1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where

cells are not grouted. 5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed

anchors and ties in mortar.

B. Set trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes.

1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear

water. 2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting. 3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.

C. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient

mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.



D. Tool exposed joints when thumbprint hard, using a grapevine jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated to match existing masonry joint style.

E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than

paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 COMPOSITE MASONRY

A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following methods:

1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less

than one metal tie for 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 24 inches o.c. horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36 inches apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches o.c. vertically.

a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type) ties.

2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.

a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending across both wythes.

b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.

c. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align.

3. Header Bonding: Provide masonry unit headers extending not less than 3 inches into

each wythe. Space headers not over 8 inches clear horizontally and 16 inches clear vertically.

4. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers.

B. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using bonding system indicated on Drawings.

C. Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and shoving units of

other wythe into place.

D. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at

juncture, bond walls together as follows:

1. Provide individual metal ties not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Provide continuity with masonry-joint reinforcement by using prefabricated T-shaped

units.

3.7 CAVITY WALLS

A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:

1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less

than one metal tie for 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 24 inches o.c. horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide



additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36 inches apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches o.c. vertically.

a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type) ties.

2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.

a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending

across both wythes. b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type

reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties. c. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use

adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align.

3. Header Bonding: Provide masonry unit headers extending not less than 3 inches into

each wythe. Space headers not over 8 inches clear horizontally and 16 inches clear vertically.

4. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers.

B. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using bonding system indicated on Drawings.

C. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds

away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.

D. Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Division 07 Section "Fluid-Applied Membrane

Air Barriers."

E. Installing Cavity Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches

o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown.

1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and

masonry.

3.8 ANCHORED MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and concrete and masonry backup with

masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:

1. Fasten anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete and masonry backup

with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.

2. Insert slip-in anchors in metal studs as sheathing is installed. Provide one anchor at each stud in each horizontal joint between sheathing boards.

3. Embed in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.

4. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down.



5. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft.of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inchesof openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter.

3.9 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8

inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and

extending 12 inches beyond openings.

a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns,

offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.10 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces structural steel

or concrete, to comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inchwide between masonry and structural steel

or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches

o.c. horizontally.

3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.

Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows



1. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 2. Control joints are indicated on the Drawings, generally for masonry veneer, column

details, etc. Provide additional control joints in masonry not to exceed 30 feet horizontally. Joint locations shall be confirmed with the Architect prior to installation.

C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows:

1. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 2. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch

for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3. Expansion joints are indicated on the Drawings, generally for masonry veneer, column

details, etc. Provide additional expansion joints in masonry where required. Expansion joint locations shall be confirmed with the Architect prior to installation.

D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an airspace or inserting a

compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch.

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.

3.12 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.

B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 8 inches for brick-size

units and 16 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

3.13 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND CAVITY VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,

other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install cavity vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could

puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across airspace behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under air barrier, lapping at least 4 inches. Fasten upper edge of flexible flashing to sheathing through termination bar. Where flexible flashing is not supported by masonry, steel lintels, or other construction, provide a stainless steel support angle below flexible flashing spanning the cavity and with vertical leg mechanically fastened to interior face of cavity.

3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.



4. Install stainless steel metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to top of stainless steel drip edge.

C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be

built into masonry.

D. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of masonry

immediately above embedded flashing.

1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

E. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity

drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

3.14 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support

reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as

indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough

strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout

placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections

and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Special inspections according to VUSBC 2012 and Level B in

TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5.

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of

site-prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades,

sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

C. The Owner's independent testing/inspection agency shall inspect the masonry construction

during various work stages for compliance with project drawings and specifications, and keep records which cover the following:



1. Quality and testing of masonry units. 2. Proportioning, mixing and consistency of mortar and grout. Laying, mortaring, and

grouting of masonry units and elements. 3. Condition, grade, size, spacing and placement of reinforcement. 4. Any significant or unusual construction loads on masonry structural elements. 5. General progress of work 6. When ambient temperature falls below 40 deg F or rises above 100 deg F, a complete

record of weather conditions and of preconditioning and protection given to masonry materials and protection and curing of completed work shall be maintained.

7. Inspection records shall be furnished to Building Official, Owner and Architect/Engineer during progress of the work.

8. The Inspector shall not supervise the construction; however, he shall visit the project with the frequency necessary to observe the various stages of work and long enough at each visit to ascertain that it is being done in compliance with the Contract Documents and code requirements. The Inspector shall be present as frequently as he deems necessary to judge whether the quality of the work complies with the Contract Documents; to see that masonry materials are of the correct quality and properly installed; and, to see that tests for quality control are being made as specified.

D. Evaluation of Quality Control Tests and Inspections: In absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, masonry will be considered satisfactory if results from construction quality control tests and inspections comply with minimum requirements indicated.

3.16 PARGING

A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in two uniform coats to a

total thickness of 3/4 inch. Dampen wall before applying first coat, and scarify first coat to ensure full bond to subsequent coat.

B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface

variation of 1/8 inch per foot. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom.

C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.

3.17 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise

damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and

completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.



C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape

hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20.

6. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A. 7. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's

written instructions. 8. Clean stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions. 9. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone

Handbook."


STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1


SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel.2. Prefabricated building columns.3. Field-installed shear connectors.4. Field installed deformed bar anchors.5. Grout.


1. Section 051213 "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additionalrequirements for architecturally exposed structural steel.

2. Section 053100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck.3. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to

structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel items not definedas structural steel.

4. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting".

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described inAISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paintand coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoatsare compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other constructionwithout delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, anddirections for installation.







B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, and testing agency.


C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

E. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 3. Shear stud connectors. 4. Deformed bar anchors. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout.

F. Survey of existing conditions.

G. Source quality-control reports, including ultrasonic inspection of full penetration shop welds.

H. At completion of fabrication, the approved fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance to the AHJ stating that the materials supplied and work performed by the fabricator are in accordance with the construction documents.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD or the fabricator shall employ an approved independent inspection or quality control agency to conduct periodic, in-plant inspections at the fabricator's plant, at a frequency that will assure the fabricator's conformance to the requirements of the inspection agency's approved quality control program as required by the VUSBC (Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code) 2012 Edition, effective July 14, 2014.



B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE or the installer shall employ an approved independent inspection or quality control agency to conduct periodic inspections of the installer’s work, at a frequency that will assure the installer's conformance to the requirements of the inspection agency's approved quality control program as required by the VUSBC (Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code) 2012 Edition, effective July 14, 2014.

C. Fabricator and Erector Quality Control Programs shall adhere to the minimum requirements of Chapter N of AISC 360-10.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating

ASTM F 1852 fasteners and ASTM F 2280 and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Channels, Angles , S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade C, structural tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.

1. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized.



F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers with plain finish.

C. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating.

D. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, and ASTM F 2280, Type 1, heavy-hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain.

E. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

F. Deformed Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496, cold-worked deformed steel bar type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type C.

G. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554-Grade 36, Grade 55 (weldable) and Grade 105 as indicated.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain.

H. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M.



2.4 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."

F. Shear Connectors and Deformed Bar Anchors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors and deformed bar anchors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors and deformed bar anchors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened unless noted otherwise.



B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.

2.7 PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS

A. Prefabricated building columns consisting of load-bearing structural-steel members protected by concrete fireproofing encased in an outer non-load-bearing steel shell.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide prefabricated building column listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 119.

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated.

2.8 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches.

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. 6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or

erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

2.9 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

1. For members to receive field paint, do not quench or apply post-galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.



2. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

3. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls unless indicated to be Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS).


A. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded full-penetration connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedure by fabricator-employed testing agency.

1. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 2. Test 100% of CJP welds in Risk Category III and Risk Category IV structures. 3. Reductions and increases in the rate of ultrasonic testing shall be in accordance with

Paragraphs N5.5e and N5.5f of AISC 360-10. 4. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Baseplates, Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Provide plate washers at anchor rods as indicated and in accordance with minimum sizes

contained in Table 14-2 of AISC Manual of Steel Construction.



3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

H. Shear Connectors and Deformed Bar Anchors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors and deformed bar anchors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors and deformed bar anchors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.


B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs as required for ultrasonic testing. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes

without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.

3.5 PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS

A. Install prefabricated building columns to comply with AISC 360, manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements of testing and inspecting agency that apply to the fire-resistance rating indicated.




A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. All testing and inspections of Structural Steel Framing and Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel shall be done in conformance with IBC 2012, Section 17 and AISC 360-10, Chapter N.

C. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect complete joint penetration (CJP) field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedure:

a. Test 10% of CJP welds in Risk Category II Structures. b. Test 100% of CJP welds in Risk Category III and Risk Category IV structures. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Reductions and increases in Rate of Ultrasonic Testing shall be in accordance with

Paragraphs N5.5e and N5.5f of AISC 360-10.

E. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors and deformed bar anchors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector or deformed bar anchor.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors or deformed bar anchors if weld fracture occurs on those already tested.

3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.


ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051213 - 1


SECTION 051213 - ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes architecturally exposed structural-steel (AESS).

1. Requirements in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" also apply to AESS.


1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements applicable toAESS.

2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached tostructural-steel frame miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not definedas structural steel.

3. Section 078123 “Intumescent Fireproofing”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Category 1 AESS: AESS that is within 96 inches vertically and 36 inches horizontally of awalking surface and that is visible to a person standing on that walking surface or is designatedas "Category 1 architecturally exposed structural steel" or "AESS-1" in the Contract Documents.

B. Category 2 AESS: AESS that is within 20 feet vertically and horizontally of a walking surfaceand that is visible to a person standing on that walking surface or is designated as "Category 2architecturally exposed structural steel" or "AESS-2" in the Contract Documents.

C. Category 3 AESS: AESS that is not defined as Category 1 or Category 2 or that is designatedas "Category 3 architecturally exposed structural steel" or "AESS-3" in the ContractDocuments or that is indicated to receive intumescent mastic fireproofing.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paintand coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoatsare compatible with one another.






A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of AESS components. Shop Drawings for structural steel may be used for AESS provided items of AESS are specifically identified and requirements below are met for AESS.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. Indicate grinding, finish, and profile of welds.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections. Indicate orientation of bolt heads.

5. Indicate exposed surfaces and edges and surface preparation being used. 6. Indicate special tolerances and erection requirements.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.

B. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.



A. Use special care in handling to prevent twisting, warping, nicking, and other damage. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.


A. Field Measurements: Where AESS is indicated to fit against other construction, verify actual dimensions by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FILLER

A. Filler: Polyester filler intended for use in repairing dents in automobile bodies.



2.2 PRIMER

A. Typical Primer for Interior AESS Locations: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Primer for Interior AESS Locations to Receive Intumescent Mastic Fireproofing shall be

coordinated with requirements of Section 078123.

B. Primer for Exterior AESS Locations: Carbozinc 859 by Carboline - organic zinc-rich epoxy.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate and assemble AESS to the maximum extent possible. Locate field joints at concealed locations if possible. Detail assemblies to minimize handling and to expedite erection.

B. In addition to special care used to handle and fabricate AESS, comply with the following:

1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust, scale, and roughness.

2. Grind sheared, punched, and flame-cut edges of Category 1 AESS to remove burrs and provide smooth surfaces and edges.

3. Fabricate Category 1 AESS with exposed surfaces free of mill marks, including rolled trade names and stamped or raised identification.

4. Fabricate Category 1 and Category 2 AESS with exposed surfaces free of seams to maximum extent possible.

5. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning, treating, and shop priming.

6. Fabricate with piece marks fully hidden in the completed structure or made with media that permits full removal after erection.

7. Fabricate Category 1 AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is designated AESS.

8. Fabricate Category 2 and Category 3 AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is not designated AESS.

9. Seal-weld open ends of hollow structural sections with 3/8-inch closure plates for AESS.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill,or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.4 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.




B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work, and comply with the following:

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding specified tolerances.

2. Use weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment for AESS that limit distortions to allowable tolerances.

3. Provide continuous, sealed welds at angle to gusset-plate connections and similar locations where AESS is exposed to weather.

4. Provide continuous welds of uniform size and profile where Category 1 AESS is welded. 5. Make butt and groove welds flush to adjacent surfaces within tolerance of plus 1/16 inch,

minus zero inch for Category 1 and Category 2 AESS. Do not grind unless required for clearances or for fitting other components, or unless directed to correct unacceptable work.

6. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs; back-gouge and grind steel smooth for Category 1 and Category 2 AESS.

7. At locations where welding on the far side of an exposed connection of Category 1 and Category 2 AESS occurs, grind distortions and marking of the steel to a smooth profile aligned with adjacent material.

8. Make fillet welds for Category 1 and Category 2 AESS of uniform size and profile with exposed face smooth and slightly concave. Do not grind unless directed to correct unacceptable work.

2.5 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches.

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. 5. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation for Nongalvanized Steel: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide minimum dry film thickness indicated below. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or

erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. 3. Provide minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils for AESS at interior locations. 4. Provide minimum dry film thickness of 3.0 mils for AESS at exterior locations.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

B. Examine AESS for twists, kinks, warping, gouges, and other imperfections before erecting.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep AESS secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

1. If possible, locate welded tabs for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling where they will be concealed from view in the completed Work.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set AESS accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

1. Erect Category 1 AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is designated AESS.

2. Erect Category 2 and Category 3 AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is not designated AESS.

B. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened unless noted otherwise. 2. Orient bolt heads in same direction for each connection and to maximum extent possible

in same direction for similar connections.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with requirements in "Weld Connections" Paragraph in "Shop Connections" Article.

1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs; back-gouge and grind steel smooth for Category 1 and Category 2 AESS.



2. Remove erection bolts in Category 1 and Category 2 AESS, fill holes, and grind smooth. 3. Fill weld access holes in Category 1 and Category 2 AESS and grind smooth.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect AESS as specified in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing." The testing agency is not responsible for enforcing requirements relating to aesthetic effect.

B. Architect will observe AESS in place to determine acceptability relating to aesthetic effect.


A. Remove welded tabs that were used for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling and that are exposed to view in the completed Work. Grind steel smooth.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

C. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.


STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 1


SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. K-series steel joists.2. KCS-type K-series steel joists.3. K-series steel joist substitutes.4. CJ-series Composite Steel Joists or proprietary composite steel joists.5. Joist accessories.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing bearing plates in concrete.2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry.3. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for field-welded shear connectors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SJI's "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and WeightTables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."

B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to supportnonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's"Specifications."


A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists.2. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and

connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and professional engineer.




C. Manufacturer certificates.

D. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt.

E. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists and composite joists signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation.

F. At completion of fabrication, the approved fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance to the building official stating that the work was performed in accordance with the approved construction documents.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications."

1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists and composite joists to comply with performance requirements.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."

B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists, composite joists, and connections capable of withstanding design loads indicated.

1. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level. 2. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live-load deflections no greater than

the following:

a. Floor Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span. b. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span.

B. Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for web and steel-angle chord members.



2.2 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS

A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord.

1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists and KCS-type K-series steel joists.

B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members.

C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.

D. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."

E. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications" unless noted otherwise.

F. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.

2.3 LONG-SPAN STEEL JOISTS

A. Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members; of joist type and end and top-chord arrangements as indicated.

B. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.

C. Camber long-span steel joists according to SJI's "Specifications" unless noted otherwise.

D. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.

2.4 COMPOSITE STEEL JOISTS

A. Manufacture joist girders according to "Standard Specifications for Composite Steel Joists, CJ-series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members; with end and top-chord arrangements as indicated.

B. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.

C. Camber joists for 75% of anticipated dead load deflection of wet concrete slab.

D. Design headed shear studs or shear screws to create 100% composite joist/slab section properties.

2.5 PRIMERS

A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.



2.6 JOIST ACCESSORIES

A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.

B. Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications."

C. Furnish ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface unless otherwise indicated.

D. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.

E. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

G. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist assembly.

2.7 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING

A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.

B. Do not prime paint joists and accessories to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

C. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.



B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section.

1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that

joists are stabilized during construction.

C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with Research Council on Structural Connection's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.

E. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports. Coordinate timing of periodic testing and inspection of the following:

1. Field inspection of welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 2. Visual inspection of bolted connections. 3. Correct member mark, size, spacing and orientation.

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in compliance with specified requirements.

C. Perform additional testing to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates, abutting structural steel, and accessories.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 3.

2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as primer used on adjacent surfaces.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

STEEL DECKING 053100 - 1


SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof deck.2. Composite floor deck.3. Noncomposite form deck.


1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill.2. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear

connectors.3. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous

steel shapes.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcingchannels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to otherconstruction.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Welding certificates.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed steel deck similar inmaterial, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted inconstruction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documentedaccording to ASTM E 548.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural WeldingCode - Sheet Steel."



D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

E. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

F. FMG Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FMG and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.

1.5 Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

1. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory-installed insulation to maintain insulation free of moisture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOF DECK

A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and with the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50, G60 zinc

coating. Provide Grade 40 minimum at 3” deep deck. 2. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: Provide at areas to receive field paint.

ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50, G60 zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. Provide Grade 40 minimum at 3” deep deck.

a. Color: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Deck Profile: As indicated. 4. Profile Depth: As indicated. 5. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 6. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 7. Side Laps: Overlapped.



2.2 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK

A. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50, G60 zinc

coating. 2. Profile Depth: As indicated. 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 4. Span Condition: Triple span or more.

2.3 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK

A. Noncomposite Steel Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form-deck panels to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 60, G60 zinc

coating. 2. Profile Depth: As indicated. 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 4. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 5. Side Laps: Overlapped.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 12 minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 30 for overhang and slab depth.

G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch thick, with factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch minimum diameter.

I. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780 for roof deck welds after welds have been inspected by Special Inspector.



J. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.

K. Shearflex Screws: For systems that combine deck attachment with composite slab connections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

C. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

1. Align cellular deck panels over full length of cell runs and align cells at ends of abutting panels.

D. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

E. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

F. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

G. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members as indicated.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports as indicated.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum.



D. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

1. Weld or mechanically fasten cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure.

3.4 COMPOSITE FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: As indicated. 2. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated.

B. Alternate floor deck fastening to steel joists may be submitted as a substitution request. Demonstrate structural equivalence to specified fastening.

C. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, as indicated.

D. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 2-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Butted.

E. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck.

3.5 NON-COMPOSITE FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: As indicated. 2. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports as indicated.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2".



D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field welds and mechanical fasteners will be subject to inspection.

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.


A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on top surface of roof deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. This applies at all roof deck welds.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 1


SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Load-bearing wall framing.2. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.3. Interior non-load bearing wall framing exceeding height limitations of standard,

nonstructural metal framing.4. Floor joist framing5. Ceiling joist framing.6. Soffit framing.7. Bracing for CMU partition walls.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections.2. Section 092116.23 "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for interior non-load-bearing,

metal-stud-framed, shaft-wall assemblies.3. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud

framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies.




A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing;fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing,bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel framing, but only for those items indicated tobe designed by the Contractor.




A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. For Professional Engineer responsible for Delegated Design.


C. Product certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks.

D. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.

E. Evaluation Reports: For non-standard cold-formed steel framing, post-installed anchors and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.

B. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Certified Steel Stud Association, the Steel Framing Industry Association or the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."


A. Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design cold-formed steel framing members that are indicated to be designed by the Contractor.



B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections

greater than the following:

a. Exterior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height, typical. Use 1/600 behind masonry or stucco veneer.

b. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height under a horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft..

c. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height, typical. Use 1/600 behind masonry or stucco veneer.

d. Ceiling Joist and soffit Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span for live loads and 1/240 for total loads of the span.

3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F.

4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:

a. Upward and downward movement of 3/4 inch.

5. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.

C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:

1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210. 2. Wall Studs: AISI S211. 3. Headers: AISI S212. 4. Lateral Design: AISI S213.

D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200.

E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.2 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: ST33H for 18 and 20 gage studs, ST50H for 16 gage studs and thicker. 2. Coating: G60.



B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: 50, Class 1. 2. Coating: G90.

2.3 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. 2. Minimum Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Minimum Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.

C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:


2.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING AND INTERIOR NON-LOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING THAT EXCEEDS HEIGHT LIMITATIONS OF STANDARD, NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING.

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:


B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Minimum Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass and head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.

1. Clark Dietrich Building Systems 2. The Steel Network, Inc. 3. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

D. Vertically Slotted Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free



vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0677 inch. 2. Minimum Flange Width: 1 inch plus the design gap for one-story structures and 1 inch

plus twice the design gap for other applications.

2.5 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING

A. Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches, minimum.

B. Steel Joist Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel joist track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel joists. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches, minimum.

2.6 CEILING JOIST FRAMING

A. Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, punched with standard holes, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:


2.7 SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Exterior Soffit Frame: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:


2.8 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips.



7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers and knee braces. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates.

2.9 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers.

C. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

D. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

2.11 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,

pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.



4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.


A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.

D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.



1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,

or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.4 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows:

1. Anchor Spacing: 24 inches maximum for delegated design or as indicated for DMWPV designed items.

B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches maximum for delegated design or as indicated for DMWPV designed items.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations.

D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.



E. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated.

F. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.

1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads.

2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs.

G. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing.

1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported.

H. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced vertically 60 inches on-center maximum unless noted otherwise. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of two screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches deep.

2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

3. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.5 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING INSTALLATION.

A. Also applies to interior non-load bearing wall framing that exceeds height limitations of standard, nonstructural metal

B. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

C. Fasten both flanges of studs to bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches maximum for delegated design or as indicated for DMWPV designed items.

D. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.



E. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Connect vertical deflection clips or vertically slotted single deflected track to bypassing or infill studs and anchor to building structure.

F. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated but not more than 60 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

3. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.6 JOIST INSTALLATION

A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.

1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches. 2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers,

steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings.

C. Space joists not more than 2 inches from abutting walls, and as follows:

1. Joist Spacing: 24 inches maximum for delegated design or as indicated for DMWPV designed items.

D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, or another combination of connected joists if indicated.

E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as indicated.

1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.

F. Install bridging at intervals indicated. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as follows:

1. Joist-Track Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist webs.

2. Combination Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs.



G. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange.

H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly.


A. Testing and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Coordinate timing of periodic testing and inspections of the following:

1. Field and shop welds. 2. Connections using self-drilling, self-tapping screws. 3. Size, steel grade, flange width, spacing, and material thickness of members.

B. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

C. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.


A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections.

2. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors 3. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel edgings. 4. Abrasive metal nosings. 5. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other

Sections. 6. Angle framing around roof openings and units. 7. Joist web stiffeners, joist seats, and joist extensions. 8. Repair anchor bolts and base plates at masonry walls. 9. Beam and joist strengthening.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:

1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts

indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.

2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into unit masonry.

3. Division 05 Section “Structural Steel Framing” for all items requiring coordination with this section.

4. Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for any items requiring coordination with this section.


A. Delegated Design: Design alternating tread devices, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.



1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F , ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. 2. Paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

E. Welding certificates.

F. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work.

C. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed to practice in jurisdiction where project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the successful installation of metal fabrications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.



1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

1. Grade C unless otherwise indicated or required for design loading.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501, hot-formed steel tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

1. Black finish unless galvanizing is indicated.

E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 , Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A ; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 ; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3 ; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3 ; and, where indicated, flat washers.

D. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 ; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 ; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy [Group 1 ] [Group 2 ].



E. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.

F. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 .

1. Cadmium plated steel.

G. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1 .

H. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.

I. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 .

J. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 .

K. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

L. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings."

C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

1. Containing no asbestos fibers.

F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi .



2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

F. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

5. Comply with AWS recommendations.

G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips Flathead (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

H. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

I. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

J. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches , with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to



complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

1. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. 2. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into

masonry.

C. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with primer specified in Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings" where indicated.

2.7 SHELF ANGLES

A. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete.

B. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction.

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.

2.9 ABRASIVE METAL NOSINGS

A. Cast-Metal Units: Cast aluminum, with an integral-abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. b. Barry Pattern & Foundry Co., Inc.

2. Nosings: Cross-hatched units, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches , for casting into concrete curbs.

B. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with manufacturer.



C. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units.

2.10 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

B. Galvanize plates.

2.11 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated.

C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.

2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless primers specified in Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings" are indicated.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification



No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.

3.3 INSTALLING NOSINGS

A. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and level with tread surfaces.

3.4 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to



improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations unless otherwise indicated.

2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.



METAL STAIRS 055100- 1

SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. 2. Steel shape railings attached to metal stairs. 3. Metal railing components for metal stairs including but not limited to sleeves, anchors,

grates, bars, handrails an any other components not specified elsewhere. Refer to Drawings for component details and dimensions. Provide AESS where indicated in the Drawings.

4. Steel pipe handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. 5. Perforated metal panels and fasteners that are part of guardrails

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms.

2. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal treads and nosings installed at locations other than in metal stairs.

3. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings.


A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. . 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. . 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition

to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch ,

whichever is less.

C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.



2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. . b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

D. Seismic Performance: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Reference structural drawings for requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For metal stairs.

1. Prefilled metal-pan stair treads. 2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Show anchorage and accessory items. 2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other sections. 3. Submit shop drawings of perforated metal panel layout. Indicate size, shape, extent of

perforation, dimensions and fastening for all rail elevations.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:

1. Perforated metal panels, aluminum angles, and flat-stock guardrail components:

a. Provide samples of unfinished material for verification of thickness, perforation size and pattern prior to providing samples of finished materials for verification of color.

b. Provide samples of finished material for verification of color

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

G. Welding certificates.

H. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

1. Metal stairs specified in this section to be fabricated and installed by the same firm.

B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.



1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 3. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Recycled Content: Provide steel with minimum 30 percent total recycled content, including at least 25 percent post‐consumer recycled content. Give preference to products with the highest percentage of recycled content feasible.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Grating: press-locked bar grating refer to Drawings for sizes. ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed).

E. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or ASTM A 1018/A 1018M.

F. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 .

G. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, structural steel, Grade 30 , unless another grade is required by design loads.

H. Expanded-Metal, Carbon Steel: ASTM F 1267, Type I (expanded), Class 1 (uncoated).

1. Style Designation: 3/4 number 13.

2.3 FASTENERS



A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 , Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3. Refer to Drawing requirements for metal stair components.

C. Paints and Coatings applied within the building waterproofing envelope: Comply with low‐emitting requirements in Division 01 Section “Indoor Air Quality Requirements.”


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections and Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings."

C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

1. Containing no asbestos fibers.

F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

G. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.

H. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 6 by 6 inches , W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS): Comply with fabrication requirements, including tolerance limits, of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel identified as architecturally exposed structural steel.



1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust, scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness.

2. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning, treating, and shop priming.

D. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

E. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

F. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

G. Weld connections to comply with the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint

Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint.

H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

I. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

2.6 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A. Stair Framing:

1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels.

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.

2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements.

3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces.

B. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.067 inch .

1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated hot-rolled steel sheet[ unless otherwise indicated]. 2. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars.

Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting.

3. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser. 4. At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal-pan subtreads filled with

reinforced concrete during fabrication. 5. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as

subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing.



2.7 STAIR RAILINGS

A. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.

1. Provide steel tube railings in sizes and shapes indicated on the drawings.

B. Steel Shape Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including post spacings and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.

1. Provide steel shape railings in sizes and shapes indicated on the Drawings. Provide AESS where indicated in the Drawings.

C. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.

1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint.

D. Form changes in direction of railings as follows:

1. As detailed.

E. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

F. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

G. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.

H. Handrails: provide 1 1/2 inch round steel handrails.

I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work.

1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. For galvanized railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and

other ferrous-metal components. 3. For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,

fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction.

J. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate.

2.8 PERFORATED METAL PANELS

A. Basis-of-Design: McNichols Quality Round Perforated panels



B. Requirements:

1. Material: Steel 2. Thickness: .11 ga. 3. Hole size: 5/16” 4. Spacing: 7/16” 5. Pattern: Staggered 6. Open Area: Min. 46% 7. Finish: Powdercoat. Color to be selected by Architect from full range of RAL colors. 8. Panel size: Overall panel size and shape shall be as indicated on drawings. Extent of

perforated portion of panel shall be of size and shape indicated on Drawings.

C. Fasteners: Oval-head thread-cutting screws, size, thread and point as-required for substrate, with finished cup washer, stainless steel or chrome finish. Locations as indicated on drawings.

2.9 FINISHES


B. Finish metal stairs after assembly.

C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed products:

1. Interior Stairs: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated.

D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.



E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

F. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.

G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.2 INSTALLING RAILINGS

A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:

1. Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members. 2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail

ends and anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts.

B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket [with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt] [with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage]. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as required to comply with performance requirements.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections and Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.



MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 3. Wood furring and grounds. 4. Fire-retardant treated plywood subfloor. 5. Fire-retardant plywood backing panels.


1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" 2. Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" 3. Division 06 Section "Interior Finish Carpentry"

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension.

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include



physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

B. Deliver interior wood materials that are to be exposed to view only after building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work other than painting is dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy levels.

C. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade stamp and

provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for

moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

a. Moisture content: 15% maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment.

4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA UC3B.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

2. Plywood: Preservative treatment by pressure process AWPA C9.



B. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 pcf.

C. For interior uses, kiln-dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 and 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

D. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.

4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas.

5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

F. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood).

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in attic

spaces, and where indicated. 4. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Concealed blocking. 2. Concealed plywood backing panels. 3. Concealed plywood subfloor panels.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers.



3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds. 7. Utility shelving.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of any species.

C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.5 PLYWOOD SUBFLOOR

A. Classification: DOC PS-1, Exposure 1

B. Panel Thickness: 23/32

C. Edge Type: Tongue and Groove

D. Fire-retardant treated

2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

2.7 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or of Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.



F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 .

G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A ; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

C. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.

E. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:

1. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions.

F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

H. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:



1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in BOCA's BOCA National Building Code.

I. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



SHEATHING 061600 - 1

SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wall sheathing. 2. Sheathing joint-and-penetration treatment.


1. Division 07 Section "Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers" for fluid applied air barrier.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

2. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."


A. Stack panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEATHING

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum Corporation. Manufactured in Ontario, Canada with 50% recycled content.

a. Gypsum board designed as an exterior substrate for a weather barrier, consisting of a noncombustible water-resistant core, essentially gypsum, surfaced with glass mats on face and back, partially or completely embedded in core, and with unsurfaced square edges.

2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. For wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.

1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM C 1002.

2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM C 954.

2.3 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. Verify joint treatment required by fluid applied air barrier manufacturer. Joints shall be treated in a manner approved by air barrier manufacturer.

B. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing, and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners.

C. Sheathing Tape for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing board and with a history of successful in-service use.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."

D. Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural

elements. 3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might

retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing.

C. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards.

3.3 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT

A. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions and fluid applied air barrier requirements.



1. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing board joints, and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings.



INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 1

SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior wood flooring.


1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, plywood backing panels and other carpentry work not exposed to view.

2. Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop-fabricated interior woodwork and interior woodwork not specified in this Section.

3. Division 09 Section "Painting" for priming and back priming of interior finish carpentry.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.

B. MDO: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical-treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels specified.

4. Include copies of warranties from chemical-treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B. Shop Drawing: Provide dimensioned plans, elevations and sections and large scale details. Show location of each item, attachment devices, and other components



C. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For installation adhesives and sealants, documentation in accordance with Division 01 Section "Indoor Air Quality Requirements."

2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For composite woods, agrifiber products and laminating adhesives, documentation in accordance with Division 01 Section "Indoor Air Quality Requirements." a. For each composite-wood product used, documentation indicating that the bonding

agent contains no urea formaldehyde. b. For each adhesive used, documentation indicating that the adhesive contains no

urea formaldehyde. 3. Product Data for Credit(s) MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: For products having recycled content,

documentation indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

4. Product Data for Credit MR 5: For products with regional material, documentation indicating location of manufacture and extraction or recovery of primary materials. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having regional material.

5. Product Data Certificates for Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates certifying that products specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements. a. Include vendor invoice indicating Chain of Custody number and wood products

listed per requirements in Division 01 Section "Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED."Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or textures.

6. Product Data for Credits EQ 4.2 and 4.3: For floor finish system, documentation including printed statement of VOC content in g/L.

7. Product data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints and coatings applied within the building water proofing envelope, documentation including printed statement of VOC content in g/L.

E. Samples for Verification:

1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with non-factory-applied finish, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels.

F. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

G. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.

H. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

C. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers.



D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that

woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard

and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with such selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.

F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated wood, from ICC-ES.

B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.


A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Composite wood products to be manufactured with binders containing no urea-formaldehyde.

B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and the following grading rules:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association, "Standard Grading Rules for Northeastern Lumber."

2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association, "Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress."

3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority, "Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber."

4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, "Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber."

5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, Standard No. 17, "Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber."

6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association, "Western Lumber Grading Rules."

C. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade

stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency.

2.2 FIELD-FINISHED WOOD FLOORING

A. Solid-Wood Flooring: Kiln dried to 6 to 9 percent maximum moisture content, tongue and groove and end matched, and with backs channeled.


a. Aacer Flooring, LLC. b. Carlisle Wide Plank Floors. c. EcoTimber. d. International Hardwood Flooring, Inc. e. Kentucky Wood Floors. f. Miller and Company, Inc. g. Oregon Lumber Company. h. Sandy Pond Hardwoods, Inc. i. WD Flooring, LLC. j. Yesteryear Floorworks Company.

2. Species and Grade: Maple, Second and Better grade 3. Cut: Plain sawn. 4. Thickness: 25/32 inch. 5. Face Width: 3 1/4”. 6. Lengths: Manufacturer's standard.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456793246&mf=04&src=wd












B. Stair Nosings 1. Species: Maple 2. Cut: Plain Sawn 3. Thickness: To match solid wood flooring 4. Face width: 6” 5. Nose: Bullnose 6. Length: Min: 48”

C. Urethane Finish System: Complete system of compatible components that is recommended by finish manufacturer for application indicated.


a. Basic Coatings, Inc. b. BonaKemi USA Inc. c. Dura Seal, Sherwin-Williams Company (The). d. Hillyard, Inc. e. Polo-Plaz Coatings; National Coatings Company.

2. Basis of Design: Bona Mega Clear HD

3. VOC Content: When calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), as follows:

a. Finish Coats and Floor Sealers: Not more than 350 g/L. 4. Color: Clear, no amber tint, will not yellow over time 5. Finish Coats: Min. 4 coats 6. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D523.

D. Sealer: Manufacturer’s recommended clear sealer

E. Wood Filler: Compatible with finish system components and recommended by filler and finish manufacturers for use indicated. If required to match approved Samples, provide pigmented filler.


A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible.

B. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use.

1. Wood glue shall have a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer.








1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.

B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer.


A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements, or with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.

B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.

1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless otherwise indicated.

3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation.

4. Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch variation between adjacent treads and risers and with no more than 3/8-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight.

5. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry.

3.4 FIELD-FINISHED WOOD FLOORING

A. Comply with flooring manufacturer's written installation instructions, but not less than applicable recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring.".



B. Wood Sleepers and Subfloor: Install according to requirements in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" and as indicated on drawings.

C. Wood Underlayment: Install according to requirements in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" and as indicated on drawings.

D. Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring as indicated on drawings.

E. Solid-Wood Flooring: Blind nail or staple flooring to substrate.

1. For flooring of face width more than 3 inches:

a. Install two countersunk screws at each end of each piece in addition to blind nailing. Cover screw heads with wood plugs glued flush with flooring.

F. Field Finishing

1. Machine-sand flooring to remove offsets, ridges, cups, and sanding-machine marks that would be noticeable after finishing. Vacuum and tack with a clean cloth immediately before applying finish. a. Comply with applicable recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines:

Wood Flooring.". b. Fill and repair wood flooring seams and defects. c. Apply floor-finish materials in number of coats recommended by finish

manufacturer for application indicated, but not less than one coat of floor sealer and four finish coats. 1) Apply stains to achieve an even color distribution matching approved

Samples. 2) For water-based finishes, use finishing methods recommended by finish

manufacturer to minimize grain raise. d. Cover wood flooring before finishing.

2. Do not cover wood flooring after finishing until finish reaches full cure, and not before seven days after applying last finish coat.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Restore damaged or soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes, if any.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. 1. Protect installed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with covering of

heavy kraft paper or other suitable material. Do not use plastic sheet or film that might cause or trap condensation.



2. Do not move heavy or sharp objects directly over kraft-paper-covered wood flooring. Protect flooring with plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over flooring.

3. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are damaged from construction activity.

B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023-1

SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate Cabinets. 2. Plastic-laminate Countertops. 3. Butcher-block Countertops. 4. Wood shelving and Display Boxes. 5. Plywood paneling. 6. Closet Utility Shelving. 7. Cabinet Hardware and Miscellaneous Accessories. 8. Shop finishing of interior woodwork.


1. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

2. Division 08 “Glazing” for glass at custom display boxes. 3. Division 09 Section “Painting” for high-performance paint for Decorative Wall Panels. 4. Division 10 Section “Display Cases” for recessed mounted aluminum framed display

cases recessed in walls with Decorative Wall Panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes.

B. Product Data: For high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, solid-surfacing material cabinet hardware and accessories, and finishing materials and processes.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale



details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical devices, plumbing fixtures,

faucets, soap dispensers, in-counter equipment and other items installed in architectural woodwork.

4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.

D. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Shop-applied transparent finishes. 2. Plastic laminates. 3. PVC edge material. 4. Solid-surfacing materials.

E. Samples for Verification:

1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches wide by 24 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge.

2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent-finished woodwork.

3. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 12 by 24 inches, for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified.

4. Plastic laminates, 3 by 5 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 5. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.

F. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

G. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.

H. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

C. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers.

D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.

2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard



and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with such selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.

E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Recycled Content: Provide products with the highest percentage of recycled content feasible.

C. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Hard White Maple, Plain Sawn.

D. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade M., made with binder containing no

urea formaldehyde 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade [M-2] made with binder containing no urea



formaldehyde. 4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive

containing no urea formaldehyde. 5. Veneer-Core Plywood

E. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with exposed or semiexposed edges, unless noted otherwise in drawings. 1. 0.5mm edging on cabinet doors and drawers.

2. 0.5 mm edging on edges of open body cabinets. 3. 0.5mm edging on all cabinet body and shelf edges. 4. 3mm edging on all laminate counter tops and backsplashes.

F. High-Pressure Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Formica Corporation high-pressure decorative laminates as the Basis-of-Design.

2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets.

B. Hinges:

1. BLUM "Modul" 170 concealed self-closing hinge, #91A6500, with #195H7 series mounting plate.

2. One pair per door to 48 inch height. Two pair over 48 inches in height.

C. Pulls: Back mounted, aluminum, Hafele 116.05.922.

D. Shelf Rests:

1. Laminate Clad Shelves: Hafele #282.47.402 clear plastic, heavy duty double pin system locks shelf in place.

E. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.

1. Drawers up to 6 inches high: Accuride 2632 by length required. Zinc-plated, full extension, steel ball bearing, silenced in and out, minimum 65 lb. load rating.

2. Drawers over 6 inches high and up to 18 inches wide: Accuride 7432 x length required. Zinc-plated, full extension, steel ball bearings, silenced in and out, minimum 100 lb. load rating.

3. Drawers over 6 inches high and 18 inches wide: Accuride 9301 x length required. Zinc-plated, full extension, steel ball bearings, silenced in and out, minimum 200 lb. load rating.

F. Door & Drawer Locks:

1. Manufacturer: National Lock, high security cam locks. 2. Mounting Type: Flush 3. Keying: Master keyed alike for entire campus; provide locks on all cabinet doors and

drawers; provide two (2) keys per room. 4. Finish: Brushed Chrome



G. Countertop Brackets:

1. Manufacturer: Hafele

a. #287.77.002: 15 by 18 inches for 24 inch deep countertops. b. #287.77.003: 21 by 28 inches for 30 inch deep countertops.

2. Finish: Stainless Steel

H. Grommets for cable passage: 2 inch diameter, molded plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage:

1. Manufacturer: Doug Mockett & Company, Inc. 2. Series: TG Flip-Top 3. Color: Warm Grey 92W 4. Location: Reference Drawings.

I. Label Holders: C-Channel, self-adhesive:

1. Manufacturer: Demco Co. 2. Series: WS15333510 3. Color: Clear PVC 4. Dimension: 1/2 inch high by 6 inches wide. 5. Location: Provide one label at each mail slot in Workroom A103.

J. Metal Base: Anodized Aluminum Baseboard profile comprised of a symmetrically rounded top, flat exposed face, and 5/16” radius cove.

1. Manufacturer: Schluter Systems, L.P. 2. Style: Designbase SL 3. Finish: AE – Satin Anodized Aluminum. 4. Height: 3 1/8 inch (80mm) 5. Corners: Provide matching inside and outside corners and connectors. 6. Installation: Provide sealing lip to protect the floor-to-wall transition from moisture.

K. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. 2. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

L. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

1. Use concealed hardware and fasteners at all wall paneling, both wood finish and plastic laminate finish.

M. Flip-top power units: Medium Flip-Up Grommet

1. Manufacturer: Doug Mockett & Company, Inc. 2. Model: PC36M/U2 3. With (2) electrical outlets rated 15A/125VAC and (2) dual USB chargers 4. Dimensions: 8 15/16” x 4 7/16” 5. Custom length electrical cord: coordinate with electrical floor box location to ensure

reach.



6. Color: Satin Aluminum 7. Location: Reference Drawings.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.


A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom -grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.

B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:

1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.

D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete.

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.

E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, equipment and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

F. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops.



2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS

A. Grade: Custom.

B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.

C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure laminate complying with the following requirements:

1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. 3. Edges: Grade VGS PVC tape, 0.018-inch minimum thickness, matching laminate in

color, pattern, and finish. 4. Alternative edges as noted on drawings: Exposed veneer-core plywood edge with clear

wood sealer.

D. Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.

a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC tape, 0.018-inch minimum thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade CLS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.

E. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure laminate, Grade BKL.

F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide the following colors and textures; Laminate color locations to be identified on Shop Drawings.

1. PLAM-1: Formica Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 2. PLAM-2: Formica Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 3. PLAM-3: Formica high-gloss finish; Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s

full range. 4. PLAM-4: Formica high-gloss finish; Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s

full range. 5. PLAM-5: Formica high-gloss finish; Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s

full range. 6. PLAM-6: Formica Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Grade: Custom.

B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.

C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As noted under 2.5.F.1-6.



D. Edge Treatment: PVC tape, .12 inch minimum thickness; Plastic laminate self edge, or exposed finished veneer-core plywood edge; ref. drawings for locations of each type.

E. Core Material: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard. Veneer-core plywood where edge specified. Reference drawings for locations.

F. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard made with exterior glue.

G. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate.

2.7 BUTCHER-BLOCK COUNTERTOPS

A. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish):

1. Species: Hard White Maple. 2. Grade: Premium. 3. Cut: Plain-sawn, solid hardwood sections. 4. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent. 5. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 6. Veneered Material: Not allowed. 7. Face Surface: Edge grain on top surface. 8. Thickness: 3-inches. 9. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color. 10. Profile: As indicated on drawings.

B. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. AWI Finish System: Conversion varnish. 3. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-

grain wood before staining and finishing. 4. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.

2.8 PLYWOOD PANELING FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Veneer-core Hard White Maple Plywood

1. Thickness: ½” or ¾” as noted on drawings

2. Grain Direction: Vertically for fixed panels. 3. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match. 4. Vertical Matching of Veneer Leaves: End match. 5. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Running match. 6. Edges: As noted on drawings, exposed veneer-core edges

1.1 SHOP FINISHING

A. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling



countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative panels.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. AWI Finish System: Conversion varnish. 3. Staining: Match Architect's control sample. 4. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-

grain wood before staining and finishing. 5. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 96 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.

1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished.

2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch



in 96 inches.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16

inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.

1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

3. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive, in locations indicated on drawings. 4. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section

"Joint Sealants."

H. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.


A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.



BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 1

SECTION 071113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.


1. Division 04 section "Unit Masonry" for mortar parge coat on masonry surfaces. 2. Division 07 section "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing” for waterproofing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from single source from single manufacturer. Provide auxiliary materials recommended in writing by manufacturer of primary materials.

2.2 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ChemMasters Corp.



2. Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products. 3. Gardner Gibson, Inc. 4. Henry Company. 5. Meadows, W. R., Inc.

B. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.

C. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with bituminous dampproofing.

B. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as recommended in writing by manufacturer.

C. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.

D. Patching Compound: Asbestos-free fibered mastic of type recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness, surface moisture, and other conditions affecting performance of bituminous dampproofing work.

1. Test for surface moisture according to ASTM D 4263.

B. Proceed with application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains.

B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to the dampproofing work; fill voids, seal joints, and remove bond breakers if any, as recommended in writing by prime material manufacturer.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for dampproofing application, cure time between coats, and drying time before backfilling unless more stringent requirements are indicated.



1. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection. 2. Apply additional coats if recommended in writing by manufacturer or to achieve a smooth

surface and uninterrupted coverage.

B. Where dampproofing footings and foundation walls, apply from finished-grade line to top of footing; extend over top of footing and down a minimum of 6 inches over outside face of footing.

1. Extend dampproofing 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed.

C. Where dampproofing exterior face of inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls, lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer ties, and other items that penetrate inner wythe.

1. Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs that interrupt inner wythe.

2. Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) onto shelf angles supporting veneer.

D. Where dampproofing interior face of above-grade, exterior concrete and masonry single-wythe masonry walls, continue dampproofing through intersecting walls by keeping vertical mortar joints at intersection temporarily open or by dampproofing wall before constructing intersecting walls.

3.4 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. Concrete Foundations and Parged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply one trowel coat at not less than 4 gal./100 sq. ft.

B. Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and one trowel coat at not less than 5 gal./100 sq. ft.

C. Unexposed Face of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply one brush or spray coat at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.



SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326 - 1

SECTION 071326 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Modified bituminous sheet waterproofing.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site in combination with other waterproofing assemblies.

1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.

2. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing and details of substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, including the following products:

1. 8-by-8-inch square of waterproofing and flashing sheet. 2. 4-by-4-inch square of drainage panel.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Field quality-control reports.



C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by waterproofing manufacturer.


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate.

1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.

B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materials.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard materials-only warranty in which manufacturer agrees to furnish replacement waterproofing material for waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Installer's Special Warranty: Provide installer warranty signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations for Waterproofing System: Obtain waterproofing materials, molded-sheet drainage panels from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Mastic, Adhesives, and Detail Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

2.2 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING

A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Not less than 60-mil-thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil-thick, polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive side and formulated for application with primer or surface conditioner that complies with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Henry Company; Blueskin WP200 b. American Hydrotech, Inc.; VM 75. c. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW MiraDRI 860/861.



d. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Bituthene 4000.

2. Physical Properties: a. Must have record of success with compatibility and adhesion with the materials

within the flashing assembly and any other material with which it will be in contact. b. Tensile Strength: 250 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. c. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. d. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. e. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement; ASTM C 836. f. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154. g. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 150 feet minimum; ASTM D 5385. h. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at

70 deg F; ASTM D 570. i. Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms; ASTM E 96, Water Method. j. Lap Adhesion at 25 F: 5 lbs/in of width in accordance with ASTM D1876. k. Peel Strength: minimum 9 lbs/in in accordance with ASTM D903.


A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.

1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by sheet-waterproofing material manufacturer.

C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by sheet-waterproofing material manufacturer.

D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, of trowel grade or low viscosity.

E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, modified asphalt coating.

F. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at 9-inch centers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the waterproofing.

1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and within the moisture limits recommended in writing by manufacturer. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.



3. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry, smooth, sound, and ready to receive waterproofing sheet.


3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids.

E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.

F. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.

1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch fillets of liquid membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows:

a. At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane in each direction from corner or install membrane strip centered over corner.

G. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.

3.3 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET-WATERPROOFING APPLICATION

A. Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in ASTM D 6135.

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.

1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install self-adhering, modified bituminous sheets produced for low-temperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F.

D. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low to high points of decks to ensure that laps shed water.



E. Apply continuous sheets over already-installed sheet strips, bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints.

F. Seal edges of sheet-waterproofing terminations with mastic.

G. Install sheet-waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing.

H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.

I. Immediately install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane.

1. Molded-sheet drainage panels may be used in place of a separate protection course to vertical applications when approved by waterproofing manufacturer and installed immediately.

3.4 PROTECTION, REPAIR, AND CLEANING

A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.

B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

C. Protect installed drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

D. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.

E. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.



THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Perimeter insulation under slabs-on-grade. 2. Cavity-wall insulation. 3. Spray Foam Insulation


1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for insulation installed in cavity walls and masonry cells.

2. Division 07 Section "Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers " for air barrier. 3. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for insulation installed as part of a

perimeter fire-resistive joint system. 4. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for installation in metal-framed assemblies of

insulation specified by referencing this Section. 5. Division 21 Section "Fire protection." 6. Division 22 Section "Plumbing." 7. Division 23 Section "Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning"

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls.


A. Plenum Rating: Provide insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products.




A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time.

3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively:


a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company. c. Owens Corning.

2. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft. , unless otherwise indicated.



B. Recycled Content: Give preference to products with the highest percentage of recycled content feasible.

2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Corning.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

C. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated:

1. 1-1/2" (38mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 13 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F . 2. 2-1/2" (64mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 13 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F . 3. 3-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 13 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F . 4. 3-5/8 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 11 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F . 5. 5-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F .

2.4 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION

A. Spray applied polyurethane foam insulation system: ASTM C 1149, Type II (materials containing a dry adhesive activated by water during installation, intended for enclosed applications), chemically treated for flame-resistance, processing and handling characteristics.

B. Apply in wall cavities and at junctions of wall and roof assemblies as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Basis-of-Design: Subject to compliance with specifications, provide HE735 Permax 2.0 Spray-Applied Polyurethane Foam Insulation by Henry Company, or approved equal.

1. Air Leakage: <0.0006 L/(s.m2) @ 75Pa, per ASTM E 2178

2. Meet ICC AC377 standards

3. Vapor permeance minimum: 0.95 perms @ 1in, 0.47 perms @ 2in, per ASTM E96

4. Aged R value minimum: >6.45/in @ 1 inch thickness, > 6.2/in @ 4 inches

5. Nominal Density: 2.0 pounds per cubic foot

6. Tested ASTM E-84 for FSI and SDI



2.5 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS

A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION

A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line.

B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.



C. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection course with joints butted. Set in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying protection course with joints butted.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. On units of foam-plastic board insulation, install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates indicated.

1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry."

3.6 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Maintain an insulation value of R-19 or greater at exterior walls from slab to roof deck.

D. Fill all hollow structural steel members in line of insulation at exterior walls with cellulosic insulation.

E. Install glass-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches , support unfaced

blankets mechanically.

F. Apply self-supported, spray-applied polyurethane foam insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make it flush with face of studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer.

1. Fill all voids, cavities, and joints between building envelope components not sealed by other means specified herein.



3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072726 - 1

SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fluid-applied membrane air barrier, vapor permeable. 2. The Contractor and Applicator shall ensure that the intent of the constructing of the

building enclosure with a continuous air barrier system to control air leakage into, or out of the conditioned spaced at the wall plane from the foundation to the roof system is achieved. The air barrier system shall have the following characteristics:

a. It must be continuous. Continuity shall be maintained through the installation membranes or other transition elements where possible. Continuity shall not rely solely on any permanently exposed sealant joint.

b. It must be structurally supported to withstand positive and negative pressures applied to the building enclosure.

c. Connections shall be made between: 1) Foundation and walls - below grade waterproofing to fluid applied air barrier. 2) Walls and windows, doors and other openings. 3) Different wall systems 4) Wall and roof system 5) Wall and roof over unconditioned space 6) Walls across construction, control and expansion joints 7) Walls and utility, pipe, duct or other penetrations


1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedded flashings. 2. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for wall sheathings and wall sheathing

joint-and-penetration treatments. 3. Division 7 Section "Ethylene-Propylene-Diene Monomer (EPDM) Roofing” 4. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" 5. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” 6. Division 7 Section “Direct Exterior Finish System” 7. Division 7 Section “Formed Metal Wall Panels” 8. Division 7 Section “Composite Wall Panels” 9. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts"

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABAA: Air Barrier Association of America.

B. Air Barrier Material: a single component of an air barrier system with an air permanence no



greater than 0.004 cfm/ft² when tested at a static pressure of 1.57 psf in accordance with ASTM E 2178.

C. Air Barrier Component: Material used to connect different air barrier materials or assemblies together to make the air barrier continuous.

D. Air Barrier Assembly: The collection of air barrier materials and auxiliary materials applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall. The air permeance of an air barrier assembly shall not exceed 0.04 cfm/ft² when tested at a static pressure of 1.57 psf in accordance with ASTM E 2357.

E. Air Barrier System: Collection of building assemblies within the building enclosure designed, installed, and integrated in such a manner as to stop uncontrolled flow of air into and out of the building.

F. Transition Membrane: A self-adhered sheet membrane installed in various applications throughout the air barrier assembly. The transition membrane is generally used to provide a continuous transition at various locations where a fluid applied material cannot be effectively installed or will need additional reinforcing, such as at changes in substrate, corners, joints and integrations with other air barrier components.


A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous permeable air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior water within the exterior wall cavity, incidental condensation and water penetration. Air barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.

B. The Contractor and Applicator shall ensure that the intent of constructing the building enclosure with a continuous air barrier system to control air leakage into, or out of the conditioned space at the wall plane from the foundation to the roof system is achieved. The air barrier system shall gave the following characteristics:

1. It must be continuous, with all joints sealed. 2. It must be structurally supported to withstand positive and negative air pressures applied

to the building enclosure. 3. Connections shall be made between:

a. Foundation and walls. b. Walls and windows, doors and other openings. c. Different wall systems. d. Wall and roof systems. e. Wall and roof over unconditioned space. f. Walls across construction, control and expansion joints. g. Walls and utility, pipe, duct or other penetrations.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of air barrier.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details of specific project



conditions for substrate joints and cracks, counter flashing strip, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction including but not limited to waterproofing, structural framing, flashing, door, windows, louvers, storefronts, curtain wall, architectural precast concrete, parapets, and roofing. Shop drawings shall be coordinated with and include interface details with windows. storefronts, roofing and curtain walls. The coordinated air barrier shop drawings shall indicate all materials, flashings, weeps, closures transition membranes, sealant, and other miscellaneous components, regardless of which Contractor is responsible for their installation. Provisions for sealing all penetrations, including brick veneer anchor penetrations; fasteners for hat channels for the metal panel wall system; and all electrical, plumbing and HVAC penetrations through the air barrier shall be included in the shop drawings. Drawings shall be prepared by an experienced air barrier system designer.

1. Drawings shall be composed to illustrate complete building sections from foundation to roof with large scale details provided for points of connections identified in paragraph 1.2.A.2.C, and supplemented with additional details including interface with other materials and building components that form the air barrier system.

C. Product Certificates: For air barriers, certifying compatibility and adhesion of air barrier and accessory materials with project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier; signed by product manufacturer.

D. Qualification Data: For Applicator.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for air barriers.


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying air barrier materials similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance and that is an ABAA-licensed contractor, employs certified and registered installers, and complies with ABAA's Quality Assurance Program.

B. Pre-Installation Conference: Contractor shall conduct conference at Project site.

Attendance: Representatives of Contractors installing construction connecting to the air barrier shall attend including below grade waterproofing, architectural precast concrete, masonry, sealants, metal panels, insulation, sheathing, windows, storefronts and curtain walls. The meeting shall be held after all related shop drawings have been submitted but prior to the commencement of any related work. Installation and sequencing shall be discussed. Typical and critical details shall be reviewed with all responsible parties.

C. Mockups: Before beginning installation of air barrier, build mockups of exterior wall assembly , 150 sq. ft. , incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, window, door frame and sill, insulation, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air barrier membrane.

1. Include junction with roofing membrane, building corner condition, and foundation wall intersection.

2. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct mockups and apply air barrier until mockups are approved.




A. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by air barrier manufacturer.

B. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

C. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by air barrier manufacturer. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect performance of air barrier. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER

A. Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: synthetic polymer membrane.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Synthetic Polymer Membrane:

1) Henry Company; Air Block 17MR 2) WR Grace Perm-A-Barrier 3) Tremco; ExoAir 230. 4) Prosoco, R-Guard. 5) BASF, Enershield.

2. Physical and Performance Properties:

a. Membrane Air Permeance: Not to exceed 0.0005 L/(sec-M2) at a test pressure difference of 75Pa; ASTM E 2178.

b. Membrane Vapor Permeance: Not less than 14 perms; ASTM E 96.


A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by air barrier manufacturer for intended use and compatible with air barrier membrane. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Materials used above grade shall be vapor permeable.

B. Self Sealing Tape: To be installed behind all fastener penetrations for cladding support systems including behind metal panel attachments and brick veneer anchors.



1. Coordinate fastener type with self healing rating of membrane. 2. Coordinate adhesive for tape with fluid applied air barrier

C. Preformed Silicone Membrane: To be used to integrate curtain walls and storefront with air barrier as indicated on the drawings.

1. Silicone rubber extrusion intended to be installed as a transition membrane between air barrier and fenestrations assemblies. Size and width as required by applicable detail.


a. Dow 123 b. Tremco Proglaze c. GE Ultraspan

D. Sealant for adhering preformed silicone membrane: Neutral Cure one part silicone sealant designed for adhering to low energy surfaces with excellent adhesion to aluminum, the HDPE facer of the sheet waterproofing, stainless steel, and the fluid applied air barrier.

1. Basis of Design: Dow Corning 758 Silicone Weather Barrier Sealant

E. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of air barrier material.

F. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air barrier manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape.

G. Substrate Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.

H. Adhesive and Tape: Air barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive adhesive tape.

I. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch thick, and Series 300 stainless-steel fasteners.

J. Adhesive-Coated Transition Strip: Vapor-permeable, 17-mil- thick, self-adhering strip consisting of an adhesive coating over a permeable laminate with a permeance of 37 perms .

K. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low-modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. Comply with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." Sealant shall be compatible with adjoining materials and confirmed to adhere to such materials.

L. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Plus

Self-Adhered Flashing. c. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300.

M. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for



substrate.

N. Termination bar and fasteners: Provide stainless bar and fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.

O. Sealant: Product as recommended for compatibility with flashing and adjoining materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Verify that substrates are sufficiently dry, sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants.

2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by air barrier manufacturer.

3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and

ambient weather conditions will permit proper installation.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air barrier application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate patching membrane.

E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.

F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.

G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier.

3.3 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 1193 and air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces.



1. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of preparation coat strip extending a minimum of 3 inches along each side of joints and cracks. Apply a double thickness of air barrier membrane and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat.

B. Gypsum Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch with sealant according to ASTM C 1193 and in accordance with air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply first layer of fluid air barrier membrane at joints. Tape joints with joint reinforcing strip after first layer is dry. Apply a second layer of fluid air barrier membrane over joint reinforcing strip.

3.4 TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION

A. Install strips, transition strips, and auxiliary materials according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier.

1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane, windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier.

2. Install butyl strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over both substrates.

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.

C. Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to roofing membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials .

D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic.

E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

F. Wall Openings: Install stainless steel closures at cavity wall at wall openings including window storefront system, curtainwall system and flat lock metal panel system. Lap and seal air barrier to closures.

G. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant.

H. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination sealant.

I. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6-inchwide, counterflashing strip.

J. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination sealant.



K. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction.

3.5 AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Apply air barrier membrane to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply air barrier membrane within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges.

C. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.

D. Apply a continuous unbroken air barrier to substrates according to the following minimum thickness. Apply membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties.

1. Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: 70 mil wet film thickness and 40 mil dry film thickness, or as required by the manufacturer to provide the required air and vapor permeance.

E. Apply strip and transition strip over cured air membrane overlapping 3 inches onto each surface according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency.

G. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air barrier components.


A. Site Tests:

1. The ABAA Licensed Contractor shall conduct daily visual inspection, adhesion/cohesion testing and density measurements.

2. The ABAA Licensed Contractor shall complete the Daily Work Record and record all information required including the results of the testing. The Daily Work Record shall be kept on site for routine inspection. Copies of the Daily Work Record shall be forwarded to the Owner or Owner's representative upon request. Copies of the Daily Work Record or monthly summaries shall be sent to the ABAA office on a monthly basis as required by the Quality Assurance Program.

3. Transition membranes shall be pull tested in accordance with the ABAA Quality Assurance Program requirements before installing the fluid applied air barrier.

4. The costs incurred for daily testing and inspection by the Licensed Installer and the completion of the Daily Work Record shall be borne by the Licensed Contractor.

B. Inspection:

1. Arrange for site inspections by ABAA. The cost of inspections shall be included in the bid



provided by the ABAA Licensed Contractor. 2. The ABAA site-inspections shall verify conformance with the manufacturer's instructions,

the ABAA Quality Assurance Program, and this section of the project specification. 3. Inspections and testing shall be carried out at 5%, 50%" and 95% of" completion. A

written inspection report shall be forwarded to the Architect, the Owner's representative, the Contractor and the ABAA-Licensed Contractor within 3 working days of the inspection and test being performed. In the case of any deficiencies, the ABAA-Licensed inspector may verbally advise the licensed installer at the time of the inspection.

4. If the inspection reveals any defects, the Licensed Contractor shall immediately rectify all such defects at his cost

C. Tolerances:

1. Maximum variation from indicated thickness not to exceed the manufacturer's published data.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. Remove and replace air barrier exposed for more than 30 days unless longer exposure time has been approved in writing by the manufacturer. Any material that has developed surface chalking or in other ways limits the adhesion of sealants or transition flashings shall be removed and replaced.

2. Protect air barrier from contact with creosote, uncured coal-tar products, TPO, EPDM, flexible PVC membranes, mastics and sealants not approved by air barrier manufacturer.

B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

C. Remove masking materials after installation.



DIRECT EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM (DEFS) 074200 - 1

SECTION 074200 - DIRECT EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM (DEFS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY:

A. The work of this section includes direct exterior finish system as indicated on the drawings. B. Related work specified elsewhere includes:

Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants". 1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications and installation instructions for the cement board system.

B. Samples: Submit samples as follows:

1. Cement Board: 6" Square 2. Exterior Finish Colors: Select from full range of manufacturer's standard and custom

colors. 3. Fasteners. 4. Joint Reinforcement. 5. Water Barrier Membrane. 6. 12" sample corner bead, control joint and other installation accessories.

C. Mock-up: Contractor to provide an on-site 2 x 2 foot mock-up of the cement board system containing all component materials as specified, (show finish application as specified).

D. Maintenance Kit: Supply Maintenance Kit at project completion including sufficient base coat

& finish coat materials in unopened containers and bags to cover 100 square feet. Finish coat material shall be tinted same color as finished installation. Proved joint reinforcement tape, 2" wide, 300 linear feet.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Applicator: Application of the System shall be by an applicator approved by the Manufacturer of the System. Follow manufacturer's latest printed application instructions.

B. Requirements of regulatory agencies: The System shall be approved by BOCA. Packaging

shall be labeled to indicate approval. The System shall be listed as a result of test by Factory Mutual or Underwriter's Laboratories as an acceptable System for use on non-combustible construction.

C. Reference Standards:

Exterior Cement Board: ASTM C947-81 Flexural Strength, 1000 psi



ASTM C473-84 Water Absorption, 10% by weight - 24 hours ASTM C473-84 Nail Pull Resistance, 125 lbs. ASTM C473-84 Weight, 3 lbs/s.f. ASTM C666-84 Freeze/thaw resistance (Procedure A), 100 cycles - no deterioration

D. Obtain exterior cement board system components from a single manufacturer, or from

manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of cement boards. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the jobsite in the original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the brand name and manufacturer's identification.

B. Storage: Store materials in dry locations with adequate ventilation, free from water and in

such a manner to permit easy access for inspection and handling. Stack cement boards flat to avoid sagging or damage to edges, or surfaces. Protect basecoat and exterior finish from freezing.

C. Handling: Handle cement boards to prevent damage.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:

A. Comply with referenced manufacturer's recommendations. B. Do not apply finishes to exterior cement board if board is wet, or when ambient temperature

is below 45oF. Protect finish materials from rain or excessive moisture and maintain a minimum of 45oF for 24 hours after application.

C. Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification.

Store products in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight, protected from the elements and from damage. Store at a temperature of not less than 45oF.

D. Environmental Requirements:

1. Application of the System, including finishes, skim coats and basecoats shall not be

applied to exterior cement board that is wet, frozen or contains frost. After application, and for at least 24 hours, finishes, skim coats and basecoats shall be protected from rain and excessive moisture.

2. During basecoat and finish application, exterior cement board, basecoat, finish material

and air temperature must be at least 45oF and must remain at this temperature or higher for at least 24 hours after application. Under rapid drying conditions, dampening of board or basecoat surface may be required to improve workability.

3. Do not schedule application of system components when environmental conditions are

not expected to remain above the minimum temperatures for the period of time required for installing and curing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER:

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide complete cement board System from a single source manufacturer. System is comprised of reinforced finish coating on



mechanically fastened cement board over substrate; include all components of specified system and substrate(s) in tested samples.

B. Basis-of-Design: Provide the following product or equal subject to approval by Architect:

STO Quick Quik Gold System for Soffits. 2.2 MATERIALS:

A. Glass Mesh Mortar Unit (Cement Board):

1. Basis-of-Design: provide USG Durock Exterior Cement Board, 1/2" x 4' x 8', or equal, subject to approval by Architect.

B. Cement Board Fasteners:

1. 1-1/4" or 1-5/8" corrosion resistant self-drilling, self-tapping wafer head screws, for

installation into metal framing and wood framing as applicable.

C. Joint Reinforcement:

1. Polymer coated, open mesh, glass fiber exterior tape (4" wide).

D. Control Joints:

1. Zinc alloy control joint, USG No. 093.

E. Trim Accessories shall be ClarkDietrich Building Systems or approved equal.

1. Corner Bead: Zinc 2. Channel J – Trim: Zinc 3. L – Trim: Zinc 4. Standard and ‘F’ Control Joints: Zinc 5. Soffit Vent

F. Finish Materials:

1. Exterior Finish:

a. Base Coat: Acrylic- or polymer-modified fiber reinforced Portland Cement Exterior

Basecoat, Gray, ASTM C150, Type I or II. b Finish Coating Top Coat: Water-based, air curing, acrylic finish with integral color

and texture. Texture shall be as selected from manufacturer’s full range of standard textures. Color shall be as selected from manufacturer’s full range of standard colors.

G. Sealant: Cement board manufacturer recommended products for exterior applications. H. Soffit Vent: Fry-Reglet 3/4" Soffit Vent, DS-75-V-200, or equal, subject to approval by

Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.2 CEMENT BOARD:

A. Apply exterior cement board with rough sides towards exterior and with ends and edges over supports. Fit ends and edges closely, but not forced together. For exterior cement board with staple-attached membrane, apply in a shingle-like manner beginning at the bottom of a wall. Stagger end joints in successive courses.

B. Fasten exterior cement board to framing with specified fasteners. Drive fasteners in field of

exterior cement board first, working towards end and edges. Drive screws so bottom of heads are flush with surface of exterior cement board, to provide firm panel contact with framing. Do not overdrive.

C. Prefill joints with exterior basecoat and then immediately embed tape and level the joints. D. Trim accessories shall be applied using hot dipped galvanized roofing nails, monel or

stainless staples. Space fasteners 6" to 9" o.c. in each flange. E. Treat trim accessories with basecoat and level with adjacent board areas. Fill all voids and

depression with basecoat and feather mortar edges. The treated joints and trim areas must be allowed to cure for a minimum of 24 hours before application of basecoat.

3.3 JOINT REINFORCEMENT:

A. Apply over board joints and corners. Do not overlap. 3.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES:

A. Install corner beads as required at outside corners. Install control joints as shown on drawings, or every 144 sq.ft. Fasten with staples.

3.5 TEXTURE COATING:

A. Basecoat: Apply a 1/16" minimum thick, uniform layer of exterior basecoat over the entire surface, including taped joints, leaving surface smooth and flat. Under rapid drying conditions, dampen surface as necessary to improve workability. Allow basecoat to cure for 24 hours before application of exterior finish coat.

B. Finish Coat: Finish shall be standard "float" finish. Trowel-apply exterior finish in a 1/16"

minimum thick, uniform layer over all base-coated surfaces. Do not add sand or other additives to create heaver textures. If necessary, adjust consistency and working properties by adding up to 8 oz. clean water per 5 gallons of finish material. Add the same amount of water to all subsequent pails to ensure color uniformity. Mix well for uniform consistency. Texture as required, using conventional stucco tools.

C. Install control joints where indicated on drawings and where required by manufacturer's

recommendations. D. Surfaces to receive coating shall be clean and dry prior to application. Apply basecoat over

joint reinforcement and trim pieces. Allow to set 24 hours prior to application of full base coat. Skim approximately 1/16" base coat over entire surface. Base coat shall be uniform, smooth and flat. Allow to set 24 hours prior to application of texture finish. Trowel on a 1/16" minimum to 3/16" maximum coating thickness in selected finish and texture.


FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.13 - 1

SECTION 074213.13 - FORMED METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exposed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels.






1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, fastening pattern, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Refer to Drawings for location of panel joints.

2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied finishes.

1. Include Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Metal Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other metal panel accessories.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as factory-formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of work.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.



1. Build mockup of typical metal panel assembly 48 x 48 inches, including corner, soffits, supports, attachments, and accessories.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.

b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.


B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

2. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/240 of the span.



B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 EXPOSED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

B. Corrugated-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels : Formed with alternating curved ribs spaced at 2.67 inches o.c. across width of panel.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, :

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Centria Econolap ¾ inch at locations indicated in the Drawings, or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Berridge Manufacturing Company.

b. MBCI; a division of NCI Building Systems, L.P.

3. Centria Econolap ¾ inch:

a. Panel coverage: 34.66 inches (880 mm).

b. Panel height: 0.75 inches (19 mm).

c. Corrugation spacing: 2.56 inches (68 mm) o.c.

d. Installation orientation: Horizontal ribs

4. Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 0.030 inch/22 gauge.

b. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer two-coat system: 0.2 mil primer with 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer color coat. Basis-of-Design: Centria Flourofinish


A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal panels.

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=6932&mf=04&src=wd





3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fascia, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

C. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.

D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.

2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.

a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels.

2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal panels are installed.

3. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.

4. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds.

5. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.

6. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws.

7. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.

B. Fasteners:

1. Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

D. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.

1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure.

2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal panels.

3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer.

4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.

5. Flash and seal panels with weather closures at perimeter of all openings.

E. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal wall panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.



F. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof performance.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.

C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 074213.13


COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 074243 - 1

SECTION 074243 - COMPOSITE WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes metal-faced composite wall panels.


1. Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for cold-formed metal framing supporting metal-faced composite wall panels.

2. Division 07 Section "Roof Specialties" for shop-formed flashings and other sheet metal work not part of metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies.

3. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. Metal-Faced Composite Wall Panel Assembly: Metal-faced composite wall panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight wall system.


A. General Performance: Metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Design metal-faced composite wall panel assembly, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.11 cfm/sq. ft. of wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. .

D. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 15 lbf/sq. ft. .

E. Structural Performance: Provide metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 330:



1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures:

a. Uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft. , acting inward or outward.

2. Deflection Limits: Metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span.

F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal-faced composite wall panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal-faced composite wall panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish among factory-, shop-, and field-assembled work.

1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches :

a. Flashing and trim. b. Anchorage systems.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal-faced composite wall panel indicated with factory-applied color finishes.

1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. 2. Include manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full

range of colors available for each sealant exposed to view.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Metal-Faced Composite Wall Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other metal-faced composite wall panel accessories.

a. Composite Panels: Include four-way joint.

2. Trim and Closures: 12 inches long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Accessories: 12-inch- long Samples for each type of accessory. 4. Exposed Gaskets: 12 inches long. 5. Exposed Sealants: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint

sealants in 1/2-inchwide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of metal-faced composite wall panels adjacent to joint sealants.



E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-faced composite wall panel assembly indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

F. Coordination Drawings: Exterior elevations, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Wall panels and attachments. 2. Stud framing and 'Z' clips. 3. Wall-mounted and penetrating items including but not limited to wall ladders, solar screen

supports, ductwork, steel structures and lighting/electrical fixtures. 4. Penetrations of wall by pipes and utilities. 5. Clarify the extent of subframing provided by 054000 Subcontractor and the substructure

provided by this system subcontractor. 6. Indicate roof edge assemblies and flashings by Division 07 subcontractor.

G. Qualification Data: For Installer,professional engineer and testing agency

H. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. |Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. |Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

I. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product.

1. Metal Panels: Include reports for air infiltration and water penetration.

J. Maintenance Data: For metal wall panels to include in maintenance manuals.

K. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.


A. Installer and Fabricator Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer with a minimum ten (10) years experience fabricating and installing composite metal panel systems.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal-faced composite wall panel from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of composite metal panel system of typical wall and corner; mock up shall form a part of the overall exterior wall assembly and include by full thickness, including supports, attachments, and accessories.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



1. Meet with Owner, Architect , metal-faced composite wall panel Installer, metal-faced composite wall panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal-faced composite wall panels including installers of doors, windows, and louvers.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review methods and procedures related to metal-faced composite wall panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and attachment to structural members.

5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other construction that will affect metal-faced composite wall panels.

6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections if applicable.

7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal-faced composite wall panel assembly during and after installation.

8. Review wall panel observation and repair procedures after metal-faced composite wall panel installation.


A. Deliver components, sheets, metal-faced composite wall panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal-faced composite wall panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal-faced composite wall panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Store metal-faced composite wall panels vertically, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal-faced composite wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal-faced composite wall panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Do not allow storage space to exceed 120 deg F .

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal-faced composite wall panel for period of panel installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal-faced composite wall panels to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by field measurements and coordinate and verify dimensions shown on the drawings with backup wall construction tolerances before metal-faced composite wall panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of studs, soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and



noncorrosive installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal-faced composite wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209 , alloy as standard with manufacturer, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes:

a. Color 1: Three-coat Fluoropolymer finish with suspended metallic flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat, AAMA 620. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1) Color shall be selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

b. Color 2 and 3: Two-coat Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat, AAMA 620. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

3. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil .



B. Panel Sealants:

1. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal-faced composite wall panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by panel manufacturer.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING

A. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated.

B. Subgirts: Manufacturer's standard C- or Z-shaped sections 0.064-inch nominal thickness.

C. Zee Clips: 0.079-inch nominal thickness.

D. Base or Sill Anglesand Channels: 0.079-inch nominal thickness.

E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels:

1. Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch .

F. Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to substrates.


A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 , alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal-faced composite wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.

2.4 METAL-FACED COMPOSITE WALL PANELS (Aluminum Composite Metal Panels)

A. General: Provide factory-formed and -assembled, metal-faced composite wall panels fabricated from two metal facings bonded, using no glues or adhesives, to solid, extruded thermoplastic core; formed into profile for installation method indicated. Include attachment system components and accessories required for weathertight system.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available composite panel products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Alcan Composites USA Inc.; Alucobond . b. Alcoa Inc.; Reynobond PE . c. ALPOLIC, Division of Mitsubishi Chemical America, Inc.; ALPOLIC.



B. Attachment System Components: Formed from extruded aluminum.

1. Include manufacturer's standard perimeter extrusions with integral weather stripping,panel stiffeners,panel clips,and anchor channels.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal-faced composite wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal-faced composite wall panels unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.018-inch- minimum thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal-faced composite wall panels.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal-faced composite wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Fabricator/Installer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a complete system fabricated and installed by one of the following manufacturers:

1. Basis of Design: The design is based on W. H. Stovall & Company's (11107 Air Park Road, Ashland, Virginia 23005) dry gasketed system "RR-175".

2. Advanced Exterior Systems dry gasket DSS 2000 rout and return gasket system. 3. Precision Walls, Inc. DSS-2000 rout and return gasket system.

C. Fabricate metal-faced composite wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.

D. Metal-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Factory form panels in a continuous process with no glues or adhesives between dissimilar materials. Trim and square edges of sheets with no displacement of face sheets or protrusion of core material.

1. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from warp and buckle.

2. Fabricate panels with sharply cut edges, with no displacement of face sheets or protrusion of core material.

3. Fabricate panels with panel stiffeners, as required to comply with deflection limits, attached to back of panels with structural silicone sealant or bond tape.

4. Dimensional Tolerances:

a. Length: Plus 0.375 inch . b. Width: Plus 0.188 inch . c. Thickness: Plus or minus 0.008 inch .



d. Panel Bow: 0.8 percent maximum of panel length or width. e. Squareness: 0.2 inch maximum.

E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.

5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.

6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal-faced composite wall panel manufacturer.

a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal-faced composite wall panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS


B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal-faced composite wall panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal-faced composite wall panel manufacturer.

2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal-faced



composite wall panel manufacturer. 3. Verify that weather-resistant sheathing paper has been installed over sheathing or

backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal-faced composite wall panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of panels before panel installation.

C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel support members and anchorage according to ASTM C 754 and metal-faced composite wall panel manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 METAL-FACED COMPOSITE WALL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal-faced composite wall panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts and subgirts unless otherwise indicated. Anchor panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Commence metal-faced composite wall panel installation and install minimum of 300 sq. ft. in presence of factory-authorized representative.

2. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal-faced composite wall panels. 3. Flash and seal metal-faced composite wall panels at perimeter of all openings. Do not

begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be concealed by panels are installed.

4. Install flashing and trim as metal-faced composite wall panel work proceeds. 5. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and

concrete, and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing. 6. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.

B. Fasteners:

1. Aluminum Wall Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended by metal-faced composite wall panel manufacturer.

D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, and joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weathertight performance of metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets and fillers indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by panel manufacturer.

E. Attachment System Installation, General: Install attachment system required to support



metal-faced composite wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels.

1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material joinery, and panel-system joint seals.

2. Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be concealed by composite panels are installed.

F. Track-Support Installation: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal and vertical tracks that provide support and complete secondary drainage system, draining to the exterior at horizontal joints. Install support system at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Attach panels to wall by interlocking tracks with perimeter extrusions attached to wall panels. Fully engage integral gaskets and leave horizontal and vertical joints with open reveal.

1. Attach routed-and-returned flanges of wall panels to perimeter extrusions with manufacturer's standard fasteners.

2. Install wall panels to allow individual panels to "free float" and be installed and removed without disturbing adjacent panels.

3.4 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal-faced composite wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).


A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal-faced composite wall panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet , nonaccumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.




A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust completed metal-faced composite wall panel installation, including accessories.

B. Metal-faced composite wall panels will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal-faced composite wall panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal-faced composite wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. After metal-faced composite wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.

C. Replace metal-faced composite wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 075323 - 1

SECTION 075323 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Adhered EPDM membrane roofing system. 2. Vapor retarder. 3. Roof insulation. 4. Flashing at all penetrations through the roof system and at all materials which abut the

roof system. 5. Walkway pads or rolls.


1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry " for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking[; and for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels].

2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings, flashings, and counterflashings.

3. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation. 4. Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for roof drains.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.


A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial solar reflectance not less than 0.70 and emissivity not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.

1.5 SUBMITTALS




B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of membrane roofing and

fastening spacings and patterns for mechanically fastened membrane roofing. 4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:

1. Sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam. 2. Roof insulation. 3. Walkway pads or rolls. 4. Six insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish. 5. Six roof cover fasteners of each type, length, and finish.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.

F. Manufacturer Certificate: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that membrane roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements.

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system.

H. Maintenance Data: For membrane roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.

I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation fasteners for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing.

D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.



E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

F. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.

4. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 5. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if

applicable.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1 EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING

A. EPDM: ASTM D 4637, Type II, scrim or fabric internally reinforced, uniform, flexible EPDM sheet.


a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Firestone Building Products. c. Johns Manville.

2. Thickness: 60 mils , nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: Black.

2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.

1. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. e. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L. f. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. g. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. h. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. i. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. j. Other Adhesives and Sealants: 250 g/L.

B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inchwide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film.

E. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, single-component sealant, colored to match membrane roofing.

F. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant.

G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.

H. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.



I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories.

2.3 VAPOR RETARDER

A. Provide Self-adhering, Vapor Retarder/Air Barrier Underlayment Sheet: Reinforced, consisting of slip resisting polyethylene-fil top face surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied. Warranted by manufacturer for direct to steel application. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Carlisle VapAir Seal MD or equal approved by Architect.

2. Thckness: .015” 3. Tensile Strength: 250 PSI 4. Air Permeance: 0.000 at 75 Pa 5. Water Vapor Permeability: .03 perms 6. Tear Strength: 135 LBF 7. Puncture Resistance: 54.6 LB

2.4 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by EPDM membrane roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated and that produce FM Approvals-approved roof insulation.

B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type X, 1.3-lb/cu. ft. minimum density, square edged.

C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation[ and cover boards] to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

C. Modified Asphaltic Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended modified asphalt, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer.

D. Cover Board: High Density Polyiso Cover Board; ASTM C 1289 Type II, Class 4 Grade 1.

1. Basis-of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Carlisle Syntec



SecurShield HD Plus Polyiso, or equal approved by Architect 2. Thickness: ½” 3. Panel size: 4x8, 4x4 4. Weight 0.406 lbs/sf 5. Compressive Strength: 100 psi 6. R-Value: 2.5 7. Water Absorption: < 0.5% volume

2.6 WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Division 05 Section "Steel Decking."

4. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system manufacturer has passed.

5. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

6. Verify that concrete curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing components to roof deck have been removed.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

3.3 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION



A. Polyethylene Film: Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor retarder in a single layer over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches and 6 inches , respectively.

1. Continuously seal side and end laps with tape.

B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement into membrane roofing system.

3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.

1. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers, install noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if applicable, and install composite board insulation for top layer.

E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

G. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:

1. Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

2. Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

H. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type.

1. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

3.5 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system



manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax before installing.

B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to splice area of membrane roofing.

E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeters.

F. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

G. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of membrane roofing terminations.

H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.

I. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in place with clamping ring.

3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings[ and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars].

3.7 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.




A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform inspections.

B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion.

C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.



SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1

076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Formed Products:

a. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. b. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. c. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.


1. Division 07 Section "Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing" for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with membrane roofing.

2. Division 07 Section "Formed Metal Wall Panels" for sheet metal flashing and trim integral with metal wall panels.

3. Division 07 Section “Composite Wall Panels” for sheet metal flashing and trim integral with panels.

4. Division 07 Section "Roof Specialties" for manufactured roof specialties not part of sheet metal flashing and trim.


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F , ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal



Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

C. Copper Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

3. Color: Match Architect's samples. 4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or

polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil .


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or



factory-applied coating. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for

metal being fastened. c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching

internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.

3. Fasteners for Zinc Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Solder:

1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.

2. For Zinc: ASTM B 32, 40 percent tin and 60 percent lead with low antimony, as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.


A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch



offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."

D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.

E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and by FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

I. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

J. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

K. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.4 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.

1. Accessories: Wire ball downspout strainer.

B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.

C. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes, exterior flange trim. Fabricate from the following materials:



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored.

B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.



A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.



E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F , set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F .

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches , except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.

1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into

joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 3. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for

stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization.

3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.

B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints.

1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.

2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant.

3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall



flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.


A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 - 1

SECTION 077100 – ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Flashing and miscellaneous materials and accessories as required by new roof curb and pipe boot installation.

2. Roof edge copings and fascias 3. Reglets and Counterflashings 4. Roof Edge Protection System


1. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.

2. Division 07 Section " Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing" for roof membrane.

3. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants between roof specialties and adjacent materials.

4. Division 07 Section “ Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim” for metal flashing and trim components not included in this section.


A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. FM Approvals' Listing: Manufacture and install copings and roof-edge flashings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-90. Identify materials with FM Approvals' markings.

C. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings and roof-edge flashings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures:

1. Design Pressure: Conforming to VSUBC, values indicated on Structural Drawings, and listed in Division 07 Section "Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing".

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on



surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F., ambient; 180 deg F., material surfaces.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. For roof specialties. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work. Include the following:

a. Details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including direction of expansion and contraction.

b. Pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. c. Section details at no less than 3” = 1’-0” of all roof edge systems showing

relationships to and interface with adjacent Work by other trades. d. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. e. Details of brackets, hangers or other types of fastening. f. Details of special conditions.

2. For Roof Edge Protection System: Drawings showing fabrication and installation of guardrails including plans, elevations, sections details of components, anchors and attachment to adjoining units of work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of roof specialty indicated with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For copings, roof-edge flashings, roof-edge drainage systems, reglets and counterflashings made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components including fasteners, cover joints, accessories, and attachments.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for copings and roof-edge flashings.

F. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.

G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical roof edge, including fascia, approximately 10 feet long, including supporting construction, seams, attachments, underlayment, and accessories. In corporate mockup into masonry wall construction mockup.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. General Contractor shall



schedule and coordinate.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roof specialties including installers of roofing materials and accessories.

2. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members.

3. Review special roof details, roof drainage, and condition of other construction that will affect roof specialties.


A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof specialties installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXPOSED METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal

surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

a. Fluoropolymer Three-Coat Metallic system: 0.2 mil primer with 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF flouropolymer color coat containing metal flakes, and a 0.5 mil 70 percent PVDF flouropolymer clear coat, AAMA 620. Match finish of Formed Metal Wall Panels.

b. Concealed Surface: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.



2.2 CONCEALED METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.

2.3 ROOF-EDGE FLASHINGS

A. Manufactured two-piece fascia consisting of snap-on compression-clamped metal fascia cover in section lengths not exceeding 10 feet and a continuous formed 22 ga. cleat.

B. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Carlisle SecurEdge 400 Fascia or equal approved by Architect.

1. Fascia Material: .040” Aluminum 2. Finish: Three-coat PVDF containing Metallic flakes. Match finish of Composite Wall

Panels. 3. Face dimensions: as indicated on Drawings. Available in dimensions equal to those of

provided Coping system.

2.4 ROOF EDGE COPINGS

A. Manufactured coping consisting of a two-piece assembly that includes a continuous cleat and snap on coping cover.

B. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Carlisle SecurEdge 400 Coping System or equal approved by Architect.

1. Material: .040” aluminum 2. Finish: Three-coat PVDF containing Metallic flakes. Match finish of Composite Wall

Panels. 3. Face dimensions: as indicated on Drawings. Available in dimensions equal to those of

provided Roof Edge system.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.

D. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited



movement.

E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

F. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.6 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS

A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory-mitered and -welded corners and junctions.

1. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.

2. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.

B. Counterflashings: Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings by 4 inches and in lengths not exceeding 12 feet designed to snap into through-wall-flashing receiver and compress against base flashings with joints lapped, from the following exposed metal:

1. Formed Aluminum: min 0.032 inch thick.

C. Aluminum Finish: Two-coat PVDF finish, color selected from manufacturers full range by Architect.

2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS


B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast

2.8 ROOF EDGE PROTECTION SYSTEM

A. Basis-of-Design: Kee Safety, Inc. KeeGuard Roof Fall Protection Railing

B. Provide free-standing counter-balanced guardrail system with 42” minimum height to withstand a minimum load of 200 lbs in any direction to the top rail per OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1910.35.

1. Rails and posts: Galvanized tube, 12 gauge, 1.5” diameter.

2. Counterweight levers: Galvanized tube, 12 gauge, 1.25” diameter.

3. Mounting bases: Steel based are galvanized and are supplied with a rubber pad on underside of component.



4. Fasteners: stainless steel or galvanized.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.

C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

E. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.

1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify

shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

F. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof specialties with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of self-adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof specialties for waterproof performance.

G. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.

1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners or intersections unless otherwise shown on Drawings.

2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.

H. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

I. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.



J. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.

3.2 ROOF EDGE FLASHING AND COPING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge flashing system according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing and coping with installation of roof-edge drainage system and other flashings.

B. Install cleats, cants and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners approved by manufacturer.

C. Anchor roof edgings and copings with manufacturer’s required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet performance requirements.

3.3 REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Coordinate installation of reglets and counterflashings with installation of base flashings.

B. Embedded Reglets: See Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installation of reglets.

C. Counterflashings: Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers; ensure that counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with elastomeric sealant. Fit counterflashings tightly to base flashings.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition during construction.

D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 1

SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concealed SFRM. 2. Exposed SFRM. 3. Exposed intumescent mastic fire-resistive coatings


1. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for surface conditions required for structural steel receiving SFRM.

2. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for fire-resistance-rated firestopping systems.

3. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for fire-resistance-rated joint systems. 4. Division 09 Section “Painting”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SFRM: Sprayed fire-resistive material.

B. Concealed: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are concealed from view behind other construction when the Work is completed and have not been defined as exposed.

C. Exposed: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are exposed to view when the Work is completed.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following:

1. Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying SFRM and IMFRC. 2. Extent of SFRM/IMFRC for each construction and fire-resistance rating, including the

following:

a. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1) For steel joist assemblies, include applicable fire-resistance design

designations, with each steel joist tested with the same maximum tensile stress as each steel joist indicated on Drawings. Design designations with



steel joists tested at lower maximum tensile stress than those indicated are not permitted.

b. Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance ratings of structural components and assemblies.

3. Treatment of SFRM/IMFRC after application.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of colored, exposed SFRM/IMFRC indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of colored, exposed SFRM/IMFRC, two Samples, each 4 inches square, of each color, texture, and material formulation to be applied. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of SFRM/IMFRC, signed by product manufacturer.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency.

G. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From SFRM/IMFRC manufacturer indicating the following:

1. Materials have been tested for bond with substrates. 2. Materials have been verified by SFRM/IMFRC manufacturer to be compatible with

substrate primers and coatings. 3. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate

preparation needed for adhesion.

H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for proposed SFRM/IMFRC.

I. Research/Evaluation Reports: For SFRM/IMFRC.

J. Field quality-control test and special inspection reports.

K. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

L. Contractor shall be required to certify that the material being used contains no asbestos particles. (CPSM 724.3.2)


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by SFRM manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain SFRM and IMFRC through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. SFRM/IMFRC Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Owner or manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods.



1. SFRM/IMFRC are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable classification marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Testing is performed on specimens of SFRM/IMFRC that comply with laboratory testing requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fire-resistive materials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final application.

3. Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing and inspecting agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in test reports a full description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens.

D. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods.

1. Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.

2. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, has not found primers or coatings to be incompatible with SFRM.

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM/IMFRC with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify bags containing SFRM/IMFRC with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for SFRM serving as direct-applied protection tested per ASTM E 119.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.

F. Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."

G. Mockups: Apply mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Extent of Mockups: Approximately 100 sq. ft. of surface for each product indicated. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to SFRM/IMFRC including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review products, exposure conditions, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions, calculations, densities, thicknesses, bond strengths, and other performance requirements.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify sequencing and coordination requirements.

3. Review weather predictions, ambient conditions, and proposed temporary protections for SFRM during and after installation.

4. Review surface conditions and preparations. 5. Review field quality-control testing procedures.




A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, shelf life if applicable, and fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project.

B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and discard materials whose shelf life has expired.

C. Store materials inside, under cover, and aboveground; keep dry until ready for use. Remove from Project site and discard wet or deteriorated materials.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply SFRM/IMFRC when ambient or substrate temperature is 40 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.

B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of SFRM/IMFRC. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire-resistive material dries thoroughly.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM/IMFRC with other related work specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements:

1. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the environment.

2. Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of fire-resistive material due to exposure to weather and to unfavorable ambient conditions for humidity, temperature, and ventilation.

a. Do not install IMFRC when ambient or substrate temperatures are 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and falling, unless temporary protection and heat can be provided to maintain temperatures of both at or above this temperature level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after application of IMFRC .

3. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely

to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application. 4. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until concrete topping, if

any, has been completed. For metal roof decks without concrete topping, do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fire-resistive material. If roof traffic is required provide pavers on the deck or other means to add rigidity to the deck and prevent vibrations and deflection.

5. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal floor deck substrates until concrete topping has been completed.

6. Do not begin applying fire-resistive material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fire protection are in place.

7. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fire-resistive material until application of fire protection is completed.



8. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive material has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective applications.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s form, signed by Contractor and by Installer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SFRMs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of specified requirements; peeling; or delaminating of SFRM/IMFRC from substrates.

b. Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and Owner's maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than those investigated and approved during fire-response testing, and other causes not reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal use.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCEALED SFRM

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco 300 or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type MK-6 , MK-6/HY and MK-6s

2. Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrolite 15 High Yield.

B. Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, as follows :

1. Concealed Cementitious SFRM: Factory-mixed, dry formulation of gypsum or portland cement binders, additives, and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application, per ASTM E 1513.

C. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property as follows:

1. Dry Density: 15 lb/cu. ft. for average and individual densities, or greater if required to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."

2. Thickness: Minimum average thickness required for fire-resistance design indicated according to the following criteria, but not less than 0.375 inch , per ASTM E 605:

a. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of 1 inch or more, the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the design thickness minus 0.25 inch.



b. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of less than 1 inch but more than 0.375 inch, the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the greater of 0.375 inch or 75 percent of the design thickness.

c. No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those fire-resistance designs whose fire-resistance ratings were established at densities of less than 15 lb/cu. ft.

3. Bond Strength: 200 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736 based on laboratory testing of 0.75-inch minimum thickness of SFRM.

4. Compressive Strength: 5.21 lbf/sq. in. minimum per ASTM E 761. Minimum thickness of SFRM tested shall be 0.75 inch and minimum dry density shall be as specified but not less than 15 lb/cu. ft. .

5. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937. 6. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759. 7. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 760. 8. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. in 24 hours per ASTM E 859. For

laboratory tests, minimum thickness of SFRM is 0.75 inch, maximum dry density is 15 lb/cu. ft., test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24 hours.

9. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0.

10. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21. 11. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136.

2.2 EXPOSED SFRM

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco 400. or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Grace, W.R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type Z106 2. Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrolite 22.

C. Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, as follows:

1. Exposed Cementitious SFRM: Factory-mixed, dry, cement aggregate formulation; or chloride-free formulation of gypsum or portland cement binders, additives, and inorganic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application, per ASTM E 1513.

D. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property as follows:

1. Dry Density: Values for average and individual densities as required for fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method," but with an average density of not less than 22 lb/cu. ft. .

2. Bond Strength: 434 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736.



3. Compressive Strength: 51 lbf/sq. in. minimum per ASTM E 761. 4. Dry Density: Values for average and individual densities as required for fire-resistance

ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method," but with an average density of not less than 39 lb/cu. ft. .

5. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937. 6. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759. 7. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 760. 8. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. per ASTM E 859. 9. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136. 10. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-burning

characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0.

11. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21. 12. For exterior applications of SFRM, provide formulation listed and labeled by testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for surfaces exposed to exterior.

E. Accessory Materials 1. Sealer: Clear sealer applied to SFRM where exposed to view prior to painting. 2. Basis of Design: Isolatek Bond Seal or equal recommended in writing by SFRM

Manufacturer.

2.3 EXPOSED INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Fire-Resistive, Non-Water-Based, Intumescent Mastic Coating Material:

a. Isolatek CAFCA Sprayfilm WB5 b. Albi Manufacturing, Division of StanChem Inc.; Albi Clad 800. c. Carboline Company, Fireproofing Products Div.; Nullifire System E.

B. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.4 AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.

B. Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire-resistive product, provide primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements:

1. Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per ASTM E 736.

2. Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics of SFRM per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



C. Adhesive for Bonding Fire-Resistive Material: Product approved by manufacturer of SFRM.

D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated and fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive SFRM.

E. Adhesives and Sealants applied within the building waterproofing envelope: Comply with low-emitting requirements in Division 01 Section "Indoor Air Quality Requirements".

F. Paints and Coatings applied within the building waterproofing envelope: Comply with low-emitting requirements in Division 01 Section "Indoor Air Quality Requirements".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following:

1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related materials and construction are specified.

2. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire-resistive materials with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.

3. Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.

4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive material.

B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed.

C. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related work are completed.

D. Conduct tests according to fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials during application.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive material, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

C. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by SFRM/IMFRC manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive SFRM.



D. For exposed applications, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of SFRM/IMFRC. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with fire-resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and spray on fire-resistive material, as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

B. Apply SFRM/IMFRC that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article and substantiated by test reports, with respect to rate of application, accelerator use, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and procedures affecting test results.

C. Install metal lath, as required, to comply with fire-resistance ratings and fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. Securely attach lath to substrate in position required for support and reinforcement of fire-resistive material. Use anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer. Attach accessories where indicated or required for secure attachment of lath to substrate.

D. Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fire-resistive material where required to achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended in writing by SFRM/IMFRC manufacturer for material and application indicated.

E. Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM/IMFRC manufacturer, install body of fire-resistive covering in a single course.

F. Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by SFRM/IMFRC manufacturer.

G. For applications over encapsulant materials, including lockdown (post-removal) encapsulants, apply SFRM that differs in color from that of encapsulant over which it is applied.

H. Where structural steel members having different thicknesses of sprayed-on fireproofing intersect or connect, provide sprayed-on fireproofing equal to the greater thickness on all members for a distance of two (2) feet minimum from junction of the members. (CPSM 724.3.2)

I. Metal attachments such as miscellaneous angles, light gage framing, and hangers shall be covered in the area of the attachment with the same thickness of sprayed-on fireproofing as the structural member. (CPSM 724.3.2)

3.4 APPLICATION, CONCEALED SFRM

A. Apply concealed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if specified in Part 2 "Concealed SFRM" Article.

B. Cure concealed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations.



3.5 APPLICATION, EXPOSED SFRM

A. Apply exposed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if indicated.

1. For steel beams and bracing, provide a thickness required by selected UL Design to achieve required rating.

2. For metal floor or roof decks, provide a thickness required by selected UL Design to achieve required rating. .

B. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of material and matching Architect's sample or, if none, finish approved for field-erected mockup.

C. Apply exposed cementitious SFRM to produce the following finish:

1. Spray-textured finish with no further treatment.

D. Cure exposed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.6 APPLICATION, EXPOSED INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS

A. Apply exposed intumescent mastic fire-resistive coatings in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition.

B. Apply intumescent mastic fire-resistive coating as follows:

1. Install reinforcing fabric as required to obtain designated fire-resistance rating. 2. Finish: Spray-textured finish with no further treatment.


A. All sprayed-on fireproofing shall be tested after installation according to ASTM E-605 and ASTM E-736, latest editions. Include the specific Validation Testing Requirements as defined in CPSM Section 724.4.1. These tests shall be made by an independent testing laboratory. The Owner shall arrange and pay for laboratory services for field and laboratory tests and reports. The Contractor shall schedule the tests while the material is accessible. If additional tests are required as a result of non-compliance with the specifications; the additional tests and reports shall be paid for by the Contractor. (CSPM 724.3.2)

B. The independent testing laboratory reports shall clearly show the location of tests and test results. Copies of the report shall be sent through the A/E to the Owner, State Fire Marshal and Bureau of Capital Outlay Management. (CSPM 724.3.2)

C. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspection and prepare reports:

1. SFRM. 2. IMFRC.

D. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.



1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements.

E. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of SFRM shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with application of SFRM/IMFRC for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of SFRM/IMFRC show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.

1. Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each 1000-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 144-sq. in. sample area, with sample width of not less than 6 inches per ASTM E 605.

2. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12 measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605.

3. Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method." Testing area 2,500 sq. ft.

4. Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For each 2,500-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion from one sample of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 736.

a. Field test SFRM/IMFRC that is applied to flanges of wide-flange, structural-steel members on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fire-resistive material.

b. If surfaces of structural steel receiving SFRM/IMFRC are primed or otherwise painted for coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire-resistance criteria, but not less than 150 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736.

5. If testing finds applications of SFRM/IMFRC are not in compliance with requirements, testing and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of noncompliance.

F. Remove and replace applications of SFRM/IMFRC that do not pass tests and inspections for cohesion and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above.

G. Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate that thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as specified above.

3.8 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIR

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

B. Protect SFRM/IMFRC, according to advice of product manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so fire protection will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



C. Coordinate application of SFRM/IMFRC with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fire protection. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect SFRM/IMFRC and patch any damaged or removed areas.

D. Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel.



PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.


A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479:

1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:

a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.

3. L-Rated Systems: Where through-penetration firestop systems are indicated in smoke barriers, provide through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings indicated at both ambient temperatures and 400 deg F .

C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction.

1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems.

2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.

3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems



not requiring removal of insulation.

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.

1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items.

C. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration firestop system, along with the following information:

1. Types of penetrating items. 2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where

applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated. 3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design

designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Product Certificates: For through-penetration firestop system products, signed by product manufacturer.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors."

B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article:

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, OPL ITS, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard



referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following:

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems.

C. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-penetration firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one of the following manufacturers:

1. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.



2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Nelson Firestop Products. 5. Specified Technologies Inc. 6. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. 7. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without



disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.

3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use self-adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is attempted. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting

agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified, independent inspecting agency to inspect through-penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174 requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing test reports.

B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they



comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to alpha-alpha-numeric designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.



FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 1

SECTION 078446 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.


1. Division 7 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers.




A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating fire-resistive joint systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for fire-resistive joint systems.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing fire-resistive joint systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire-resistive joint system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Fire-resistive joint systems shall comply with the following requirements:

1. Fire-resistive joint system tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing agency.

b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by reference to designations listed by the following:

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.

C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.

B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079:

1. Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls floor or floor/ceiling assemblies.

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of construction they will join.

3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:



a. Grace Construction Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. 3M Fire Protection Products.

C. Joints at Exterior Storefront/Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with rating determined by ASTM E 119 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg or ASTM E 2307.

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor assembly.



D. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft of joint at 0.30 inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures.



E. VOC Content: Fire-resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

F. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for systems indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials.

2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system.

C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of joint edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Fire-Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building



Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.



JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 4. Acoustical joint sealants.


1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets.

2. Division 08 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefront" for glazing sealants. 3. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 4. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints. 5. Division 09 Section "Tiling" for sealing tile joints.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inchwide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.

E. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.




A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F .

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Provide up to four custom colors to be selected to match exterior materials.

2.2 LOW MODULUS SILICONE

A. One part low modulus silicone sealant suitable for application against concrete, masonry, stainless steel, PVDF coatings, aluminum.

B. To be used at aluminum storefront perimeter joints to attach and seal preformed silicone transition membranes

C. Color: To be selected by Architect

D. Performance characteristics:

1. Joint movement capabilities (extension/compression): +100/-50, ASTM C 719

2. Durometer Hardness, Shore A: 15, ASTM D 2240

3. Ultimate Tensile Strength: Minimum of100 lb/in in accordance with ASTM D 412

4. Peel Strength: Minimum of 25 lb/in in accordance with ASTM C 794

5. Tack Free Time: Maximum of 10 hours in accordance with ASTM C 769

E. Manufacturers. Provide one of the following or equal approved by Architect:

1. Spectrem 1, Tremco Commercial Sealants and Waterproofing

2. 790 Silicone Building Sealant, Dow Corning Corporation

3. SCS2700 Silpruf LM, GE

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.



1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II. b. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-270. c. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240 FC.

B. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use T.


a. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-270. b. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240 FC.

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant: siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR . b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type O (open-cell material) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.




A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel.



d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's



written recommendations.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.



3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. b. Joints between metal panels and other materials. (Except where gasket is

provided between panels.) c. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows and

louvers. e. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry walls and partitions. e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors

windows and elevator entrances.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant Location:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Location:

a. Acoustical joints where indicated.


EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - 1

SECTION 079500 - EXPANSION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Architectural joint systems for building interiors. 2. Architectural joint systems for building exteriors.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Maximum Joint Width: Widest linear gap a joint system tolerates and in which it performs

its designed function without damaging its functional capabilities.

B. Minimum Joint Width: Narrowest linear gap a joint system tolerates and in which it performs

its designed function without damaging its functional capabilities.

C. Movement Capability: Value obtained from the difference between widest and

narrowest widths of a joint opening typically expressed in numerical values (mm or inches) or a percentage (plus or minus) of nominal value of joint width.

D. Nominal Joint Width: The width of the linear opening specified in practice and in which

the joint system is installed.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Provide the following for each joint system specified:

1. Placement Drawings: Include line diagrams showing plans, elevations, sections,

details, splices, blockout requirement, entire route of each joint system, and attachments to other work. Where joint systems change planes, provide isometric or clearly detailed drawing depicting how components interconnect.

2. Architectural Joint System Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of the supplier. Include the following information in tabular form:

a. Manufacturer and model number for each joint system. b. Joint system location cross-referenced to Drawings. c. Nominal joint width. d. Movement capability. e. Classification as thermal or seismic.



f. Materials, colors, and finishes. g. Product options.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of joint system indicated.

1. Include manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors and finishes

available for each exposed metal and elastomeric seal material.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain interior architectural joint systems through one source from

a single manufacturer.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

architectural joint systems and are based on the specific systems indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with

Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

D. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural

& Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)".

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of exterior wall and soffit joint systems with roof expansion assemblies

to ensure that wall transitions are watertight. Roof expansion assemblies are specified in Division 07.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209 , Alloy 6061-T6 for

sheet and plate.

1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed

in contact with cementitious materials. 2. High-Performance Organic Finish (Two-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x

(Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2604 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304 for plates, sheet, and strips.



1. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. 2. Finish: No. 4, directional satin.

a. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.

b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

C. Brass: ASTM B 36/B 36M, UNS Alloy C26000 for half hard sheet and coil.

D. Bronze: ASTM B 455, Alloy C38500 for extrusions; Alloy C23000 red brass for plates.

E. Elastomeric Seals: Preformed elastomeric membranes or extrusions to be installed in

metal frames.

F. Compression Seals: ASTM E 1612; preformed rectangular elastomeric extrusions

having internal baffle system and designed to function under compression.

G. Strip Seals: ASTM E 1783; preformed elastomeric membrane or tubular extrusions having

an internal baffle system and secured in or over a joint by a metal locking rail.

H. Cellular Foam Seals: Extruded, compressible foam designed to function under compression.

I. Elastomeric Concrete: Modified epoxy or polyurethane extended into a

prepackaged aggregate blend, specifically designed for bonding to concrete substrates.

J. Fire Barriers: Any material or material combination, when fire tested after cycling,

designated to resist the passage of flame and hot gases through a movement joint and to meet performance criteria for required rating period.

K. Moisture Barrier: Flexible elastomeric material, Santoprene.

L. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, clips, fasteners, set screws, spacers, and

other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete installations.

2.2 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. General: Provide architectural joint systems of design, basic profile, materials, and

operation indicated. Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent surfaces.

1. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing. Install with

hairline mitered corners where joint changes direction or abuts other materials. 2. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, tee-joints, corners,

curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous joint systems.

B. Design architectural joint systems for the following size and movement characteristics:

1. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated in the Drawings. 2. Movement Capability: As indicated in the Drawings. 3. Type of Movement: As indicated in the Drawings.



2.3 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS FOR BUILDING INTERIORS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product specified in the individual

paragraphs below as basis-of-design products or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Architectural Art Mfg., Inc. 2. Balco, Inc. 3. MM Systems Corporation.

B. Floor-to-Floor Joint Systems:

1. New Construction: Basis-of-Design product is GFT-100/200 and GFT-100/200 W/FB

(at all fire barrier locations indicated in the Drawings) by Construction Specialties, Inc.

a. Type: Center Plate.

b. Exposed Metal: Aluminum.

1) Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish.

c. Seal Material: Santoprene.

1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

d. Recess Depth: 2 inches. e. Attachment Method: Cast in. f. Load Capacity: Heavy duty. g. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard.

2. Where expansion joints in existing construction are replaced: Basis-of-Design shall be

as follows: a. Where floor finish is VCT, or Epoxy: GFST-100/200 at all locations where

expansion joint is located in the middle of the floor.

b. Where floor finish is Carpet: GFPS-100/200 where expansion joint is located in

the middle of the floor.

c. Type: Flush, no blockout.

d. Gasket: Dual Durometer with harder material at outer for secure attachment to aluminum extrusions.

e. Exposed Metal: Aluminum.


f. Load Capacity: Heavy duty.

C. Floor-to-Wall Joint Systems:

1. New Construction: Basis-of-Design product is GFTW-100/200 and GFTW-100/200

W/FB (at all fire barrier locations indicated in the Drawings) by Construction Specialties, Inc.



2. Type: Hidden sightline.

a. Exposed Metal: Aluminum.


b. Seal Material: Santoprene.

1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Cover-Plate Design: Plain. 4. Cover-Plate Design: Recessed to accept field-applied finish materials.

a. Recess Depth: 2 inches, and 1 inch respectively. 5. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Wall-to-Wall Joint Systems:

1. Basis-of-Design product: ASM-100/200 and ASM-100/200 W/FB (at all fire barriers

indicated in the Drawings)

2. Type: Vertical cover plate.


1) Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish. 2) Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and

color densities.

E. Wall Corner Joint Systems:

1. Basis-of-Design product: ASMC-100/200 and ASMC-100/200 W/FB (at all fire barriers

indicated in the Drawings) 2. Type: Vertical cover plate.



color densities.

F. Ceiling-to-Ceiling Joint Systems:

1. Basis-of-Design product: ASM-100/200 for acoustical ceiling tile/gypsum board to acoustical ceiling tile/gypsum board and ASMC-100/200 for acoustical ceiling tile/gypsum board to wall.

2. Type: Cover plate.


color densities.

2.4 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS FOR BUILDING EXTERIORS

A. Architectural Joint Systems for Exterior Walls and Soffits:



1. Basis-of-Design Product: Color Joint Silicone Sealing System "ESS Series" by MM

Systems or equal as approved by Architect. Size to match existing and new expansion joints, 1” and 2” respectively.

2. Provide a five (5) year watertight warranty. 3. Color: Provide a custom color as selected by the Architect. 4. Fabricate and install the joint sealing system in accordance with the

manufacturer's requirements.

2.5 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS FOR ROOF TO ROOF AND ROOF TO WALL SYSTEM

A. Roof to Wall Joint Systems:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: BRJW-100/200 and BRJW-100/200 W/FB (at all fire barrier

locations indicated in the Drawings) 2. Provide a five (5) year watertight warranty. 3. Color: Provide a custom color as selected by the Architect. 4. Fabricate and install the joint sealing system in accordance with the

manufacturer's requirements.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"

for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and blockouts where architectural joint systems will be installed

for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to architectural joint system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Repair concrete slabs and blockouts using manufacturer's recommended repair grout

of compressive strength adequate for anticipated structural loadings.

C. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing joint

systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and to provide for secure attachment of joint systems.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing

architectural joint assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install joint systems.

1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished

surfaces measured from established lines and levels. 2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to

ambient temperature at time of installation. Notify Architect where discrepancies occur that will affect proper joint installation and performance.

3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without buckling of frames.

4. Locate in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. 5. Standard-Duty Systems: Shim to level where required. Support underside of frames

continuously to prevent vertical deflection when in service. 6. Heavy-Duty Systems: Repair or grout blockout as required for continuous frame

support and to bring frame to proper level. Shimming is not allowed. 7. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3

inches from each end and not more than 24 inches o.c.

8. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections. 9. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions. Vulcanize or heat-

weld field-spliced joints as recommended by manufacturer. 10. Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to frames with adhesive

or pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Terminate exposed ends of joint assemblies with field- or factory-fabricated

termination devices.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When

protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. Where necessary due to

heavy construction traffic, remove and properly store cover plates or seals and install temporary protection over joints. Reinstall cover plates or seals prior to Substantial Completion of the Work.



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Fire rated hollow metal doors and frames.


1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into masonry construction.

2. Division 08 Section "Finish Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 3. Division 09 Sections "Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. 4. Division 26, 27 and 28 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for

door controls and operators.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, and finishes. Also include hardware preparation, profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C. Other Action Submittals:



1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.

2. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.

E. Allow three (3) weeks for processing submittal and for three (3) weeks processing each resubmittal. Coordinate submittal submission to Architect with other related submittals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252.

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

C. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.

D. Provide doors and frames complying wtih Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications Standard Steel Doors and Frames" ANSI/SDI-100 and as herein specified.


A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.

1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

D. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before



fabrication.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 2. Steelcraft. 3. Metal Products, Inc. 4. Curries Company. 5. Ceco Door Products.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 metallic coating.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches , as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry



film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,

polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.

a. Internal Construction: Manufacturer's standard vertical steel stiffeners with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets where appropriate in accordance with SDI standards.

b. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads except between non-fire-rated pairs of doors not mroe than 1/4 inch. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom.

c. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated.

d. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: At exterior doors and where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

1) Locations: Exterior doors; and interior doors where indicated.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Square edge. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or

channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors

and Frames."

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).

a. Width: 1 3/4 inches. b. Minimum 16-gage galvanized sheet face.

C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).

a. Width: 1 3/4 inches. b. Minimum 16-gage cold rolled steel sheet face.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.



E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.

a. All corners ground smooth.

3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.075-inch- thick steel sheet.

a. Minimum 14-gage galvanized steel.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.

a. All corners ground smooth.

3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.

a. Minimum 16-gage cold-rolled steel sheet.

4. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet or same as adjacent door frame.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,

allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.



2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.036 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

1. Provide non-removeable stops on outside of exterior doors anda on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. No stop shall project beyond the face of the door.

2. Provide screw applied removable glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. No glazing bead shall project beyond the face of the door.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.036 inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.

D. All stops to be minimum 20-gage steel.

2.7 LOUVERS

A. Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- () thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- thick steel frame.

1. Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades.

2. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Louvers constructed with movable blades closed by actuating fusible link, and listed and labeled for use in fire-rated door assemblies of type and fire-resistance rating indicated by same testing and inspecting agency that established fire-resistance rating of door assembly.

B. Provide louvers for exterior doors where indicated, with blades or baffles with steel gages to match door requirements.

1. Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades.

2. Provide insect screens at exterior door louvers.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

B. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.



B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

C. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.

D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in

metal-stud partitions.

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised



hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 3. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division

26 Sections.

G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type

of installation indicated.

2.10 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,



alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

D. Prep doors and frames as required for intrusion detection system devices.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. Provide continuity of rated assembly at joints with adjacent fire rated construction.

b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed.

Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,

twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:



a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch . b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch . c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch . d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4

inch .

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.

2. Glazing at fire-rated doors, transoms and sidelights shall comply with code required fire rating.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.



FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.


1. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for metal door frames. 2. Division 08 “Finish Hardware” for door hardware. 3. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.

D. Allow three (3) weeks for processing submittal and (2) two weeks for processing each resubmittal.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.



C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252.

D. Obtain doors from single manufacturer.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations, as well as manufacturer's instructions.

D. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used on shop drawings for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary, removable or concealed markings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch

span.

2. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

a. Includes the cost of reinstallation.

3. Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where Contractor's work contributed to rejection or voiding of manufacturer's warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 4. VT Industries.

B. No substitutions will be allowed.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.

B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.

C. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2 , made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.

2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows:

a. 5-inch top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. b. 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, mop,

or armor plates. c. 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.

D. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors (at full glass doors):

1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.

a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf . b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf .

E. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.

1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

F. Mineral-Core Doors:

1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.

2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as follows:

a. 5-inch top-rail blocking. b. 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.



2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors :

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 2. Species: White Maple 3. Cut: Sliced. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by

mullions. 7. Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces. 8. Core: Particleboard. 9. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive

planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.

2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES

A. Metal Louvers:


a. Air Louvers Inc. b. Anemostat; a Mestek company.

2. Blade Type: Vision-proof, inverted V. 3. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, with baked-enamel- or

powder-coated finish.

B. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads as follows unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads. 3. At wood-core doors with fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal glazing

clips approved for such use.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.



1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Finish doors at factory.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: WDMA TR-4 conversion varnish. 3. Staining: Match Architect’s sample 4. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

E. Lite Trim: Set nails at stops and fill with putty to match door finish.



3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.

C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.



ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1

SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.


1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for anchoring and grouting access door frames set in masonry construction.

2. Division 23 for heating and air-conditioning duct access doors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches in size, in specified finish.

D. Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

E. Provide access doors where required for plumbing, electrical, or HVAC access through gypsum drywall and masonry partitions.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door(s) and frame(s) through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames. 2. ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames.



C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 591/A 591M with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

B. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 3. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's

standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils .

a. Provide Baked-Enamel Finish on access doors located in gypsum drywall partitions and ceilings.

2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type [304] [316]. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.

1. Finish: Directional Satin Finish, No. 4.

a. Provide Stainless-Steel access doors located in masonry partitions.

2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS


1. J. L. Industries, Inc. 2. Milcor Inc. 3. Nystrom, Inc.



B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet.

1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum .074-inch thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch thick sheet metal with 1-inch wide, surface-mounted trim. 4. Hinges: Continuous piano. 5. Latch: Cam latch operated by flush keywith interior release.

a. Provide two (2) keys per latch.

C. Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet.

1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes. 4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a

minimum thickness of .074. 5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with 1-inchwide, surface-mounted

trim. 6. Hinges: Continuous piano. 7. Automatic Closer: Spring type. 8. Latch: Self-latching device operated by flush key with interior release.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated.

1. Exposed Flanges: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches wide around perimeter of frame. 2. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors. Furnish adjustable

metal masonry anchors. 3. Furnish frames with perforated edge and drywall bead where installed in gypsum drywall

partitions and ceilings.

D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels



aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.

C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.


A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.


OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 1

TUCKAHOE MIDDLE SCHOOL RENOVATIONS 07-30-2017

SECTION 083323 - OVERHEAD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of manually electric-motor-operated overhead coiling doors:

1. Overhead Insulated service doors. 2. Glazed Aluminum Sectional Doors 3. Overhead Coiling Security Grilles 4. Counter Shutters


1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Operation Cycle: One cycle of a door is complete when it is moved from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.


A. Structural Performance: Provide door systems capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door components:

1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. acting inward and outward.

2. Impact Test for Flying Debris: Comply with ASTM E 1996, tested according to ASTM E 1886.

a. Level of Protection: Basic Protection. b. Wind Zone: 110 mph, pressure test to 1/2 and 1-1/2 x design pressure (positive

and negative).

B. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Provide components and operators capable of operating for not less than 50,000 cycles.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of door and accessory. Include the following:



1. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.

B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing full range of colors available for units with factory-applied finishes.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Closeout submittals: Operation and Maintenance manual


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain all overhead doors through one source from a single manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OVERHEAD INSULATED SERVICE DOORS (OD1, OD4)

A. Basis of Design: Overhead Door Corporation Model 470

1. OD1: Provide door and rollers only, use existing track and supports. Coordinate with existing operator.

2. OD4: Provide complete door, track and operator system. Coordinate with Prefabricated Metal Building Manufacturer.

3. Provide finish as selected by Architect from standard finishes.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Overhead Door Corp. 2. Cornell Iron Works Inc. 3. The Cookson Company. 4. Raynor.

C. Panel Assembly

1. Thickness: 2” 2. Insulation: Polystyrene 3. R-value: R-9 Min. 4. Steel face

a. Interior: 29 Gauge b. Exterior: 26 gauge, smooth face.

5. Track: Manufacturers standard, engineered for height and width and loading requirements.

D. Weatherseals: Provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets fitted to bottom and top of exterior doors, unless otherwise indicated. At door head,



use 1/8-inch- thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of hood.

1. In addition, provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8-inch- thick seals of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene at door jambs for a weathertight installation.

E. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.

F. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.

G. Counterbalancing Mechanism:

1. General: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

2. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. of span under full load.

3. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft.

4. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.

5. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate.

H. Motor Operators:

1. Operators: Basis-of-Design: Exterior rated, RSX by Overhead Door. 2. Size and capacity recommended by door manufacturer; exterior-mounted in enclosure. 3. Complete with internal pre-wiring to terminal block, electric motor, controller, gear

reduction nit, solenoid operated brake, adjustable clutch, control devices and 24 volt circuit control stations.

4. Worm gear drive from motor to reduction gear box and chain or worm gear drive from reduction box to gear mounted on counterbalance shaft.

5. Designe for removal of motor without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator.

I. Electric Motors:

1. High-starting torque, reversible, constant-duty, Class A insulated with overload protection, sized to move curtain in either direction, from any position, at approximately one foot per second.

2. Horsepower as determined by manufacturer.

3. Coordinate wiring requirements and characteristics with electrical service system.

J. Emergency Auxiliary Operator:



1. Provide hand chain for emergency manual operation in case of power failure or other similar events.

2. Provide hand operated or automatic mechanism to engage sprocket of auxiliary operator and release brake.

3. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when auxiliary sprocket is engaged.

K. Local Control Stations:

1. Interior: Flush-mounted, 3 position design, key operated, momentary contact to open, constant contact to close, spring return to center, fully guarded, NEMA Type I enclosure, and chrome plated or stainless steel faceplate.

2. Exterior: Flush-mounted, 3 position design, key operated, momentary contact to open, constant contact to close, spring return to center, fully guarded, NEMA Type I enclosure, and chrome plated or stainless steel faceplate.

2.2 GLAZED ALUMINUM SECTIONAL DOORS (OD2, OD3)

A. Basis of Design: Overhead Door Corporation Model 511


1. Overhead Door Corp. 2. Cornell Iron Works Inc. 3. The Cookson Company 4. Raynor

C. Door Assembly: Stile and rail assembly secured with ¼” diameter through-rods.

1. Panel Thickness: 1 ¾” 2. Center Stile Width: 21/32” 3. End Stile Width: 2 ¾” 4. Intermediate Rail Pair Width: 1 3/8” 5. Top Rail Width: 2 3/8” 6. Bottom Rail Width: 2 3/8” 7. Stiles and rails: 6063-T6 Aluminum 8. Finish: Clear Anodized 9. Springs: 50,000 cycles 10. Glazing, refer to Division 8 Section ‘Glazing’:

a. OD2: GL-3 b. OD3: GL-1

11. Hardware: Galvanized steel hinges and fixtures. Ball bearing rollers with hardened steel races.

12. Track: face of wall mounted at jambs. Provide track as recommended by the manufacturer to suit loading requirements and clearances available.

13. Electric operator



2.3 OVERHEAD COILING SECURITY GRILLS (SG1, SG2)

A. Basis of Design: Cornell 5015 Security Grill



C. Curtain Construction:

1. Horizontal Rods: 3/16” Thick aluminum links with 5/16” solid aluminum rods spaced 1 ½” apart and ½” diameter composite tube spaces on every rod.

2. Bottom Bar: 4” x 1 3/4” extruded aluminum tubular section. D. Finish: Clear Anodized

E. Counterbalance shaft assembly: Steel tubing of not less than 6” diameter. Oil tempered torsion

springs capable of counter-balancing the weight of the curtain. Deflection shall be no greater than .03” per foot of opening width. Springs shall be adjustable by means of external wheel.

F. Guides: ¼” thick continuous aluminum of size and type required for installation as indicated on

Drawings Tube supports at jambs shall be provided by Manufacturer where required.

G. Brackets: Min. ¼” Thick steel plate. Powdercoat finish where exposed, color selected from manufacturer’s full range; G85 galvanized where concealed.

H. Operation:

1. Motor: Supply manufacturers standard electric motor designed for units cycling no more

than 25 times per day. 2. Control Station: Flush mounted, “Open/Close” key switch and with “Stop” push button,

NEMA 1B.

2.4 COUNTER SHUTTERS (CS1, CS2)

A. Basis of Design: Cornell Rolling Counter Shutter ESC10



C. Curtain Construction:

1. Slat Configuration: Aluminum interlocked flat-faced slats, 1 ½” by ½” deep, minimum

0.040 inch thickness, with extruded tubular aluminum bottom bar with continuous lift handle and vinyl astragal.

2. Finish: Clear Anodized 3. Endlocks: Fabricate interlocking slat sections with high strength molded nylon endlocks

riveted to ends of alternate slats.



D. Guides:

1. Fabrication: Heavy duty aluminum sections with snap-on cover to conceal fasteners.

Provide polypropylene pile runners on both sides of curtain to eliminate metal to metal contact between guides and curtain.

2. Finish: Clear anodized

E. Shaft Assembly: 1. Tube Motor Shaft Assembly

a. Barrel: Steel pipe capable of supporting cutain load with maximum deflection of 0.03

inches per foot of width.

F. Brackets 1. Fabricate from reinforced steel plate with bearings at rotating support points to support

shaft assembly and form end closures. 2. Finish: As selected by Architect from Manufacturers standard colors.

G. Hood: Min. 0.40 inch aluminum with reinforced top and bottom edges. Provide min. ½” steel

intermediate support brackets. Clear anodized.

H. Operation:

1. Manual operation with crank hoist operator including crank gear box, steel crank drive shaft and geared reduction unit. Fabricate gear box to complete enclose operating mechanism and be oil-tight.

I. Locking: Padlockable slide bolt on coil side of bottom bar at each jamb.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install overhead doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head molding strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICES

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.



2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."



ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1

SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. 2. Storefront framing for punched openings. 3. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units. 4. Exterior sunshading devices for storefront framing. 5. Aluminum horizontal pass-thru sliding window assembly 6. Exterior Fire-Protection-Rated storefront framing


1. Division 08 Section "Finish Hardware" for door hardware and power door operators for aluminum entrance doors.

2. Division 08 Section " Glazing" for glazing units

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."


A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:

1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following:

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and

structural movements to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements.



e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. g. Failure of operating units.

B. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch , whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components directly below them to less than 1/8 inch and clearance between members and operable units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch .

D. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

2. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds.

E. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. .

F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 12 lbf/sq. ft. .

G. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


H. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 57 frame when tested according to AAMA 1503.

I. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having an average U-factor of not more than 0.42 (with a .29 center of glass U value) for storefront and not more than 0.45 (with a .29 center of glass U value) for curtainwall when tested according to AAMA 1503.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum-framed systems.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. Details of typical composite members, anchors and reinforcement.

2. Layout and installation details, including relationship to adjacent work. 3. Elevations at 1/4 inch scale. 4. Detail sections of typical composite members. 5. Anchors and reinforcement. 6. Provisions for expansion and contraction. 7. Glazing details. 8. Locations of mortised security system contacts. 9. Hardware mounting heights and preparation for hardware equipment items. Location of

mortised security system contacts.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. The Architect reserves the right to require additional samples that show fabrication techniques and workmanship and design of hardware and accessories.

E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For aluminum-framed systems, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

F. Welding certificates.

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements.

H. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.



A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project.

C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics



are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

D. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.

E. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer.

1. Obtain from same manufacturer as Division 08 section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls".

F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering. d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Trifab VersaGlaze 451T - 2" x 4 1/2" Thermal storefront framing system at exterior locations and Kawneer Trifab Versaglaze 451 - 2" x 4 1/2" Non-thermal storefront framing at interior locations; or comparable product by one of the following:

1. EFCO Corporation 2. United States Aluminum. 3. YKK AP America Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 . 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 . 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

B. Recycled Content: Provide products with the highest percentage of recycled content feasible.

C. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides . 3. Glazing Plane: Center.

B. Provide thickwall extrusions and steel interior mullion reinforcing to support all loads on framing system.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing



system.

E. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft, 0.018-inch- thick stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M of type recommended by manufacturer.

G. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type.

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.

D. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and as follows:

1. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use.

a. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard wide-stile heavy-duty glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 2-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.1875” inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

2. Door Design: Wide stile; 6-inch minimum width.

a. Top Rail shall be custom extrusion of dimensions indicated on Drawings. Minimum 6” width.

b. Bottom Rail shall be custom extrusion of dimension indicate on Drawings. Minimum 1’-0” width.

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.



a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

2.6 SHADING DEVICES

A. Provide sunshade designed specifically for storefront system.

B. Basis of Design: Kawneer Versoleil Sunshade Single Blade System

C. Provide 8” deep oval-shaped sunshade blade system fabricated from aluminum.

1. Color and finish to match storefront framing to which each sunshade is attached. 2. Mechanically fastened by means of extruded aluminum screw spline construction. 3. Refer to Drawings for spacing of sunshade blades. 4. Fabricate sunshade to resist wind loads, snow loads, thermal movement, live loads, and

concentrated loads as indicated on the drawings. 5. Warranty: Same as required for storefront framing. 6. All disimilar metals shall be properly insulated to prevent galvanic action.

2.7 HORIZONTAL SLIDING PASS-THRU ASSEMBLY WITH TRACK AND JAMB

A. Provide the specified product, including accessories as required for installation in wall at Attendance Office.

B. Provide the following:

1. Basis of Design: CR Laurence Satin Anodized Horizontal Sliding Daisy Model Pass-Thru Assembly with D4 Overhead Track with Jamb, catalog number D1040A, or approved equal by one of the listed manufacturers.

2. Locks and Latches: Provide locks and latches designed to allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash in direction indicated and operated from the inside only.

3. Provide the following operating hardware:

a. Sash Rollers: Nylon rollers.

2.8 MOUNTING BRACKETS (FOR MOUNTING BUILDING SIGN)

A. Manufacturers mounting brackets designed to anchor to exterior face of storefront framing member to support outrigger sunshade system.

B. Basis-of-Design: Kawneer Versoliel Outrigger Sunshade bracket, part numbe 494-390.

2.9 WINDOW STOOLS

A. Extruded aluminum interior stool trim designed to secure to storefront system’s sill framing member and extend to cover the top of the supporting wall.

B. Provide a standard or custom stool in shape and size, and in locations indicated on the Drawings.



2.10 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED STOREFRONT ASSEMBLIES

A. Fire-rated aluminum storefront assembly including framing members and glazing units, tested and certified to applicable standards, meeting rating requirements.

B. Basis of Design: Subject project requirements Provide Aluflam North America, Fixed Storefront Vision Wall Framing System, or equal approved by Architect.

C. Performance Requirements:

1. Fire Rating: Meeting requirements indicated on Drawings. 2. Certification: Assemblies shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 2010, NFPA

252,UBC 7-4, UL 263. 3. Air Infiltration: 0.01 cfm/SF at 6.27 air pressure differential, ASTM E283 4. Static Water Resistance: No leakage at 10 PSF air pressure differential, ASTM E331 5. Dynamic Water Resistance: No leakage at 10 PSF dynamic air pressure differential,

AAMA 501.1 6. Uniform Load Deflection: No greater than L/175 at 60 PSF static air pressure. 7. U-Value: Max. 0.48 BTU/hr/sf/F

D. Aluminum Framing:

1. Construction: Integral structure and glazing stops from extruded and thermally broken aluminum profiles. Filled internally with cement composite material.

2. Dimensions: Face 2 ½”; Depth 3 ½” nominal 3. Sealing: Framing system shall insulate against effects of fire, smoke and heat transfer

from either side. Perimeter of the framing system to the rough opening shall be firmly packed with mineral wool insulation.

4. Glazing: Insulated glass units shall be approved by framing manufacturer and a component of the tested assembly. Refer to Division 08 Section “Glazing”.

5. Finish: Three-Coat PVDF, color to match that of standard Aluminum Storefront System

E. Glazing Accessories:

1. Fasteners: All fasteners, setting pads and glazing clips shall be stainless or zinc-plated steel.

2. Glazing Accessories: The glazing material perimeter sealant shall be separated from the perimeter framing system with approved flame retardant intumescent glazing tape. Ceramic setting blocks shall be placed between the metal setting pads and the glazing material. Setting pads and blocks shall be provided by framing manufacturer.

2.11 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

C. Provide break metal closures finished to match the storefront at column enclosures, miscellaneous covers and connections between storefront frames, and all other locations as



indicated in the Drawings, with thickness as recommended by the manufacturer for each specific application, but no less than 0.03” for widths less than 6” spanning up to 6’ in height and no less than 0.08” for widths less than 1’ spanning more than 8’ in height.

2.12 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture

migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using screw-spline system.

F. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install

three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors.

G. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge.

2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.13 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. High-Performance Organic Finish: 2 -coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2604 and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.



1. Color and Gloss: EFCO "Ultradize Hardcoat" pearlescent 50% fluoropolymer system. 2. Color: as selected by the Architect from the full line of "Ultradize" coatings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack.

F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.

2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce



weathertight installation.


A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances:

1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet ; 1/4 inch over total length.

2. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch . b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch .

B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch .


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive phases as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements.

1. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of 75 feet by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.

C. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer.

1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading door edge.



SLOPED GLAZING ASSEMBLIES 084433 - 1

SECTION 084433 - SLOPED GLAZING ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Conventionally glazed sloped glazing assemblies.


1. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for steel framing that supports sloped glazing framing members.

2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with sloped glazing assemblies.

3. Division 08 Section "Glazing"


A. General Performance: Sloped glazing assemblies shall withstand movements of supporting structure (where applicable) without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1. Sloped Glazing Assemblies: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by manufacturer’s standard assemblies representing those indicated for this Project.

2. Failures also include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units. f. Glazing-to-glazing contact.

B. Delegated Design: Design sloped glazing assemblies, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Structural Performance: Sloped glazing assemblies shall withstand the wind loads, the effects of gravity loads, and loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI.

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.



2. The IBC requires sloped glazing assemblies (sloped roof) to resist snow loads and roof live loads. Indicate snow loads and roof live loads, determined by Project's structural engineer, on Drawings or in first three subparagraphs below. Verify requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings 4. Concentrated Live Loads: As indicated on Drawings applied to framing members at

locations that will produce greatest stress or deflection. 5. Uniform Live Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Load Combinations: Calculate according to requirements of applicable code indicated on

Drawings.

D. Structural Performance: Provide sloped glazing assemblies tested according to ASTM E 330, as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

E. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller.

F. Seismic Performance: Sloped glazing assemblies shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Component Importance Factor is 1.25.

G. Story Drift: Accommodate design displacement of adjacent stories indicated.

1. Design Displacement: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Test Performance: Meet criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when

tested according to AAMA 501.4 at design displacement.

H. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 12 lbf/sq. ft.

I. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 at dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 12 lbf/sq. ft.

1. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior.

J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperature:



1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2. Test Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F. 3. Test Performance: No buckling, stress on glass, sealant failure, or excess stress on

framing, anchors, and fasteners and no reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.

K. Energy Performance: Sloped glazing assemblies shall have certified and labeled energy-performance ratings according to the NFRC.

1. Thermal Transmittance (U-Factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of not more than 0.46 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100.

2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient: per Division 08 Section "Glazing". 3. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06

cfm/ft2 at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 PSF of fixed area as determined according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

4. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified CR rating of not less than 68frame and 66glass (clear) as determined according to NFRC 500.

L. Sound Transmission: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have the following characteristics:

1. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 30 when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 1332.

M. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structural-sealant glazing without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure.

1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material behind.

2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength.

N. Structural-Sealant Joints:

1. Designed to carry gravity loads of glazing. 2. Designed to produce tensile or shear stress of less than 20 psi. 3. Design reviewed and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For sloped glazing assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture within the assembly to the exterior.

2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assembly, showing the following:

a. Joinery including concealed welds.



b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage.

3. Project-specific layout and installation details including relationship to adjacent work

including but not limited to, fluid applied air barrier, flashing, transition membranes, and other cladding elements.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

F. Welding certificates.

G. Energy Performance Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each glazed aluminum curtain wall.

H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified preconstruction testing agency, for glazed aluminum curtain walls, indicating compliance with performance requirements.

I. Maintenance Data: For glazed aluminum curtain walls to include in maintenance manuals.

J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating sloped glazing assemlbies that meet or exceed energy performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by certification, labeling, and inclusion in lists.

1. Obtain sloped glazing assemblies from same source as Division 08 section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts.”

B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.



1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

E. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation.

F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

G. Energy Performance Standards: Comply with NFRC for minimum standards of energy performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated.

1. Provide NFRC-certified glazed aluminum curtain walls with an attached label.

H. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions, and manufacturer’s warranty requirements.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for sloped glazing assemblies by field measurements before fabrication.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Assembly Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sloped glazing assemblies that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: System CW, as shown in the drawings. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer S.G. (Sloped Glazing) –2-1/2" x 6", outside glazed pressure plate system.

B. Subject to compliance with the system requirements, products by the following may be provided:

1. EFCO Corporation -System 5900T 2. Oldcastle 3. Enclos

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, ASTM B 209M. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 ASTM B 221M. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard, zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.3 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard, formed- or extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Framing-Member Type: Self-supporting. 2. Glass Retention: Glass shall be outside glazed and held in place with extruded aluminum

pressure plates anchored to the rafters using stainless steel fasteners.

B. Pressure Caps: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components that mechanically retain glazing.

1. Include snap-on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners.



C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning assembly components.

D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. At pressure caps, use ASTM A 193/A 193M stainless-steel screws. 2. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from

thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 3. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 4. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads finished to match framing

system.

E. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors, with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodates fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials, and recommended by manufacturer.

F. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), galvanized steel.

G. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft, 0.018-inch-thick stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M; of type recommended by manufacturer.

H. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components not less than 0.060 inch thick.

I. Framing Sealants: Manufacturer's standard.

2.4 GLAZING

A. General: Comply with Division 08 Section "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. Glazing gaskets shall comply with ASTM C 864 and be extruded of a silicone compatible EPDM, TPV or equal.

C. Glazing Sealants: Comply with Division 08 Section "Glazing."

1. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.

2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 33 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

B. Cleaning Agent and Cloth: As recommended by structural-sealant manufacturer.

2.6 FABRICATION



A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible. 6. Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation

occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

D. Fabricate continuous, one-piece-type aluminum sill closures with weep holes.

E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.


A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and approved shop drawings. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion, electrolytic

deterioration, and impediments to movement of joints.



6. Weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding.

7. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

3. Where aluminum will contact pressure-treated wood, separate dissimilar materials by method recommended by sloped glazing assembly manufacturer.

C. Install continuous sill closure with weatherproof expansion joints and locked and sealed or welded corners. Locate weep holes at rafters.

D. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the sloped glazing assembly to exterior.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

1. Two-Sided, Structural-Sealant Glazing:

a. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

b. Install weatherseal sealant according to Division 08 Section "Glazing" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING

A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements.

C. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows:

D. Testing of installed sloped glazing assembly for water resistance shall be performed in accordance with AAMA 501.2 “Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems.”

E. Testing Extent: Entire perimeter and mullions of one installed sloped glazing assembly as selected by Architect.

F. Remove and replace noncomplying assemblies and retest as specified above. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.




A. General: Install sloped glazing assemblies to comply with the following maximum tolerances:

1. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 2. Alignment: Limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch where surfaces abut in line, edge

to edge, at corners, or where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned surfaces by less than 3 inches; otherwise limit offset to 1/8 inch.

3. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.



DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1

SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Commercial door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. b. Other doors to the extent indicated.

2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections.

3. Electrified door hardware and a complete Best Access control system furnished & installed under this section.


1. Division 8 Section “Steel Doors and Frames” for astragals provided as part of a fire-rated labeled assembly and for door silencers provided as part of the frame.

2. Division 8 Sections “Flush Wood Doors” and “Stile and Rail Wood Doors” for wood doors, including integral intumescent seals provided as part of fire-rated assemblies.

3. Division 26 Sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage wiring work.

C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section.

1. Final replacement cores and keys to be installed by Owner.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following:

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include the following: a. System schematic. b. Point-to-point wiring diagram. c. Riser diagram. d. Elevation of each door.

2. Operation Narrative: Describe the operation of doors controlled by electrified door hardware.

C. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrica-tion and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the fi-nal Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's “Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule.”

2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. a. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Schedule at

the end of Part 3.

3. Content: Include the following information:



a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor

plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

D. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of lock manufacturer, detailing Own-er's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations.

E. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with local warehousing facilities and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.

C. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by the Door and Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experi-enced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.

1. Electrified Door Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant who is experienced in providing consulting services for electrified door hardware installations.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufactur-er, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following:

1. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), ANSI A117.1, as follows:

a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape easy to grasp with one hand and not requiring tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of wrist.



b. Door Closers: Comply with the following opening-force requirements: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: Maximum 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force per authorities having jurisdiction.

c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high, beveled with maximum slope of 1:2.

2. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors:

a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

b. Door Closers: Not more than 30 lbf to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open door to minimum required width.

c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high.

F. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

1. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be es-tablished at 40 inches or less above the sill. (Positive pressure testing per IBC 2006).

G. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

H. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Divi-sion 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination.” Incorporate keying conference deci-sions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion.

2. Requirements for key control system.

3. Address for delivery of keys.

I. The manufacturer’s representative will inspect the installation of materials prior to turning the building over to the owner. They will provide a written report outlining any deficiencies in the installation of the hardware and recommendations of hardware adjustments required.


A. Delivery of materials to be coordinated with project schedule.

B. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. Aluminum door hardware should be delivered to jobsite and inventoried by gen-eral contractor prior to being turned over to the aluminum door supplier when templates are not adequate to manufacture aluminum doors and frames.

C. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

D. Deliver keys to the Owner’s Construction Manager.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Draw-ings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies. Coordinate with electrical and storefront subcontractors. Contractor shall ensure pathways are provided to all devices and as required for a fully operational system.



1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in ad-dition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and mainte-nance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full mainte-nance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive mainte-nance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and ad-justing as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section, door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule, and the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.

2.2 HINGES AND PIVOTS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Hinges: a. Hager Companies (HAG). b. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB). c. McKinney Products Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (MCK). d. *Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).

2. Continuous Geared Hinges: a. Hager Companies (HAG). (Roton) b. Markar Products, Inc. (MP). c. McKinney Products Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (MCK). d. *Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). e. *ABH Manufacturing.

B. Quantity: As scheduled.



C. Size: Provide sizes scheduled.

D. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Exterior Hinges: Brass, with stainless-steel pin body and brass protruding heads. 2. Interior Hinges: Steel, with steel pin. 3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin.

E. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule or on Drawings:

1. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following applications: a. Out-swinging exterior doors.

2. Corners: Square.

F. Continuous-Geared Hinges: Overall width of 4 inches; fabricated to full height of door and frame. Fabricate hinges to template screw locations.

G. Electrified Functions for Hinges: Comply with the following:

1. Power Transfer: Concealed PTFE-jacketed wires, secured at each leaf and continuous through hinge knuckle. Servable panels at continuous hinges.

H. Fasteners: Comply with the following:

1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws; Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.

2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Manufacturers: a. *Best Locks b. Sargent – with Best cylinder c. Schlage – with Best cylinder

B. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA Grade 1, unless Grade 2 is indicated; Series 1000.

C. Auxiliary Locks: BHMA Grade 1, unless Grade 2 is indicated.

D. Certified Products: Provide door hardware listed in the following BHMA directories:

1. Mechanical Locks and Latches: BHMA's “Directory of Certified Locks & Latches.”

E. Lock Trim: Comply with the following:

1. Lever: Cast 2. Escutcheon (Rose): Cast 3. Lockset Designs: Provide the lockset design designated in schedule or, if sets are pro-

vided by another manufacturer, provide designs that match those designated.

F. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in the Door Hardware Sched-ule comply with the following:

1. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13.

G. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows:

1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw.

H. Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 EXIT DEVICES



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol-lowing:

1. *Precision Hardware, Inc. (PH) (Apex). 2. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT) (80 Series). 3. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD) (99 Series).

B. Certified Products: Exit devices listed in BHMA's “Directory of Certified Exit Devices.”

C. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to au-thorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.

D. Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and in-specting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.

E. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder material and finish to match locksets.

1. Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 KEYING SYSTEM

A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type with patented removable cores, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:

1. Number of Pins: Seven.

2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cam as required.

3. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring.

C. Construction Keying: Comply with the following:

1. Construction Master Keys: Provide 60 construction cores. Provide 5 construction master keys.

D. Manufacturer: Best Locks – No substitutions.

2.6 KEY REQUIREMENTS

A. Upon receipt of approved Hardware Schedule, arrange an interview with the contractor and owner’s representative to obtain and determine necessary keying information.

1. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass, bronze, stainless steel or nickel silver.

2. Cores shall be the Best and identified on the core face.

3. All locksets, exit devices, and padlocks shall accept same.

4. Exterior Doors shall be furnished with a construction core master keying system for inter-im use during construction.

B. Stamp each key with change number and stamp set symbol; and stamp each master key with set symbol, as applicable.

1. Provide change keys in individual envelopes for each cylinder delivered. 2. Envelopes shall be marked with respective door identification numbers. 3. The inscription “Do Not Duplicate” shall be stamped on all change keys.

C. Keys shall be supplied in the following quantities; confirm with Owner’s Construction Manag-er.

1. Construction Keys: Five (5) 2. Grandmaster Keys: Five (5) 3. Masterkeys (each Masterkey set): Five (5) 4. Change Keys per Lock: Three (3)



D. Deliver master keys and key blanks to Owner’s Construction Manager at the Project site.

2.7 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish; containing key-holding hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150 percent of the number of locks.

1. Wall-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet with hinged-panel door equipped with key-holding panels and pin-tumbler cylinder door lock. Locate cabinet per owner’s instructions.

B. Cross-Index System: Single-index system for recording key information. Include three receipt forms for each key-holding hook.


a. Key Control Systems, Inc. (KCS). b. Lund Equipment Co., Inc. (LUN). c. MMF Industries (MMF). d. Sunroc Corporation (SUN).

2.8 ELECTRIC STRIKES

A. Standard: BHMA A156.31, Grade 1.

B. General: Use fail-secure electric strikes with fire-rated devices.

C. Available Manufacturers: 1. Folger Adam Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (FAS). 2. *HES, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (HES). 3. Locknetics; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LSE). 4. Security Door Controls (SDC). 5. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD).

2.9 POWER SUPPLIES, MAGNETIC LOCKS A. *Stanley B. Securitron C. Von Duprin

2.10 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS


1. Removable Mullions: a. *Precision Hardware, Inc. (PH). b. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). c. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD).

2.11 CLOSERS


1. Surface-Mounted Closers: a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). 4011/4111 CI b. *Stanley D4550 c. Sargent Manufacturing Co; Div. of ASSA Abloy Co. (SGT). CI/351 ALUM

B. Surface Closers: BHMA Grade 1

C. Certified Products: Provide door closers listed in BHMA's “Directory of Certified Door Closers.”



D. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.

2.12 AUTO DOOR OPERATORS:

A. Furnish and install D4990 Swing Door Operator, complete with controls, as manufactured by Stanley Hardware or Equal

B. ANSI A156.9 STANDARD: Provide automatic entrance doors that comply with applicable re-quirements of Low-energy Automatic Door Standard.

C. UL 325: Provide powered door operators that comply with UL 325, Electrical Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver and Window Operators and Systems.

D. MANUFACTURER’S QUALIFICATIONS: Provide units produced by a firm with minimum five years experience in the fabrication of automatic doors of the type required for this project.

E. INSTALLER’S QUALIFICATIONS: Provide operators installed by Installer who is an author-ized representative of the automatic entrance door manufacturer for both the installation and maintenance of the type of units required for this project. Operators are furnished and in-stalled by this section.

F. Units to be warranted against defect in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of the Installation.

2.13 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS


1. Metal Protective Trim Units: a. Hager Companies (HAG). b. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS). c. *Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).

B. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine or self-tapping screws.

C. Furnish protection plates sized 2 inches less than door width on push side and 1 inch less than door width on pull side, by height specified in Door Hardware Schedule.

2.14 STOPS AND HOLDERS


1. Door Controls International (DCI). 2. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). 3. Hager Companies (HAG). 4. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS). 5. *Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 6. *ABH – O.H. stops and misc.

B. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Grade 1.

C. Combination Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA Grade 1, unless Grade 2 is indicated.

D. Floor Stops: For doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.

1. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders.



2.15 DOOR GASKETING


1. Door Gasketing: a. *National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP). b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM). c. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). d. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO).

2. Door Bottoms: a. *National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP). b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM). c. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). d. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO).

B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indi-cated.

1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 3. Door Bottoms: Apply to door bottom, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.

2.16 THRESHOLDS


1. *National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP). 2. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM). 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). 4. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO).

2.17 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE


1. Hager Companies (HAG). 2. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS). 3. *Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).

B. Boxed Power Supplies: Modular unit in NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure; filtered and regulated; voltage rating and type matching requirements of door hardware served; and listed and labeled for use with fire alarm systems, where applicable.

C. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA Grade 1, unless otherwise indicated.

2.18 ACCESS CONTROL AND CODE BLUE LOCKDOWN

A. The work included under this section consists of, but is not limited to, the following: Building access control system Door contacts (for access control only; door contacts for Intrusion System are provided in Division 28) Proximity readers Request to exit devices All wiring terminations associated to Access Control Locking controls to be provided under 087100 (interface with locking control by access control provider)

Installation must be by factory authorized dealer



Contract Documents are based BEST WiQ access control system by Best Access Solutions

Access Control System Provider will:

▪ Install and termination of proximity readers ▪ Install and termination of door contacts for access system ▪ Install and terminations of electric strike ▪ Install and terminations of the entire Access Control ▪ Provide One Hundred (100) BASIS proximity/mag-stripe Access Cards ▪ Provide specific composite cable for electrician to pull all wires for the low voltage

wiring as required for the system. ▪ Provide all terminations at electrified locks/devices for access control system. ▪ Terminate all electrified exit devices, power supplies, gateways, electric strikes,

and all system components at Head End. ▪ Install all electric strikes, 45HQ locks, EXQ trims (and exit devices mounted on),

lock-down buttons, gateways, and all components at Head End. ▪ Install and terminate auto operators and associated components and coordinate

with Aiphone provider as needed. ▪ Provide Head End Components as described in the Miscellaneous Head End Set

in order to provide a fully functional BEST WiQ access control system.

B. Code Blue Lockdown: Upon pushbutton activation input the access control system will lock down all hardwired doors connected to the access control system. To ensure reliability, ser-viceability and quality, the entire system is to be provided and commissioned by Best Access Solutions.

C. Training Furnish instruction for operating staff in system operation and operator troubleshooting and preventive maintenance procedures. Commence instruction after system is fully operational, and complete instruction prior to system acceptance and turnover to Owner. Furnish mainte-nance instruction for personnel in adjustment, operation, and maintenance all system equip-ment. Provide three classes of videotaped training and the recording and turned over to the Owner

D. Work to be furnished and installed by Electrician Contractor (EC) Divsion 26:

• 110VAC at Head End and at Auto Operators.

• Conduit and/or cable trays to each opening; 4’ x 8’ Component Fire Rated Plywood Mount-ing. Board at Head End equipment location

• Provide and install flush-mount 2”x4” J-Box at proximity reader mount location.

• Provide conduit to for all Access Control Devices and Auto Operator Components as Nec-essary.

• Install low voltage wire runs with composite cable provided by Best Access Solutions

• Required data drops by EC (or Data Contractor)

Subsequent to installation, clean each system component of dust, dirt, grease, or oil incurred during installation or accrued subsequent to installation from other project activities, and pre-pared for system activation by manufacturer's recommended procedures for adjustment, align-



ment, or synchronization. Prepare each component in accordance with appropriate provisions of component installation, operations, and maintenance manuals. Final Inspection The Owner’s Representative will witness formal tests after receipt of written certification that preliminary tests have been completed and that system is ready for final inspection. Manufac-turer's technical representatives shall be present for the final inspection and test. Repeat pre-liminary tests and functional and operational tests, conducted as required. Correct defects and conduct additional tests to demonstrate that system conforms to contract specifications.

2.19 FABRICATION

A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect.

1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.

B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indi-cated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Fur-nish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard.

C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates gener-ally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indi-cated.

1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.

2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications: a. Mortise hinges to doors. b. Strike plates to frames. c. Closers to doors and frames.

3. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications, unless door blocking is provided: a. Surface hinges to doors. b. Closers to doors and frames. c. Surface-mounted exit devices.

4. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors.

5. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, “Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors.”

2.20 FINISHES

A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.18.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, tem-porary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable varia-



tions in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if within the range of approved Samples and assembled or installed to mini-mize contrast.

D. BHMA Designations: Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the fol-lowing:

1. BHMA 626: Satin chromium plated over nickel, over brass or bronze base metal. 2. BHMA 628: Satin aluminum, clear anodized, over aluminum base metal. 3. BHMA 630: Satin stainless steel, over stainless-steel base metal. 4. BHMA 652: Satin chromium plated over nickel, over steel base metal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for instal-lation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 series.

1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W series.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:

1. Standard Steel Door Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

2. DHI WDHS.3, Locations for Wood Doors.”

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of sur-face protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

C. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings. Verify location with Architect.

1. Configuration: Provide the least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware.

D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of sealant complying with require-ments specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants.”

3.4 ADJUSTING



A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt.

2. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.

B. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, In-staller shall perform the following:

1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, and door hardware, and electrified door hardware.

2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures. 3. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, mate-

rials, or installation of door hardware units.


A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

SET 1

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D

1 EACH LOCKSET 45H 7T 14H 626 VIN PAT

1 EACH WALL STOP 403 630

3 EACH SILENCER SR64

1 EACH COAT HOOK RM801 630

DOORS: A102, A104, A105, A106, A108B, A112A, A113, A114, A117, A120, A123, A124, A125,

A127, B121B

SET 2

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D




DOORS: A107, A109A, A109B, A108C, A112B, A121, F205

SET 3E

3 EACH HINGE CB179 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D






DOORS: E106A, E106B, E113A, E113B, F207, C101A, C116

SET 4

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D


1 EACH DOOR CLOSER D4551 REG AL

1 EACH CONC. O.H. STOP 9020 630 90 DEGREES

1 EACH KICK PLATE K1050 8” X 2” LDW 630


DOORS: A103, D114

SET 5

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D

1 EACH LOCKSET 45H 7T 14H 626 PAT VIT





DOORS: A132, C109A

SET 6

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D


1 EACH DOOR CLOSER D4551 CS AL



DOORS: A116A, C104

SET 7

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D





DOORS: A128, A142A, A142B, A143, A145, A146A, A146B, B100, B101, B103, B104, B105, B106,

B109, B110, B111A, B113A, B114, B132, B133, B134, D111, D113, F208, F210, F214, F215, F216,

F217, F218, F219, F220, F222, F224, F226, F228, F231, F232, F233, F235A, F236, F202A, F203A,

G202, G204, G206, G208, G210, G211, G212, G213, G214, G215, G217B, G229, G230, G231, G220,

G222, G223, G224, G225, G234, G235, G236



SET 8

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D





DOORS: A140B, A141, F211, F235B

SET 9

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D




1 EACH O.H. STOP 9020 630


DOOR: C109B

SET 10E

3 EACH HINGE CB179 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D






DOORS: E101, E102

SET 11

6 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D

2 EACH FLUSH BOLT 555 – 12” 626

1 EACH D.P. STRIKE 570 626




DOOR: F206

SET 12

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D

1 EACH LOCKSET 45H 7D 14H 626 PAT TAC



1 EACH MOP PLATE K1050 4” X 1” LDW 630




1 SET SEAL 5050C

DOORS: A144A, A144B, A144D, B102A, B102B, B102D, A118, B121A, B122A

SET 13

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D






1 SET SEAL 5050C

DOORS: A144C, B102C

SET 14

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D NRP




1 SET SEAL 5050C

DOORS: A126, B128A, D110A, G227

SET 15

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D

1 EACH LOCKSET 45H 7D 14H 626 PAT




1 SET SEAL 5050C

DOORS: C110A, D110, F204A, F204B, F209

SET 16

3 EACH HINGE CB168 5” X 4-1/2” 26D

1 SET AUTO BOLT 2845 626



1 EACH COORDINATOR 1700 PC



2 EACH FLOOR STOP 440 626

1 SET SEAL 5050C

DOORS: D107A, D108A

SET 17



3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D

1 EACH PRIVACY 45H 0L 14H 626






DOORS: A110, A111, A122, B114A, B108, F212

SET 18

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D

1 EACH PRIVACY 45H 0L 14H 626




DOORS: A108A, A130, B119A, D114B

SET 19

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D

1 EACH DEADBOLT 83T 7S 626 PAT

1 EACH PUSH PLATE 70E 6” X 16” 630

1 EACH PULL PLATE 110 X 70C 4” X 16” 630




1 EACH DOOR HOLDER 494R 626


DOORS: A147, A149

SET 20

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D

1 EACH LOCKSET LR6656 X 630 ABH

1 EACH MORTISE CYLINDER 1E74 626 PAT






DOORS: B124, B125

SET 21

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D



1 EACH LOCKSET 45H 7H 14H 626 PAT VIN






4 EACH EMERGENCY KEY

DOORS: B126, C107, C108, F225, F227, G205

SET 22

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D


1 EACH PUSH PLATE 70E 6” X 16” 630







DOORS: D104, D105

SET 23E

3 EACH CONT. HINGE 662HD CL 1/2 WS

1 EACH DEADBOLT 83T 7S 626

1 EACH PUSH PLATE 70C 4” X 16” 630







DOORS: F221, F229, G216, G219, G209, G232

SET 24E




1 EACH ARMOR PLATE K1050 24” X 2” LDW 630

1 EACH WALL STOP 403 626 OR FLOOR STOP 440 626


DOORS: D101, E110, F228A, G203, G218

SET 25E








DOORS: A148, B118C, B120

SET 26

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D

1 EACH LOCKSET 45H 7G 14H 626 PAT



DOOR: A115

SET 27

6 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D



1 EACH LOCKSET 45H 7T 14H 626 PAT VIN

1 EACH COORDINATOR 1700



DOOR: A140A

SET 28E

2 EACH CONT. HINGE A504 85” 630 1/2 WS

6 EACH FRAME FILLER HF-45 PC (DON JO)

2 EACH EXIT DEVICE FL2108 X 4908D 630

2 EACH RIM CYLINDER 12E72 626 PAT

2 EACH DOOR CLOSER D4551 EDA AL


2 EACH WALL MAGNETS 2100 X US28

2 EACH SEALS 5050C 18’

MAGNETIC HOLDER HOLDS DOOR OPEN, UNLESS IT IS RELEASED BY THE FIRE

ALARM/SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM.

DOORS: S01A, S01B, S02B, S03B, S01C, S02C, S03C, S04C, S05A, S05B, C105, D115, C110, E103

SET 29E


6 EACH FILLER HF-45 PC








DOORS: S02A, S03A

SET 30E









NOT USED

SET 31







1 EACH WALL MAGNET 2100 X US28


MAGNETIC HOLDER HOLDS DOOR OPEN, UNLESS IT IS RELEASED BY THE FIRE

ALARM/SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM.

DOOR: S04B

SET 32

6 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D

1 EACH EXIT DEVICE FL2208 X 4908D LBR 630




2 EACH WALL MAGNET 2100 X US28


DOORS: B131B, D100D, D106D, D100C, G200

SET 33

2 EACH RIM CYLINDER 12E72 625 PAT (VD TRIM)

1 EACH MORTISE CYLINDER 1E74 625 PAT (VD KR MULLION)



REUSE BALANCE

DOORS: E117A, E117B, E120B, E120C

SET 34

2 EACH MORTISE CYLINDER 1E74 625 PAT (VD EXIT)

REUSE BALANCE

DOOR: E120A

SET 35

1 EACH DEADBOLT 83T 75 625 PAT

REUSE BALANCE

DOORS: E118, E119

SET 36E

1 EACH LOCKSET 93K 7D 14D 626 S3 PAT

REUSE BALANCE

DOORS: E122, E124, C103E, C103F

SET 37E

1 EACH LOCKSET 93K 7AB 14D 626 S3 PAT

REUSE BALANCE

DOOR: E123

SET 38E

3 EACH HINGE CB179 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D

1 EACH LOCKSET 45H 7R 14H 626 PAT




1 EACH SEALS 5050C

DOORS: G221, B129, B112A, B112B, E107, E114

SET 39E

3 EACH HINGE CB179 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D







1 EACH SEALS 5050C

DOORS: G226, B123, B127A

SET 40E

3 EACH HINGE CB179 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D




1 EACH SEALS 5050C

DOOR: G228

SET 41


2 EACH EXIT DEVICE 2203CD X 4903D LBR 630


2 EACH MORTISE CYLINDER 1E74 – C4 – R705 626 PAT

2 EACH DOOR CLOSER D4551 CSH AL


1 EACH SEALS 5050C

DOORS: F201A, F201B

SET 42

1 EACH SLIDING DOOR

TRACK

2610F X 96” (JOHNSON)

1 SET PULLS 94P X 94L 630

NOTES:

1. FOR EACH TRACK PROVIDE FULL ASSEMBLY INCLUDING BALL BEARING WHEEL TROLLEY, CONCEALED IN-TRACK STOPS, AND CHANNEL END CAPS. 2. DOOR BOTTOM GUIDE: CROWN INDUSTRIAL CONCEALED ROLLER CHANNEL CRSC14 3. DOOR BOTTOM GUIDE STOP: CROWN INDUSTRIAL CONCEALED FLOOR GUIDE BLOCK ITEM# 0105.00107 4. STAY ROLLER: CROWN INDUSTRIAL WALL MOUNTED CONCEALED STAY ITEM #CRS14X11-Z

DOORS: F202B, F203B

SET 43



3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D




DOORS: A129, A131, D114A

SET 44








1 EACH SEALS 5050C

DOORS: B118A, C117A, E121

SET 45






2 EACH DOOR CLOSER D4551 CSH AL ACTIVE


1 EACH O.H. STOP 9010 630 INACTIVE

1 SET SEALS 5050C

DOOR: B118B

SET 46E

3 EACH HINGE CB179 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D





DOOR: B119B

SET 47

6 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D




1 EACH DOOR CLOSER D4551 CS AL ACTIVE



1 EACH O.H. STOP 9020 630 INACTIVE

1 SET SEALS 5050C

DOORS: B129A, C115

SET 49

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D





1 SET SEALS 5050C

DOOR: B130B

SET 50E

1 EACH CONT. HINGE 662HD CL

1 EACH RIM EXIT FL2103 X 4903D 626




1 EACH THRESHOLD 426E

1 EACH DOOR BOTTOM C627A

1 EACH HEAD SEAL 700NA

2 EACH JAMB SEAL 110NA

1 EACH DPS PREP 3/4" DIA HOLE AT HEAD (NEW FRAMES ONLY)

PREP FOR DOOR POSITION SWITCH BY OTHER TRADES.

DOORS: B127B, B130A, B128B

SET 51

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D




1 EACH THRESHOLD 411

1 EACH SOUND SEAL 5075CL

1 EACH MORTISE BOTTOM 423N

DOORS: C112, C113, C114, C120, C120A, C121A, C121B

SET 52

3 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D


1 EACH O.H. HOLDER 9010 630




DOOR: C118

SET 53

6 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D





2 EACH DOOR CLOSER D4551H X AL


2 EACH FLOOR STOP 440 626


DOOR: C117B

SET 54

3 EACH HINGE CB168 5” X 4-1/2” 26D




1 EACH THRESHOLD 411

1 EACH SOUND SEAL 5075CL

1 EACH MORTISED BOTTOM 423N

DOOR: C115A

SET 55

6 EACH HINGE CB168 5” X 4-1/2” 26D

1 EACH EXIT DEVICE 2203CD X 4903D LBR 630

1 EACH EXIT DEVICE 2201CD LBR 630 (LHR)


2 EACH MORTISE CYLINDER 1E74-C4-R705 626 PAT

2 EACH DOOR CLOSER D4551 CSH AL


1 SET SEAL 5050C

DOORS: C101B, C101C

SET 56E

1 EACH CONT. HINGE 662HD CL (1/2 WS @ WD)





1 SET SEAL 5050C



DOORS: A133, C102, C103C, E117

SET 57E

6 EACH HINGE CB168 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D






DOORS: C103A, C103B

SET 58E


1 SET AUTO BOLT 2942 626 (2842 @ HM DOORS)







1 SET SEAL 5050C

DOORS: C103D, C106

SET 59


1 EACH DEADBOLT 83T 7K 626 PAT RH 32” C/L








1 SET SEAL 5050C

DOORS: D102B, D112A

SET 60E







2 EACH SEAL 5050C - 18



DOORS: D106E, D106F

SET 61E









DOORS: E104, E115

SET 62E









DOORS: E108A, E111A

SET 63E

3 EACH HINGE CB179 4-1/2” X 4-1/2” 26D




DOOR: E101A

SET 64

1 EACH CYLINDER 1E74 OR 12E72 626 PAT AS REQ’D

G.C.: ADVISE TYPE

DOORS: E105, E112

SET 65E


1 EACH LOCKSET 45H 7G 14H 626 PAT





DOORS: E108B, E111B

SET 66AL


1 EACH EXIT DEVICE 2103CD X 4903D 626 S988


1 EACH MORTISE CYLINDER 1E74 – C4 R70S 626 PAT


1 EACH FILLER P45HD – 110HL AL

1 EACH SUPPORT P45HD – 112 AL

1 EACH THRESHOLD 426E (2” WIDER THAN DOOR @ MULLIONS – G.C. CUT

AROUND MULLION)

1 EACH BOTTOM C627A

1 EACH DPS PREP 3/4” DIA HOLE

SEALS BY DOOR SUPPLIER.

NOTE: PREP HEAD FOR 3/4” DIA DOOR POSITION SWITCH PROVIDED BY OTHERS.

DOORS: A116B, B111B, B113B, S07, C105A, C105B, C105C

SET 67AL


1 EACH KEYED MULLION KR822 AL

1 EACH STABILIZER MCS 822 AL

1 EACH RIM CYLINDER 12E72 – S2 R706 626 PAT

1 EACH EXIT DEVICE 2103CD X 4903D 626 RHR

1 EACH EXIT DEVICE 2101CD X 626


2 EACH MORTISE CYLINDER 1E74 – C4 R705 626 PAT




SEALS BY DOOR SUPPLIER.

DOORS: A136B, A138B

SET 68E


1 EACH EXIT DEVICE 2103CD X 4903D 626 RHR

1 EACH EXIT DEVICE 2101CD X 630


2 EACH MORTISE CYLINDER 1E74-C4 R705 626 PAT

2 EACH DOOR CLOSER D4550 CS AL (MOUNT TO SEAL)




2 EACH THRESHOLD 426E X 2” WIDER THAN DR – CUT AROUND MULLION


2 EACH HEAD SEAL 700 NA


DPS PREP OF SWITCH BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR.

DOOR: S04A

SET 69


1 EACH EXIT DEVICE 2103CD X 4903D 630









1 EACH DPS PREP 3/4” DIA HOLE

NOTE: PREP HEAD FOR 3/4” DIA DOOR POSITION SWITCH PROVIDED BY OTHERS.

DOORS: C115B, C121C, D102A

SET 70E


1 EACH EXIT DEVICE 2103CD X 4903D 630





1 EACH THRESHOLD 426E 2” WIDER THAN DOOR – CUT AROUND

MULLION




DPS PREPS BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR.

DOORS: E100A, E100B, D106A, D106B, D106C, D106G, D106H, D106I

SET 71E







1 EACH DOOR CLOSER D4550 CSH AL ACTIVE (MOUNT TO SEAL)

1 EACH O.H. HOLDER 9010 630 INACTIVE (MOUNT TO SEAL)






1 SET ASTRAGAL 9605A

DPS PREPS BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR.

DOORS: D107B, D108B

SET 72A



1 EACH ELECTRIC STRIKE 4500C 630 24V

1 EACH SMART PAK 2005M3




1 EACH DOOR BOTTOM 600A

2 EACH DESK SWITCHES PB3ER

1 EACH POWER SUPPLY BPS24 - 2

OPERATION: ELECTRIC STRIKE CAN BE UNLOCKED REMOTELY BY THE ACCESS CONTROL

SYSTEM ALLOWING ENTRY INTO RECEPTION. STRIKE CAN ALSO BE MOMENTARILY

UNLOCKED BY DESK SWITCHES AT RECEPTION DESK AT RECEPTION A101. STRIKE

SHOULD LOCK IN THE EVENT OF A SCHOOL LOCKDOWN.

DOOR: A101A

SET 73A


1 EACH LOCKSET 93K 7DR 14D 626 PAT

1 EACH ELECTRIC STRIKE 4500C 630 24V

1 EACH SMART PAK 2005M3



1 EACH SUPPORT P45 – 112 AL

2 EACH DESK SWITCHES PB3ER

USE POWER SUPPLY PROVIDED FOR DOOR A101A

OPERATION: RECEPTION A101 SIDE IS ALWAYS MECHANICALLY LOCKED PREVENTING

ENTRY INTO ENTRY A133. ENTRY A133 DOOR SIDE CAN BE UNLOCKED BY KEY,

ALLOWING ENTRY INTO RECEPTION A101 DURING OPERATION HOURS. ELECTRIC STRIKE

CAN BE UNLOCKED BY DESK SWITCHES, ALLOWING ENTRY INTO ENTRY A133.



DOOR: A101B

SET 74AE


1 EACH ACCESS LOCK 45HQ 7DV 14PH 626 PAT

1 EACH DOOR CLOSER D4550 AL







1 EACH PORTAL GATEWAY WQX-PG-C-BP

DPS PREP AND SWITCH BY THE SECURITY CONTRACTOR.

NOTE: INGRESS INTO BUILDING PROVIDED BY WIRELESS CARD LOCK.

DOOR: B118D

SET 75AE


1 EACH EXIT DEVICE Q2103 X 630

1 EACH ACCESS TRIM EXQ – 7EV – 14PH – PH2 LHR RM 626 PAT




1 EACH THRESHOLD 426E 2” WIDER THAN DOOR – CUT AROUND

MULLION




1 EACH PORTAL GATEWAY WQX-PG-C-BP

DPS PREP AND SWITCH BY THE SECURITY CONTRACTOR.

NOTE: INGRESS INTO BUILDING PROVIDED BY WIRELESS EXIT TRIM.

DOOR: E100C

SET 76A

2 EACH CONT. ELECT. HINGE 661HD X AL X EPT

2 EACH POWER TRANSFER CEPT 630

1 EACH KEYED MULLION KR822

1 EACH MULLION

STABILIZER

MCS822 AL


2 EACH EXIT DEVICE TS-MLR-2103LD X 4903D 630









1 EACH ASTRAGAL/SEALS BY DOOR SUPPLIER

2 EACH D.P. SWITCH 1078C (SENTROL)

2 EACH MAGNET 1840N (SENTROL)

1 EACH POWER SUPPLY RPSMLR2

2 EACH DPS PREPS FOR 3/4" DPS PROVIDED BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR

OPERATION: DOORS CAN BE REMOTELY UNLOCKED WHEN PROGRAMMED TO UNLOCK

BY THE ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM. DPS IS PROVIDED TO MONITOR THE DOORS.

REQUEST TO EXIT AVAILABLE IN EXIT PUSH BAR. DPS PREP SHOULD BE PROVIDED FOR

THE SECURITY SYSTEM DOORS TO BE LOCKED BY LOCK DOWN FEATURE WHEN

REQUIRED. POWER SUPPLY AT HEAD END.

DOORS: A100B, A138A, D100A

SET 77

1 EACH CONT. HINGE 662HD AL




1 EACH O.H. HOLDER 9010 630 (MOUNT TO SEAL)


1 EACH BOTTOM C627A



DOORS: AB100A, AB100B, AB100C

SET 78A

2 EACH CONT. HINGE 661HD X AL X EPT



1 EACH MULLION

STABILIZER

MCS822 AL







1 EACH AUTO OPERATOR D4990 628 (LHR)

1 EACH PUSH PLATE

PACKAGE

CL4977 (EXT. AND ENTRY)

1 EACH CARD READER 5355 AGK00



2 EACH DOOR CONTACT 1078C

2 EACH MAGNET 1840N

2 EACH DPS PREPS FOR 3/4” DIA DPS PROVIDED BY THE SECURITY

CONTRACTOR





1 EACH BOLLARD CL2247



REQUEST TO EXIT AVAILABLE IN EXIT BAR. DPS PREP PROVIDED FOR SECURITY

CONTRACTOR. DOORS TO BE LOCKED BY LOCK DOWN FEATURE WHEN REQUIRED.

POWER SUPPLY AT HEAD END.

ONE PUSH PLATE (FROM PACKAGE) FOR EXTERIOR OF A100A AND ONE FOR INTERIOR OF

A100C. CARD READER AND PUSH PLATE FOR DOOR A100A TO BE MOUNTED ON

PEDESTAL. ENTRY IS BY AUTHORIZED CARD AND PUSH PLATE FOR HANDICAPPED. FOR

ALL OTHERS, ENTRY IS BY AUTHORIZED CARD OR BY MECHANICAL KEY OVERRIDE.

LATCH RETRACTION IS BY PROGRAMMING (FOR SPECIFIC PERIODS OF TIME) OR

PRESENTING OF AUTHORIZED CARD. EGRESS IS ALWAYS FREE. POWER SUPPLY FOR EXIT

DEVICES AND WIRELESS ACCESS CONTROLLER FOR CARD READER AT HEAD END.

DOOR: A100A

SET 79A




1 EACH MULLION

STABILIZER

MCS822 AL








1 EACH PUSH PLATE

PACKAGE

CL4977 (EXT. AND VEST.)



2 EACH MAGNET 1840N


CONTRACTOR













CARD READER AND PUSH PLATE FOR DOOR A136A TO BE MOUNTED ON PEDESTAL.

ENTRY IS BY AUTHORIZED CARD AND PUSH PLATE FOR HANDICAPPED. FOR ALL OTHERS,

ENTRY IS BY AUTHORIZED CARD OR BY MECHANICAL KEY OVERRIDE. EGRESS IS

ALWAYS FREE. POWER SUPPLY FOR EXIT DEVICES AND WIRELESS ACCESS CONTROLLER

FOR CARD READER AT HEAD END.

DOOR: A136A

SET 80A




1 EACH MULLION

STABILIZER

MCS822 AL







1 EACH AUTO OPERATOR D4990 628 (RHR)

1 EACH PUSH PLATE

PACKAGE

CL4977 (EXT. AND VEST.)



2 EACH MAGNET 1840N


CONTRACTOR











ONE PUSH PLATE (FROM PACKAGE) FOR EXTERIOR AND ONE FOR INTERIOR. ENTRY IS BY

AUTHORIZED CARD AND PUSH PLATE FOR HANDICAPPED. FOR ALL OTHERS, ENTRY IS BY



AUTHORIZED CARD OR BY MECHANICAL KEY OVERRIDE. EGRESS IS ALWAYS FREE.

POWER SUPPLY FOR EXIT DEVICES AND WIRELESS ACCESS CONTROLLER FOR CARD

READER AT HEAD END.

DOORS: B131A, B115, D100B

SET 81A




1 EACH MULLION

STABILIZER

MCS822 AL








1 EACH DUAL PUSH PLATE CL2388 (VESTIBULE MTG)



2 EACH MAGNET 1840N


ASTRAGAL AND SEALS BY DOOR SUPPLIER.

DOORS CAN BE REMOTELY UNLOCKED WHEN PROGRAMMED TO UNLOCK BY THE ACCESS

CONTROL SYSTEM. DPS IS PROVIDED TO MONITOR THE DOORS. REQUEST TO EXIT

AVAILABLE IN EXIT BAR. DOORS TO BE LOCKED BY LOCK DOWN FEATURE WHEN

REQUIRED. POWER SUPPLY AT HEAD END. ENTRY BY CARD READER WITH

HANDICAPPED PUSH PLATE FEATURE. PUSH PLATE WILL OPEN EXTERIOR DOOR A100A

AT ALL TIMES, BUT ONLY DOOR A100C WHEN CARD IS PRESENTED. POWER SUPPLY FOR

EXIT DEVICES AT HEAD END.

DOOR: A100C

SET 82A




1 EACH MULLION

STABILIZER

MCS822 AL










2 EACH MAGNET 1840N


ASTRAGAL AND SEALS BY DOOR SUPPLIER.

ENTRY IS BY MECHANICAL KEY OVERRIDE OR SPECIFIC PERIODS OF TIME BY

PROGRAMMED LATCH RETRACTION. EGRESS IS ALWAYS FREE. DOOR CONTACTS

PROVIDE MONITORING OF DOOR POSITION TO HEAD END. POWER SUPPLY FOR EXIT

DEVICES AT HEAD END.

DOOR: A100D

SET 83 – MISC.

1 EACH KEY CABINET 1205AA 450 CAPACITY

5 EACH CONSTRUCTION

MASTER KEYS

SUPPLIER PROPERTY

60 EACH CONSTRUCTION

CORES

SUPPLIER PROPERTY

1 EACH CONSTRUCTION

EXTRACTOR KEY

SUPPLIER PROPERTY

5 EACH GRANDMASTERS

5 EACH MASTER KEYS PER SET – ALLOW FOR 50 KEYS

1 EACH EXTRA KEY WITH EACH LOCK

2 EACH CONTROL KEYS

HEAD END

4’ X 8’ PLYWOOD BACK BOARD (PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR)

- 3’ X 3’ NEMA ENCLOSURE

o 10 EACH WIRELESS ACCESS CONTROLLER WQX

o 1 EACH 10 AMP 12/24VDC FIELD SELECTABLE POWER SUPPLY

- 2 EACH PORTAL GATEWAY WQX-PG (SAME IP ADDRESS; ONLY ONE NETWORK

DROP (BY OTHERS) NEEDED)

- 9 EACH POWER SUPPLY RPSMLR2 (FOR ELECTRIFIED EXIT DEVICES – SEE HW SETS)

- 2 EACH UPS APC-BE550R-550VA

- 7 EACH RELAY BAS#7182064

- 7 EACH RELAY SOCKET BAS#7182063

- COMPOSITE CABLE FOR LOW VOLTAGE WIRE RUNS

SCOPE PROVIDED OTHER BY SUBCONTRACTORS TO THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR:

NETWORK DROP AT HEAD END AND AT TWO PORTAL GATEWAY LOCATIONS FOR 45HQ

AND EXQ.

120VAC AT HEAD END AND AT AUTO OPERATOR LOCATIONS.

LOW VOLTAGE WIRE RUNS (HOME RUN) FROM HEAD END LOCATION TO EACH PAIR OF



DOORS WITH LATCH RETRACTION EXIT DEVICES:

WIRE RUNS BY ELECTRICIAN. USE COMPOSITE CABLE FOR WIRE RUNS, BY BEST ACCESS

SYSTEMS.



GLAZING 088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Doors 2. Storefront framing 3. Glazed entrances 4. Casework 5. Interior hollow metal framing 6. Sloped Glazing Assemblies


1. Division 08 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts". 2. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" and “Wood Doors” 3. Division 08 Section “Sloped Glazing Assemblies”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F , ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces.


GLAZING 088000 - 2

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass the following products; 12 inches square.

1. Tinted glass. 2. Patterned glass. 3. Coated glass. 4. Insulating glass. 5. Laminated clear glass. 6. Color glass.

C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets sealants and colored spacers, in 12-inch lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.

D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

E. Qualification Data: For installers manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated, low-e coatings.

F. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for tinted glass coated glass insulating glass glazing sealants and glazing gaskets.

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period.

H. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.



A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain ultraclear float glass coated float glass laminated glass and insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.


GLAZING 088000 - 3

F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.

G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's "Glazing Manual."

2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."

3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

H. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

I. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F .

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.



GLAZING 088000 - 4

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 1/4 inch. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated

throughout Project.

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 1/4 inch 6 thick. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite. 4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F . 5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.

1. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass). 2. Kind HS (heat strengthened) unless otherwise required to be fully tempered. 3. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated and / or where required by Code.


GLAZING 088000 - 5

2.3 LAMINATED GLASS

A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer or cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written recommendations.

2. Interlayer Thickness: Single layer, provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements.

3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.

B. Color Film Laminated Glass: Provide in exterior insulated window systems ¼” thick laminated glass with colored film by Vanceva, North America, St. Louis, Missouri, or equal approved by architect. 1. Colors:

a. GL-2: Clear b. CL-3a: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full range.

2.4 INSULATING GLASS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Vitro Architectural Glass

a. Exterior Lite: 1/4 inch (6.0 mm) Solarban 60 #2. b. Airspace: 1/2 inch (12.5 mm). c. Interior Lite: 1/4 inch (6.0 mm) Clear.

2. Basis-of-Design: Vitro SolarBan 72 Starphire+Starphire

B. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.

C. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article and in "Laminated Glass" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article and in "Insulating-Laminated-Glass Types" Article.

2.5 FIRE PROTECTION GLAZING

A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies, ASTM E119 and UL263 for wall assemblies, NFPA 257 and UL


GLAZING 088000 - 6

9 for window assemblies.

B. Fire-protection-Rated Tempered Glass, Exterior: ¾” (or thickness required to achieve required rating) specially tempered glass.

1. Provide fire-protection rated assembly, including fire-protection-rated aluminum storefront framing system and glazing in a tested assembly.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Vetrotech, Saint Gobain; ContraFlam

3. Ratings (Assembly):

a. 1 hour: OH-45 b. 2 hour: OH-90 c. 3 hour: OH-90

C. Fire-Protection-Rated Tempered Glass, Interior: ¼-inch-thick, fire-protection-tempered glass, complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited, to the following:

a. Vetrotech, Saint-Gobain; Pyroswiss b. InterEdge, Inc., a subsidiary of AFG Industries, Inc.; PyroEdge c. Safti First; SuperLite

2. Ratings: a. 1 hour (wall): W-60 b. 90 minute (door): D-H-90 c. 2 hour (wall): W-120

2.6 GLAZING FILMS

A. Patterned polyester sheet film applied to interior glass for the purpose of obscuring view.

B. Basis of Design: Provide Solyx SX-2006 ‘White Stripes’ or equal approved by architect.

1. Film Thickness: .002 2. Pattern: Vertical frosted stripes, 3/16” thick, 3/16” apart 3. Locations: As indicated on Drawings

2.7 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:

1. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 2. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.


GLAZING 088000 - 7

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

2.8 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.

4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.9 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.

2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

2.11 EXTERIOR INSULATED SPANDREL UNITS


GLAZING 088000 - 8

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ICD Coatings Opaci-Coat-300 Spandrel glass

B. Glass rendered opaque with a water-based silicone elastomeric spandrel coating for non-vision applications.

1. Glass type: clear float glass matching that provided in insulated vision lites.

2. Standards: GANA 89-1-6 Specification for Environmental Durability of Fully-Tempered or Heat-Strengthened Spandrel Glass with Applied Opacifiers.

3. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range.

4. Coating Orientation: Surface #2

2.12 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

2.13 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES

A. Interior Glass Type [GL-1]: Ceramic-coated vision glass, fully tempered float glass.

1. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.0 mm) 2. Provide safety glazing labeling.

B. Interior Glass Type [GL-6]: Fire-protective, safety-rated, specialty tempered float glass.

1. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.0 mm) 2. Provide safety glazing labeling.

2.14 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES

A. Interior Glass Type [GL-2]: Insulated Clear Tempered Laminated Glazing

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: ¼ inch (6.0 mm) 3. Outdoor Lite: 1/8” clear glass/0.030” clear PVB layer/1/8” clear glass 4. Interspace Content: ½” Air space 5. Indoor Lite: 1/8” clear glass/0.030” clear PVB layer/1/8” clear glass 6. Provide safety glazing labeling


GLAZING 088000 - 9

B. Exterior Glass Type [GL-3]: Insulated Low-E Clear Tempered Glazing.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch . 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: ¼ inch (6.0 mm). 3. Outdoor Lite: Clear heat-treated float glass or fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Clear Fully Tempered Float Glass. 6. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 71 percent minimum. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: .29 maximum. 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: .28 maximum. 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .30 maximum 11. Exterior reflectance: 13% 12. Light to Solar Gain(Tvis/SHGC): 2.37 13. Provide safety glazing labeling.

C. Exterior Glass Type [GL-3a]: Insulated Colored Low-E Tempered Glazing

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch . 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: ¼ inch (6.0 mm). 3. Outdoor Lite: Color film laminated heat-treated float glass or fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Clear Fully Tempered Float Glass. 6. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface 7. Visible Light Transmittance: N/A. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: .29 maximum. 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: .28 maximum. 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: N/A 11. Provide safety glazing labeling.

D. Exterior Glass Type [GL-4]: Insulated Tempered Spandrel Glazing.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch . 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: ¼ inch (6.0 mm). 3. Outdoor Lite: Clear float glass with opaque coating on surface #2, tempered where

required by code. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Clear Fully Tempered Float Glass. 6. Provide safety glazing labeling.

E. Exterior Glass Type [GL-5]: Insulated Fire-Protection-Rated, Low-E Glazing

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch . 2. Outdoor Lite: Clear Fire-Protection-Rated ¾” float glass 3. Interspace Content: Air. 4. Indoor Lite: Clear Fully Tempered ¼” Float Glass 5. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface 6. Visible Light Transmittance: 71% 7. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: .29 maximum. 8. Summer Daytime U-Factor: .28 maximum. 9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .30 maximum 10. Provide safety glazing labeling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


GLAZING 088000 - 10

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches .

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant


GLAZING 088000 - 11

width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.5 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING

A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged


GLAZING 088000 - 12

from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.



MIRRORS 088300 - 1

SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors:

1. Film-backed glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions.

B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each type of the following products:

1. Mirrors: 12 inches square, including edge treatment on two adjoining edges.

2. Mirror Clips: Full size.

3. Mirror Trim: 12 inches long.

D. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals.

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from single source.

D. Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations:

1. GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

2. GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."

E. Retain first paragraph below if mirrors required for Project need safety glass.

F. Safety Glazing Products: For film-backed mirrors, provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.


MIRRORS 088300 - 2


A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which mirror manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed form normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film.

1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS

A. Glass Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503; manufactured using low-lead mirror coating process.

B. Clear Glass: Mirror Glazing Quality; ultraclear (low-iron) float glass with a minimum 91 percent visible light transmission.

1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm.


A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.

C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.

D. Film Backing for Safety Mirrors: Film backing and pressure-sensitive adhesive; both compatible with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer.

2.3 MIRROR HARDWARE

A. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece.

1. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 and 7/8 inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch.

B. Top Channel/Cleat and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece.


MIRRORS 088300 - 3

C. Mirror Clips: Provide clips for hanging top and bottom as required for support.

D. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.

E. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes

1. Wall mirrors shall be 70 inches high, installed 18 inches AFF; Ref. Drawings for width in each location.

B. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.

C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Rounded polished.

1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating.

2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes.

D. Film-Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with adhesive coating over mirror backing paint as recommended in writing by film-backing manufacturer to produce a surface free of bubbles, blisters, and other imperfections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic with existing finishes or primers.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.

B. Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

C. Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.


MIRRORS 088300 - 4

1. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Provide setting blocks 1/8 inch thick by 4 inches long at quarter points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between setting blocks, two slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch wide by 3/8 inch long at bottom channel.

2. Top Channel/Cleat and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Fasten J-channel directly to wall and attach top trim to continuous cleat fastened directly to wall.

3. Mirror Clips: Place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to prevent spalling of mirror edges. Locate clips so they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced.

4. Install mastic as follows:

a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of mirrors and backing material.

b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

c. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface.


A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.

B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.

C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.

D. Wash exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash mirrors as recommended in writing by mirror manufacturer.



LOUVERS AND VENTS 089000 - 1

SECTION 089000 - LOUVERS AND VENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers. 2. Wall vents (brick vents).


1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for building wall vents (brick vents) into masonry. 2. Division 23 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades; i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal.

C. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.


A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using structural and seismic performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building.

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings.

C. Seismic Performance: Louvers, including attachments to other construction, shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes, without buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, or other detrimental effects.




E. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.

1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion.

2. Show mullion profiles and locations.

C. Samples for Verification: Submit samples for selection in form of metal chips for all brick colors and for all gray color tones available in standard and metallic coatings. Submit samples for color selection in form of metal chips for all colors of wall vents (brick vents) available.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed according to AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with performance requirements specified.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

B. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. Use tamper-resistant screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 3. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip-galvanized steel or 300 series stainless-steel

fasteners. 4. For fastening stainless steel, use 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 5. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

C. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.


A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.

C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated.

D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

E. Provide vertical brace bars of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by manufacturer.

1. Semirecessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions partly recessed behind louver blades so louver blades appear continuous. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with interlocking split mullions and close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.

F. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers for recessed louvers.

G. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.



2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louvers: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Horizontal

Drainable Fixed Blade Louvers: Reliable Products, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Construction Specialties, Inc. b. Greenheck Fan Corporation. c. Ruskin Company.

2. Louver Depth: 4 inches . 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.060 inch for blades and 0.080

inch for frames. 4. Louver Spacing: 1 inch 5. Mullion Type: Semirecessed. 6. Louver Performance Ratings:

a. Free Area: 50%, but not less than free area required by HVAC equipment manufacturer.

b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 1000 fpm . c. Air Performance: Not more than 0.15-inch wg static pressure drop at 900-fpm

free-area intake velocity.

7. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 8. Provide removable panel as indicated for access to wall sleeve. 9. Finish and Color: to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard, including

metallic coatings. 10. Provide louvers in quantities and sizes and at locations indicated in Mechanical

Drawings. Verify in field all existing opening measurements prior to fabrication.

2.4 LOUVER SCREENS

A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver:

1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Insect screening.

B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c.

C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.

1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips.

2. Finish: To match louver color and finish. 3. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert.

D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:

1. Insect Screening: Aluminum, 18-by-16 mesh, 0.012-inch wire.

2.5 BLANK-OFF PANELS

A. Insulated, Blank-Off Panels: Laminated panels consisting of insulating core surfaced on back



and front with metal sheets and attached to back of louver.

1. Thickness: 1 inch . 2. Metal Facing Sheets: Aluminum sheet, not less than 0.032-inch nominal thickness. 3. Insulating Core: extruded-polystyrene foam. 4. Edge Treatment: Trim perimeter edges of blank-off panels with louver manufacturer's

standard extruded-aluminum-channel frames, not less than 0.080-inch nominal thickness, with corners mitered and with same finish as panels.

5. Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with gaskets or sealant. 6. Panel Finish: Same finish applied to louvers. 7. Attach blank-off panels with clips. 8. Install insulated blank-off panels at all sections of louvers not attached to mechanical

ductwork at the interior of the building. 9. Provide blank-off panels in quantities and sizes and at locations indicated in Mechanical

Drawings.

2.6 WALL VENTS (BRICK VENTS)

A. Extruded-Aluminum Wall Vents:


a. Construction Specialties, Inc. b. Greenheck Fan Corporation. c. Reliable Products, Inc. d. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC.

2. Extruded-aluminum louvers and frames, not less than 0.125-inch nominal thickness, assembled by welding; with 18-by-14- mesh, aluminum insect screening on inside face; incorporating weep holes, continuous drip at sill, and integral waterstop on inside edge of sill; of load-bearing design and construction.

3. Dampers: Aluminum blades and frames mounted on inside of wall vents; operated from exterior with Allen wrench in socket-head cap screw. Fabricate operating mechanism from Type 304 stainless-steel components.

4. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 5. Provide wall vents in quantities and at locations indicated in Drawings. Provide the

following sizes: 8"x32", 24"x48". Verify in field all sizes to match existing openings.

2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL



A. Finish louvers after assembly.

B. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3 -coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.



1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

F. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.

G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.


A. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period.

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

C. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by



Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.

1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.
